Array
(
    [2] => <p><a href="foreword-2.html"><span>Foreword</span></a><br>
   	Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN
owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with
confidence. It was produced using the latest
techniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you understand
the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle so that you may enjoy ma ...
   	</p>
    [3] => <p><a href="read_first_ythen_drive_safely-3.html"><span>Read first—then drive safely</span></a><br>
   	Before driving your vehicle, please read this
Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity
with controls and maintenance requirements,
assisting you in the safe operation of your
vehicle.
Warning
Important safety information reminders
for safety!
Follow these important driving ru ...
   	</p>
    [4] => <p><a href="when_reading_the_manual-4.html"><span>When reading the manual</span></a><br>
   	This manual includes information for all features
and equipment available on this model. Features
and equipment in your vehicle may vary depending
on model, trim level, options selected, order,
date of production, region or availability. Therefore,
you may find information about features or
eq ...
   	</p>
    [5] => <p><a href="nissan_customer_care_program-5.html"><span>NISSAN customer care program</span></a><br>
   	NISSAN CARES . . .
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your 
automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are
our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with 
all your automobile sales and service needs.
 ...
   	</p>
    [7] => <p><a href="air_bags_seat_belts_and_child_restraints-7.html"><span>Air bags, seat belts and child restraints</span></a><br>
   	
1. Top tether strap anchor
2. Rear seat belts 
3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag 
4. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag 
5. Head restraints/headrests
6. Front seat belts
7. Side-impact pressure sensor (driver’s
side shown; passenger’s side simil ...
   	</p>
    [8] => <p><a href="exterior_front-8.html"><span>Exterior front</span></a><br>
   	
1. Power windows
2. Windshield 
3. Windshield wiper and washer switch
4. Engine hood 
5. Tie down 
6. Fog light switch (if so equipped)
7. Headlight and turn signal switch
8. Replacing bulbs
9. Tire pressure 
10. Flat tire
11. Tire chains 
12. Mirrors 
13. Door locks, NISSAN Intelligen ...
   	</p>
    [10] => <p><a href="passenger_compartment-10.html"><span>Passenger compartment</span></a><br>
   	
1. Interior trunk access
2. Moonroof (if so equipped)
3. Sun visors
4. Interior lights, illuminated entry 
5. HomeLink® universal transceiver
(if so equipped)
6. Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) 
7. Glove box 
8. Cup holders 
9. Console box 
10. Front seat 
11. Re ...
   	</p>
    [11] => <p><a href="instrument_panel-11.html"><span>Instrument panel</span></a><br>
   	
1. Instrument brightness control/Trip computer
reset switch
2. Vents 
3. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn
signal switch 
4. Driver supplemental air bag/horn
5. Meters and gauges 
6. Paddle shift controls (if so equipped)
7. Windshield wiper/washer switch
8. Hazard warning flasher ...
   	</p>
    [12] => <p><a href="engine_compartment_check_locations-12.html"><span>Engine compartment check locations</span></a><br>
   	
QR25DE engine
1. Power steering fluid reservoir
2. Engine coolant reservoir 
3. Engine oil filler cap 
4. Brake fluid reservoir 
5. Air cleaner 
6. Fuse/fusible link box 
7. Battery
8. Engine oil dipstick
9. Radiator cap 
10. Drive belt location 
11. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
S ...
   	</p>
    [15] => <p><a href="seats-15.html"><span>Seats</span></a><br>
   	
WARNING
&#9679; Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive ...
   	</p>
    [16] => <p><a href="front_manual_seat_adjustment_if_so_equipped-16.html"><span>Front manual seat adjustment (if so equipped</span></a><br>
   	
Forward and backward
Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while you
slide the seat forward or backward to the desired
position. Release the bar to lock the seat in
position.

Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean
back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the le ...
   	</p>
    [17] => <p><a href="front_power_seat_adjustment_if_so_equipped_for_driver_us_seat_-17.html"><span>Front power seat adjustment (if so equipped for driver’s seat)</span></a><br>
   	
Operating tips
WARNING
Before driving the vehicle, return the seatback
to an upright seating position after
manually releasing it. Also, make sure the
seat is locked in place. Failure to do so
may cause the seat to move in a collision
or sudden stop. This may result in damage
to the seat o ...
   	</p>
    [18] => <p><a href="folding_rear_seat-18.html"><span>Folding rear seat</span></a><br>
   	Interior trunk access
The trunk can be accessed from the driver side (if
so equipped) and passenger side of the rear seat
for loading and unloading, as shown.
1. Move the front passenger seat to the most
forward position.
2. Open the access cover on the rear parcel
shelf.
3. Push down on the ...
   	</p>
    [19] => <p><a href="front_seat_head_restraints_headrests-19.html"><span>Front seat head restraints/headrests</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
&#9679; Head restraints/headrests supplement
the other vehicle safety systems. They
may provide additional protection
against injury in certain rear end collisions.

Adjust the head
restraints/headrests properly, as specified
in this section. Check the adjustment
after someone else  ...
   	</p>
    [20] => <p><a href="rear_seat_head_restraints_headrests-20.html"><span>Rear seat head restraints/headrests</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
&#9679; Head restraints/headrests supplement
the other vehicle safety systems. They
may provide additional protection
against injury in certain rear end collisions.

Adjust the head
restraints/headrests properly, as specified
in this section. Check the adjustment
after someone else  ...
   	</p>
    [22] => <p><a href="precautions_on_seat_belt_usage-22.html"><span>Precautions on seat belt usage</span></a><br>
   	
If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted
and you are sitting upright and well back in
your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances
of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the
severity of injury may be greatly reduced.

NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your ...
   	</p>
    [25] => <p><a href="three_point_type_seat_belt_with_retractor-25.html"><span>Three-point type seat belt with retractor</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
&#9679; Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times.
&#9679; Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and ...
   	</p>
    [26] => <p><a href="seat_belt_extenders-26.html"><span>Seat belt extenders</span></a><br>
   	If, because of body size or driving position, it is
not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt
and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with
the installed seat belts is available that can be
purchased. The extender adds approximately 8 in
(200 mm) of length and may be used for eith ...
   	</p>
    [27] => <p><a href="seat_belt_maintenance-27.html"><span>Seat belt maintenance</span></a><br>
   	&#9679; To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a
mild soap solution or any solution recommended
for cleaning upholstery or carpet.

Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat
belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the
seat belts to retract until they are completely
dry.
&#9679; If dirt builds ...
   	</p>
    [28] => <p><a href="child_safety-28.html"><span>Child safety</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
Do not allow children to play with the seat
belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt
becomes wrapped around a child’s neck
with the ALR mode activated, the child can
be seriously injured or killed if the seat ...
   	</p>
    [30] => <p><a href="small_children-30.html"><span>Small children</span></a><br>
   	Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at
least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing
child restraint as long as possible up to the height
or weight limit of the child restraint. Children who
outgrow the height or weight limit of the rearfacing
child restraint and are at least 1 yea ...
   	</p>
    [31] => <p><a href="larger_children-31.html"><span>Larger children</span></a><br>
   	Children should remain in a forward-facing child
restraint with a harness until they reach the maximum
height or weight limit allowed by the child
restraint manufacturer.
Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit
of the harness-equipped forward-facing child restraint,
NISSAN recommends  ...
   	</p>
    [33] => <p><a href="precautions_on_child_restraints-33.html"><span>Precautions on child restraints</span></a><br>
   	

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions
for proper use and installation
of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
– The child restraint must be used and
installed properly. Always follow all ...
   	</p>
    [34] => <p><a href="latch_lower_anchors_and_tethers_for_children_system-34.html"><span>LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) System</span></a><br>
   	
LATCH system anchor locat
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor
points that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren) system compatible
child restraints. This system may also be referred
to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system.

With this system, you do not ha ...
   	</p>
    [35] => <p><a href="rear_facing_child_restraint_installation_using_latch-35.html"><span>Rear-facing child restraint installation using LATCH</span></a><br>
   	Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before installing
a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always
follow the child restra ...
   	</p>
    [36] => <p><a href="rear_facing_child_restraint_installation_using_the_seat_belts-36.html"><span>Rear-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts</span></a><br>
   	
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
use the ALR mode will result in the child
restraint not being properly secured. The
restraint could tip over or be loose and
cause injury to a child in a sudde ...
   	</p>
    [37] => <p><a href="forward_facing_child_restraint_installation_using_latch-37.html"><span>Forward-facing child restraint installation using LATCH</span></a><br>
   	Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before installing
a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
child restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always
follow the child res ...
   	</p>
    [38] => <p><a href="forward_facing_child_restraint_installation_using_the_seat_belts-38.html"><span>Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
use the ALR mode will result in the child
restraint not being properly secured. The
restraint could tip over or be loose and
cause injury to a child in a sudden  ...
   	</p>
    [39] => <p><a href="installing_top_tether_strap-39.html"><span>Installing top tether strap</span></a><br>
   	
First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH
lower anchors (rear outboard seat positions only)
or the seat belt, as applicable.

1. Flip up the anchor cover 1 from the anchor
point which is located directly behind the
child seat.
2. Position the top tether strap over the top of
the hea ...
   	</p>
    [40] => <p><a href="booster_seats-40.html"><span>Booster seats</span></a><br>
   	Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not used
properly, the risk of a child being injured in
a sudden stop or collision greatly
increases:
– Make sure the shoulder portion of
the belt is away from the child’s face
and neck and the lap portion of the
b ...
   	</p>
    [42] => <p><a href="precautions_on_supplemental_restraint_system-42.html"><span>Precautions on supplemental restraint system</span></a><br>
   	This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) section
contains important information concerning
the following systems:
&#9679; Driver and passenger supplemental frontimpact
air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag
System)
&#9679; Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental
air bag
&#9679; Roof-mounted cu ...
   	</p>
    [43] => <p><a href="front_seat_mounted_side_impact_supplemental_air_bag_and_roof_mounted_curtain_side_impact_supplemental_air_bag_systems-43.html"><span>Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain 
side-impact supplemental air bag systems</span></a><br>
   	
The side air bags are located in the outside of the
seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags
are located in the side roof rails. However, all of
the information, cautions and warnings in
this manual still apply and must be followed.

The side air bags and curtain air bags are
desig ...
   	</p>
    [44] => <p><a href="seat_belts_with_pretensioners_front_seats_-44.html"><span>Seat belts with pretensioners (Front seats)</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
&#9679; The pretensioners cannot be reused after
activation. They must be replaced
together with the retractor and buckle
as a unit.
&#9679; If the vehicle becomes involved in a
collision but a pretensioner is not activated,
be sure to have the pretensioner
system checked and, if nec ...
   	</p>
    [46] => <p><a href="supplemental_air_bag_warning_light-46.html"><span>Supplemental air bag warning light</span></a><br>
   	
The supplemental air bag warning light,
displaying  in the instrument panel, 
monitors
the circuits for the air bag systems, pretensioners
and all related wiring.

When the ignition is placed in the ON or START
position, the supplemental air bag warning light
illuminates for about 7 second ...
   	</p>
    [48] => <p><a href="instrument_panel-48.html"><span>Instrument panel</span></a><br>
   	
1. Instrument brightness control/Trip computer
reset switch 
2. Vents
3. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn
signal switch
4. Driver supplemental air bag/horn
5. Meters and gauges 
6. Paddle shift controls (if so equipped)
7. Windshield wiper/washer switch
8. Hazard warning flasher  ...
   	</p>
    [50] => <p><a href="speedometer_and_odometer-50.html"><span>Speedometer and odometer</span></a><br>
   	
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometer
The odometer 1 and the twin trip odometer 2
are displayed below the Vehicle Information Display
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.

The odometer records the total distance the vehicle
ha ...
   	</p>
    [52] => <p><a href="engine_coolant_temperature_gauge-52.html"><span>Engine coolant temperature gauge</span></a><br>
   	
The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature.

The engine coolant temperature is within the
normal range 1 when the gauge needle points
within the zone shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with the
outside air temperature and driving conditions.
CAUTION
 ...
   	</p>
    [53] => <p><a href="fuel_gauge-53.html"><span>Fuel gauge</span></a><br>
   	
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level
in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,
turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) after the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

The low fuel warning light comes on w ...
   	</p>
    [54] => <p><a href="compass_display_if_so_equipped_-54.html"><span>Compass display (if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and indicates
the direction of the vehicle’s heading.

With the ignition switch placed in the ON position,
press the  button as described in 
the
chart below to activate various features of the
automatic anti-glare rearview mirror.

For information ...
   	</p>
    [56] => <p><a href="checking_bulbs-56.html"><span>Checking bulbs</span></a><br>
   	With all doors closed, apply the parking brake
and place the ignition switch to the ON position
without starting the engine. The following lights
will come on:

The following lights (if equipped) come on briefly
and then go off:

If any light fails to come on, it may indicate
a burned-out b ...
   	</p>
    [57] => <p><a href="warning_lights-57.html"><span>Warning lights</span></a><br>
   	For additional information on warnings and indicators,
see “Vehicle information display” later in
this section.

Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning light illuminates and then turns ...
   	</p>
    [58] => <p><a href="indicator_lights-58.html"><span>Indicator lights</span></a><br>
   	For additional information on warnings and indicators,
see “Vehicle information display” later in
this section.

Front fog light indicator light (if
so equipped)
The front fog light indicator light illuminates when
the front fog lights are ON. See “Fog light switch”
later in this sec ...
   	</p>
    [59] => <p><a href="audible_reminders-59.html"><span>Audible reminders</span></a><br>
   	Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.

When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it
makes a high pitched scraping sound when the
vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake
pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as
soon as possible if the warning sou ...
   	</p>
    [60] => <p><a href="vehicle_information_display-60.html"><span>Vehicle Information Display</span></a><br>
   	
The vehicle information display is located to the
left of the speedometer. It displays such items as:
&#9679; Vehicle settings
&#9679; Trip computer information
&#9679; Drive system warnings and settings (if so
equipped)
&#9679; Cruise control system information
&#9679; NISSAN Intelligent K ...
   	</p>
    [61] => <p><a href="how_to_use_the_vehicle_information_display-61.html"><span>How to use the vehicle information display</span></a><br>
   	
The vehicle information display can be changed
using the buttons  and ENTER located 
on
the steering wheel.

1.  — navigate through the items in 
vehicle
information
ENTER — change or select an item in the
vehicle information display
2.  — go back to the previous menu
3. &nbsp; � ...
   	</p>
    [62] => <p><a href="startup_display-62.html"><span>Startup display</span></a><br>
   	When the vehicle in placed in the ON or ACC
position the screens that display in the vehicle
information include:
&#9679; Active system status (if so equipped)
&#9679; Trip computer
&#9679; Tire pressure information (if so equipped)
&#9679; Fuel economy
&#9679; Warnings
Warnings will only di ...
   	</p>
    [63] => <p><a href="settings-63.html"><span>Settings</span></a><br>
   	The setting mode allows you to change the information
displayed in the vehicle information display:
&#9679; Driver Assistance (if so equipped)
&#9679; Main Menu Selection
&#9679; Body Color
&#9679; Maintenance
&#9679; Alarms
&#9679; Vehicle Settings
&#9679; Language
&#9679; Unit
&#9679; We ...
   	</p>
    [64] => <p><a href="vehicle_information_display_warnings_and_indicators-64.html"><span>Vehicle information display warnings and indicators</span></a><br>
   	
1. No Key Detected
2. Key ID Incorrect
3. Shift to Park
4. Push ignition to OFF
5. Key Battery Low
6. Engine start operation for Intelligent Key
system
7. Release parking brake
8. Low Fuel
9. Low Washer Fluid
10. Door Open
11. Trunk Open
12. Timer Alert – Time for a driver break?
13 ...
   	</p>
    [66] => <p><a href="vehicle_security_system-66.html"><span>Vehicle security system</span></a><br>
   	audible alarm signals if someone opens the
doors, trunk lid or the hood when the system is
armed. It is not, however, a motion detection type
system that activates when a vehicle is moved or
when a vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot
prevent it, nor can it preve ...
   	</p>
    [67] => <p><a href="nissan_vehicle_immobilizer_system-67.html"><span>NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system</span></a><br>
   	The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
allow the engine to start without the use of a
registered key.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This devic ...
   	</p>
    [68] => <p><a href="windshield_wiper_and_washer_switch-68.html"><span>Windshield wiper and washer switch</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solution
may freeze on the window and obscure
your vision which may lead to an
accident. Warm the window with the defroster
before you wash the window.
CAUTION
&#9679; Do not operate the washer continuously
for more than 30 seconds.
&#9679; Do not ...
   	</p>
    [69] => <p><a href="rear_window_and_outside_mirror_if_so_equipped_defroster_switch-69.html"><span>Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch</span></a><br>
   	
Type A
To defrost the rear window glass and outside
mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and
push the rear window defroster switch on. The
rear window defroster indicator light on the
switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn
the defroster off.

The rear window defroster automat ...
   	</p>
    [71] => <p><a href="xenon_headlights_if_so_equipped_-71.html"><span>Xenon headlights (if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE
&#9679; When xenon headlights are on, they
produce a high voltage. To prevent an
electric shock, never attempt to modify
or disassemble. Always have your xenon
headlights replaced at a NISSAN
dealer.
&#9679; Xenon headlights provide considerably
more light than conventi ...
   	</p>
    [72] => <p><a href="headlight_control_switch-72.html"><span>Headlight control switch</span></a><br>
   	Lighting
1 When turning the switch to the  
position,
the front parking, tail, license plate and
instrument panel lights come on.
2 When turning the switch to the  
position,
the headlights come on and all the other
lights remain on.
CAUTION
Use the headlights with the engine running
to a ...
   	</p>
    [73] => <p><a href="daytime_running_light_system_canada_only_-73.html"><span>Daytime running light system (Canada only)</span></a><br>
   	The headlights automatically illuminate at a reduced
intensity when the engine is started with
the parking brake released. The daytime running
lights operate with the headlight switch in the
OFF position or in the  position. 
Turn the
headlight switch to the  position 
for full
illumination  ...
   	</p>
    [76] => <p><a href="fog_light_switch_if_so_equipped_-76.html"><span>Fog light switch (if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch
to the  position, then turn the fog 
light
switch to the  position.

To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch in
the AUTOposition, the headlights must be on, then
turn the fog light switch to the  
position.

To turn the fog ...
   	</p>
    [78] => <p><a href="heated_seats_if_so_equipped_-78.html"><span>Heated seats (if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	
The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.

1. Start the engine.
2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, as
desired. The indicator light in the switch will
illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,
automatically turning the heater on and off.

The indicator light w ...
   	</p>
    [79] => <p><a href="heated_steering_wheel_if_so_equipped_-79.html"><span>Heated steering wheel (if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	
The heated steering wheel system is designed to
operate only when the surface temperature of the
steering wheel is below approximately 68°F
(20°C).

Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm
the steering wheel after the engine starts. The
indicator light will come on.

If the surfac ...
   	</p>
    [80] => <p><a href="warning_systems_switch_if_so_equipped_-80.html"><span>Warning systems switch (if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	
The warning systems switch is used to temporarily
turn off the warning systems (Lane Departure
Warning (LDW) and Blind SpotWarning (BSW)
systems) that are activated using the settings
menu in the vehicle information display.

When the warning systems switch is turned off,
the indicator 1 on ...
   	</p>
    [81] => <p><a href="vehicle_dynamic_control_vdc_off_switch-81.html"><span>Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch</span></a><br>
   	
The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driving
conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC
system reduces the engine output to reduce
wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced
even if the accelerator is depressed to the flo ...
   	</p>
    [82] => <p><a href="power_outlet-82.html"><span>Power outlet</span></a><br>
   	
Instrument panel
The power outlets are for powering electrical
accessories such as cellular telephones. They
are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum.

The power outlets are powered only when the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Open the lower half of the console box to acces ...
   	</p>
    [86] => <p><a href="sunglasses_holder-86.html"><span>Sunglasses holder</span></a><br>
   	
To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.

Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.
WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed while
driving to prevent an accident.
CAUTION
&#9679; Do not use for anything other than
sunglasses.
&#9679; Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglass ...
   	</p>
    [87] => <p><a href="cup_holders-87.html"><span>Cup holders</span></a><br>
   	
Front

Rear
The rear center cup holders are located in the
rear fold-down armrest.
CAUTION
&#9679; Avoid abrupt starting and braking when
the cup holder is being used to prevent
spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it
can scald you or your passenger.
&#9679; Use only soft cups in th ...
   	</p>
    [89] => <p><a href="console_box-89.html"><span>Console box</span></a><br>
   	
Upper half
Pull up on the driver’s side latch to open the
upper half of the console box.

The upper half of the console box may be used for
storage of cellular phones. An access hole is
provided at the front of the upper half of the
console box for phone cord routing to the power
outlet. ...
   	</p>
    [91] => <p><a href="windows-91.html"><span>Windows</span></a><br>
   	POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
&#9679; Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while
it is in motion and before closing the
windows. Use the window lock switch to
prevent unexpected use of the power
windows.
&#9679; Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. ...
   	</p>
    [92] => <p><a href="moonroof_if_so_equipped_-92.html"><span>Moonroof (if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	
AUTOMATIC MOONROOF
switch is placed in the ON position. The automatic
moonroof is operational for a period of time,
even if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or
OFF position. If the driver’s door or the front
passenger’s door is opened during this period of
time, the power to the  ...
   	</p>
    [93] => <p><a href="interior_light-93.html"><span>Interior light</span></a><br>
   	
&#02;1 The interior light can be turned ON regardless
of door position. The light will go off after
a period of time unless the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position when any door is
opened.
2 The interior lights can be set to operate
when the doors are opened. To turn off the
interi ...
   	</p>
    [97] => <p><a href="homelink_universal_transceiver_if_so_equipped_-97.html"><span>HomeLink® universal transceiver (if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides
a convenient way to consolidate the functions of
up to three individual hand-held transmitters into
one built-in device.

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:
&#9679; Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)
devices such as garage doors, gates, home
a ...
   	</p>
    [98] => <p><a href="programming_homelink_-98.html"><span>Programming HomeLink®</span></a><br>
   	If you have any questions or are having difficulty
programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to
the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com
or call 1-800-355-3515.
NOTE:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC position
when programming HomeLink®. It is
also recommended that a new battery be
 ...
   	</p>
    [99] => <p><a href="programming_homelink_for_canadian_customers_and_gate_openers-99.html"><span>Programming HomeLink® for Canadian customers and gate openers</span></a><br>
   	Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission – which may not be long
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal
during training. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to “timeout” ...
   	</p>
    [101] => <p><a href="programming_trouble_diagnosis-101.html"><span>Programming trouble-diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the
hand-held transmitter information:
&#9679; replace the hand-held transmitter batteries
with new batteries.
&#9679; position the hand-held transmitter with its
battery area facing away from the
HomeLink® surface.
&#9679; press and hold both the Hom ...
   	</p>
    [102] => <p><a href="clearing_the_programmed_information-102.html"><span>Clearing the programmed information</span></a><br>
   	The following procedure clears the programmed
information from both buttons. Individual buttons
cannot be cleared. However, individual buttons
can be reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a
single HomeLink® button” in this section.

To clear all programming:
1. Press and hold the two outer Ho ...
   	</p>
    [103] => <p><a href="reprogramming_a_single_homelink_button-103.html"><span>Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button</span></a><br>
   	To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
button, complete the following:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button.

DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the
HomeLink® button, proceed with “Programming
HomeL ...
   	</p>
    [104] => <p><a href="if_your_vehicle_is_stolen-104.html"><span>If your vehicle is stolen</span></a><br>
   	If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the
codes of any non-rolling code device that has
been programmed into HomeLink®. Consult the
Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manufacturer
or dealer of those devices for additional
information.
When your vehicle is recovered, you will
 ...
   	</p>
    [107] => <p><a href="nissan_intelligent_key_-107.html"><span>NISSAN Intelligent Key®</span></a><br>
   	Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent
Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intelligent
Key system components and NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System components. As many
as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used
with one vehicle. The new keys must be registered
by a ...
   	</p>
    [108] => <p><a href="nissan_vehicle_immobilizer_system_keys-108.html"><span>NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys</span></a><br>
   	You can only drive your vehicle using the master
keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System components in your vehicle.

The master key can be used for all the locks.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
Additional or replacement keys:
If you still have a key, the ke ...
   	</p>
    [109] => <p><a href="doors-109.html"><span>Doors</span></a><br>
   	When the doors are locked using one of the
following methods, the doors can not be opened
using the inside or outside door handles. The
doors must be unlocked to open the doors.
WARNING
&#9679; Always have the doors locked while
driving. Along with the use of seat belts,
this provides greater ...
   	</p>
    [110] => <p><a href="locking_with_key-110.html"><span>Locking with key</span></a><br>
   	
Driver’s side
Manual (if so equipped)
To lock a door, turn the key toward the front of the
vehicle 1 . To unlock, turn the key toward the rear
of the vehicle 2 .

Power (if so equipped)
The power door lock system allows you to lock or
unlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key ...
   	</p>
    [112] => <p><a href="locking_with_power_door_lock_switch-112.html"><span>Locking with power door lock switch</span></a><br>
   	
Door lock switch
To lock all the doors without a key, push the door
lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to
the lock position 1 . When locking the door this
way, be certain not to leave the key inside the
vehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push the
door lock s ...
   	</p>
    [113] => <p><a href="automatic_door_locks-113.html"><span>Automatic door locks</span></a><br>
   	&#9679; All doors lock automatically when the vehicle
speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).
&#9679; All doors unlock automatically when the ignition
is placed in the OFF position.

The automatic unlock function can be deactivated
or activated. To deactivate or activate
the automatic door unlock sys ...
   	</p>
    [114] => <p><a href="child_safety_rear_door-114.html"><span>Child safety rear door</span></a><br>
   	
Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors
from being opened accidentally, especially when
small children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on the
edge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the unlock position 2 , the
door can be opened from the outside o ...
   	</p>
    [115] => <p><a href="nissan_intelligent_key_with_door_and_trunk_request_switches-115.html"><span>NISSAN Intelligent Key® With Door and Trunk Request Switches</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
&#9679; Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those who
use a pacemaker should contact the
electric medical equipment manufacturer
for the possible influences before
use.
&#9679; The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves when the buttons are pressed.

The F ...
   	</p>
    [116] => <p><a href="operating_range-116.html"><span>Operating range</span></a><br>
   	
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified
operating range from the request switch 1 .

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or
strong radio waves are present near the operating
location, the Intelligent Key system’s operating
 ...
   	</p>
    [117] => <p><a href="door_locks_unlocks_precaution-117.html"><span>Door locks/unlocks precaution</span></a><br>
   	
&#9679; Do not push the door handle request switch
with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as
illustrated. The close distance to the door
handle will cause the Intelligent Key system
to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelligent
Key is outside the vehicle.
&#9679; After locking with ...
   	</p>
    [118] => <p><a href="nissan_intelligent_key_operation-118.html"><span>NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation</span></a><br>
   	
You can lock or unlock the doors without taking
the key out of your pocket or bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you
can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door
handle request switch within the range of operation.

Locking doors
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park)  ...
   	</p>
    [119] => <p><a href="how_to_use_the_remote_keyless_entry_function-119.html"><span>How to use the remote keyless entry function</span></a><br>
   	The remote keyless entry function can operate all
door locks using the remote keyless function of
the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function
can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away
from the vehicle. The operating distance depends
upon the conditions around the vehicle.

The remot ...
   	</p>
    [120] => <p><a href="warning_signals-120.html"><span>Warning signals</span></a><br>
   	To help prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly
by erroneous operation of the Intelligent
Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being
stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and
outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in
the instrument panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or ...
   	</p>
    [122] => <p><a href="nissan_intelligent_key_without_door_and_trunk_request_switches-122.html"><span>NISSAN Intelligent Key® Without Door and Trunk Request Switches</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
&#9679; Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those who
use a pacemaker should contact the
electric medical equipment manufacturer
for the possible influences before
use.
&#9679; The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves when the buttons are pressed.

The F ...
   	</p>
    [124] => <p><a href="how_to_use_the_remote_keyless_entry_function-124.html"><span>How to use the remote keyless entry function</span></a><br>
   	The remote keyless entry function can operate all
door locks using the remote keyless function of
the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function
can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away
from the vehicle. The operating distance depends
upon the conditions around the vehicle.

The remot ...
   	</p>
    [125] => <p><a href="warning_signals-125.html"><span>Warning signals</span></a><br>
   	To help prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly
by erroneous operation of the Intelligent
Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being
stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and
outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in
the instrument panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or ...
   	</p>
    [127] => <p><a href="remote_engine_start_if_so_equipped_-127.html"><span>Remote Engine Start (if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	
The  button will be on the 
NISSAN Intelligent
Key® if the vehicle has remote engine start.

This feature allows the engine to start from outside
the vehicle.

The following features may be affected when the
remote start feature is used:
&#9679; Vehicles with a manual climate control sys ...
   	</p>
    [129] => <p><a href="remote_starting_the_vehicle-129.html"><span>Remote starting the vehicle</span></a><br>
   	perform the following:
1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.

2. Press the  LOCK button to lock 
all
doors.

3. Within 5 seconds press and hold the

remote start button until the turn signal lights
illuminate. If the vehicle is not within view
press and hold the  remote start 
butto ...
   	</p>
    [130] => <p><a href="extending_engine_run_time-130.html"><span>Extending engine run time</span></a><br>
   	The remote start feature can be extended one
time by performing the steps listed in “Remote
starting the vehicle” in this section. Run time will
be calculated as follows:
&#9679; The first 10 minute run time will start when
the remote start function is performed.
&#9679; The second 10 minu ...
   	</p>
    [132] => <p><a href="conditions_the_remote_start_will_not_work-132.html"><span>Conditions the remote start will not work</span></a><br>
   	The remote start will not operate if any of the
following conditions are present:
&#9679; The ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
&#9679; The hood is not securely closed.
&#9679; The hazard warning lights are on.
&#9679; The I–Key Indicator Light remains
solid in the vehicle inform ...
   	</p>
    [133] => <p><a href="hood-133.html"><span>Hood</span></a><br>
   	
1 Pull the hood lock release handle located
below the driver’s side instrument panel; the
hood springs up slightly.
2 Push the lever at the front of the hood to the
side as illustrated with your fingertips and
raise the hood.
3 Remove the support rod from the clamp.
4 Insert the support r ...
   	</p>
    [135] => <p><a href="opener_operation-135.html"><span>Opener operation</span></a><br>
   	
Instrument panel
WARNING
&#9679; Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This
could allow dangerous exhaust gases
to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Exhaust
gas” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.

Intelligent Key
&#9679; Closely supervise children when they
are  ...
   	</p>
    [136] => <p><a href="interior_trunk_lid_release-136.html"><span>Interior trunk lid release</span></a><br>
   	
WARNING
Closely supervise children when they are
around cars to prevent them from playing
and becoming locked in the trunk where
they could be seriously injured. Keep the
car locked, with the rear seatback and
trunk lid securely latched when not in use,
and prevent children’s access to ca ...
   	</p>
    [139] => <p><a href="fuel_filler_cap-139.html"><span>Fuel-filler cap</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
&#9679; Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain conditions.

You could be burned or seriously
injured if it is misused or mishandled.

Always stop the engine and do not
smoke or allow open flames or sparks
near the vehicle when refueling.
&#9679; Do not a ...
   	</p>
    [142] => <p><a href="telescopic_operation-142.html"><span>Telescopic operation</span></a><br>
   	Pull the lock lever down 1 and adjust the steering
wheel forward or backward 3 to the desired
position.

Push the lock lever up 1 firmly to lock the
steering wheel in place.
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel any
closer to you than is necessary for proper
steering operation and comfor ...
   	</p>
    [143] => <p><a href="sun_visors-143.html"><span>Sun visors</span></a><br>
   	
1 To block glare from the front, swing down the
main sun visor.
2 To block glare from the side, remove the
main sun visor from the center mount and
swing the visor to the side.
3 To extend (if so equipped) the sun visor, slide
in or out as needed.
CAUTION
&#9679; Do not store the sun visor ...
   	</p>
    [146] => <p><a href="automatic_anti_glare_rearview_mirror_if_so_equipped_-146.html"><span>Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror (if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically
dims during night time conditions and according
to the intensity of the headlights of the
vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare
feature is activated when the ignition switch is in
the ON position.

The indicator light will illum ...
   	</p>
    [147] => <p><a href="outside_mirrors-147.html"><span>Outside mirrors</span></a><br>
   	
WARNING
&#9679; Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.

You could lose control of your vehicle
and cause an accident.
&#9679; Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
the passenger side are closer than they
appear. Be careful when moving to the
right. Using only this mirror could cause
a ...
   	</p>
    [148] => <p><a href="monitor_climate_audio_phone_and_voice_recognition_systems-148.html"><span>Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice
recognition systems</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
&#9679; Positioning of the heating or air conditioning
controls and display controls
should not be done while driving in order
that full attention may be given to
the driving operation.
&#9679; Do not disassemble or modify this system.

If you do, it may result in accidents,
fire, o ...
   	</p>
    [149] => <p><a href="control_panel_buttons_y_color_screen_with_navigation_system_if_so_equipped_-149.html"><span>Control panel buttons — color screen with Navigation System (if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	
1. PWR button/VOL (volume) control knob
2. Display screen
3. ENTER / AUDIO button / TUNE / SCROLL
knob
4.  BACK button
5. MAP button*
6. NAV button*
7.  button
8.  (brightness control) button
9.  button**
10. CAMERA button
* For information regarding the Navigation system
control butto ...
   	</p>
    [150] => <p><a href="how_to_use_the_touch_screen-150.html"><span>How to use the touch screen</span></a><br>
   	CAUTION
&#9679; The glass display screen may break if it
is hit with a hard or sharp object. If the
glass screen breaks, do not touch it.

Doing so could result in an injury.
&#9679; To clean the display, never use a rough
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any
kind of solvent or paper towe ...
   	</p>
    [152] => <p><a href="how_to_use_the_apps_button-152.html"><span>How to use the APPS button</span></a><br>
   	
For more information about the “SiriusXM Travel
Link”, and “SiriusXM Traffic” features, see the
separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

For more information about the “My Apps” key,
see “NissanConnect APP Smartphone Integration
(if so equipped)” in this section.

For  ...
   	</p>
    [153] => <p><a href="_nbsp_button-153.html"><span>&nbsp;button</span></a><br>
   	To change the display brightness, press
the  button. Pressing the button 
again will
change the display to the day or the night display.

If no operation is performed within 5 seconds, the
display will return to the previous display.
Press and hold the  button for 
more than
two seconds to  ...
   	</p>
    [154] => <p><a href="rearview_monitor_if_so_equipped_-154.html"><span>RearView Monitor (if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	When the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse)
position, the monitor display shows the
view to the rear of the vehicle.

The system is designed as an aid to the driver in
detecting large stationary objects to help avoid
damaging the vehicle. The system will not detect
small objects belo ...
   	</p>
    [155] => <p><a href="how_to_read_the_displayed_lines-155.html"><span>How to read the displayed lines</span></a><br>
   	
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width and
distances to objects with reference to the vehicle
bumper line A are displayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines:
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

&#9679; Red line 1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
&#9679; Yellow line 2 : approx. 3  ...
   	</p>
    [156] => <p><a href="difference_between_predicted_and_actual_distances-156.html"><span>Difference between predicted and actual distances</span></a><br>
   	The distance guide line and the vehicle width
guide line should be used as a reference only
when the vehicle is on a level, paved surface. The
distance viewed on the monitor is for reference
only and may be different than the actual distance
between the vehicle and displayed objects.

Backing ...
   	</p>
    [157] => <p><a href="how_to_adjust_the_screen_if_so_equipped_-157.html"><span>How to adjust the screen (if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	settings, press the SETTING button while the
RearView Monitor screen is displayed. Each time
the SETTING button is pressed, the next setting
item is selected. Turn the
TUNE·SCROLL/TUNE·FOLDER control knob to
adjust each item.
Available setting items:
&#9679; Brightness
&#9679; Contrast
&# ...
   	</p>
    [158] => <p><a href="operating_tips-158.html"><span>Operating tips</span></a><br>
   	CAUTION
&#9679; Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
to clean the camera. This will cause
discoloration. To clean the camera,
wipe with a cloth dampened with a diluted
mild cleaning agent and then wipe
with a dry cloth.
&#9679; Do not damage the camera as the monitor
screen may be adversel ...
   	</p>
    [159] => <p><a href="rear_and_rear_wide_view_monitor_with_moving_object_detection_mod_if_so_equipped_-159.html"><span>Rear and rear-wide view monitor with moving object detection (MOD) (if so 
equipped)</span></a><br>
   	When the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse)
position, the monitor display shows view to
the rear of the vehicle.

The system is designed as an aid to the driver in
detecting large stationary objects to help avoid
damaging the vehicle. The system will not detect
small objects below th ...
   	</p>
    [160] => <p><a href="how_to_switch_the_display-160.html"><span>How to switch the display</span></a><br>
   	
A : Original screen before the RearView Monitor
is operated
B : Rear-wide view screen
C : Rear view screen
1 : Shift lever is moved into the R (Reverse)
position
2 : Shift lever is moved out of the R (Reverse)
position
3 : Select the “View” key on the screen
&#9679; When the shift lev ...
   	</p>
    [161] => <p><a href="how_to_park_with_predicted_course_lines-161.html"><span>How to park with predicted course lines</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
&#9679; Always turn and check that it is safe to
do so before backing up. Always back
up slowly.
&#9679; Use the displayed lines as a reference.

The lines are highly affected by the number
of occupants, fuel level, vehicle position,
road conditions and road grade.
&#9679; If the ti ...
   	</p>
    [163] => <p><a href="operating_tips-163.html"><span>Operating tips</span></a><br>
   	&#9679; When the shift lever is shifted to R (Reverse),
the monitor screen automatically
changes to the RearView Monitor mode.

However, the radio can be heard.
&#9679; It may take some time until the RearView
Monitor is displayed after the shift lever has
been shifted to R (Reverse). Objects ...
   	</p>
    [164] => <p><a href="moving_object_detection_mod_if_so_equipped_-164.html"><span>Moving Object Detection (MOD) (if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	The Moving Object Detection (MOD) system can
inform the driver of moving objects behind the
vehicle when backing out of garages, maneuvering
in parking lots and in other such instances.

The MOD system detects moving objects by
using image processing technology on the image
shown in the displ ...
   	</p>
    [165] => <p><a href="vents-165.html"><span>Vents</span></a><br>
   	
Side
Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent
slides.

Open or close the vents by using the dial. Move
the dial toward the  to open the 
vents or
toward the  to close them.

Center

Rear ...
   	</p>
    [166] => <p><a href="heater_and_air_conditioner_manual_if_so_equipped_-166.html"><span>Heater and Air Conditioner (manual) (if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	
1. Fan speed control / system OFF dial /
air conditioning (A/C) button
2. Air flow control buttons
3. Temperature control dial / MAX A/C
button
4. Air recirculation button
5. Rear window defroster button
6. Front windshield defrost button
WARNING
&#9679; The air conditioner cooling functi ...
   	</p>
    [167] => <p><a href="controls-167.html"><span>Controls</span></a><br>
   	Fan control dial
The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, and
controls fan speed.

Air flow control buttons
The air flow control buttons allow you to select
the air flow outlets.
MAX
A/C -&nbsp; Air flows from center and side
vents with maximum cooling.
 - Air flows from center and s ...
   	</p>
    [168] => <p><a href="heater_operation-168.html"><span>Heater operation</span></a><br>
   	Heating
This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot
outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost
outlets and the side vent outlets.
1. Press  the button to the OFF 
position
for normal heating.
2. Press&nbsp;  the air flow control 
button.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired ...
   	</p>
    [169] => <p><a href="air_conditioner_operation-169.html"><span>Air conditioner operation</span></a><br>
   	Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the
desired position, and press the  
button to
activate the air conditioner. When the air conditioner
is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions
are added to the heater operation.
The air conditioner cooling function operates
only when the engin ...
   	</p>
    [170] => <p><a href="air_flow_charts-170.html"><span>Air flow charts</span></a><br>
   	The following charts show the button and dial
positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,
cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation
button should always be in the OFF position
for heating and defrosting.





 ...
   	</p>
    [171] => <p><a href="heater_and_air_conditioner_automatic_if_so_equipped_-171.html"><span>Heater and Air Conditioner (automatic) (if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	
1.  (front defroster) button
2. Temperature control dial (driver’s side)/
AUTO (automatic) climate control button
3. Display screen
4. Temperature control dial (passenger’s
side)/DUAL (passenger’s side temperature
control) button
5.  Fresh air intake button
6.  Air recirculation butt ...
   	</p>
    [172] => <p><a href="automatic_operation-172.html"><span>Automatic operation</span></a><br>
   	Cooling and/or dehumidified heating
(AUTO)
This mode may be used all year round as the
system automatically works to keep a constant
temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed
are also controlled automatically.

1. Press the AUTO button on. The indicator on
the button will illuminate.
 ...
   	</p>
    [173] => <p><a href="manual_operation-173.html"><span>Manual operation</span></a><br>
   	Fan speed control
Press the fan control buttons  to 
manually
control the fan speed.

Press the AUTO button to return to automatic
control of the fan speed.
Air recirculation
Press the  air recirculation 
button to recirculate
interior air inside the vehicle. The 
indicator light on the b ...
   	</p>
    [174] => <p><a href="operating_tips-174.html"><span>Operating tips</span></a><br>
   	&#9679; When the engine coolant temperature and
outside air temperature are low, the air flow
from the foot outlets may not operate for a
maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is
not a malfunction. After the coolant temperature
warms up, air flow from the foot outlets
will operate normally.

 ...
   	</p>
    [175] => <p><a href="servicing_air_conditioner-175.html"><span>Servicing air conditioner</span></a><br>
   	The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle
is charged with a refrigerant designed with
the environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s
ozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is required
when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner.

Using imprope ...
   	</p>
    [177] => <p><a href="radio-177.html"><span>Radio</span></a><br>
   	With the ignition placed in the ACC or ON position,
press the PWR (power)/VOL (volume) knob
to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with
the engine not running, the ignition should be
placed in the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signal
strength, distance from r ...
   	</p>
    [178] => <p><a href="fm_radio_reception-178.html"><span>FM radio reception</span></a><br>
   	Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi
(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM
having slightly more range than stereo FM. External
influences may sometimes interfere with FM
station reception even if the FM station is within
25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is ...
   	</p>
    [179] => <p><a href="am_radio_reception-179.html"><span>AM radio reception</span></a><br>
   	AM signals, because of their low frequency, can
bend around objects and skip along the ground.

In addition, the signals can be bounced off the
ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of
these characteristics, AM signals are also subject
to interference as they travel from transmitter
to r ...
   	</p>
    [180] => <p><a href="satellite_radio_reception_if_so_equipped_-180.html"><span>Satellite radio reception (if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	When the satellite radio is used for the first time
or the battery has been replaced, the satellite
radio may not work properly. This is not a malfunction.

Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite
radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or
large building for satellite radio to receive a ...
   	</p>
    [181] => <p><a href="audio_operation_precautions-181.html"><span>Audio operation precautions</span></a><br>
   	
Compact disc (CD) player
CAUTION
&#9679; Do not force a compact disc into the CD
insert slot. This could damage the CD
and/or CD player.
&#9679; Trying to load a CD with the CD door
closed could damage the CD and/or CD
player.
&#9679; Only one CD can be loaded into the CD
player at a time ...
   	</p>
    [182] => <p><a href="fm_am_radio_with_compact_disc_cd_player_if_so_equipped_-182.html"><span>FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player (if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	
1.  CD eject button
2. CD insert slot
3. SCAN button
4. DISP button
5. RPT/RDM button
6. TUNE/FOLDER knob / MENU button
7. AUX IN jack
8. AUX button
9. CD button
10. AM button
11. FM button
12. VOL (volume) control knob / power button
13. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
14. TRACK butto ...
   	</p>
    [183] => <p><a href="fm_am_radio_with_compact_disc_cd_player_type_a_if_so_equipped_-183.html"><span>FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player (Type A) (if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	
1. CD eject button
2. CD button
3. Display screen
4. CD insert slot
5.  SEEK button
6. SCAN button
7.  TRACK button
8. BACK button
9. iPod MENU button
10.TUNE/FOLDER knob, ENTER/SETTING
button
11.Station select (1 - 6) buttons
12.RDM button
13.RPT button
14.VOL (volume) knob /  butto ...
   	</p>
    [184] => <p><a href="fm_am_radio_with_compact_disc_cd_player_type_b_if_so_equipped_-184.html"><span>FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player (Type B) (if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	
1.  CD eject button
2. CD button
3. Display screen
4. CD insert slot
5.  SEEK button
6. SCAN button
7.  TRACK button
8.  BACK button
9. APPS button
10.TUNE/FOLDER knob, ENTER/SETTING
button
11.Station select (1 - 6) buttons
12.RDM button
13.RPT button
14.VOL (volume) knob /  button
 ...
   	</p>
    [185] => <p><a href="fm_am_sat_radio_with_compact_disc_cd_player_type_c_if_so_equipped_-185.html"><span>FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD) player (Type C) (if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	
1.  CD eject button
2. XM button*
3. Display screen
4. CD insert slot
5.  SEEK button
6. SCAN button
7.  CAT button
8.  BACK button
9. APPS button
10.TUNE/SCROLL knob, ENTER/SETTING
button
11.Station select (1 - 6) buttons
12.RDM button
13.RPT button
14.VOL (volume) knob /  button
1 ...
   	</p>
    [186] => <p><a href="fm_am_sat_radio_with_compact_disc_cd_player_if_so_equipped_-186.html"><span>FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD) player (if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	
1. VOL (volume) / POWER button
2.  CD eject button
3. CD insert slot
4. TUNE/SCROLL knob, ENTER/AUDIO
button
5.  BACK button
6.  button
7. Display screen
8. AUX button
9.  Forward seek button
10.  Backward seek button
11.CD button
12.FM-AM button
13.SXM button
 button is a button to  ...
   	</p>
    [187] => <p><a href="usb_interface_models_without_navigation_system_if_so_equipped_-187.html"><span>USB interface (models without Navigation System) (if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	
Connecting a device to the USB input
jack
WARNING
Do not connect/disconnect or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be
a distraction. If distracted you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause an accident
or serious injury.
CAUTION
&#9679; Do not force the USB device int ...
   	</p>
    [188] => <p><a href="usb_interface_models_with_navigation_system_-188.html"><span>USB interface (models with Navigation System)</span></a><br>
   	
Connecting a device to the USB input
jack
WARNING
Do not connect/disconnect or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be
a distraction. If distracted you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause an accident
or serious injury.
CAUTION
&#9679; Do not force the USB device int ...
   	</p>
    [189] => <p><a href="ipod_player_operation_without_navigation_system_if_so_equipped_-189.html"><span>iPod®* player operation without Navigation System (if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	
Connecting iPod®
WARNING
Do not connect/disconnect or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be
a distraction. If distracted you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause an accident
or serious injury.
CAUTION
&#9679; Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Insertin ...
   	</p>
    [190] => <p><a href="ipod_player_operation_with_navigation_system_if_so_equipped_-190.html"><span>iPod®* player operation with Navigation System (if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	
Connecting iPod®
WARNING
Do not connect/disconnect or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be
a distraction. If distracted you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause an accident
or serious injury.
CAUTION
&#9679; Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Insertin ...
   	</p>
    [191] => <p><a href="bluetooth_streaming_audio_without_navigation_system_type_a_if_so_equipped_-191.html"><span>Bluetooth® streaming audio without Navigation System (Type A) (if so 
equipped)</span></a><br>
   	If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio device
that is capable of playing audio files, the
device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio
system so that the audio files on the device play
through the vehicle’s speakers.

Connecting Bluetooth® audio
To connect your Bluetooth® audio de ...
   	</p>
    [192] => <p><a href="bluetooth_streaming_audio_without_navigation_system_type_b_if_so_equipped_-192.html"><span>Bluetooth® streaming audio without Navigation System (Type B) (if so 
equipped)</span></a><br>
   	If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio device
that is capable of playing audio files, the
device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio
system so that the audio files on the device play
through the vehicle’s speakers.

Connecting Bluetooth® audio
To connect your Bluetooth® audio de ...
   	</p>
    [193] => <p><a href="bluetooth_streaming_audio_with_navigation_system_if_so_equipped_-193.html"><span>Bluetooth® streaming audio with Navigation System (if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio device
that is capable of playing audio files, the
device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio
system so that the audio files on the device play
through the vehicle’s speakers.

Connecting Bluetooth® audio
To connect your Bluetooth® audio de ...
   	</p>
    [194] => <p><a href="cd_care_and_cleaning-194.html"><span>CD care and cleaning</span></a><br>
   	
&#9679; Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the
disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.
&#9679; Always place the discs in the storage case
when they are not being used.
&#9679; To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the
center to the outer edge using a clean, soft
cloth. Do not wipe the ...
   	</p>
    [195] => <p><a href="steering_wheel_switch_for_audio_control-195.html"><span>Steering wheel switch for audio control</span></a><br>
   	
1. Source select and power on switch
2. Menu control switch/ENTER button
3.  (Back) switch
4. Volume control switch
POWER on switch
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position,
push the SOURCE switch to turn the audio
system on.
SOURCE select switch
Push the source select switch to ...
   	</p>
    [201] => <p><a href="car_phone_or_cb_radio-201.html"><span>Car phone or CB radio</span></a><br>
   	When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in
your vehicle, be sure to observe the following
precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may
adversely affect the engine control system and
other electronic parts.
WARNING
&#9679; A cellular phone should not be used for
any purpose while driving ...
   	</p>
    [202] => <p><a href="bluetooth_hands_free_phone_system_without_navigation_system_type_a_if_so_equipped_-202.html"><span>Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System without Navigation System (Type A) (if so 
equipped)</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
&#9679; Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
&#9679; If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talkin ...
   	</p>
    [203] => <p><a href="regulatory_information-203.html"><span>Regulatory Information</span></a><br>
   	FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regulations.
– Operation is subject to the following two cond ...
   	</p>
    [204] => <p><a href="using_the_system-204.html"><span>Using the system</span></a><br>
   	The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows
hands-free operation of the Bluetooth® Phone
System.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may
not be available so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.
Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN ...
   	</p>
    [205] => <p><a href="control_buttons-205.html"><span>Control buttons</span></a><br>
   	
The control buttons for the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System are located on the steering wheel.

 PHONE/SEND
Press the  button to initiate a 
VR
session or answer an incoming call.

You can also use the  button to
interrupt the system feedback and
give a command at once. See “List o ...
   	</p>
    [206] => <p><a href="getting_started-206.html"><span>Getting started</span></a><br>
   	The following procedures will help you get
started using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For additional
command options, refer to “List of voice
commands” in this section.

Choosing a language
You can interact with the Bluetooth® Hands-
Free Phone  ...
   	</p>
    [207] => <p><a href="list_of_voice_commands-207.html"><span>List of voice commands</span></a><br>
   	
When you press and release the  
button on
the steering wheel, you can choose from the
commands on the Main Menu. The following
pages describe these commands and the commands
in each sub-menu.

Remember to wait for the tone before
speaking.
After the main menu, you can say “Help” to h ...
   	</p>
    [208] => <p><a href="voice_adaptation_va_mode-208.html"><span>Voice Adaptation (VA) mode</span></a><br>
   	Voice Adaptation allows up to two out-of-dialect
users to train the system to improve recognition
accuracy. By repeating a number of commands,
the users can create a voice model of their own
voice that is stored in the system. The system is
capable of storing a different voice adaptation
model ...
   	</p>
    [209] => <p><a href="manual_control-209.html"><span>Manual control</span></a><br>
   	While using the Voice Recognition system, it is
possible to select menu options by using the
steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice
commands. The manual control mode does not
allow dialing a phone number by digits. The user
may select an entry from the Phonebook or Recent
Calls list ...
   	</p>
    [211] => <p><a href="bluetooth_hands_free_phone_system_without_navigation_system_type_b_if_so_equipped-211.html"><span>Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System without Navigation System (Type B) (if so 
equipped</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
&#9679; Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
&#9679; If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talkin ...
   	</p>
    [212] => <p><a href="regulatory_information-212.html"><span>Regulatory Information</span></a><br>
   	FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regulations.
– Operation is subject to the following two cond ...
   	</p>
    [213] => <p><a href="using_the_system-213.html"><span>Using the system</span></a><br>
   	The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows
hands-free operation of the Bluetooth® Phone
System.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may
not be available so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.

Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISS ...
   	</p>
    [214] => <p><a href="control_buttons-214.html"><span>Control buttons</span></a><br>
   	
The control buttons for the Bluetooth® Hands-
Free Phone System are located on the steering
wheel.

 PHONE/SEND
Press the  button to initiate
a VR session or answer an incoming
call.

You can also use the  button
to interrupt the system feedback
and give a command at once. See
“List ...
   	</p>
    [215] => <p><a href="connecting_procedure-215.html"><span>Connecting procedure</span></a><br>
   	
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be performed
when the vehicle is stationary. If the
vehicle starts moving during the procedure,
the procedure will be cancelled.
To connect a phone to the Bluetooth® Hands-
Free Phone System:
1. Press the SETTING button.
2. Use the TUNE/FOLDER knob to s ...
   	</p>
    [216] => <p><a href="voice_commands-216.html"><span>Voice commands</span></a><br>
   	Voice commands can be used to operate the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. Press
the  button and say “Phone” to 
bring up the
phone command menu. The available options
are:
&#9679; Call
&#9679; Phonebook
&#9679; Recent Calls
&#9679; Messaging (if available)
&#9679; Show Application ...
   	</p>
    [217] => <p><a href="making_a_call-217.html"><span>Making a call</span></a><br>
   	To make a call from a phone connected to the
vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:
1. Press the button on the 
steering
wheel.
2. The system will prompt you for a command.

Say “Call”.
3. Select one of the available voice commands
to continue:
&#9679; “(A Name)” — Spea ...
   	</p>
    [219] => <p><a href="during_a_call-219.html"><span>During a call</span></a><br>
   	While a call is active, press the
 button to
access additional options. Speak one of the following
commands:
&#9679; “Send” – Speak this command followed by
the digits to enter digits during the phone
call.

&#9679; “Mute On” or “Mute Off” – Speak the command
to mute or unmu ...
   	</p>
    [221] => <p><a href="text_messaging-221.html"><span>Text messaging</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
&#9679; Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict
the use of some of the applications and
features, such as social networking and
texting.
&#9679; Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict
the use of “Text-to-Speech”. Check local
regulations before using this
feature.
&#9679; Use th ...
   	</p>
    [222] => <p><a href="bluetooth_settings-222.html"><span>Bluetooth® settings</span></a><br>
   	
To access and adjust the settings for the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:
1. Press the SETTING button.
2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
“Bluetooth” and then press the ENTER button:
&#9679; Bluetooth
Select “On” or “Off” to turn the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® system on or  ...
   	</p>
    [223] => <p><a href="manual_control-223.html"><span>Manual control</span></a><br>
   	While using the Voice Recognition system, it is
possible to select menu options by using the
steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice
commands. To activate manual control mode,
press the PHONE/SEND ( ) button on 
the
steering wheel to access the phone menu and
then press either up or ...
   	</p>
    [224] => <p><a href="bluetooth_hands_free_phone_system_with_navigation_system_if_so_equipped_-224.html"><span>Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System (if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
&#9679; Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
&#9679; If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talkin ...
   	</p>
    [225] => <p><a href="regulatory_information-225.html"><span>Regulatory Information</span></a><br>
   	FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regulations.
– Operation is subject to the following two cond ...
   	</p>
    [226] => <p><a href="voice_commands-226.html"><span>Voice commands</span></a><br>
   	You can use voice commands to operate various
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System features
using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. For
more details, see “NISSAN Voice Recognition
System” in this section.

Voice Prompt Interrupt
While using the voice recognition system, the
system voic ...
   	</p>
    [227] => <p><a href="connecting_procedure-227.html"><span>Connecting Procedure</span></a><br>
   	
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be performed
when the vehicle is stationary. If the
vehicle starts moving during the procedure,
the procedure will be cancelled.
1. Press the [  ] button on the 
control
panel.
2. Select the “Settings” key.
3. Select the “Phone &amp; Bluetooth”  ...
   	</p>
    [228] => <p><a href="vehicle_phonebook-228.html"><span>Vehicle phonebook</span></a><br>
   	To access the vehicle phonebook:
1. Press the  button on the 
control panel.
2. Select the “Phonebook” key.
3. Choose the desired entry from the displayed
list.
4. The number of the entry will be displayed on
the screen. Touch the number to initiate dialing.

NOTE:
To scroll quickly th ...
   	</p>
    [229] => <p><a href="making_a_call-229.html"><span>Making a call</span></a><br>
   	To make a call, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the &nbsp; button on 
the control panel.

The “Phone” screen will appear on the display.
2. Select one of the following options to make a
call:
&#9679; “Phonebook”: Select the name from an entry
stored in the vehicle phonebook.
&# ...
   	</p>
    [230] => <p><a href="receiving_a_call-230.html"><span>Receiving a call</span></a><br>
   	When a call is placed to the connected phone,
the display will change to phone mode.

To accept the incoming call, either:
&#9679; Press the button on the 
steering
wheel, or
&#9679; Touch the  icon on the screen.

To reject the incoming call, either:
&#9679; Press the  button on the steer ...
   	</p>
    [233] => <p><a href="text_messaging-233.html"><span>Text messaging</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
&#9679; Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict
the use of some of the applications and
features, such as social networking and
texting.
&#9679; Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict
the use of “Text-to-Speech”. Check local
regulations before using this
feature.
&#9679; Use th ...
   	</p>
    [235] => <p><a href="phone_settings-235.html"><span>Phone settings</span></a><br>
   	To access the phone settings:
1. Press the [ ] button.
2. Select the “Settings” key.
3. Select the “Phone &amp; Bluetooth” key.
4. Select the “Phone Settings” key and adjust
the following settings as desired:
&#9679; Sort Phonebook By:
Select “First Name” or “Last Name” to ...
   	</p>
    [236] => <p><a href="nissan_voice_recognition_system_if_so_equipped_-236.html"><span>NISSAN Voice Recognition System (if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows
hands-free operation of the systems equipped on
this vehicle, such as the phone and navigation
systems.

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press
the  button located on the steering 
wheel.

When prompted, speak the command for the
system you wi ...
   	</p>
    [237] => <p><a href="using_the_system-237.html"><span>Using the system</span></a><br>
   	Initialization
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which
takes a few seconds. When completed, the system
is ready to accept voice commands. If
the  button is pressed before the 
initialization
completes, the system will announce: “Voice
 ...
   	</p>
    [238] => <p><a href="system_features-238.html"><span>System features</span></a><br>
   	
NISSAN Voice Recognition can activate the following
systems:
&#9679; Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System
&#9679; Navigation
&#9679; Audio
&#9679; Information
&#9679; My Apps
For additional information on the navigation system,
see the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual.

How to s ...
   	</p>
    [239] => <p><a href="bluetooth_hands_free_phone_system_voice_commands-239.html"><span>Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System voice commands</span></a><br>
   	To access the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System voice commands:
1. Press the  button.
2. Say “Call” and then a name in the vehicle
phonebook to call that entry. Otherwise, say
“Phone” to access various phone commands.

If the Bluetooth® has been set to “Off”, the
system announ ...
   	</p>
    [241] => <p><a href="audio_system_voice_commands-241.html"><span>Audio system voice commands</span></a><br>
   	To access the audio system voice commands:
1. Press the button.
2. Say “Audio”
3. Speak a command from the following available
commands:
&#9679; Play (AM, FM, etc.)
Allows user to select radio band
&#9679; Tune AM (number)
Allows user to tune directly to a desired AM
frequency
&#9679;  ...
   	</p>
    [247] => <p><a href="precautions_when_starting_and_driving-247.html"><span>Precautions when starting and driving</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
&#9679; Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatu ...
   	</p>
    [248] => <p><a href="exhaust_gas_carbon_monoxide_-248.html"><span>Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
&#9679; Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
contain colorless and odorless carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous.

It can cause unconsciousness or
death.
&#9679; If you suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering the vehicle, drive with all windows
fully open, and have the vehicl ...
   	</p>
    [249] => <p><a href="three_way_catalyst-249.html"><span>Three-way catalyst</span></a><br>
   	The three-way catalyst is an emission control
device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust
gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at
high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.
WARNING
&#9679; The exhaust gas and the exhaust system
are very hot. Keep people, animals
or flammable mater ...
   	</p>
    [250] => <p><a href="tire_pressure_monitoring_system_tpms_-250.html"><span>Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)</span></a><br>
   	Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and inflated
to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated on
th ...
   	</p>
    [251] => <p><a href="avoiding_collision_and_rollover-251.html"><span>Avoiding collision and rollover</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
and prudent manner may result in loss of
control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey
all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,
high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers,
because these driving practi ...
   	</p>
    [252] => <p><a href="off_road_recovery-252.html"><span>Off-road recovery</span></a><br>
   	If the right side or left side wheels unintentionally
leave the road surface, maintain control of the
vehicle by following the procedure below. Please
note that this procedure is only a general guide.

The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based
on the conditions of the vehicle, road and t ...
   	</p>
    [253] => <p><a href="rapid_air_pressure_loss-253.html"><span>Rapid air pressure loss</span></a><br>
   	Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur
if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to
hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss
can also be caused by driving on under-inflated
tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling
and stability of the vehicle, especial ...
   	</p>
    [254] => <p><a href="drinking_alcohol_drugs_and_driving-254.html"><span>Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol
or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces
coordination, delays reaction time
and impairs judgement. Driving after
drinking alcohol increases the likelihood
of being involved in an accident injuring
yourself and others. Additionally, if you ...
   	</p>
    [255] => <p><a href="push_button_ignition_switch-255.html"><span>Push-Button Ignition Switch</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
Do not operate the push-button ignition
switch while driving the vehicle except in
an emergency. (The engine will stop when
the ignition switch is pushed 3 consecutive
times in quick succession or the ignition
switch is pushed and held for more
than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops whi ...
   	</p>
    [256] => <p><a href="operating_range-256.html"><span>Operating range</span></a><br>
   	
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified
operating range.

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost discharged
or strong radio waves are present near
the operating location, the Intelligent Key system’s
operating range becomes narro ...
   	</p>
    [257] => <p><a href="push_button_ignition_switch_positions-257.html"><span>Push-button ignition switch positions</span></a><br>
   	LOCK (Normal parking position):
The ignition switch can only be locked in this
position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is
pushed to the ACC position while carrying the
Intelligent Key.

The ignition switch will lock when any door is
opened or closed with the ignition switche ...
   	</p>
    [259] => <p><a href="nissan_intelligent_key_battery_discharge-259.html"><span>NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge</span></a><br>
   	
If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key® is
discharged, or environmental conditions interfere
with the Intelligent Key operation, start the engine
according to the following procedure:
1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) position.
2. Firmly apply the foot brake.
3. Touch the ignit ...
   	</p>
    [260] => <p><a href="nissan_vehicle_immobilizer_system-260.html"><span>NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system</span></a><br>
   	The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer system will not
allow the engine to start without the use of the
registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key
(for example, when interference is caused by
another registered key, an automated toll road
device or automatic payment device o ...
   	</p>
    [261] => <p><a href="before_starting_the_engine-261.html"><span>Before starting the engine</span></a><br>
   	&#9679; Make sure the area around the vehicle is
clear.
&#9679; Check fluid levels such as engine oil, coolant,
brake fluid, and windshield-washer fluid
as frequently as possible, or at least whenever
you refuel.
&#9679; Check that all windows and lights are clean.
&#9679; Visually inspect ti ...
   	</p>
    [262] => <p><a href="starting_the_engine-262.html"><span>Starting the engine</span></a><br>
   	1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral).

P (Park) is recommended.

The starter is designed not to operate if
the shift lever is in any of the driving
positions.
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.

Depress the brake pedal and push the ign ...
   	</p>
    [263] => <p><a href="driving_the_vehicle-263.html"><span>Driving the vehicle</span></a><br>
   	CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT)
WARNING
&#9679; Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral)
to R (Reverse), D (Drive), Ds (Drive
Sport) or manual shift mode (if so
equipped). Always depress the brake
pedal until shifting is completed. Failure
to ...
   	</p>
    [264] => <p><a href="parking_brake-264.html"><span>Parking brake</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
&#9679; Be sure the parking brake is fully released
before driving. Failure to do so
can cause brake failure and lead to an
accident.
&#9679; Do not release the parking brake from
outside the vehicle.
&#9679; Do not use the shift lever in place of the
parking brake. When parking, be  ...
   	</p>
    [265] => <p><a href="blind_spot_warning_bsw_system_lane_departure_warning_ldw_system_if_so_equipped_-265.html"><span>Blind Spot Warning (BSW) System / Lane Departure Warning (LDW) System (if so 
equipped)</span></a><br>
   	The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system helps
alert the driver of other vehicles in adjacent lanes
when changing lanes.

The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system
helps alert the driver when the vehicle is traveling
close to either the left or the right of a traveling
lane.

The BSW/LDW systems u ...
   	</p>
    [266] => <p><a href="bsw_system_operation-266.html"><span>BSW system operation</span></a><br>
   	
The BSW system operates above approximately
20 MPH (32 km/h).

When the camera unit detects vehicles in the
detection zone, the Blind spot indicator light located
inside the outside mirrors will illuminate. If
the turn signal is then activated, the system
chimes (twice) and the Blind spot i ...
   	</p>
    [267] => <p><a href="bsw_driving_situations-267.html"><span>BSW driving situations</span></a><br>
   	Another vehicle approaching from
behind

The Blind spot indicator light illuminates if a vehicle
enters the detection zone from behind in an
adjacent lane.

However, if the overtaking vehicle is traveling
much faster than your vehicle, the indicator light
may not illuminate before the detec ...
   	</p>
    [268] => <p><a href="ldw_system_operation-268.html"><span>LDW system operation</span></a><br>
   	The LDW system operates above approximately
45 MPH (70 km/h).

When the vehicle approaches either the left or
the right of the traveling lane, the LDW system
will chime a sound and the LDW light on the
instrument panel will blink to alert the driver
The LDW system is not designed to operate
 ...
   	</p>
    [270] => <p><a href="bsw_ldw_automatic_deactivation-270.html"><span>BSW/LDW automatic deactivation</span></a><br>
   	When dirt, rain or snow cannot be removed by
the automatic washer and blower and accumulates
on the camera, making it impossible to
detect the vehicles or the lane markers, the BSW
and/or LDW system will be turned off automatically.

The BSW light (white) and/or LDW light
(white) will blink,  ...
   	</p>
    [271] => <p><a href="camera_unit_maintenance-271.html"><span>Camera unit maintenance</span></a><br>
   	
The rear camera unit 1 for the LDW/BSW systems
is located above the rear licence plate. To
maintain the proper operation of the LDW/BSW
systems and help keep the system functioning,
be sure to observe the following:
&#9679; Always keep the camera unit clean.
&#9679; Do not attach “licence  ...
   	</p>
    [273] => <p><a href="precautions_on_cruise_control-273.html"><span>Precautions on cruise control</span></a><br>
   	
1. CANCEL switch
2. ACCEL/RES switch
3. COAST/SET switch
4. ON/OFF switch
&#9679; If the cruise control system malfunctions, it
cancels automatically. The SET indicator
light in the instrument panel then blinks to
warn the driver.
&#9679; If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the
cruise ...
   	</p>
    [274] => <p><a href="cruise_control_operations-274.html"><span>Cruise control operations</span></a><br>
   	The cruise control allows driving at a speed between
25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without
keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the
ON·OFF switch on. The CRUISE indicator light in
the instrument panel will illuminate.
To set cruising speed, accelerat ...
   	</p>
    [275] => <p><a href="break_in_schedule-275.html"><span>Break-in schedule</span></a><br>
   	CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
follow these recommendations to obtain
maximum engine performance and ensure
the future reliability and economy of your
new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations
may result in shortened
engine life and reduced engine
performance.
& ...
   	</p>
    [276] => <p><a href="fuel_efficient_driving_tips-276.html"><span>Fuel efficient driving tips</span></a><br>
   	Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient Driving
Tips to help you achieve the most fuel economy
from your vehicle.

1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake
Pedal Application
&#9679; Avoid rapid starts and stops
&#9679; Use smooth, gentle accelerator and
brake application whenever possible
&#9679 ...
   	</p>
    [277] => <p><a href="increasing_fuel_economy-277.html"><span>Increasing fuel economy</span></a><br>
   	&#9679; Keep your engine tuned up.
&#9679; Follow the recommended scheduled maintenance.
&#9679; Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure.

Low tire pressure increases tire wear
and lowers fuel economy.
&#9679; Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Improper
alignment increases tire wea ...
   	</p>
    [278] => <p><a href="parking_parking_on_hills-278.html"><span>Parking/parking on hills</span></a><br>
   	
WARNING
&#9679; Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire.
&#9679; Safe parking procedures require that
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed into P (Park). Failure
to do so could ca ...
   	</p>
    [279] => <p><a href="power_steering-279.html"><span>Power steering</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
&#9679; If the engine is not running or is turned
off while driving, the power assist for
the steering will not work. Steering will
be harder to operate.
&#9679; When the power steering warning light
illuminates with the engine running,
there will be no power assist for the
steering. ...
   	</p>
    [281] => <p><a href="brake_precautions-281.html"><span>Brake precautions</span></a><br>
   	Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using engine
vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the
vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,
greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be
required to stop the vehicle and stopping distance
will be longer.

Using the b ...
   	</p>
    [282] => <p><a href="anti_lock_braking_system_abs_-282.html"><span>Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
&#9679; The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a
sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent
accidents resulting from careless
or dangerous driving techniques. It can
help maintain vehicle control during
braking on slippery surfaces. Remember
that stopping distances on slippery
surfac ...
   	</p>
    [283] => <p><a href="vehicle_dynamic_control_vdc_system-283.html"><span>Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system</span></a><br>
   	The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system uses
various sensors to monitor driver inputs and vehicle
motion. Under certain driving conditions,
the VDC System helps to perform the following
functions:
&#9679; Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel
slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is
tr ...
   	</p>
    [289] => <p><a href="tire_equipment-289.html"><span>Tire equipment</span></a><br>
   	1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to
provide superior performance on dry pavement.

However, the performance of these
tires will be substantially reduced in snowy
and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle
on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends
the use of MUD &amp; SNOW or ALL
SEA ...
   	</p>
    [291] => <p><a href="driving_on_snow_or_ice-291.html"><span>Driving on snow or ice</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
&#9679; Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),
very cold snow or ice can be slick and
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will
have much less traction or “grip” under
these conditions. Try to avoid driving on
wet ice until the road is salted or
sanded.
&#9679; Whatever the condi ...
   	</p>
    [292] => <p><a href="engine_block_heater_if_so_equipped_-292.html"><span>Engine block heater (if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	Engine block heaters are used to assist with cold
temperature starting.

The engine block heater should be used when
the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C) or lower.
WARNING
&#9679; Do not use your engine block heater
with an ungrounded electrical system or
a 2-pronged adapter. You can be  ...
   	</p>
    [295] => <p><a href="hazard_warning_flasher_switch-295.html"><span>Hazard warning flasher switch</span></a><br>
   	
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when
you must stop or park under emergency conditions.

All turn signal lights flash.
WARNING
&#9679; If stopping for an emergency, be sure to
move the vehicle well off the road.
&#9679; Do not use the hazard warning flashers
while moving on the hig ...
   	</p>
    [297] => <p><a href="tire_pressure_monitoring_system_tpms_-297.html"><span>Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)</span></a><br>
   	This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure
of all tires except the spare. When the low
tire pressure warning light is lit, and the “Tire
Pressure Low - Add Air” warning appears in the
vehicle information display, one or more of your
 ...
   	</p>
    [298] => <p><a href="changing_a_flat_tire-298.html"><span>Changing a flat tire</span></a><br>
   	If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below:
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking
brake. Move the shift lever to P (Park).
4. Turn off the engine. ...
   	</p>
    [299] => <p><a href="jump_starting-299.html"><span>Jump starting</span></a><br>
   	To start your engine with a booster battery, the
instructions and precautions below must be followed.
WARNING
&#9679; If done incorrectly, jump starting can
lead to a battery explosion, resulting in
severe injury or death. It could also
damage your vehicle.
&#9679; Explosive hydrogen gas is a ...
   	</p>
    [301] => <p><a href="if_your_vehicle_overheats-301.html"><span>If your vehicle overheats</span></a><br>
   	If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an
extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if
you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal
noise, etc. take the following steps.
WARNING
&#9679; Do not continue to drive if your vehicle
overheats. Doing so could cause engine
damage or a v ...
   	</p>
    [302] => <p><a href="towing_your_vehicle-302.html"><span>Towing your vehicle</span></a><br>
   	When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in
Canada) and local regulations for towing must be
followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage
your vehicle. Towing instructions are available
from a NISSAN dealer. Local service operators
are generally familiar with the applicable laws
an ...
   	</p>
    [303] => <p><a href="towing_recommended_by_nissan-303.html"><span>Towing recommended by NISSAN</span></a><br>
   	
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed
with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or
place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION
&#9679; Never tow Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models with the front
wheels on the ground or four wheels on
the ground ( ...
   	</p>
    [304] => <p><a href="vehicle_recovery_freeing_a_stuck_vehicle_-304.html"><span>Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle)</span></a><br>
   	Pulling a stuck vehicle
WARNING
To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal
injury or death when recovering a stuck
vehicle:
&#9679; Contact a professional towing service
to recover the vehicle if you have any
questions regarding the recovery
procedure.
&#9679; Do not use the vehicle tie-down ...
   	</p>
    [306] => <p><a href="cleaning_exterior-306.html"><span>Cleaning exterior</span></a><br>
   	In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle,
it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your
vehicle as soon as you can:
&#9679; after a rainfall to prevent possible damage
from acid rain.
&#9679; after driving on coastal roads.
&#9679; whe ...
   	</p>
    [307] => <p><a href="washing-307.html"><span>Washing</span></a><br>
   	Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of
water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild
soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose
dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm
(never hot) water.
CAUTION
&#9679; Do not use car washes that use acid in
the detergent. Some car washes ...
   	</p>
    [308] => <p><a href="waxing-308.html"><span>Waxing</span></a><br>
   	Regular waxing protects the paint surface and
helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is
recommended to remove built-up wax residue
and to avoid a weathered appearance before
re-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the
proper product.

&#9679; Wax your vehicle on ...
   	</p>
    [311] => <p><a href="glass-311.html"><span>Glass</span></a><br>
   	
When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier
to clean if the high-mounted stop light (if so
equipped) is removed first.

Be careful when removing the high-mounted
stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the
high-mounted stop light wires.

To remove the high-mounted stop light:
1 Push ...
   	</p>
    [312] => <p><a href="aluminum_alloy_wheels_if_so_equipped_-312.html"><span>Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge dampened
in a mild soap solution, especially during
winter months in areas where road salt is used. If
not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.
CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid
staining or discoloring the wheels:
&#9679; Do not use a  ...
   	</p>
    [314] => <p><a href="tire_dressings-314.html"><span>Tire dressings</span></a><br>
   	dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to
the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rubber.

If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may
react with the coating and form a compound. This
compound may come off the tire while driving and
stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose ...
   	</p>
    [315] => <p><a href="cleaning_interior-315.html"><span>Cleaning interior</span></a><br>
   	Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior
trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum
cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and
leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened
in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a
dry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is requ ...
   	</p>
    [316] => <p><a href="air_fresheners-316.html"><span>Air fresheners</span></a><br>
   	Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect
the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener,
take the following precautions:
&#9679; Hanging-type air fresheners can cause permanent
discoloration when they contact vehicle
interior surfaces. Place the air freshener
in a location that a ...
   	</p>
    [317] => <p><a href="floor_mats-317.html"><span>Floor mats</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
To avoid potential pedal interference that
may result in a collision or injury:
&#9679; NEVER place a floor mat on top of another
floor mat in the driver front
position.
&#9679; Use only genuine NISSAN floor mats
specifically designed for use in your vehicle
model. See your NISSAN de ...
   	</p>
    [318] => <p><a href="seat_belts-318.html"><span>Seat belts</span></a><br>
   	The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them
with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.

Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade
before using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”
in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system” section of this manual.
W ...
   	</p>
    [321] => <p><a href="environmental_factors_influence_the_rate_of_corrosion-321.html"><span>Environmental factors influence the rate of corrosion</span></a><br>
   	Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle
body underside can accelerate corrosion.

Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside
the vehicle and should be removed for drying to
avoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of ...
   	</p>
    [322] => <p><a href="to_protect_your_vehicle_from_corrosion-322.html"><span>To protect your vehicle from corrosion</span></a><br>
   	&#9679; Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the
vehicle clean.
&#9679; Always check for minor damage to the paint
and repair it as soon as possible.
&#9679; Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors
open to avoid water accumulation.
&#9679; Check the underbody for accumulation of
sand,  ...
   	</p>
    [324] => <p><a href="maintenance_requirements-324.html"><span>Maintenance requirements</span></a><br>
   	Your NISSAN has been designed to have minimum
maintenance requirements with long service
intervals to save you both time and money.

However, some day-to-day and regular maintenance
is essential to maintain your NISSAN’s
good mechanical condition, as well as its emissions
and engine perform ...
   	</p>
    [325] => <p><a href="general_maintenance-325.html"><span>General maintenance</span></a><br>
   	During the normal day-to-day operation of the
vehicle, general maintenance should be performed
regularly as prescribed in this section. If
you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or
smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a
NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you
should notify  ...
   	</p>
    [326] => <p><a href="maintenance_precautions-326.html"><span>Maintenance precautions</span></a><br>
   	When performing any inspection or maintenance
work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent
serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to
the vehicle. The following are general precautions
which should be closely observed.
WARNING
&#9679; Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply
th ...
   	</p>
    [327] => <p><a href="engine_compartment_check_locations-327.html"><span>Engine compartment check locations</span></a><br>
   	
QR25DE engine
1. Power steering fluid reservoir
2. Engine coolant reservoir
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Brake fluid reservoir
5. Air cleaner
6. Fuse block/ Fusible links
7. Battery
8. Engine oil dipstick
9. Radiator cap
10. Drive belt location
11. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

VQ ...
   	</p>
    [328] => <p><a href="engine_cooling_system-328.html"><span>Engine cooling system</span></a><br>
   	The engine cooling system is filled at the factory
with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine
NISSAN Engine Coolant (blue) and 50% water
to provide year-round anti-freeze and coolant
protection. The anti-freeze solution contains rust
and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling
system ad ...
   	</p>
    [329] => <p><a href="checking_engine_coolant_level-329.html"><span>Checking engine coolant level</span></a><br>
   	
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when
the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below
the MIN level B , add coolant to the MAX level
A . If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant
level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If
there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill ...
   	</p>
    [330] => <p><a href="changing_engine_coolant-330.html"><span>Changing engine coolant</span></a><br>
   	A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.

The service procedure can be found in the
NISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheating.
WARNING
&#9679; To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the engin ...
   	</p>
    [332] => <p><a href="checking_engine_oil_level-332.html"><span>Checking engine oil level</span></a><br>
   	
QR25DE engine
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than
10 minutes for the oil to drain back into
the oil pan.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it cle ...
   	</p>
    [333] => <p><a href="changing_engine_oil-333.html"><span>Changing engine oil</span></a><br>
   	
QR25DE engine
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature, then turn it off.
3. Remove the oil filler cap A by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug
B . ...
   	</p>
    [334] => <p><a href="changing_engine_oil_filter-334.html"><span>Changing engine oil filter</span></a><br>
   	
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Turn the engine off.
3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter A .
4. Loosen the oil filter A with an oil filter
wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Then
remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

VQ35DE
CA ...
   	</p>
    [336] => <p><a href="power_steering_fluid-336.html"><span>Power steering fluid</span></a><br>
   	
Check the fluid level in the reservoir.

The fluid level should be checked when the fluid
is cold at fluid temperatures of 0 to 30&ordm;C (32 to
86&ordm;F). The fluid level can be checked with the
level gauge which is attached to the cap. To
check the fluid level, remove the cap. The fluid
 ...
   	</p>
    [337] => <p><a href="brake_fluid-337.html"><span>Brake fluid</span></a><br>
   	For further brake fluid specification information,
refer to “Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
WARNING
&#9679; Use only new fluid from a sealed container.

Old, inferior or contaminated
fluid may damage the ...
   	</p>
    [338] => <p><a href="windshield_washer_fluid-338.html"><span>Windshield-washer fluid</span></a><br>
   	
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
RESERVOIR
Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodically.

Add windshield-washer fluid when the low
windshield-washer fluid warning light comes on.

To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift
the cap off the reservoir and pour the windshieldwasher
 ...
   	</p>
    [339] => <p><a href="battery-339.html"><span>Battery</span></a><br>
   	&#9679; Keep the battery surface clean and dry.

Clean the battery with a solution of baking
soda and water.
&#9679; Make certain the terminal connections are
clean and securely tightened.
&#9679; If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or
longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery
ter ...
   	</p>
    [340] => <p><a href="variable_voltage_control_system-340.html"><span>Variable voltage control system</span></a><br>
   	
CAUTION
&#9679; Do not ground accessories directly to
the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass
the variable voltage control system
and the vehicle battery may not
charge completely.
&#9679; Use electrical accessories with the engine
running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.
Your ...
   	</p>
    [341] => <p><a href="drive_belt-341.html"><span>Drive belt</span></a><br>
   	
QR25DE eng
1. Crankshaft pulley
2. Drive belt Automatic tensioner
3. Water pump pulley
4. Alternator
5. Air conditioner
WARNING
Be sure the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF or LOCK position before servicing
drive belt. The engine could rotate
unexpectedly.
1. Visually inspect the be ...
   	</p>
    [342] => <p><a href="spark_plugs-342.html"><span>Spark plugs</span></a><br>
   	
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped A
spark plugs as frequently as conventional type
spark plugs because they last much longer. Follow
the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN
Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service
iridi ...
   	</p>
    [343] => <p><a href="air_cleaner-343.html"><span>Air cleaner</span></a><br>
   	
QR25DE
NOTE:
The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned
and reused.
Replace the air cleaner filter according to the
maintenance log shown in the “Warranty Information
and Maintenance Booklet.”
To remove the air cleaner filter:
&#9679; Unlatch the clips and move the air cleaner
cover ...
   	</p>
    [345] => <p><a href="cleaning-345.html"><span>Cleaning</span></a><br>
   	If your windshield is not clear after using the
windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters
when running, wax or other material may be on
the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer
fluid or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean
if beads do not form whe ...
   	</p>
    [346] => <p><a href="replacing-346.html"><span>Replacing</span></a><br>
   	
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
2 Push the release tab, then move the wiper
blade down the wiper arm to remove.
3 Remove the wiper blade.
4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper
arm until it clicks into place.
5. Rotate the w ...
   	</p>
    [349] => <p><a href="brake_pad_wear_indicators-349.html"><span>Brake pad wear indicators</span></a><br>
   	The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible
wear indicators. When a brake pad requires replacement,
a high pitched scraping or screeching
sound will be heard when the vehicle is in
motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the
brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes
checked as soon ...
   	</p>
    [350] => <p><a href="fuses-350.html"><span>Fuses</span></a><br>
   	
Two types of fuses are used. Type A is used in
the fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type
B is used in the passenger compartment fuse
box.

Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. They
are stored in the passenger compartment fuse
box.

Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com ...
   	</p>
    [351] => <p><a href="engine_compartment-351.html"><span>Engine compartment</span></a><br>
   	
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not come on,
check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are O ...
   	</p>
    [352] => <p><a href="passenger_compartment-352.html"><span>Passenger compartment</span></a><br>
   	
Fusible links
If the electrical equipment does not operate and
fuses are in good condition, check the fusible
links. If any of these fusible links are melted,
replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts.
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than specified on the
fuse bo ...
   	</p>
    [353] => <p><a href="battery_replacement-353.html"><span>Battery replacement</span></a><br>
   	CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to swallow
the battery or removed parts.
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as follows:
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent
Key.
2. Insert a small screwdriver A into the slit B
of the corner and twist it  ...
   	</p>
    [355] => <p><a href="headlights-355.html"><span>Headlights</span></a><br>
   	Replacing the xenon headlight bulb (if
so equipped)
WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE
When xenon headlights are on, they produce
a high voltage. To prevent an electric
shock, never attempt to modify or disassemble.

Always have your xenon headlights
replaced at a NISSAN dealer. For
additional informati ...
   	</p>
    [358] => <p><a href="exterior_and_interior_lights-358.html"><span>Exterior and interior lights</span></a><br>
   	
*1 Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest 
parts information.
*2 See a NISSAN dealer for assistance.

1. Front map light
2. Headlamp assembly
3. Park/ Turn signal light
4. Fog light (if so equipped)/ Day time
running light (Canada only)
5. Step light
6.  ...
   	</p>
    [360] => <p><a href="tire_pressure-360.html"><span>Tire pressure</span></a><br>
   	Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It
monitors tire pressure of all tires except
the spare. When the low tire pressure
warning light is lit and the “Tire Pressure
Low - Add Air” warning appears in the
vehicle i ...
   	</p>
    [361] => <p><a href="tire_labeling-361.html"><span>Tire labeling</span></a><br>
   	
Example
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information identifies
and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The ...
   	</p>
    [362] => <p><a href="types_of_tires-362.html"><span>Types of tires</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
&#9679; When changing or replacing tires, be
sure all four tires are of the same type
(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and
construction. A NISSAN dealer may be
able to help you with information about
tire type, size, speed rating and
availability.
&#9679; Replacement tires may have ...
   	</p>
    [363] => <p><a href="tire_chains-363.html"><span>Tire chains</span></a><br>
   	CAUTION
Only certain SAE class “S” tire chains can
be used on this vehicle. Using the wrong
Class “S” chains on this vehicle will cause
damage to the vehicle. If you plan to use
tire chains/cables, you should use a tire
chain that meets the minimum clearances
for your vehicle.

Use  ...
   	</p>
    [364] => <p><a href="changing_wheels_and_tires-364.html"><span>Changing wheels and tires</span></a><br>
   	
Tire rotation
NISSAN recommends rotating the tires
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this manual for tire replacing
procedures.
As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.

Wheel ...
   	</p>
    [366] => <p><a href="capacities_and_recommended_fuel_lubricants-366.html"><span>Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants</span></a><br>
   	The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may 
be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure
described in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the 
proper refill capacity.

*1: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil fil ...
   	</p>
    [367] => <p><a href="fuel_recommendation-367.html"><span>Fuel recommendation</span></a><br>
   	Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number
(Research octane number 91).
CAUTION
&#9679; Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect the
warranty coverage.
&#9679; Under no ...
   	</p>
    [368] => <p><a href="engine_oil_and_oil_filter_recommendations-368.html"><span>Engine oil and oil filter recommendations</span></a><br>
   	
VQ35DE engine mod
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality
and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory
engine life and performance. See “Capacities
and recommended fuel/lubricants” earlier in this
section. NISSAN recommends the use of an
energy  ...
   	</p>
    [369] => <p><a href="air_conditioner_system_refrigerant_and_oil_recommendations-369.html"><span>Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations</span></a><br>
   	The air conditioner system in your NISSAN
vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant
HFC-134a (R-134a) and NISSAN A/C
system oil Type S or the exact equivalents.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil will
cause severe damage to the air conditioning
system and will require the repl ...
   	</p>
    [374] => <p><a href="when_traveling_or_registering_your_vehicle_in_another_country-374.html"><span>When traveling or registering your vehicle in another country</span></a><br>
   	When planning to drive your NISSAN vehicle
in another country, you should first find
out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle’s
engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low
may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles
must be operated with unleaded gasoline. The ...
   	</p>
    [385] => <p><a href="terms-385.html"><span>Terms</span></a><br>
   	It is important to familiarize yourself with
the following terms before loading your
vehicle:
&#9679; Curb Weight (actual weight of your
vehicle) - vehicle weight including:
standard and optional equipment, fluids,
emergency tools, and spare tire
assembly. This weight does not include
passen ...
   	</p>
    [386] => <p><a href="vehicle_load_capacity-386.html"><span>Vehicle load capacity</span></a><br>
   	Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle
shown as “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo” on the Tire and
Loading Information label. Do not exceed
the number of occupants shown as
“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Loading
Information label.

To get “the combined weight of ...
   	</p>
    [387] => <p><a href="loading_tips-387.html"><span>Loading tips</span></a><br>
   	&#9679; The GVW must not exceed GVWR
or GAWR as specified on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
&#9679; Do not load the front and rear axle to
the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the
GVWR.
WARNING
&#9679; Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent it
from sliding ...
   	</p>
    [388] => <p><a href="measurement_of_weights-388.html"><span>Measurement of weights</span></a><br>
   	Secure loose items to prevent weight
shifts that could affect the balance of your
vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive
to a scale and weigh the front and the rear
wheels separately to determine axle
loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed
either of the gross axle weight ratings
( ...
   	</p>
    [389] => <p><a href="towing_a_trailer-389.html"><span>Towing a trailer</span></a><br>
   	Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.
FLAT TOWING
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground is sometimes called flat towing. This
method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle
behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor
home.
CAUTION
&#9679; Failure to follow these guideli ...
   	</p>
    [390] => <p><a href="uniform_tire_quality_grading-390.html"><span>Uniform tire quality grading</span></a><br>
   	DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality
Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to these
grades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200  ...
   	</p>
    [391] => <p><a href="emission_control_system_warranty-391.html"><span>Emission control system warranty</span></a><br>
   	Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following
emission warranties:
For USA
1. Emission Defects Warranty
2. Emissions Performance Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.

If you  ...
   	</p>
    [392] => <p><a href="reporting_safety_defects-392.html"><span>Reporting safety defects</span></a><br>
   	For USA
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could
cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an inv ...
   	</p>
    [393] => <p><a href="readiness_for_inspection_maintenance_i_m_test-393.html"><span>Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test</span></a><br>
   	Due to legal requirements in some states and
Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be required
to be in what is called the “ready condition”
for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of
the emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it
is driven through c ...
   	</p>
    [394] => <p><a href="event_data_recorders_edr_-394.html"><span>Event Data Recorders (EDR)</span></a><br>
   	This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR
is  ...
   	</p>
    [395] => <p><a href="owner_us_manual_service_manual_order_information-395.html"><span>Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information</span></a><br>
   	Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this model
year and prior can be purchased. A genuine
NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of
service and repair information for your vehicle.

This manual is the same one used by the factorytrained
technicians working at NISSAN dealerships.

Genuine NI ...
   	</p>
    [398] => <p><a href="how_to_use_this_manual-398.html"><span>How to use this manual</span></a><br>
   	Description 
This volume explains “Removal, Disassembly, Installation, Inspection and 
Adjustment” and “Trouble Diagnoses”.
Terms
• The captions WARNING and CAUTION warn you of steps that must be followed to 
prevent personal injury
and/or damage to some part of the vehicle.

WARNI ...
   	</p>
    [399] => <p><a href="how_to_follow_trouble_diagnoses-399.html"><span>How to follow trouble diagnoses</span></a><br>
   	Description 
NOTICE:
Trouble diagnoses indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems 
effectively. Observe the following
instructions before diagnosing.

• Before performing trouble diagnoses, read the “Work Flow” in each section.

• After repairs, re-check that the problem  ...
   	</p>
    [400] => <p><a href="how_to_read_wiring_diagrams-400.html"><span>How to read wiring diagrams</span></a><br>
   	Connector symbols  
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal 
side.

• Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by
a single line and followed by the direction mark.

• Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by
a doubl ...
   	</p>
    [404] => <p><a href="terminology-404.html"><span>Terminology</span></a><br>
   	SAE J1930 Terminology List
All emission related terms used in this publication in accordance with SAE 
J1930 are listed. Accordingly, new
terms, new acronyms/abbreviations and old terms are listed in the following 
chart.




***: Not applicable ...
   	</p>
    [405] => <p><a href="features_of_new_model-405.html"><span>Features of new model</span></a><br>
   	IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
Model Variation - Sedan

Model Variation - Coupe 

Identification Number - Sedan 

1. Vehicle identification number (under
carpet on cross member)
2. Emission control information label
3. Air Conditioner specification label
4. Vehicle identification number plate ...
   	</p>
    [407] => <p><a href="precautions-407.html"><span>Precautions</span></a><br>
   	Description
Observe the following precautions to ensure safe and proper servicing. These 
precautions are not
described in each individual section.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot;
and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;  
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR ...
   	</p>
    [408] => <p><a href="lifting_point-408.html"><span>Lifting point</span></a><br>
   	Special Service Tool
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special 
service tools illustrated here.

CAUTION:
• Every time the vehicle is lifted up, maintain the complete vehicle curb 
condition.

• Since the vehicle's center of gravity changes when removing main ...
   	</p>
    [409] => <p><a href="tow_truck_towing-409.html"><span>Tow truck towing</span></a><br>
   	Tow Truck Towing  
CAUTION:
• Never tow a CVT model with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the 
ground. This may
cause serious and expensive damage to the transaxle. If it is necessary to tow 
the vehicle with the
rear wheels raised, always use towing dollies under the front whe ...
   	</p>
    [411] => <p><a href="service_information_for_electrical_incident-411.html"><span>Service information for electrical
incident</span></a><br>
   	Work Flow


Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
• Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.

• Install only parts specified for a vehicle.

• Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of 
the component parts.

• Do not apply excessi ...
   	</p>
    [412] => <p><a href="consult_iii_checking_system-412.html"><span>Consult-iii checking system</span></a><br>
   	Description  
• When CONSULT-III is connected with a data link connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control
unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic
tests.
1 : Hood release handle
2 : Data link connector

• Refer to “CONSU ...
   	</p>
    [414] => <p><a href="precaution-414.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
 ...
   	</p>
    [415] => <p><a href="preparation-415.html"><span>Preparation</span></a><br>
   	Special Service Tool
The actual shapes of the Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of the 
special service tools illustrated here.



Commercial Service Tool


 ...
   	</p>
    [416] => <p><a href="function_diagnosis-416.html"><span>Function diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting - Engine Noise

Use the Chart Below to Help You Find the Cause
of the Symptom
1. Locate the area where noise occurs.

2. Confirm the type of noise.

3. Specify the operating condition of engine.

4. Check specified ...
   	</p>
    [418] => <p><a href="spark_plug-418.html"><span>Spark plug</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation



1. Ignition coil

2. Spark plug

3. Rocker cover

REMOVAL

1. Remove the ignition coil. Refer to EM-35, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot;.

2. Remove the spark plug with a suitable spark plug wrench.



INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

• Do not use a wir ...
   	</p>
    [419] => <p><a href="drive_belts-419.html"><span>Drive belts</span></a><br>
   	Checking Drive Belts

WARNING:
Inspect the drive belt only when the engine is stopped.

• Make sure that the stamp mark of drive belt auto-tensioner is within the 
usable range.

NOTE:
• Check the drive belt auto-tensioner indicator (notch) when the engine is cold.

• When the new d ...
   	</p>
    [420] => <p><a href="air_cleaner_filter-420.html"><span>Air cleaner filter</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Air duct hose
2. Air cleaner filter
3. Air cleaner case (front)
4. Front air duct
5. Air cleaner mounting bracket
6. Air cleaner case (rear)
7. Mass air flow sensor
A. To electric throttle control actuator
B. Air cleaner case side clips
CHANGING THE AIR CLEANE ...
   	</p>
    [421] => <p><a href="camshaft_valve_clearance-421.html"><span>Camshaft valve clearance</span></a><br>
   	Camshaft valve clearance
• Perform this inspection as follows after removal, installation, or 
replacement of the camshaft or any valverelated
parts, or if there are any unusual engine conditions due to changes in valve 
clearance over time
(starting, idling, and/or noise).

1. Warm up the  ...
   	</p>
    [422] => <p><a href="compression_pressure-422.html"><span>Compression pressure</span></a><br>
   	CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE
1. Warm up the engine to full operating temperature.

2. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-550, &quot;Inspection&quot; (California), 
EC-1038, &quot;Inspection&quot; (Except California).

3. Remove the ignition coil and spark plug from each cylinder.

Refer ...
   	</p>
    [424] => <p><a href="air_cleaner_and_air_duct-424.html"><span>Air cleaner and air duct</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Air duct hose
2. Front air duct
3. Air cleaner mounting bracket
4. Air cleaner assembly
5. Mass air flow sen
A. To electric throttle control actuator
REMOVAL
1. Remove front air duct.

2. Disconnect the air duct hose clamps at the electric throttle control act ...
   	</p>
    [425] => <p><a href="intake_manifold-425.html"><span>Intake manifold</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Intake manifold
2. Rubber seal
3. Intake manifold adapter
4. Gasket
5. Electric throttle control actuator
6. Rubber seal
7. PCV hose
8. EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
9. EVAP hose
REMOVAL
WARNING:
To avoid the danger of being scalded, nev ...
   	</p>
    [426] => <p><a href="exhaust_manifold_and_three_way_catalyst-426.html"><span>Exhaust manifold and three way
catalyst</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Exhaust manifold cover (upper)
2. Exhaust manifold stay
3. Manifold yoke (type B)
4. Manifold yoke (type A)
5. Exhaust manifold cover (lower)
6.. Exhaust manifold and three way catalyst
assembly
7. &nbsp;Exhaust manifold gasket
8. Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
 ...
   	</p>
    [427] => <p><a href="oil_pan_and_oil_strainer-427.html"><span>Oil pan and oil strainer</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Oil level gauge guide
2. Oil pan, upper
3. Cylinder block
4. Oil filter
5. Oil strainer
6. Drain plug
7. Oil pan, lower
8. Rear plate cover
9. O-ring
A. To oil pan, lower
REMOVAL
WARNING:
To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the engine oil when ...
   	</p>
    [429] => <p><a href="fuel_injector_and_fuel_tube-429.html"><span>Fuel injector and fuel tube</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Fuel tube protector
2. Fuel tube
3. Upper O-ring (black)
4. Clip
5. Fuel injector
6. Lower O-ring (green)
7. Intake manifold adapter
A. Follow installation procedure
CAUTION:
• Apply new engine oil before installing the parts, as shown above.

• Do not r ...
   	</p>
    [430] => <p><a href="rocker_cover-430.html"><span>Rocker cover</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Oil filler cap
2. Rocker cover
3. Rocker cover gasket
A. Follow installation for tightening steps
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. Refer to PG-68, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot; (Coupe models) or
PG-139, &quot;Removal and Installation& ...
   	</p>
    [431] => <p><a href="camshaft-431.html"><span>Camshaft</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation  

1. Camshaft bracket (No.1)
2. Washer
3. Front cover (partial view)
4. Chain guide
5. Chain tensioner
6. O-ring(s)
7. Chain tensioner spring
8. Chain tensioner plunger
9. IVT control solenoid valve
10. IVT control cover
11. Camshaft sprocket (EXH)
12. Camshaft ...
   	</p>
    [432] => <p><a href="timing_chain-432.html"><span>Timing chain</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. O-rings
2. Camshaft sprocket (INT)
3. Camshaft sprocket (EXH)
4. Chain tensioner
5. Spring
6. Chain tensioner plunger
7. Timing chain slack guide
8. Timing chain
9. Front cover
10. Chain guide
11. IVT solenoid valve
12. IVT cover
13. Crankshaft pulley bolt
 ...
   	</p>
    [433] => <p><a href="oil_seal-433.html"><span>Oil seal</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal 
REMOVAL
1. Remove camshaft. Refer to EM-41, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot;.

2. Remove valve lifter. Refer to EM-41, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot;.

3. Rotate crankshaft, and set piston whose oil seal is to removed to top dead 
center.  ...
   	</p>
    [434] => <p><a href="cylinder_head-434.html"><span>Cylinder head</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation  

1. Cylinder head
2. Cylinder head gasket
3. Cylinder head bolt
A. Follow installation procedure
REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine and transaxle assembly. Refer to EM-72, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;.

2. Remove the timing chain. Refer to EM-52, &quot;Removal ...
   	</p>
    [436] => <p><a href="cylinder_block-436.html"><span>Cylinder block</span></a><br>
   	Disassembly and Assembly 

1. Cylinder block
2. O-ring
3. Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
4. Knock sensor
5. Cylinder block heater (if equipped)
6. Lower cylinder block
7. Lower cylinder block bolt
8. Snap ring
9. Connecting rod
10. Connecting rod bearing
11. Connecting rod bearing cap
 ...
   	</p>
    [437] => <p><a href="how_to_select_piston_and_bearing-437.html"><span>How to select piston and bearing</span></a><br>
   	DESCRIPTION

*For the service parts, the grade for fitting cannot be selected between a 
piston pin and a connecting rod.

(Only 0 grade is available.) The information at the shipment from the plant is 
described as a reference.

• The identification grade stamped on each part is the grade ...
   	</p>
    [438] => <p><a href="service_data_and_specifications_sds_-438.html"><span>Service data and specifications
(SDS)</span></a><br>
   	Standard and Limit
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

DRIVE BELTS

CYLINDER HEAD



* Approximately 80°C (176°F)
Available Valve Lifter


Valve Spring





CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING


CYLINDER BLOCK


PISTON, PISTON RING, AND PISTON PIN
Available Piston

Piston Ring

CONNECT ...
   	</p>
    [439] => <p><a href="precaution-439.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [441] => <p><a href="function_diagnosis-441.html"><span>Function diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting - Engine Noise

1. Camshaft bearing noise
2. Piston pin noise
3. Piston slap noise
4. Main bearing noise
5. Connecting rod bearing noise
6. Drive belt noise (Sticking/Slipping)
7. Drive belt noise (Slipping)
8. Wate ...
   	</p>
    [443] => <p><a href="spark_plug-443.html"><span>Spark plug</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Ignition coil
2. Spark plug
3. Rocker cover RH
4. Rocker cover LH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the ignition coil. Refer to EM-145, &quot;Removal and Installation LH&quot; 
and EM-145, &quot;Removal and
Installation RH&quot;.

2. Remove the spark plug with a suitable spar ...
   	</p>
    [444] => <p><a href="drive_belts-444.html"><span>Drive belts</span></a><br>
   	Checking Drive Belts

1. Power steering pump
2. Drive belt auto-tensioner
3. Crankshaft
4. Idler pulley
5. A/C compressor pulley
6. Generator pulley
7. Idler pulley
8. Drive belt
A. Indicator
B. Possible use range (for new belt)
C. Belt replacement
WARNING:
Inspect and check the drive  ...
   	</p>
    [445] => <p><a href="air_cleaner_filter-445.html"><span>Air cleaner filter</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Air duct hose
2. Duct sub-cover
3. Front air duct
4. Air cleaner case (lower)
5. Grommets
6. Air cleaner case mounting bracket
7. Bracket
8. Air cleaner filter
9. Air cleaner case (upper)
10. Mass air flow sensor
A. To electric throttle control actuator
B. A ...
   	</p>
    [446] => <p><a href="camshaft_valve_clearance-446.html"><span>Camshaft valve clearance</span></a><br>
   	Valve Clearance
CHECKING
• Perform inspection as follows after removal, installation or replacement
of camshaft or valve related parts, or if there is unusual
engine conditions regarding valve clearance.

Check valve clearance while engine is cold and not running.

1. Remove the air duct w ...
   	</p>
    [447] => <p><a href="compression_pressure-447.html"><span>Compression pressure</span></a><br>
   	On-Vehicle Service
CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.

2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.

3. Release fuel pressure and leave the fuel pump electrically disconnected.

Refer to EC-1579, &quot;Inspection&quot;.

4. Remove all six  ...
   	</p>
    [449] => <p><a href="air_cleaner_and_air_duct-449.html"><span>Air cleaner and air duct</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Air duct hose
2. Duct sub-cover
3. Front air duct
4. Air cleaner assembly
5. Grommets
6. Air cleaner mounting bracket
7. Bracket
8. Mass air flow sensor
A. To electric throttle control actuator
REMOVAL
1. Remove front air duct.

2. Disconnect the tube clamp ...
   	</p>
    [450] => <p><a href="intake_manifold_collector-450.html"><span>Intake manifold collector</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Power valve (RH)
2. Intake manifold collector
3. Gasket
4. Power valve (LH)
5. Electric throttle control actuator
REMOVAL
WARNING:
• To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the coolant when the engine 
is hot.

• The gasket for intake manifold c ...
   	</p>
    [451] => <p><a href="intake_manifold-451.html"><span>Intake manifold</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Intake manifold
2. Gasket
A. Follow installation procedure
REMOVAL
WARNING:
To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the coolant when the engine is 
hot.
1. Remove the engine cover with power tool.

2. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-1579, &quo ...
   	</p>
    [452] => <p><a href="exhaust_manifold_and_three_way_catalyst-452.html"><span>Exhaust manifold and three way
catalyst</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Exhaust manifold heat shield (RH)
2. Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1)
3. Exhaust manifold (RH)
4. Gaskets
5. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1)
6. Three way catalyst (manifold) (bank
1)
7. Three way catalyst (manifold) (bank
2)
8. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (ba ...
   	</p>
    [453] => <p><a href="oil_pan_and_oil_strainer-453.html"><span>Oil pan and oil strainer</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Oil pan baffle
2. O-ring
3. Gasket
4. Oil pressure switch
5. Oil cooler gasket
6. Oil cooler
7. Oil cooler connection
8. Oil filter
9. Lower oil pan
10. Oil strainer
11. Rear plate cover
12. Upper oil pan
REMOVAL
WARNING:
• You should not remove the oil ...
   	</p>
    [454] => <p><a href="ignition_coil-454.html"><span>Ignition coil</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 

1. Ignition coil
2. Spark plug
3. Rocker cover (RH)
4. Rocker cover (LH)
Removal and Installation LH
REMOVAL
1. Remove engine room cover.

2. Disconnect ignition coil connector.

3. Remove the ignition coil.
CAUTION:
Never shock ignition coil.
INSTALLATION
Installatio ...
   	</p>
    [455] => <p><a href="fuel_injector_and_fuel_tube-455.html"><span>Fuel injector and fuel tube</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Fuel feed hose
2. Quick connector cap
3. Fuel tube
4. O-ring
5. Fuel damper
6. Fuel damper cap
7. Clip
8. O-ring (black)
9. Fuel injector
10. O-ring (green)
A. Follow installation procedure
CAUTION:
• Apply new engine oil when installing the parts as spec ...
   	</p>
    [456] => <p><a href="rocker_cover-456.html"><span>Rocker cover</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 

1. Rocker cover (RH)
2. Rocker cover gasket (RH)
3. Rocker cover gasket (LH)
4. Rocker cover (LH)
A. Follow installation procedure

Removal and Installation LH 
REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine cover, using power tool.

2. Remove front air duct.

3. Remove blow by hose from ...
   	</p>
    [457] => <p><a href="front_timing_chain_case-457.html"><span>Front timing chain case</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Gasket
2. IVT control valve cover RH
3. IVT valve RH
4. IVT valve LH
5. Water pump cover
6. IVT control valve cover LH
7. Crankshaft pulley
8. Front oil seal
9. Front timing chain case
A. Follow installation procedure
NOTE:
• This section describes procedu ...
   	</p>
    [458] => <p><a href="timing_chain-458.html"><span>Timing chain</span></a><br>
   	Component 

1. Timing chain tensioner
2. Internal chain guide
3. Timing chain tensioner
4. Camshaft sprocket (EXH)
5. Timing chain (secondary)
6. Timing chain (primary)
7. Camshaft sprocket (INT)
8. Camshaft sprocket (INT)
9. Timing chain (secondary)
10. Camshaft sprocket (EXH)
11. Slack ...
   	</p>
    [459] => <p><a href="rear_timing_chain_case-459.html"><span>Rear timing chain case</span></a><br>
   	Component

1. Timing chain tensioner
2. Internal chain guide
3. Timing chain tensioner
4. Camshaft sprocket (EXH)
5. Timing chain (secondary)
6. Timing chain (primary)
7. Camshaft sprocket (INT)
8. Camshaft sprocket (INT)
9. Timing chain (secondary)
10. Camshaft sprocket (EXH)
11. Slack  ...
   	</p>
    [460] => <p><a href="camshaft-460.html"><span>Camshaft</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation 

1. Camshaft position sensor bracket (RH)
2. Camshaft brackets
3. No. 1 camshaft bracket (RH)
4. Camshaft (EXH) RH
5. Camshaft (INT) RH
6. Cylinder head (RH)
7. Cylinder head (LH)
8. Camshaft (EXH) LH
9. Camshaft (INT) LH
10. No. 1 camshaft bracket (LH)
11. Cams ...
   	</p>
    [461] => <p><a href="oil_seal-461.html"><span>Oil seal</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal 
REMOVAL
1. Turn crankshaft until the cylinder requiring new oil seals is at TDC. This 
will prevent valve from dropping
into cylinder.
CAUTION:
When rotating crankshaft, be careful to avoid scarring the front cover with the 
timing chain.
2. Remove ...
   	</p>
    [462] => <p><a href="cylinder_head-462.html"><span>Cylinder head</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Cylinder head bolt
2. Cylinder head
3. Cylinder head gasket
4. Engine block
A. Follow installation procedure
REMOVAL
1. Remove the intake and exhaust camshafts. Refer to EM-177, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;.

2. Remove the coolant outlet housing. Refe ...
   	</p>
    [463] => <p><a href="removal_and_installation-463.html"><span>Removal and installation</span></a><br>
   	ENGINE ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation

1. Torque rod
2. RH engine mounting insulator
3. RH engine mount support
4. Front engine mounting bracket
5. Front engine mounting insulator
6. RH engine mount bracket
7. Lower torque rod bracket
8. Lower torque rod
9. Rear engine mounting insulat ...
   	</p>
    [464] => <p><a href="disassembly_and_assembly-464.html"><span>Disassembly and assembly</span></a><br>
   	CYLINDER BLOCK
Disassembly and Assembly 

1. Drive plate reinforcement (CVT)
2. Drive plate (CVT), Flywheel (M/T)
3. Rear oil seal retainer
4. Knock sensor upper main bearing
5. Cylinder block
6. Thrust bearing (upper)
7. Main bearing (upper)
8. Crankshaft
9. Crankshaft key
10. Thrust be ...
   	</p>
    [465] => <p><a href="service_data_and_specifications_sds_-465.html"><span>Service data and specifications
(SDS)</span></a><br>
   	SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS)
General Specification 

Drive Belt

Spark Plug 

Intake Manifold 

Exhaust Manifold 

Camshaft


VALVE LIFTER

VALVE CLEARANCE

AVAILABLE VALVE LIFTER


Cylinder Head 

VALVE DIMENSIONS

VALVE OIL SEAL

VALVE GUIDE


VALVE SEAT

 ...
   	</p>
    [467] => <p><a href="precaution-467.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT 
PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [469] => <p><a href="function_diagnosis-469.html"><span>Function diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Lubrication Circuit

Schematic

1. Oil pan
2. Oil strainer
3. Oil pump
4. Regulator valve
5. Oil filter
6. Relief valve (Built in oil filter)
7. Oil cooler
8. Bypass
9. Main gallery
10. Main bearing
11. Timing chain and balancer unit timing
chain oil jet
12. Conne ...
   	</p>
    [471] => <p><a href="engine_oil-471.html"><span>Engine oil</span></a><br>
   	Inspection 
OIL LEVEL
• Before starting the engine, check the oil level. If the engine is
already started, stop it and allow 10 minutes before checking.

• Check that the oil level is within the range on the dipstick.

• If it is out of range, add oil as necessary. Refer to LU-9, &quot; ...
   	</p>
    [472] => <p><a href="oil_filter-472.html"><span>Oil filter</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the oil filter using Tool.
Tool number : KV10115801 (J-38956)
WARNING:
• Be careful not to get burned, the engine and engine oil
may be hot.
CAUTION:
• When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any oil
leakage or spillage.

• Do not all ...
   	</p>
    [474] => <p><a href="oil_pump-474.html"><span>Oil pump</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation 
• The oil pump is part of the front cover. For removal and installation of 
the oil pump, it is necessary to remove
and install the front cover. Refer to EM-52, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot;.
Disassembly and Assembly

1. Front cover
2. Outer rotor
3. Inner  ...
   	</p>
    [475] => <p><a href="oil_cooler-475.html"><span>Oil cooler</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Oil pressure switch
2. Oil cooler
3. Gasket
4. Water hose (outlet)
5. Water hose (inlet)
A. To water control valve housing
B. To heater pipe assembly
C. Hose clamp
D. Clip
WARNING:
Be careful not to get burned, engine coolant and engine oil may be hot.
CAUTI ...
   	</p>
    [478] => <p><a href="precaution-478.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [482] => <p><a href="engine_oil-482.html"><span>Engine oil</span></a><br>
   	Inspection
OIL LEVEL
NOTE:
• Before starting the engine, check the oil level. If the engine is
already started, stop it and allow 10 minutes before checking.

• Check that the oil level is within the range as indicated on the dipstick.

• If it is out of range, add oil as necessary. Re ...
   	</p>
    [483] => <p><a href="oil_filter-483.html"><span>Oil filter</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine undercover.

2. Remove the oil filter using Tool (A) as shown.
Tool number : KV10115801 (J-38956)
WARNING:
• Be careful not to get burned, the engine and engine oil
may be hot.
CAUTION:
• When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absor ...
   	</p>
    [485] => <p><a href="oil_pump-485.html"><span>Oil pump</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the timing chain. Refer to EM-163, &quot;Removal&quot;.

2. Remove oil pump assembly.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Disassembly and Assembly

1. Oil pump housing
2. Outer rotor
3. Inner rotor
4. Oil pump cover
5. ...
   	</p>
    [486] => <p><a href="oil_cooler-486.html"><span>Oil cooler</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Oil filter
2. Oil cooler bolt
3. Water pipe
4. Water hose
5. Oil cooler
6. O-ring
7. Oil pan
8. Water pipe
9. Relief valve
10. Water drain plug
11. Copper gasket
12. Water connector

WARNING:
Be careful not to get burned, engine coolant and engine oil may ...
   	</p>
    [489] => <p><a href="precaution-489.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [492] => <p><a href="cooling_system-492.html"><span>Cooling system</span></a><br>
   	Cooling Circuit

1. Thermostat
2. Water control valve
3. Water control valve housing (Water outlet)
4. Cylinder block (Thermostat housing)
5. Water inlet
6. Radiator
7. Water pump
8. Cylinder block
9. Cylinder head
A. Open
B. Closed
C. To electric throttle control
D. To oil cooler
E.  ...
   	</p>
    [494] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_maintenance-494.html"><span>On-vehicle maintenance</span></a><br>
   	ENGINE COOLANT
System Inspection 
• Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns 
could occur from high pressure
fluid escaping from the radiator.

• Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly push down and turn it a quarter turn 
to allow built-up pressure
to escap ...
   	</p>
    [496] => <p><a href="radiator-496.html"><span>Radiator</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Radiator
2. CVT oil cooler hose (if equipped)
3. Radiator hose (upper)
4. Radiator hose (lower)
5. Cooling fan
6. Reservoir tank
7. Reservoir hose
8. Radiator filler cap
9. Clamps
A. To CVT (if equipped)
B. To water outlet
C. To water inlet
WARNING:
Never  ...
   	</p>
    [497] => <p><a href="cooling_fan-497.html"><span>Cooling fan</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation 

1. Fan blade
2. Fan shroud and motor assembly
REMOVAL
1. Drain engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to CO-12, &quot;Changing Engine 
Coolant&quot;.
CAUTION:
Perform when engine is cold.
2. Remove air cleaner duct assembly. Refer to EM-25, &quot;Removal and 
In ...
   	</p>
    [498] => <p><a href="water_pump-498.html"><span>Water pump</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Water pump
2. Gaskets
3. Water pump housing
4. Water pipe
5. O-ring
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur 
from high pressure
coolant escaping from the radiator.

CAUTION:
• When removing water pump assemb ...
   	</p>
    [499] => <p><a href="thermostat_and_thermostat_housing-499.html"><span>Thermostat and thermostat housing</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Thermostat
2. O-ring
3. Engine coolant inlet
4. Water control valve
5. Gasket
6. Engine coolant outlet
7. Copper washer
8. Engine coolant temperature sensor
9. Heater pipe
A. To electric throttle control
B. To oil cooler
C. To heater
D. To heater
E. To ele ...
   	</p>
    [500] => <p><a href="water_control_valve-500.html"><span>Water control valve</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Thermostat
2. O-ring
3. Engine coolant inlet
4. Water control valve
5. Gasket
6. Engine coolant outlet
7. Copper washer
8. Engine coolant temperature sensor
9. Heater pipe
A. To electric throttle control
B. To oil cooler
C. To heater
D. To heater
E. To ele ...
   	</p>
    [503] => <p><a href="precaution-503.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [508] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_maintenance-508.html"><span>On-vehicle maintenance</span></a><br>
   	ENGINE COOLANT
System Inspection
WARNING:
• Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could 
occur from high pressure
coolant escaping from the radiator.

• Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly push down and turn it a quarter turn 
to allow built-up pressur ...
   	</p>
    [510] => <p><a href="radiator-510.html"><span>Radiator</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Radiator
2. CVT oil cooler hose (if equipped)
3. Radiator hose (upper)
4. Radiator hose (lower)
5. Cooling fan
6. Reservoir tank
7. Reservoir hose
8. Radiator filler cap
9. Clamps
A. To CVT (if equipped)
B. To water outlet
C. To water inlet
WARNING:
Never  ...
   	</p>
    [511] => <p><a href="cooling_fan-511.html"><span>Cooling fan</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Fan blade
2. Fan shroud and motor assembly
REMOVAL
1. Drain engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to CO-35, &quot;Changing Engine 
Coolant&quot;.
CAUTION:
Perform when engine is cold.
2. Remove CVT control module (if equipped). Refer to TM-430, &quot;Removal a ...
   	</p>
    [512] => <p><a href="water_pump-512.html"><span>Water pump</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Water pump
2. O-rings
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur 
from high pressure
coolant escaping from the radiator.
CAUTION:
• When removing water pump assembly, be careful not to get coolant on drive 
belt.
 ...
   	</p>
    [513] => <p><a href="thermostat_and_thermostat_housing-513.html"><span>Thermostat and thermostat housing</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Gasket
2. Thermostat assembly
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur 
from high pressure
coolant escaping from the radiator.
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Perform when engine is cool.
1. Drain engine coolant from the radiat ...
   	</p>
    [514] => <p><a href="water_outlet_and_water_piping-514.html"><span>Water outlet and water piping</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Water outlet
2. Gasket
3. O-ring
4. Heater pipe
5. Water connector
6. Water bypass pipe
7. Engine coolant temperature sensor
8. Washer
A. To electric throttle control actuator
B. To heater
C. To radiator
D. From heater or transmission oil cooler
(if equippe ...
   	</p>
    [518] => <p><a href="diagnosis_and_repair_work_flow-518.html"><span>Diagnosis and repair work flow</span></a><br>
   	Work Flow
OVERALL SEQUENCE

DETAILED FLOW
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the 
condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred) using the “Diagnostic Work Sheet”. (Refer to 
EC-22, &quot;Diagnostic Work
 ...
   	</p>
    [519] => <p><a href="inspection_and_adjustment-519.html"><span>Inspection and adjustment</span></a><br>
   	BASIC INSPECTION
&nbsp;Special Repair Requirement
1.INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related 
malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance.

2. Open engine hood and check the following:
- Harness connectors for improper connecti ...
   	</p>
    [520] => <p><a href="additional_service_when_replacing_control_unit-520.html"><span>Additional service when replacing control unit</span></a><br>
   	Description
When replacing ECM, this procedure must be performed.
Special Repair Requirement
1.PERFORM INITIALIZATION OF NATS SYSTEM AND REGISTRATION OF ALL NATS IGNITION 
KEY IDS
Refer to SEC-15, &quot;ECM RE-COMMUNICATING FUNCTION : Special Repair Requirement&quot; 
(Coupe) or SEC-
214, &qu ...
   	</p>
    [522] => <p><a href="ignition_timing-522.html"><span>Ignition timing</span></a><br>
   	Description 
This describes how to check the ignition timing. For the actual procedure, 
follow the instructions in “BASIC
INSPECTION”.
IGNITION TIMING : Special Repair Requirement
1.CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Attach timing light to No. 1 igniton coil (1) wire as shown.


2. Check ignitio ...
   	</p>
    [523] => <p><a href="vin_registration-523.html"><span>Vin registration</span></a><br>
   	Description 
VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be 
performed each time ECM is replaced.

NOTE:
Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection &amp; 
Maintenance (I/M)
VIN REGISTRATION : Special Repair Requirement
1.CHECK VIN
Check th ...
   	</p>
    [524] => <p><a href="accelerator_pedal_released_position_learning-524.html"><span>Accelerator pedal released position
learning</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is a function of ECM to learn 
the fully released position of the
accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output 
signal. It must be performed each
time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor ...
   	</p>
    [525] => <p><a href="throttle_valve_closed_position_learning-525.html"><span>Throttle valve closed position learning</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Description 
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is a function of ECM to learn the 
fully closed position of the throttle
valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be 
performed each time harness connector
of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is d ...
   	</p>
    [526] => <p><a href="idle_air_volume_learning-526.html"><span>Idle air volume learning</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Description 
Idle Air Volume Learning is a function of ECM to learn the idle air volume 
that keeps each engine idle speed
within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following 
conditions:
• Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.

• Id ...
   	</p>
    [527] => <p><a href="mixture_ratio_self_learning_value_clear-527.html"><span>Mixture ratio self-learning value
clear</span></a><br>
   	Description 
This describes how to erase the mixture ratio self-learning value. For the 
actual procedure, follow the instructions
in “Diagnosis Procedure”.
Special Repair Requirement
1.START

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CO ...
   	</p>
    [529] => <p><a href="engine_control_system-529.html"><span>Engine control system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description
ECM performs various controls such as fuel injection control and ignition 
timing control.
Component Parts Location 

1. Intake valve timing control solenoid
valve
2. Ignition coil (with power transistor)
and spark plug
3. Knock sensor,
Crankshaft posi ...
   	</p>
    [530] => <p><a href="multiport_fuel_injection_system-530.html"><span>Multiport fuel injection system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal 
conditions.

*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and ...
   	</p>
    [531] => <p><a href="electric_ignition_system-531.html"><span>Electric ignition system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description 
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and 
battery voltage.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Firing order: 1 - 3 - 4 - 2
The ignition tim ...
   	</p>
    [532] => <p><a href="air_conditioning_cut_control-532.html"><span>Air conditioning cut control</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description 
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.

*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and 
battery voltage.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system improves engine operation when  ...
   	</p>
    [533] => <p><a href="automatic_speed_control_device_ascd_-533.html"><span>Automatic speed control device
(ASCD)</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description 
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line
BASIC ASCD SYSTEM
Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions.

Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at 
predetermin ...
   	</p>
    [534] => <p><a href="can_communication-534.html"><span>Can communication</span></a><br>
   	System Description
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time 
application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex
communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error 
detection ability. Many electronic
control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and  ...
   	</p>
    [535] => <p><a href="cooling_fan_control-535.html"><span>Cooling fan control</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description 
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

*1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed 
and battery voltage.

*2: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ECM controls cooling fan speed correspondin ...
   	</p>
    [536] => <p><a href="evaporative_emission_system-536.html"><span>Evaporative emission system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING

1. Intake manifold collector
2. EVAP service port
3. EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
A. From next figure

1. EVAP control system pressure sensor
2. EVAP canister vent control valve
3. EVAP canister
A. To previous figu ...
   	</p>
    [537] => <p><a href="intake_valve_timing_control-537.html"><span>Intake valve timing control</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed 
operating angle of the intake
valve.

The ECM receives signals su ...
   	</p>
    [538] => <p><a href="tumble_control_valve_control-538.html"><span>Tumble control valve control</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description 
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and 
battery voltage.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Tumble control valve has a valve portion in the intake passage of each 
cylinder.

While idling and during low  ...
   	</p>
    [539] => <p><a href="on_board_diagnostic_obd_system-539.html"><span>On board diagnostic (OBD) system</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Description 
INTRODUCTION
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related 
to engine sensors or actuators.

The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:

The above information can be checked using procedures listed in  ...
   	</p>
    [541] => <p><a href="trouble_diagnosis_specification_value-541.html"><span>Trouble diagnosis - specification
value</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is 
displayed in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR”
mode of CONSULT-III during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When 
the value in “SPEC”
of “DATA MONITOR” mode is within the SP value, the En ...
   	</p>
    [542] => <p><a href="power_supply_and_ground_circuit-542.html"><span>Power supply and ground circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1.INSPECTION START
Start engine.

Is engine running?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 8.

NO &gt;&gt; GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON.

2. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and
ground.


Is the inspection result n ...
   	</p>
    [543] => <p><a href="u0101_can_comm_circuit-543.html"><span>U0101 Can comm circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time 
application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex
communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error 
detection ability. Many electronic
control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each co ...
   	</p>
    [544] => <p><a href="u0140_can_comm_circuit-544.html"><span>U0140 Can comm circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time 
application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex
communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error 
detection ability. Many electronic
control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each co ...
   	</p>
    [545] => <p><a href="u1001_can_comm_circuit-545.html"><span>U1001 Can comm circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time 
application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex
communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error 
detection ability. Many electronic
control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each c ...
   	</p>
    [546] => <p><a href="p0011_ivt_control-546.html"><span>P0011 IVT control</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
If DTC P0011 is displayed with DTC P0075, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for EC-362, &quot;DTC Logic&quot;.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn 
ignition switch OFF a ...
   	</p>
    [547] => <p><a href="p0031_p0032_a_f_sensor_1_heater-547.html"><span>P0031, P0032 A/F sensor 1 heater</span></a><br>
   	Description 
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding 
to the engine operating
condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element at the specified 
range.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITI ...
   	</p>
    [548] => <p><a href="p0037_p0038_ho2s2_heater-548.html"><span>P0037, P0038 HO2S2 heater</span></a><br>
   	Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater 
corresponding to the engine speed,
amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION

DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Con ...
   	</p>
    [549] => <p><a href="p0043_p0044_ho2s3_heater-549.html"><span>P0043, P0044 HO2S3 heater</span></a><br>
   	Description 
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 3 heater 
corresponding to the engine speed,
amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION

DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC C ...
   	</p>
    [550] => <p><a href="p0075_ivt_control_solenoid_valve-550.html"><span>P0075 IVT control solenoid valve</span></a><br>
   	Description
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF
pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM.

The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil
amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit
or stops oil flow.

The longer pulse wi ...
   	</p>
    [551] => <p><a href="p0101_maf_sensor-551.html"><span>P0101 maf sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the
hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced as ...
   	</p>
    [552] => <p><a href="p0102_p0103_maf_sensor-552.html"><span>P0102, P0103 maf sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the
hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced a ...
   	</p>
    [553] => <p><a href="p0112_p0113_iat_sensor-553.html"><span>P0112, P0113 iat sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor
(1). The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal
to the ECM.

The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the therm ...
   	</p>
    [554] => <p><a href="p0116_ect_sensor-554.html"><span>P0116 ect sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine
coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change i ...
   	</p>
    [555] => <p><a href="p0117_p0118_ect_sensor-555.html"><span>P0117, P0118 ECT sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine
coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change i ...
   	</p>
    [556] => <p><a href="p0122_p0123_tp_sensor-556.html"><span>P0122, P0123 TP sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description  
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.

The throttle position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a
kind of potentiometers which transform th ...
   	</p>
    [557] => <p><a href="p0125_ect_sensor-557.html"><span>P0125 ECT sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine
coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change i ...
   	</p>
    [558] => <p><a href="p0127_iat_sensor-558.html"><span>P0127 IAT sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor
(1). The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal
to the ECM.

The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the ther ...
   	</p>
    [559] => <p><a href="p0128_thermostat_function-559.html"><span>P0128 thermostat function</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
If DTC P0128 is displayed with DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 or P0304, first 
perform the trouble
diagnosis for DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304. Refer to EC-271, &quot;DTC 
Logic&quot;.

Engine coolant temperature has not risen enough to open the t ...
   	</p>
    [560] => <p><a href="p0130_a_f_sensor_1-560.html"><span>P0130 A/F sensor 1</span></a><br>
   	Description
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar one-cell limit current sensor.

The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is composed an electrode
layer, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.

The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and r ...
   	</p>
    [561] => <p><a href="p0131_a_f_sensor_1-561.html"><span>P0131 A/F sensor 1</span></a><br>
   	Description
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar one-cell limit current sensor.

The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is composed an electrode
layer, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.

The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and r ...
   	</p>
    [562] => <p><a href="p0132_a_f_sensor_1-562.html"><span>P0132 A/F sensor 1</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar one-cell limit current sensor.

The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is composed an electrode
layer, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.

The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and  ...
   	</p>
    [563] => <p><a href="p0133_a_f_sensor_1-563.html"><span>P0133 A/F sensor 1</span></a><br>
   	Description
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar one-cell limit current sensor.

The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is composed an electrode
layer, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.

The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and r ...
   	</p>
    [564] => <p><a href="p0137_ho2s2-564.html"><span>P0137 HO2S2</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),
monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.

Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal
from t ...
   	</p>
    [565] => <p><a href="p0138_ho2s2-565.html"><span>P0138 HO2S2</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),
monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.

Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal
from t ...
   	</p>
    [566] => <p><a href="p0139_ho2s2-566.html"><span>P0139 HO2S2</span></a><br>
   	Description
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),
monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.

Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal
from th ...
   	</p>
    [567] => <p><a href="p0143_ho2s3-567.html"><span>P0143 HO2S3</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The heated oxygen sensor 3, after HC adsorption catalyst (Under
floor), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.

This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage
from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.

Unde ...
   	</p>
    [568] => <p><a href="p0144_ho2s3-568.html"><span>P0144 HO2S3</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The heated oxygen sensor 3, after HC adsorption catalyst (Under
floor), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.

This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage
from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.

Unde ...
   	</p>
    [569] => <p><a href="p0145_ho2s3-569.html"><span>P0145 HO2S3</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The heated oxygen sensor 3, after HC adsorption catalyst (Under
floor), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.

This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage
from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.

Unde ...
   	</p>
    [570] => <p><a href="p0146_ho2s3-570.html"><span>P0146 HO2S3</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The heated oxygen sensor 3, after HC adsorption catalyst (Under
floor), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.

This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage
from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.

Unde ...
   	</p>
    [571] => <p><a href="p0171_fuel_injection_system_function-571.html"><span>P0171 fuel injection system function</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture 
ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the 
A/F sensors 1. The ECM calculates
the necessary compensation to correct th ...
   	</p>
    [572] => <p><a href="p0172_fuel_injection_system_function-572.html"><span>P0172 fuel injection system function</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture 
ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the 
A/F sensors 1. The ECM calculates
the necessary compensation to correct t ...
   	</p>
    [573] => <p><a href="p0181_ftt_sensor-573.html"><span>P0181 FTT sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature
inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from
the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature
input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in te ...
   	</p>
    [574] => <p><a href="p0182_p0183_ftt_sensor-574.html"><span>P0182, P0183 FTT sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature
inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from
the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature
input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in te ...
   	</p>
    [575] => <p><a href="p0222_p0223_tp_sensor-575.html"><span>P0222, P0223 TP sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.

The throttle position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a
kind of potentiometers which transform the ...
   	</p>
    [576] => <p><a href="p0300_p0301_p0302_p0303_p0304_misfire-576.html"><span>P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 misfire</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed 
fluctuates enough to cause the crankshaft
position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is 
occurring.

The misfire detection logic consists of the following  ...
   	</p>
    [577] => <p><a href="p0327_p0328_ks-577.html"><span>P0327, P0328 KS</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking 
using a piezoelectric element. A
knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. 
This pressure is converted into a
voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
DTC Logic
DTC DETEC ...
   	</p>
    [578] => <p><a href="p0335_ckp_sensor_pos_-578.html"><span>P0335 CKP sensor (POS)</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing
the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.

The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.

When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the ...
   	</p>
    [579] => <p><a href="p0340_cmp_sensor_phase_-579.html"><span>P0340 CMP sensor (phase)</span></a><br>
   	Description
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of
camshaft (INT) to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.

When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative,
the camshaft position sensor (PHAS ...
   	</p>
    [580] => <p><a href="p0420_three_way_catalyst_function-580.html"><span>P0420 three way catalyst function</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2.

A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity
will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2.

As oxygen storage  ...
   	</p>
    [581] => <p><a href="p0441_evap_control_system-581.html"><span>P0441 evap control system</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
If DTC P0441 is displayed with other DTC such as P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 or 
P2138, first perform
trouble diagnosis for other DTC.

In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during 
non-closed throttle conditions.

Purge vo ...
   	</p>
    [582] => <p><a href="p0442_evap_control_system-582.html"><span>P0442 evap control system</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
If DTC P0442 is displayed with DTC P0456, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC P0456. Refer to
EC-336, &quot;DTC Logic&quot;.
This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine intake 
manifold vacuum.

If pressure does not increase ...
   	</p>
    [583] => <p><a href="p0443_evap_canister_purge_volume_control_solenoid_valve-583.html"><span>P0443 evap canister purge volume
control solenoid valve</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister.

The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount o ...
   	</p>
    [584] => <p><a href="p0444_p0445_evap_canister_purge_volume_control_solenoid_valve-584.html"><span>P0444, p0445 evap canister purge
volume control solenoid valve</span></a><br>
   	Description
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister.

The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of ...
   	</p>
    [585] => <p><a href="p0447_evap_canister_vent_control_valve-585.html"><span>P0447 evap canister vent control
valve</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister
and is used to seal the canister vent.

This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized.

A plunger will then move to seal the c ...
   	</p>
    [586] => <p><a href="p0448_evap_canister_vent_control_valve-586.html"><span>P0448 evap canister vent control
valve</span></a><br>
   	Description
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister
and is used to seal the canister vent.

This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized.

A plunger will then move to seal the ca ...
   	</p>
    [587] => <p><a href="p0451_evap_control_system_pressure_sensor-587.html"><span>P0451 evap control system pressure
sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the
purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure
increases.

DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously cond ...
   	</p>
    [588] => <p><a href="p0452_evap_control_system_pressure_sensor-588.html"><span>P0452 evap control system pressure
sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the
purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure
increases.

DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously cond ...
   	</p>
    [589] => <p><a href="p0453_evap_control_system_pressure_sensor-589.html"><span>P0453 evap control system pressure
sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the
purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure
increases.

DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously con ...
   	</p>
    [590] => <p><a href="p0455_evap_control_system-590.html"><span>P0455 evap control system</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.) in 
EVAP system between the fuel tank and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.


CAUTION:
• Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect 
fu ...
   	</p>
    [591] => <p><a href="p0456_evap_control_system-591.html"><span>P0456 evap control system</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
This diagnosis detects very small leaks in the EVAP line between fuel tank 
and EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve, using the intake manifold vacuum in the same way as 
conventional EVAP small leak
diagnosis.

If ECM judges a leak which correspond ...
   	</p>
    [592] => <p><a href="p0460_fuel_level_sensor-592.html"><span>P0460 fuel level sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit.

The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the 
combination meter. The combination
meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication 
line.

It consists o ...
   	</p>
    [593] => <p><a href="p0461_fuel_level_sensor-593.html"><span>P0461 fuel level sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit.

The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the 
combination meter. The combination
meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication 
line.

It consists o ...
   	</p>
    [594] => <p><a href="p0462_p0463_fuel_level_sensor-594.html"><span>P0462, P0463 fuel level sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit.

The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the 
combination meter. The combination
meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication 
line.

It consists of ...
   	</p>
    [595] => <p><a href="p0500_vss-595.html"><span>P0500 VSS</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the “ABS 
actuator and electric unit (control
unit)” by CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal to 
the ECM by CAN communication
line.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC P0 ...
   	</p>
    [596] => <p><a href="p0506_isc_system-596.html"><span>P0506 ISC System</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine 
adjustment of the air, which is let
into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. 
The operating of the throttle valve is
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine ...
   	</p>
    [597] => <p><a href="p0507_isc_system-597.html"><span>P0507 ISC System</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine 
adjustment of the air, which is let
into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. 
The operating of the throttle valve is
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine ...
   	</p>
    [598] => <p><a href="p0550_psp_sensor-598.html"><span>P0550 PSP Sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering 
high-pressure tube and detects a
power steering load.

This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load into 
output voltage, and emits the
voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls  ...
   	</p>
    [599] => <p><a href="p0603_ecm_power_supply-599.html"><span>P0603 ECM Power supply</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch
is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the
air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air volume
learning value memory, etc.

DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMAT ...
   	</p>
    [600] => <p><a href="p0605_ecm-600.html"><span>P0605 ECM</span></a><br>
   	Description
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine.

DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always tur ...
   	</p>
    [601] => <p><a href="p0607_ecm-601.html"><span>P0607 ECM</span></a><br>
   	Description 
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time 
application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex
communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error 
detection ability. Many electronic
control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each c ...
   	</p>
    [602] => <p><a href="p0643_sensor_power_supply-602.html"><span>P0643 Sensor power supply</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn 
ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following proced ...
   	</p>
    [603] => <p><a href="p0850_pnp_switch-603.html"><span>P0850 PNP Switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
When the shift lever position is P or N (CVT), Neutral position (M/T), 
park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON.

ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) 
exists.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.INSPECTION START
 ...
   	</p>
    [605] => <p><a href="p1217_engine_over_temperature-605.html"><span>P1217 engine over temperature</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC P1217 is displayed with DTC UXXXX, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC UXXXX.

• If DTC P1217 is displayed with DTC P0607, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC P0607. Refer
to EC-361, &quot;DTC Logic&quot;.
If the cooling fa ...
   	</p>
    [606] => <p><a href="p1225_tp_sensor-606.html"><span>P1225 TP Sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.

The throttle position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a
kind of potentiometers which transform the  ...
   	</p>
    [607] => <p><a href="p1226_tp_sensor-607.html"><span>P1226 TP Sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.

The throttle position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a
kind of potentiometers which transform the ...
   	</p>
    [608] => <p><a href="p1421_cold_start_control-608.html"><span>P1421 Cold start control</span></a><br>
   	Description
ECM controls ignition timing and engine idle speed when engine is started 
with prewarming up condition.

This control promotes the activation of three way catalyst by heating the 
catalyst and reduces emissions.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
If DTC P1421 is displayed wit ...
   	</p>
    [609] => <p><a href="p1550_battery_current_sensor-609.html"><span>P1550 battery current sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to be 
decreased by reducing the
engine load which is caused by the power generation of the generator. The 
battery current sensor is installed
to the battery cable at the negative terminal. The sensor measures  ...
   	</p>
    [610] => <p><a href="p1551_p1552_battery_current_sensor-610.html"><span>P1551, P1552 battery current sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to be 
decreased by reducing the
engine load which is caused by the power generation of the generator. The 
battery current sensor is installed
to the battery cable at the negative terminal. The sensor measures t ...
   	</p>
    [611] => <p><a href="p1553_battery_current_sensor-611.html"><span>P1553 battery current sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to be 
decreased by reducing the
engine load which is caused by the power generation of the generator. The 
battery current sensor is installed
to the battery cable at the negative terminal. The sensor measures  ...
   	</p>
    [612] => <p><a href="p1554_battery_current_sensor-612.html"><span>P1554 battery current sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to be 
decreased by reducing the
engine load which is caused by the power generation of the generator. The 
battery current sensor is installed
to the battery cable at the negative terminal. The sensor measures t ...
   	</p>
    [613] => <p><a href="p1564_ascd_steering_switch-613.html"><span>P1564 ASCD steering switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each 
button. ECM reads voltage variation
of switch, and determines which button is operated.

Refer to EC-67, &quot;System Description&quot; for the ASCD function.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
If DTC P ...
   	</p>
    [614] => <p><a href="p1572_ascd_brake_switch-614.html"><span>P1572 ASCD brake switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop 
lamp switch is turned ON.

ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF 
signal).

Refer to EC-67, &quot;System Description&quot; for the ASCD function.
DTC Logic 
DTC DET ...
   	</p>
    [615] => <p><a href="p1574_ascd_vehicle_speed_sensor-615.html"><span>P1574 ASCD vehicle speed sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The ECM receives two vehicle speed signals via CAN communication line. One is 
sent from combination
meter, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses 
these signals for ASCD control.

Refer to EC-67, &quot;System Description&quot; for ASCD functions.
D ...
   	</p>
    [616] => <p><a href="p1715_input_speed_sensor_primary_speed_sensor_-616.html"><span>P1715 input speed sensor (primary
speed sensor)</span></a><br>
   	Description
ECM receives primary speed sensor signal from TCM through CAN communication 
line. ECM uses this signal
for engine control.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC UXXXX, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC UXXXX.

• If DTC P1715 is ...
   	</p>
    [617] => <p><a href="p1805_brake_switch-617.html"><span>P1805 brake switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when 
the brake pedal is depressed.

This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is 
driving.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION ...
   	</p>
    [618] => <p><a href="p2004_tumble_control_valve-618.html"><span>P2004 tumble control valve</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Tumble control valve (3) is installed in the intake manifold adapter
(1).

Tumble control valve actuator (2) is connected to the front end of the
valve shaft.

Tumble control valve actuator consists of motor and position sensor,
etc.

The motor opens or closes the valve by the ...
   	</p>
    [619] => <p><a href="p2014_tumble_control_valve_position_sensor-619.html"><span>P2014 tumble control valve position
sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Tumble control valve position sensor is built into the tumble control
valve actuator (2).
1 : Intake manifold adapter
3 : Tumble control valve
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. It senses
the valve shaft movement and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM.

DTC ...
   	</p>
    [620] => <p><a href="p2100_p2103_throttle_control_motor_relay-620.html"><span>P2100, P2103 throttle control motor
relay</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via 
throttle control motor relay. The throttle
control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is 
turned ON, the ECM sends
an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery vol ...
   	</p>
    [621] => <p><a href="p2101_electric_throttle_control_function-621.html"><span>P2101 electric throttle control
function</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, 
throttle position sensor, etc.

The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the 
throttle valve.

The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle 
po ...
   	</p>
    [622] => <p><a href="p2118_throttle_control_motor-622.html"><span>P2118 throttle control motor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the 
throttle valve.

The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle 
position sensor and it provides feedback
to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttl ...
   	</p>
    [623] => <p><a href="p2119_electric_throttle_control_actuator-623.html"><span>P2119 electric throttle control
actuator</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, 
throttle position sensor, etc.

The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the 
throttle valve.

The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the 
open ...
   	</p>
    [624] => <p><a href="p2122_p2123_app_sensor-624.html"><span>P2122, P2123 APP sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator
position and sends a signal to the ECM.

Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which tr ...
   	</p>
    [625] => <p><a href="p2127_p2128_app_sensor-625.html"><span>P2127, P2128 APP sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator
position and sends a signal to the ECM.

Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which tr ...
   	</p>
    [626] => <p><a href="p2135_tp_sensor-626.html"><span>P2135 TP sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.

The throttle position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a
kind of potentiometers which transform the  ...
   	</p>
    [627] => <p><a href="p2138_app_sensor-627.html"><span>P2138 APP sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator
position and sends a signal to the ECM.

Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which tra ...
   	</p>
    [628] => <p><a href="p2423_hc_adsorption_catalyst_function-628.html"><span>P2423 HC adsorption catalyst function</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
The ECM monitors the phase gap between heated oxygen sensor 2
signal and heated oxygen sensor 3 signal.

The phase gap between heated oxygen sensor 2 signal and heated
oxygen sensor 3 signal becomes small as the HC adsorption catalyst
(under floor) is deteriorate ...
   	</p>
    [629] => <p><a href="p2a00_a_f_sensor_1-629.html"><span>P2A00 A/F sensor 1</span></a><br>
   	Description
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar one-cell limit current sensor.

The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is composed an electrode
layer, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.

The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and r ...
   	</p>
    [630] => <p><a href="ascd_brake_switch-630.html"><span>ASCD brake switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop 
lamp switch is turned ON.

ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF 
signal).

Refer to EC-67, &quot;System Description&quot; for the ASCD function.
Component Function  ...
   	</p>
    [631] => <p><a href="ascd_indicator-631.html"><span>ASCD indicator</span></a><br>
   	Description
The ASCD operation status is indicated by two indicators, (CRUISE and SET on 
the information display) on
the combination meter.

CRUISE indicator is displayed to indicate that ASCD system is ready for 
operation when MAIN switch on
ASCD steering switch is turned ON.

SET indica ...
   	</p>
    [632] => <p><a href="cooling_fan-632.html"><span>Cooling fan</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine 
colant temperature, refrigerant
pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 4-step control 
[HIGH/MIDDLE/LOW/OFF].
COOLING FAN MOTOR
The cooling fan operates at each speed when the cur ...
   	</p>
    [633] => <p><a href="electrical_load_signal-633.html"><span>Electrical load signal</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, rear window defogger 
switch signal, etc.) is transferred
through the CAN communication line.
Component Function Check
1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH FUNCTION
1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Connect CONSULT-III and select  ...
   	</p>
    [634] => <p><a href="fuel_injector-634.html"><span>Fuel injector</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the fuel injector circuit, the coil in the fuel injector
is energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back and
allows fuel to flow through the fuel injector into the intake manifold.

 ...
   	</p>
    [635] => <p><a href="fuel_pump-635.html"><span>Fuel pump</span></a><br>
   	Description 

*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and 
battery voltage.

The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is 
turned ON to improve engine
start ability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the camshaf ...
   	</p>
    [636] => <p><a href="ignition_signal-636.html"><span>Ignition signal</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power 
transistor. The power transistor turns
ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the 
proper high voltage in the coil
secondary circuit.
Component Function Check
1.INSPECTION ...
   	</p>
    [637] => <p><a href="malfunction_indicator_lamp-637.html"><span>Malfunction indicator lamp</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is located on the combination
meter.

The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without
the engine running. This is a bulb check.

When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the MIL remains
on, the on board diagno ...
   	</p>
    [638] => <p><a href="on_board_refueling_vapor_recovery_orvr_-638.html"><span>On board refueling vapor recovery
(ORVR)</span></a><br>
   	Description

From the beginning of refueling, the air and vapor inside the fuel tank go 
through refueling EVAP vapor cut
valve and EVAP/ORVR line to the EVAP canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP 
canister and the air is
released to the atmosphere.

When the refueling has reached the  ...
   	</p>
    [639] => <p><a href="positive_crankcase_ventilation-639.html"><span>Positive crankcase ventilation</span></a><br>
   	Description

This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.

The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase 
blow-by gas to the intake
manifold.

During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the 
blow-by gas through the ...
   	</p>
    [640] => <p><a href="refrigerant_pressure_sensor-640.html"><span>Refrigerant pressure sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the condenser of the air 
conditioner system. The sensor uses an
electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to 
voltage. The voltage signal is sent
to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.

Component ...
   	</p>
    [641] => <p><a href="ecu_diagnosis-641.html"><span>Ecu diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	ECM
Reference Value 
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL
Remarks:
&#9679; Specification data are reference values.

&#9679; Specification data are output/input values 
which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.

&#9679; Specification data may not be directly 
related to their com ...
   	</p>
    [643] => <p><a href="engine_control_system_symptoms-643.html"><span>Engine control system symptoms</span></a><br>
   	Symptom Table
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM


1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.

(continued on next table)
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL &amp; OTHER


1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. ...
   	</p>
    [644] => <p><a href="normal_operating_condition-644.html"><span>Normal operating condition</span></a><br>
   	Description
FUEL CUT CONTROL (AT NO LOAD AND HIGH ENGINE SPEED)
If the engine speed is above 1,800 rpm under no load (for example, the 
selector lever position is neutral and
engine speed is over 1,800 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact 
time when the fuel is cut off varies
b ...
   	</p>
    [645] => <p><a href="precaution-645.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [648] => <p><a href="fuel_pressure-648.html"><span>Fuel pressure</span></a><br>
   	Inspection 
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.

3. Start engine.

4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel 
pressure.

5. Turn ignition switch OFF.

1. Re ...
   	</p>
    [649] => <p><a href="evap_leak_check-649.html"><span>Evap leak check</span></a><br>
   	Inspection
CAUTION:
• Do not use compressed air or a high pressure pump.

• Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in EVAP system.
NOTE:
• Do not start engine.

• Improper installation of EVAP service port adapter [commercial service tool: 
(J-41413-OBD)] to the  ...
   	</p>
    [650] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_repair-650.html"><span>On-vehicle repair</span></a><br>
   	EVAP CANISTER 
Exploded View

Removal and Installation 
REMOVAL
1. Lift up the vehicle.

2. Remove EVAP canister fixing bolt.

3. Remove EVAP canister.

NOTE:
The EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP canister system pressure sensor 
can be removed without
removing the EVAP caniste ...
   	</p>
    [651] => <p><a href="service_data_and_specifications_sds_-651.html"><span>Service data and specifications
(SDS)</span></a><br>
   	Idle Speed 

*: Under the following conditions
• A/C switch: OFF
• Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan &amp; rear window defogger)
• Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position
Ignition Timing

*: Under the following conditions
• A/C switch: OFF
• Electric load: OFF (Light ...
   	</p>
    [652] => <p><a href="engine_control_system_qr25de_except_for_california-652.html"><span>Engine control system QR25DE except for california</span></a><br>
   	Basic inspection
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow
OVERALL SEQUENCE

DETAILED FLOW
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the 
condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred) using the “Diagnostic Work S ...
   	</p>
    [654] => <p><a href="basic_inspection-654.html"><span>Basic inspection</span></a><br>
   	Special Repair Requirement
1.INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related 
malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance.

2. Open engine hood and check the following:
- Harness connectors for improper connections
- Wiring harness fo ...
   	</p>
    [655] => <p><a href="additional_service_when_replacing_control_unit-655.html"><span>Additional service when replacing
control unit</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Description
When replacing ECM, this procedure must be performed.
&nbsp;Special Repair Requirement
1.PERFORM INITIALIZATION OF NATS SYSTEM AND REGISTRATION OF ALL NATS 
IGNITION KEY IDS
Refer to EC-563, &quot;ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special 
Repair Requirement&qu ...
   	</p>
    [656] => <p><a href="idle_speed-656.html"><span>Idle speed</span></a><br>
   	Description
This describes how to check the idle speed. For the actual procedure, follow 
the instructions in “BASIC
INSPECTION”.
Special Repair Requirement
1.CHECK IDLE SPEED

Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.

Check idle speed with Service $01 of GST.
&gt; ...
   	</p>
    [657] => <p><a href="ignition_timing-657.html"><span>Ignition timing</span></a><br>
   	Description
This describes how to check the ignition timing. For the actual procedure, 
follow the instructions in “BASIC
INSPECTION”.
Special Repair Requirement
1.CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Attach timing light to No. 1 igniton coil (1) wire as shown.
2 : Timing light


2. Check ignition ...
   	</p>
    [658] => <p><a href="vin_registration-658.html"><span>Vin registration</span></a><br>
   	Description 
VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be 
performed each time ECM is replaced.

NOTE:
Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection &amp; 
Maintenance (I/M)
Special Repair Requirement
1.CHECK VIN
Check the VIN of the vehicl ...
   	</p>
    [659] => <p><a href="accelerator_pedal_released_position_learning-659.html"><span>Accelerator pedal released position
learning</span></a><br>
   	Description
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is a function of ECM to learn 
the fully released position of the
accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output 
signal. It must be performed each
time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor  ...
   	</p>
    [660] => <p><a href="throttle_valve_closed_position_learning-660.html"><span>Throttle valve closed position learning</span></a><br>
   	Description
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is a function of ECM to learn the 
fully closed position of the throttle
valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be 
performed each time harness connector
of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconne ...
   	</p>
    [661] => <p><a href="idle_air_volume_learning-661.html"><span>Idle air volume learning</span></a><br>
   	Description
Idle Air Volume Learning is a function of ECM to learn the idle air volume 
that keeps each engine idle speed
within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following 
conditions:
• Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.

• Idle spee ...
   	</p>
    [662] => <p><a href="mixture_ratio_self_learning_value_clear-662.html"><span>Mixture ratio self-learning value
clear</span></a><br>
   	Description 
This describes how to erase the mixture ratio self-learning value. For the 
actual procedure, follow the instructions
in “Diagnosis Procedure”.
Special Repair Requirement
1.START

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CO ...
   	</p>
    [664] => <p><a href="engine_control_system-664.html"><span>Engine control system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description 
ECM performs various controls such as fuel injection control and ignition 
timing control.
Component Parts Location 

1. Intake valve timing control solenoid
valve
2. Ignition coil (with power transistor)
and spark plug
3. Knock sensor,
Crankshaft posi ...
   	</p>
    [665] => <p><a href="multiport_fuel_injection_system-665.html"><span>Multiport fuel injection system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal 
conditions.

*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and  ...
   	</p>
    [666] => <p><a href="electric_ignition_system-666.html"><span>Electric ignition system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description 
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.

*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and 
battery voltage.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Firing order: 1 - 3 - 4 - 2
The ignition t ...
   	</p>
    [667] => <p><a href="air_conditioning_cut_control-667.html"><span>Air conditioning cut control</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.

*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and 
battery voltage.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system improves engine operation when th ...
   	</p>
    [668] => <p><a href="automatic_speed_control_device_ascd_-668.html"><span>Automatic speed control device
(ASCD)</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description 
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line
BASIC ASCD SYSTEM
Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions.

Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at 
predetermin ...
   	</p>
    [669] => <p><a href="can_communication-669.html"><span>Can communication</span></a><br>
   	System Description 
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time 
application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex
communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error 
detection ability. Many electronic
control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and ...
   	</p>
    [670] => <p><a href="cooling_fan_control-670.html"><span>Cooling fan control</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description 
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

*1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed 
and battery voltage.

*2: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ECM controls cooling fan speed correspondin ...
   	</p>
    [671] => <p><a href="evaporative_emission_system-671.html"><span>Evaporative emission system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING

1. Intake manifold collector
2. EVAP service port
3. EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
A. From next figure

1. EVAP control system pressure sensor
2. EVAP canister vent control valve
3. EVAP canister
A. To previous figu ...
   	</p>
    [672] => <p><a href="intake_valve_timing_control-672.html"><span>Intake valve timing control</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description 
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed 
operating angle of the intake
valve.

The ECM receives signals s ...
   	</p>
    [673] => <p><a href="on_board_diagnostic_obd_system-673.html"><span>On board diagnostic (OBD) System</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Description
INTRODUCTION
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related 
to engine sensors or actuators.

The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:

The above information can be checked using procedures listed in t ...
   	</p>
    [675] => <p><a href="trouble_diagnosis_specification_value-675.html"><span>Trouble diagnosis - specification
value</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is 
displayed in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR”
mode of CONSULT-III during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When 
the value in “SPEC”
of “DATA MONITOR” mode is within the SP value, the En ...
   	</p>
    [676] => <p><a href="power_supply_and_ground_circuit-676.html"><span>Power supply and ground circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
1.INSPECTION START
Start engine.

Is engine running?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 8.

NO &gt;&gt; GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON.

2. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and
ground.


Is the inspection result  ...
   	</p>
    [677] => <p><a href="u0101_can_comm_circuit-677.html"><span>U0101 Can comm circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time 
application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex
communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error 
detection ability. Many electronic
control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each co ...
   	</p>
    [678] => <p><a href="u0140_can_comm_circuit-678.html"><span>U0140 Can comm circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time 
application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex
communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error 
detection ability. Many electronic
control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each co ...
   	</p>
    [679] => <p><a href="u1001_can_comm_circuit-679.html"><span>U1001 Can comm circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time 
application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex
communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error 
detection ability. Many electronic
control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each c ...
   	</p>
    [680] => <p><a href="p0011_ivt_control-680.html"><span>P0011 IVT Control</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
If DTC P0011 is displayed with DTC P0075, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for EC-867, &quot;DTC Logic&quot;.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn 
ignition switch OFF  ...
   	</p>
    [681] => <p><a href="p0031_p0032_a_f_sensor_1_heater-681.html"><span>P0031, P0032 A/F Sensor 1 heater</span></a><br>
   	Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding 
to the engine operating
condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element at the specified 
range.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITI ...
   	</p>
    [682] => <p><a href="p0037_p0038_ho2s2_heater-682.html"><span>P0037, P0038 HO2S2 Heater</span></a><br>
   	Description 
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater 
corresponding to the engine speed,
amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION

DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC C ...
   	</p>
    [683] => <p><a href="p0075_ivt_control_solenoid_valve-683.html"><span>P0075 ivt control solenoid valve</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF
pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM.

The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil
amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit
or stops oil flow.

The longer pulse w ...
   	</p>
    [684] => <p><a href="p0101_maf_sensor-684.html"><span>P0101 maf sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the
hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced a ...
   	</p>
    [685] => <p><a href="p0102_p0103_maf_sensor-685.html"><span>P0102, p0103 maf sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the
hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced a ...
   	</p>
    [686] => <p><a href="p0112_p0113_iat_sensor-686.html"><span>P0112, p0113 iat sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor
(1). The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal
to the ECM.

The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the therm ...
   	</p>
    [687] => <p><a href="p0116_ect_sensor-687.html"><span>P0116 ect sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine
coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change i ...
   	</p>
    [688] => <p><a href="p0117_p0118_ect_sensor-688.html"><span>P0117, p0118 ect sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine
coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change i ...
   	</p>
    [689] => <p><a href="p0122_p0123_tp_sensor-689.html"><span>P0122, P0123 TP Sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.

The throttle position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a
kind of potentiometers which transform the ...
   	</p>
    [690] => <p><a href="p0125_ect_sensor-690.html"><span>P0125 ECT Sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine
coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change i ...
   	</p>
    [691] => <p><a href="p0127_iat_sensor-691.html"><span>P0127 IAT Sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor
(1). The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal
to the ECM.

The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the ther ...
   	</p>
    [692] => <p><a href="p0128_thermostat_function-692.html"><span>P0128 Thermostat function</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
If DTC P0128 is displayed with DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 or P0304, first 
perform the trouble
diagnosis for DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304. Refer to EC-776, &quot;DTC 
Logic&quot;.

Engine coolant temperature has not risen enough to open the t ...
   	</p>
    [693] => <p><a href="p0130_a_f_sensor_1-693.html"><span>P0130 A/F Sensor 1</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar one-cell limit current sensor.

The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is composed an electrode
layer, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.

The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and  ...
   	</p>
    [694] => <p><a href="p0131_a_f_sensor_1-694.html"><span>P0131 A/F Sensor 1</span></a><br>
   	Description
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar one-cell limit current sensor.

The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is composed an electrode
layer, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.

The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and r ...
   	</p>
    [695] => <p><a href="p0132_a_f_sensor_1-695.html"><span>P0132 A/F Sensor 1</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar one-cell limit current sensor.

The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is composed an electrode
layer, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.

The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and  ...
   	</p>
    [696] => <p><a href="p0133_a_f_sensor_1-696.html"><span>P0133 A/F Sensor 1</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar one-cell limit current sensor.

The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is composed an electrode
layer, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.

The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and  ...
   	</p>
    [697] => <p><a href="p0137_ho2s2-697.html"><span>P0137 HO2S2</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),
monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.

Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal
from t ...
   	</p>
    [698] => <p><a href="p0138_ho2s2-698.html"><span>P0138 HO2S2</span></a><br>
   	Description
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),
monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.

Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal
from th ...
   	</p>
    [699] => <p><a href="p0139_ho2s2-699.html"><span>P0139 HO2S2</span></a><br>
   	Description
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),
monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.

Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal
from th ...
   	</p>
    [700] => <p><a href="p0171_fuel_injection_system_function-700.html"><span>P0171 fuel injection system function</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture 
ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the 
A/F sensors 1. The ECM calculates
the necessary compensation to correct t ...
   	</p>
    [701] => <p><a href="p0172_fuel_injection_system_function-701.html"><span>P0172 fuel injection system function</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture 
ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the 
A/F sensors 1. The ECM calculates
the necessary compensation to correct t ...
   	</p>
    [702] => <p><a href="p0181_ftt_sensor-702.html"><span>P0181 FTT Sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature
inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from
the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature
input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in te ...
   	</p>
    [703] => <p><a href="p0182_p0183_ftt_sensor-703.html"><span>P0182, P0183 FTT Sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature
inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from
the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature
input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in te ...
   	</p>
    [704] => <p><a href="p0222_p0223_tp_sensor-704.html"><span>P0222, P0223 TP Sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.

The throttle position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a
kind of potentiometers which transform the ...
   	</p>
    [705] => <p><a href="p0300_p0301_p0302_p0303_p0304_misfire-705.html"><span>P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 Misfire</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed 
fluctuates enough to cause the crankshaft
position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is 
occurring.

The misfire detection logic consists of the following  ...
   	</p>
    [706] => <p><a href="p0327_p0328_ks-706.html"><span>P0327, P0328 KS</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking 
using a piezoelectric element. A
knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. 
This pressure is converted into a
voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
DTC Logic
DTC DETEC ...
   	</p>
    [707] => <p><a href="p0335_ckp_sensor_pos_-707.html"><span>P0335 CKP Sensor (POS)</span></a><br>
   	Description
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing
the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.

The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.

When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the  ...
   	</p>
    [708] => <p><a href="p0340_cmp_sensor_phase_-708.html"><span>P0340 CMP Sensor (phase)</span></a><br>
   	Description
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of
camshaft (INT) to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.

When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative,
the camshaft position sensor (PHAS ...
   	</p>
    [709] => <p><a href="p0420_three_way_catalyst_function-709.html"><span>P0420 three way catalyst function</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2.

A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity
will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2.

As oxygen storage c ...
   	</p>
    [710] => <p><a href="p0441_evap_control_system-710.html"><span>P0441 evap control system</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
If DTC P0441 is displayed with other DTC such as P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 or 
P2138, first perform
trouble diagnosis for other DTC.

In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during 
non-closed throttle conditions.

Purge v ...
   	</p>
    [711] => <p><a href="p0442_evap_control_system-711.html"><span>P0442 evap control system</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
If DTC P0442 is displayed with DTC P0456, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC P0456. Refer to
EC-841, &quot;DTC Logic&quot;.

This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine intake manifold 
vacuum.

If pressure does not increa ...
   	</p>
    [712] => <p><a href="p0443_evap_canister_purge_volume_control_solenoid_valve-712.html"><span>P0443 evap canister purge volume
control solenoid valve</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister.

The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount o ...
   	</p>
    [713] => <p><a href="p0444_p0445_evap_canister_purge_volume_control_solenoid_valve-713.html"><span>P0444, p0445 evap canister purge
volume control solenoid valve</span></a><br>
   	Description
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister.

The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of ...
   	</p>
    [714] => <p><a href="p0447_evap_canister_vent_control_valve-714.html"><span>P0447 evap canister vent control
valve</span></a><br>
   	Description
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister
and is used to seal the canister vent.

This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized.

A plunger will then move to seal the ca ...
   	</p>
    [715] => <p><a href="p0448_evap_canister_vent_control_valve-715.html"><span>P0448 evap canister vent control
valve</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister
and is used to seal the canister vent.

This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized.

A plunger will then move to seal the c ...
   	</p>
    [716] => <p><a href="p0451_evap_control_system_pressure_sensor-716.html"><span>P0451 evap control system pressure
sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the
purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure
increases.

DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously con ...
   	</p>
    [717] => <p><a href="p0452_evap_control_system_pressure_sensor-717.html"><span>P0452 evap control system pressure
sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the
purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure
increases.

DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously condu ...
   	</p>
    [718] => <p><a href="p0453_evap_control_system_pressure_sensor-718.html"><span>P0453 evap control system pressure
sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the
purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure
increases.

DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously cond ...
   	</p>
    [719] => <p><a href="p0455_evap_control_system-719.html"><span>P0455 evap control system</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.) in 
EVAP system between the fuel tank and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.


CAUTION:
• Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect 
fu ...
   	</p>
    [720] => <p><a href="p0456_evap_control_system-720.html"><span>P0456 evap control system</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
This diagnosis detects very small leaks in the EVAP line between fuel tank 
and EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve, using the intake manifold vacuum in the same way as 
conventional EVAP small leak
diagnosis.

If ECM judges a leak which correspond ...
   	</p>
    [721] => <p><a href="p0460_fuel_level_sensor-721.html"><span>P0460 fuel level sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit.

The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the 
combination meter. The combination
meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication 
line.

It consists o ...
   	</p>
    [722] => <p><a href="p0461_fuel_level_sensor-722.html"><span>P0461 fuel level sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit.

The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the 
combination meter. The combination
meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication 
line.

It consists of ...
   	</p>
    [723] => <p><a href="p0462_p0463_fuel_level_sensor-723.html"><span>P0462, p0463 fuel level sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit.

The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the 
combination meter. The combination
meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication 
line.

It consists of ...
   	</p>
    [724] => <p><a href="p0500_vss-724.html"><span>P0500 VSS</span></a><br>
   	Description
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the “ABS 
actuator and electric unit (control
unit)” by CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal to 
the ECM by CAN communication
line.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC P050 ...
   	</p>
    [725] => <p><a href="p0506_isc_system-725.html"><span>P0506 ISC System</span></a><br>
   	Description
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine 
adjustment of the air, which is let
into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. 
The operating of the throttle valve is
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine  ...
   	</p>
    [726] => <p><a href="p0507_isc_system-726.html"><span>P0507 ISC System</span></a><br>
   	Description
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine 
adjustment of the air, which is let
into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. 
The operating of the throttle valve is
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine  ...
   	</p>
    [727] => <p><a href="p0550_psp_sensor-727.html"><span>P0550 PSP Sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering 
high-pressure tube and detects a
power steering load.

This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load into 
output voltage, and emits the
voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls t ...
   	</p>
    [728] => <p><a href="p0603_ecm_power_supply-728.html"><span>P0603 ECM Power supply</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch
is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the
air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air volume
learning value memory, etc.

DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMAT ...
   	</p>
    [729] => <p><a href="p0605_ecm-729.html"><span>P0605 ECM</span></a><br>
   	Description
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine.

DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always tur ...
   	</p>
    [730] => <p><a href="p0607_ecm-730.html"><span>P0607 ECM</span></a><br>
   	Description 
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time 
application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex
communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error 
detection ability. Many electronic
control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each c ...
   	</p>
    [731] => <p><a href="p0643_sensor_power_supply-731.html"><span>P0643 sensor power supply</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn 
ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following proced ...
   	</p>
    [732] => <p><a href="p0850_pnp_switch-732.html"><span>P0850 PNP Switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
When the shift lever position is P or N (CVT), Neutral position (M/T), 
park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON.

ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) 
exists.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.INSPECTION START
 ...
   	</p>
    [734] => <p><a href="p1217_engine_over_temperature-734.html"><span>P1217 engine over temperature</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC P1217 is displayed with DTC UXXXX, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC UXXXX.

• If DTC P1217 is displayed with DTC P0607, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC P0607. Refer
to EC-866, &quot;DTC Logic&quot;.

If the cooling  ...
   	</p>
    [735] => <p><a href="p1225_tp_sensor-735.html"><span>P1225 TP Sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.

The throttle position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a
kind of potentiometers which transform the  ...
   	</p>
    [736] => <p><a href="p1226_tp_sensor-736.html"><span>P1226 TP Sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.

The throttle position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a
kind of potentiometers which transform the ...
   	</p>
    [737] => <p><a href="p1421_cold_start_control-737.html"><span>P1421 cold start control</span></a><br>
   	Description 
ECM controls ignition timing and engine idle speed when engine is started 
with prewarming up condition.

This control promotes the activation of three way catalyst by heating the 
catalyst and reduces emissions.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
If DTC P1421 is displayed wit ...
   	</p>
    [738] => <p><a href="p1550_battery_current_sensor-738.html"><span>P1550 battery current sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to be 
decreased by reducing the
engine load which is caused by the power generation of the generator. The 
battery current sensor is installed
to the battery cable at the negative terminal. The sensor measures  ...
   	</p>
    [739] => <p><a href="p1551_p1552_battery_current_sensor-739.html"><span>P1551, P1552 Battery current sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to be 
decreased by reducing the
engine load which is caused by the power generation of the generator. The 
battery current sensor is installed
to the battery cable at the negative terminal. The sensor measures  ...
   	</p>
    [740] => <p><a href="p1553_battery_current_sensor-740.html"><span>P1553 battery current sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to be 
decreased by reducing the
engine load which is caused by the power generation of the generator. The 
battery current sensor is installed
to the battery cable at the negative terminal. The sensor measures  ...
   	</p>
    [741] => <p><a href="p1554_battery_current_sensor-741.html"><span>P1554 battery current sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to be 
decreased by reducing the
engine load which is caused by the power generation of the generator. The 
battery current sensor is installed
to the battery cable at the negative terminal. The sensor measures t ...
   	</p>
    [742] => <p><a href="p1564_ascd_steering_switch-742.html"><span>P1564 ASCD Steering switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each 
button. ECM reads voltage variation
of switch, and determines which button is operated.

Refer to EC-603, &quot;System Description&quot; for the ASCD function.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
If DTC  ...
   	</p>
    [743] => <p><a href="p1572_ascd_brake_switch-743.html"><span>P1572 ASCD Brake switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop 
lamp switch is turned ON.

ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF 
signal).

Refer to EC-603, &quot;System Description&quot; for the ASCD function.
DTC Logic
DTC DE ...
   	</p>
    [744] => <p><a href="p1574_ascd_vehicle_speed_sensor-744.html"><span>P1574 ASCD Vehicle speed sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The ECM receives two vehicle speed signals via CAN communication line. One is 
sent from combination
meter, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses 
these signals for ASCD control.

Refer to EC-603, &quot;System Description&quot; for ASCD functions.
D ...
   	</p>
    [745] => <p><a href="p1715_input_speed_sensor_primary_speed_sensor_-745.html"><span>P1715 input speed sensor (primary
speed sensor)</span></a><br>
   	Description 
ECM receives primary speed sensor signal from TCM through CAN communication 
line. ECM uses this signal
for engine control.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC UXXXX, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC U1000,XXXX.

• If DTC P ...
   	</p>
    [746] => <p><a href="p1805_brake_switch-746.html"><span>P1805 brake switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when 
the brake pedal is depressed.

This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is 
driving.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATI ...
   	</p>
    [747] => <p><a href="p2100_p2103_throttle_control_motor_relay-747.html"><span>P2100, p2103 throttle control motor
relay</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via 
throttle control motor relay. The throttle
control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is 
turned ON, the ECM sends
an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery vol ...
   	</p>
    [748] => <p><a href="p2101_electric_throttle_control_function-748.html"><span>P2101 electric throttle control
function</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, 
throttle position sensor, etc.

The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the 
throttle valve.

The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle 
po ...
   	</p>
    [749] => <p><a href="p2118_throttle_control_motor-749.html"><span>P2118 throttle control motor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the 
throttle valve.

The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle 
position sensor and it provides feedback
to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the thrott ...
   	</p>
    [750] => <p><a href="p2119_electric_throttle_control_actuator-750.html"><span>P2119 electric throttle control
actuator</span></a><br>
   	Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, 
throttle position sensor, etc.

The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the 
throttle valve.

The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the 
openi ...
   	</p>
    [751] => <p><a href="p2122_p2123_app_sensor-751.html"><span>P2122, P2123 APP Sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator
position and sends a signal to the ECM.

Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which tr ...
   	</p>
    [752] => <p><a href="p2127_p2128_app_sensor-752.html"><span>P2127, P2128 APP Sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator
position and sends a signal to the ECM.

Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which tr ...
   	</p>
    [753] => <p><a href="p2135_tp_sensor-753.html"><span>P2135 TP Sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.

The throttle position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a
kind of potentiometers which transform the  ...
   	</p>
    [754] => <p><a href="p2138_app_sensor-754.html"><span>P2138 APP Sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator
position and sends a signal to the ECM.

Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which tr ...
   	</p>
    [755] => <p><a href="p2a00_a_f_sensor_1-755.html"><span>P2A00 A/F Sensor 1</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar one-cell limit current sensor.

The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is composed an electrode
layer, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.

The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and  ...
   	</p>
    [756] => <p><a href="ascd_brake_switch-756.html"><span>ASCD Brake switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop 
lamp switch is turned ON.

ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF 
signal).

Refer to EC-603, &quot;System Description&quot; for the ASCD function.
Component Functio ...
   	</p>
    [757] => <p><a href="ascd_indicator-757.html"><span>ASCD Indicator</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The ASCD operation status is indicated by two indicators, (CRUISE and SET on 
the information display) on
the combination meter.

CRUISE indicator is displayed to indicate that ASCD system is ready for 
operation when MAIN switch on
ASCD steering switch is turned ON.

SET indic ...
   	</p>
    [758] => <p><a href="cooling_fan-758.html"><span>Cooling fan</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine 
colant temperature, refrigerant
pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 4-step control 
[HIGH/MIDDLE/LOW/OFF].
COOLING FAN MOTOR
The cooling fan operates at each speed when the cur ...
   	</p>
    [759] => <p><a href="electrical_load_signal-759.html"><span>Electrical load signal</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, rear window defogger 
switch signal, etc.) is transferred
through the CAN communication line.
Component Function Check
1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH FUNCTION
1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Connect CONSULT-III and select  ...
   	</p>
    [760] => <p><a href="fuel_injector-760.html"><span>Fuel injector</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the fuel injector circuit, the coil in the fuel injector
is energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back and
allows fuel to flow through the fuel injector into the intake manifold.

 ...
   	</p>
    [761] => <p><a href="fuel_pump-761.html"><span>Fuel pump</span></a><br>
   	Description

*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and 
battery voltage.

The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is 
turned ON to improve engine
start ability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the camshaft ...
   	</p>
    [762] => <p><a href="ignition_signal-762.html"><span>Ignition signal</span></a><br>
   	Description
The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power 
transistor. The power transistor turns
ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the 
proper high voltage in the coil
secondary circuit.
Component Function Check 
1.INSPECTION ...
   	</p>
    [763] => <p><a href="malfunction_indicator_lamp-763.html"><span>Malfunction indicator lamp</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is located on the combination
meter.

The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without
the engine running. This is a bulb check.

When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the MIL remains
on, the on board diagno ...
   	</p>
    [764] => <p><a href="on_board_refueling_vapor_recovery_orvr_-764.html"><span>On board refueling vapor recovery
(ORVR)</span></a><br>
   	Description 

From the beginning of refueling, the air and vapor inside the fuel tank go 
through refueling EVAP vapor cut
valve and EVAP/ORVR line to the EVAP canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP 
canister and the air is
released to the atmosphere.

When the refueling has reached the ...
   	</p>
    [765] => <p><a href="positive_crankcase_ventilation-765.html"><span>Positive crankcase ventilation</span></a><br>
   	Description 

This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.

The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase 
blow-by gas to the intake
manifold.

During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the 
blow-by gas through th ...
   	</p>
    [766] => <p><a href="refrigerant_pressure_sensor-766.html"><span>Refrigerant pressure sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the condenser of the air 
conditioner system. The sensor uses an
electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to 
voltage. The voltage signal is sent
to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.

Componen ...
   	</p>
    [767] => <p><a href="ecu_diagnosis-767.html"><span>Ecu diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	ECM 
Reference Value
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL
Remarks:
&#9679; Specification data are reference values.

&#9679; Specification data are output/input values 
which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.

* Specification data may not be directly related to their components  ...
   	</p>
    [769] => <p><a href="engine_control_system_symptoms-769.html"><span>Engine control system symptoms</span></a><br>
   	Symptom Table 
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM


1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.

(continued on next table)
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL &amp; OTHER


1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. ...
   	</p>
    [770] => <p><a href="normal_operating_condition-770.html"><span>Normal operating condition</span></a><br>
   	Description
FUEL CUT CONTROL (AT NO LOAD AND HIGH ENGINE SPEED)
If the engine speed is above 1,800 rpm under no load (for example, the 
selector lever position is neutral and
engine speed is over 1,800 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact 
time when the fuel is cut off varies
b ...
   	</p>
    [771] => <p><a href="precaution-771.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT 
PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [774] => <p><a href="fuel_pressure-774.html"><span>Fuel pressure</span></a><br>
   	Inspection
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.

3. Start engine.

4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel 
pressure.

5. Turn ignition switch OFF.

1. Rem ...
   	</p>
    [775] => <p><a href="evap_leak_check-775.html"><span>Evap leak check</span></a><br>
   	Inspection
CAUTION:
• Do not use compressed air or a high pressure pump.

• Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in EVAP system.

NOTE:
• Do not start engine.

• Improper installation of EVAP service port adapter [commercial service tool: 
(J-41413-OBD)] to th ...
   	</p>
    [776] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_repair-776.html"><span>On-vehicle repair</span></a><br>
   	EVAP CANISTER 
Exploded View 

Removal and Installation 
REMOVAL
1. Lift up the vehicle.

2. Remove EVAP canister fixing bolt.

3. Remove EVAP canister.
NOTE:
The EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP canister system pressure sensor 
can be removed without
removing the EVAP canister ...
   	</p>
    [777] => <p><a href="service_data_and_specifications_sds_-777.html"><span>Service data and specifications
(SDS)</span></a><br>
   	Idle Speed 

*: Under the following conditions
• A/C switch: OFF
• Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan &amp; rear window defogger)
• Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position
Ignition Timing 

*: Under the following conditions
• A/C switch: OFF
• Electric load: OFF (Ligh ...
   	</p>
    [779] => <p><a href="basic_inspection-779.html"><span>Basic inspection</span></a><br>
   	DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW 
Work Flow
OVERALL SEQUENCE


DETAILED FLOW
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the 
condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred) using the “Diagnostic Work Sheet”. (Refer ...
   	</p>
    [781] => <p><a href="basic_inspection-781.html"><span>Basic inspection</span></a><br>
   	Special Repair Requirement
1.INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related 
malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance.

2. Open engine hood and check the following:
- Harness connectors for improper connections
- Wiring harness fo ...
   	</p>
    [782] => <p><a href="additional_service_when_replacing_control_unit-782.html"><span>Additional service when replacing
control unit</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Description
When replacing ECM, the following procedure must be performed.
&nbsp;Special Repair Requirement
1.PERFORM INITIALIZATION OF NVIS (NATS) SYSTEM AND REGISTRATION OF ALL 
NVIS (NATS) IGNITION
KEY IDS
Refer to SEC-15, &quot;ECM RE-COMMUNICATING FUNCTION : Special Repair Requireme ...
   	</p>
    [783] => <p><a href="idle_speed-783.html"><span>Idle speed</span></a><br>
   	Description 
This describes how to check the idle speed. For the actual procedure, follow 
the instructions in “BASIC
INSPECTION”.
Special Repair Requirement
1.CHECK IDLE SPEED

Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.

Check idle speed with Service $01 of GST.
&gt ...
   	</p>
    [784] => <p><a href="ignition_timing-784.html"><span>Ignition timing</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Description 
This describes how to check the ignition timing. For the actual procedure, 
follow the instructions in “BASIC
INSPECTION”.
Special Repair Requirement
1.CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Attach timing light to loop wires (2) as shown.

- Intake manifold collector (1)
- Timing l ...
   	</p>
    [785] => <p><a href="vin_registration-785.html"><span>Vin registration</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Description 
VIN Registration is an operation to register VIN in ECM. It must be performed 
each time ECM is replaced.

NOTE:
Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection &amp; 
Maintenance (I/M).
&nbsp;Special Repair Requirement
1.CHECK VIN
Check the VIN of  ...
   	</p>
    [786] => <p><a href="accelerator_pedal_released_position_learning-786.html"><span>Accelerator pedal released position
learning</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Description 
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is a function of ECM to learn 
the fully released position of the
accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output 
signal. It must be performed each
time the harness connector of the accelerator pedal p ...
   	</p>
    [787] => <p><a href="throttle_valve_closed_position_learning-787.html"><span>Throttle valve closed position learning</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Description 
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is a function of ECM to learn the 
fully closed position of the throttle
valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be 
performed each time the harness connector
of electric throttle control actuator or ECM  ...
   	</p>
    [788] => <p><a href="idle_air_volume_learning-788.html"><span>Idle air volume learning</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Description 
Idle Air Volume Learning is a function of ECM to learn the idle air volume 
that keeps engine idle speed within
the specific range. It must be performed under the following conditions:
• Each time the electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.

• Idle speed o ...
   	</p>
    [789] => <p><a href="mixture_ratio_self_learning_value_clear-789.html"><span>Mixture ratio self-learning value
clear</span></a><br>
   	Description
This describes show to erase the mixture ratio self-learning value. For the 
actual procedure, follow the instructions
in “Diagnosis Procedure”.
Special Repair Requirement
1.START

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CO ...
   	</p>
    [791] => <p><a href="engine_control_system-791.html"><span>Engine control system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description
ECM performs various controls such as fuel injection control and ignition 
timing control.
Component Parts Location 

1. Power valve actuator 1
2. Intake valve timing control solenoid
valve (bank 1)
3. Power steering pressure sensor
4. Intake valve timi ...
   	</p>
    [792] => <p><a href="multiport_fuel_injection_system-792.html"><span>Multiport fuel injection system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description 
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal 
conditions.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM via the CAN communication line.

*3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed an ...
   	</p>
    [793] => <p><a href="electric_ignition_system-793.html"><span>Electric ignition system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

*1: This signal is sent to the ECM via the CAN communication line.

*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and 
battery voltage.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Ignition order: 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6
The ig ...
   	</p>
    [794] => <p><a href="air_conditioning_cut_control-794.html"><span>Air conditioning cut control</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description 
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

*1: This signal is sent to the ECM via the CAN communication line.

*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and 
battery voltage.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system improves engine operation when t ...
   	</p>
    [795] => <p><a href="automatic_speed_control_device_ascd_-795.html"><span>Automatic speed control device
(ASCD)</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

*: This signal is sent to the ECM via the CAN communication line
BASIC ASCD SYSTEM
Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions.

Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at 
predetermine ...
   	</p>
    [796] => <p><a href="can_communication-796.html"><span>Can communication</span></a><br>
   	System Description 
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time 
application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex
communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error 
detection ability. Many electronic
control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and ...
   	</p>
    [797] => <p><a href="cooling_fan_control-797.html"><span>Cooling fan control</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

*1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed 
and battery voltage.

*2: This signal is sent to ECM via the CAN communication line.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ECM controls the cooling fan correspondin ...
   	</p>
    [798] => <p><a href="electronic_controlled_engine_mount-798.html"><span>Electronic controlled engine
mount</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description 
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

*: This signal is sent to the ECM via the CAN communication line.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ECM controls the engine mount operation corresponding to the engine 
speed. The control system has a
2-step control [Soft/Hard]

ELECTRON ...
   	</p>
    [799] => <p><a href="evaporative_emission_system-799.html"><span>Evaporative emission system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description 
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

*1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and 
battery voltage.

*2: This signal is sent to the ECM via the CAN communication line.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The evaporative emission system is used to  ...
   	</p>
    [800] => <p><a href="intake_valve_timing_control-800.html"><span>Intake valve timing control</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description 
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

*: This signal is sent to the ECM via the CAN communication line
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed 
operating angle of the intake
valve.

The ECM receives signal ...
   	</p>
    [801] => <p><a href="variable_induction_air_system-801.html"><span>Variable induction air system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description 
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and 
battery voltage.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

In the medium speed range, the ECM sends the ON signal to the VIAS control 
solenoid valve. This signal
introdu ...
   	</p>
    [802] => <p><a href="on_board_diagnostic_obd_system-802.html"><span>On board diagnostic (OBD) System</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Description 
INTRODUCTION
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related 
to engine sensors or actuators.

The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:

The above information can be checked using procedures listed in  ...
   	</p>
    [804] => <p><a href="trouble_diagnosis_specification_value-804.html"><span>Trouble diagnosis - specification
value</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is 
displayed in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR”
mode of CONSULT-III during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When 
the value in “SPEC”
in “DATA MONITOR” mode is within the SP value, the En ...
   	</p>
    [805] => <p><a href="power_supply_and_ground_circuit-805.html"><span>Power supply and ground circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Check ground connection E9. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-45, &quot;Circuit 
Inspection&quot;.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2.

NO &gt;&gt; Repair or replace ground connection.
2.CHE ...
   	</p>
    [806] => <p><a href="u0101_can_comm_circuit-806.html"><span>U0101 can comm circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time 
application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex
communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error 
detection ability. Many electronic
control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each c ...
   	</p>
    [807] => <p><a href="u1001_can_comm_circuit-807.html"><span>U1001 can comm circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time 
application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex
communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error 
detection ability. Many electronic
control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each c ...
   	</p>
    [808] => <p><a href="p0011_p0021_ivt_control-808.html"><span>P0011, P0021 IVT control</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
If DTC P0011 or P0021 is displayed with DTC P0075 or P0081, first perform the 
trouble diagnosis for
DTC P0075, P0081. Refer to EC-1191, &quot;DTC Logic&quot;.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previousl ...
   	</p>
    [809] => <p><a href="p0031_p0032_p0051_p0052_a_f_sensor_1_heater-809.html"><span>P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F sensor 1
heater</span></a><br>
   	Description 
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding 
to the engine operating
condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element within the specified 
range.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECO ...
   	</p>
    [810] => <p><a href="p0037_p0038_p0057_p0058_ho2s2_heater-810.html"><span>P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 Heater</span></a><br>
   	Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater 
corresponding to the engine speed,
amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION

DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Co ...
   	</p>
    [811] => <p><a href="p0075_p0081_ivt_control_solenoid_valve-811.html"><span>P0075, P0081 IVT control solenoid
valve</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF
pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM.

The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil
amount and direction of flow via the intake valve timing control unit
or stops oil flow.

The longer pulse w ...
   	</p>
    [812] => <p><a href="p0101_maf_sensor-812.html"><span>P0101 Maf sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the
hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced as ...
   	</p>
    [813] => <p><a href="p0102_p0103_maf_sensor-813.html"><span>P0102, P0103 MAF sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the
hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced a ...
   	</p>
    [814] => <p><a href="p0112_p0113_iat_sensor-814.html"><span>P0112, P0113 IAT sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into the mass air flow sensor
(1). The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a
signal to the ECM.

The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the  ...
   	</p>
    [815] => <p><a href="p0116_ect_sensor-815.html"><span>P0116 ECT sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine
coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change i ...
   	</p>
    [816] => <p><a href="p0117_p0118_ect_sensor-816.html"><span>P0117, P0118 ECT sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine
coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in ...
   	</p>
    [817] => <p><a href="p0122_p0123_tp_sensor-817.html"><span>P0122, P0123 TP sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.

The throttle position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a
kind of potentiometer which transform the  ...
   	</p>
    [818] => <p><a href="p0125_ect_sensor-818.html"><span>P0125 ECT sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine
coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change i ...
   	</p>
    [819] => <p><a href="p0127_iat_sensor-819.html"><span>P0127 IAT sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into the mass air flow sensor
(1). The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a
signal to the ECM.

The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the  ...
   	</p>
    [820] => <p><a href="p0128_thermostat_function-820.html"><span>P0128 Thermostat function</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
If DTC P0128 is displayed with DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305 or 
P0306, first perform
the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306. 
Refer to EC-1283,
&quot;DTC Logic&quot;.

Engine coolant temperature has n ...
   	</p>
    [821] => <p><a href="p0130_p0150_a_f_sensor_1-821.html"><span>P0130, P0150 A/F sensor 1</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar one-cell limit current sensor.

The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is composed an electrode
layer, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.

The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and  ...
   	</p>
    [822] => <p><a href="p0131_p0151_a_f_sensor_1-822.html"><span>P0131, P0151 A/F sensor 1</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar one-cell limit current sensor.

The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is composed an electrode
layer, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.

The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and  ...
   	</p>
    [823] => <p><a href="p0132_p0152_a_f_sensor_1-823.html"><span>P0132, P0152 A/F sensor 1</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar one-cell limit current sensor.

The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is composed an electrode
layer, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.

The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and  ...
   	</p>
    [824] => <p><a href="p0133_p0153_a_f_sensor_1-824.html"><span>P0133, P0153 A/F sensor 1</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar one-cell limit current sensor.

The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is composed an electrode
layer, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.

The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and  ...
   	</p>
    [825] => <p><a href="p0137_p0157_ho2s2-825.html"><span>P0137, P0157 HO2S2</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),
monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.

Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal
from t ...
   	</p>
    [826] => <p><a href="p0138_p0158_ho2s2-826.html"><span>P0138, P0158 HO2S2</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),
monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.

Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal
from t ...
   	</p>
    [827] => <p><a href="p0139_p0159_ho2s2-827.html"><span>P0139, P0159 HO2S2</span></a><br>
   	Description
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),
monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.

Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal
from th ...
   	</p>
    [828] => <p><a href="p0171_p0174_fuel_injection_system_function-828.html"><span>P0171, P0174 Fuel injection system function</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture 
ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from A/F 
sensor 1. The ECM calculates
the necessary compensation to correct the off ...
   	</p>
    [829] => <p><a href="p0172_p0175_fuel_injection_system_function-829.html"><span>P0172, P0175 Fuel injection system function</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture 
ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from A/F 
sensor 1. The ECM calculates
the necessary compensation to correct the off ...
   	</p>
    [830] => <p><a href="p0181_ftt_sensor-830.html"><span>P0181 FTT sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature
inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from
the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature
input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in tem ...
   	</p>
    [831] => <p><a href="p0182_p0183_ftt_sensor-831.html"><span>P0182, P0183 FTT sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature
inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from
the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature
input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in tem ...
   	</p>
    [832] => <p><a href="p0222_p0223_tp_sensor-832.html"><span>P0222, P0223 TP sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.

The throttle position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a
kind of potentiometer which transform the t ...
   	</p>
    [833] => <p><a href="p0300_p0301_p0302_p0303_p0304_p0305_p0306_misfire-833.html"><span>P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 Misfire</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed 
fluctuates enough to cause the crankshaft
position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is 
occurring.

The misfire detection logic consists of the following t ...
   	</p>
    [834] => <p><a href="p0327_p0328_p0332_p0333_ks-834.html"><span>P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS</span></a><br>
   	Description
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking 
using a piezoelectric element. A
knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. 
This pressure is converted into a
voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECT ...
   	</p>
    [835] => <p><a href="p0335_ckp_sensor_pos_-835.html"><span>P0335 CKP sensor (POS)</span></a><br>
   	Description
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing
the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.

The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.

When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the  ...
   	</p>
    [836] => <p><a href="p0340_p0345_cmp_sensor_phase_-836.html"><span>P0340, P0345 CMP sensor (phase)</span></a><br>
   	Description
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion of
camshaft (INT) to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.

When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative,
the camshaft position sensor (PHAS ...
   	</p>
    [837] => <p><a href="p0420_p0430_three_way_catalyst_function-837.html"><span>P0420, P0430 Three way catalyst function</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2.

A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity
will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2.

As oxygen storage c ...
   	</p>
    [838] => <p><a href="p0441_evap_control_system-838.html"><span>P0441 Evap control system</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
If DTC P0441 is displayed with other DTC such as P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 or 
P2138, first perform
trouble diagnosis for other DTC.

In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during 
non-closed throttle conditions.

Purge vo ...
   	</p>
    [839] => <p><a href="p0442_evap_control_system-839.html"><span>P0442 Evap control system</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
This diagnosis detects leakage in the EVAP purge line using engine intake 
manifold vacuum.

If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leakage in the line 
between the fuel tank and EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve, under the followin ...
   	</p>
    [840] => <p><a href="p0443_evap_canister_purge_volume_control_solenoid_valve-840.html"><span>P0443 Evap canister purge volume control solenoid valve</span></a><br>
   	Description
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is used to
control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF
pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the
amount of fuel vapor th ...
   	</p>
    [841] => <p><a href="p0444_p0445_evap_canister_purge_volume_control_solenoid_valve-841.html"><span>P0444, P0445 Evap canister purge volume control solenoid valve</span></a><br>
   	Description
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is used to
control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF
pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the
amount of fuel vapor th ...
   	</p>
    [842] => <p><a href="p0447_evap_canister_vent_control_valve-842.html"><span>P0447 Evap canister vent control valve</span></a><br>
   	Description
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister
and is used to seal the canister vent.

This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized.

A plunger will then move to seal the ca ...
   	</p>
    [843] => <p><a href="p0448_evap_canister_vent_control_valve-843.html"><span>P0448 Evap canister vent control valve</span></a><br>
   	Description
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister
and is used to seal the canister vent.

This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized.

A plunger will then move to seal the ca ...
   	</p>
    [844] => <p><a href="p0451_evap_control_system_pressure_sensor-844.html"><span>P0451 Evap control system pressure sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the
purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure
increases.

DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously condu ...
   	</p>
    [845] => <p><a href="p0452_evap_control_system_pressure_sensor-845.html"><span>P0452 Evap control system pressure sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the
purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure
increases.

DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously condu ...
   	</p>
    [846] => <p><a href="p0453_evap_control_system_pressure_sensor-846.html"><span>P0453 Evap control system pressure sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the
purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure
increases.

DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously condu ...
   	</p>
    [847] => <p><a href="p0455_evap_control_system-847.html"><span>P0455 Evap control system</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
This diagnosis detects a very large leakage (fuel filler cap fell off etc.) 
in EVAP system between the fuel tank
and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.


CAUTION:
• Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect 
 ...
   	</p>
    [848] => <p><a href="p0456_evap_control_system-848.html"><span>P0456 Evap control system</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
If DTC P0456 is displayed with DTC P0442, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC P0456.

This diagnosis detects very small leakage in the EVAP line between fuel tank and 
EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve, using the negative pressure. ...
   	</p>
    [849] => <p><a href="p0460_fuel_level_sensor-849.html"><span>P0460 Fuel level sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit.

The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the 
combination meter. The combination
meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM via the CAN communication 
line.

It consists of ...
   	</p>
    [850] => <p><a href="p0461_fuel_level_sensor-850.html"><span>P0461 Fuel level sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit.

The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the 
combination meter. The combination
meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM via the CAN communication 
line.

It consists of ...
   	</p>
    [851] => <p><a href="p0462_p0463_fuel_level_sensor-851.html"><span>P0462, P0463 Fuel level sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit.

The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the 
combination meter. The combination
meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM via the CAN communication 
line.

It consists of ...
   	</p>
    [852] => <p><a href="p0500_vss-852.html"><span>P0500 VSS</span></a><br>
   	Description
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the “ABS 
actuator and electric unit (control
unit)” via the CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal 
to the ECM via the CAN
communication line.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• I ...
   	</p>
    [853] => <p><a href="p0506_isc_system-853.html"><span>P0506 ISC System</span></a><br>
   	Description
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level via the fine 
adjustment of the air, which is let into
the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The 
operating of the throttle valve is varied
to allow for optimum control of the engine idli ...
   	</p>
    [854] => <p><a href="p0507_isc_system-854.html"><span>P0507 ISC System</span></a><br>
   	Description
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level via the fine 
adjustment of the air, which is let into
the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The 
operating of the throttle valve is varied
to allow for optimum control of the engine idli ...
   	</p>
    [855] => <p><a href="p0550_psp_sensor-855.html"><span>P0550 PSP Sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering 
high-pressure tube and detects a
power steering load.

This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load into 
output voltage, and emits the
voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls t ...
   	</p>
    [856] => <p><a href="p0603_ecm_power_supply-856.html"><span>P0603 ECM Power supply</span></a><br>
   	Description
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch
is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the
air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air volume
learning value memory, etc.

DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATI ...
   	</p>
    [857] => <p><a href="p0605_ecm-857.html"><span>P0605 ECM</span></a><br>
   	Description
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine.

DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perf ...
   	</p>
    [858] => <p><a href="p0607_ecm-858.html"><span>P0607 ECM</span></a><br>
   	Description
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time 
application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex
communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error 
detection ability. Many electronic
control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each co ...
   	</p>
    [859] => <p><a href="p0643_sensor_power_supply-859.html"><span>P0643 Sensor power supply</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform 
the following before conducting
the next test.

1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

2. Turn ignition switch ON.
 ...
   	</p>
    [860] => <p><a href="p0850_pnp_switch-860.html"><span>P0850 PNP Switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
When the selector lever position is P or N, park/neutral position (PNP) 
signal from the TCM is sent to ECM
(CVT models).

When the selector lever position is Neutral position, park/neutral position 
(PNP) switch is ON. ECM detects the
position because the continuity of the line ( ...
   	</p>
    [862] => <p><a href="p1212_tcs_communication_line-862.html"><span>P1212 TCS Communication line</span></a><br>
   	Description
This CAN communication line is used to control the smooth engine operation 
during the TCS operation. Pulse
signals are exchanged between ECM and “ABS actuator and electric unit (control 
unit)”.

Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for “ABS 
ac ...
   	</p>
    [863] => <p><a href="p1217_engine_over_temperature-863.html"><span>P1217 Engine over temperature</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC P1217 is displayed with DTC UXXXX, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC UXXXX.

Refer to EC-1179, &quot;DTC Logic&quot;.

• If DTC P1217 is displayed with DTC P0607, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC P0607. Refer
to EC-137 ...
   	</p>
    [864] => <p><a href="p1225_tp_sensor-864.html"><span>P1225 TP Sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.

The throttle position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a
kind of potentiometer which transform the t ...
   	</p>
    [865] => <p><a href="p1226_tp_sensor-865.html"><span>P1226 TP Sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.

The throttle position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a
kind of potentiometer which transform the t ...
   	</p>
    [866] => <p><a href="p1421_cold_start_control-866.html"><span>P1421 Cold start control</span></a><br>
   	Description
ECM controls ignition timing and engine idle speed when engine is started 
with pre-warming up condition.

This control promotes the activation of three way catalyst by heating the 
catalyst and reduces emissions.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC P1421 is displayed ...
   	</p>
    [867] => <p><a href="p1550_battery_current_sensor-867.html"><span>P1550 Battery current sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to 
be decreased by reducing the
engine load which is caused by the power generation of the generator. The 
battery current sensor is installed
to the battery cable at the negative terminal. The sensor measures t ...
   	</p>
    [868] => <p><a href="p1551_p1552_battery_current_sensor-868.html"><span>P1551, P1552 Battery current sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to 
be decreased by reducing the
engine load which is caused by the power generation of the generator. The 
battery current sensor is installed
to the battery cable at the negative terminal. The sensor measures t ...
   	</p>
    [869] => <p><a href="p1553_battery_current_sensor-869.html"><span>P1553 Battery current sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to 
be decreased by reducing the
engine load which is caused by the power generation of the generator. The 
battery current sensor is installed
to the battery cable at the negative terminal. The sensor measures t ...
   	</p>
    [870] => <p><a href="p1554_battery_current_sensor-870.html"><span>P1554 Battery current sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to be 
decreased by reducing the
engine load which is caused by the power generation of the generator. The 
battery current sensor is installed
to the battery cable at the negative terminal. The sensor measures t ...
   	</p>
    [871] => <p><a href="p1564_ascd_steering_switch-871.html"><span>P1564 ASCD Steering switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each 
button. ECM reads voltage variation
of switch, and determines which button is operated.

Refer to EC-1090, &quot;System Diagram&quot; for the ASCD function.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
If DTC P156 ...
   	</p>
    [872] => <p><a href="p1572_ascd_brake_switch-872.html"><span>P1572 ASCD Brake switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop 
lamp switch is turned ON.

ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by those two types of input (ON/OFF 
signal).

Refer to EC-1090, &quot;System Diagram&quot; for the ASCD function.
DTC Logic
DTC DETEC ...
   	</p>
    [873] => <p><a href="p1574_ascd_vehicle_speed_sensor-873.html"><span>P1574 ASCD Vehicle speed sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The ECM receives two vehicle speed signals via the CAN communication line. 
One is sent from combination
meter, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses 
these signals for ASCD control.

Refer to EC-1090, &quot;System Diagram&quot; for ASCD functions.
 ...
   	</p>
    [875] => <p><a href="p1715_input_speed_sensor_primary_speed_sensor_-875.html"><span>P1715 Input speed sensor (primary speed sensor)</span></a><br>
   	Description
ECM receives primary speed sensor signal from TCM via the CAN communication 
line. ECM uses this signal
for engine control.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC UXXXX first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC UXXXX. Refer
to EC-1179, &quo ...
   	</p>
    [876] => <p><a href="p1720_vss-876.html"><span>P1720 VSS</span></a><br>
   	Description
ECM receives two vehicle speed signals via the CAN communication line. One is 
sent from “ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit)” via the combination meter, and the other is from 
TCM (Transmission control module).

ECM uses these signals for engine control.
DTC Logic
 ...
   	</p>
    [877] => <p><a href="p1800_vias_control_solenoid_valve_1-877.html"><span>P1800 Vias control solenoid valve 1</span></a><br>
   	Description
The VIAS control solenoid valve 1 cuts the intake manifold vacuum signal for 
power valve 1 control. It
responds to ON/OFF signals from the ECM. When the solenoid is OFF, the vacuum 
signal from the intake
manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil pulls the plunger 
 ...
   	</p>
    [878] => <p><a href="p1801_vias_control_solenoid_valve_2-878.html"><span>P1801 Vias control solenoid valve 2</span></a><br>
   	Description
The VIAS control solenoid valve 2 cuts the intake manifold vacuum signal for 
power valve 2 control. It
responds to ON/OFF signals from the ECM. When the solenoid is OFF, the vacuum 
signal from the intake
manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil pulls the plunger 
 ...
   	</p>
    [879] => <p><a href="p1805_brake_switch-879.html"><span>P1805 Brake switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM via the stop lamp switch when the 
brake pedal is depressed. This
signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is being 
driven.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION  ...
   	</p>
    [880] => <p><a href="p2100_p2103_throttle_control_motor_relay-880.html"><span>P2100, P2103 Throttle control motor relay</span></a><br>
   	Description
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via the 
throttle control motor relay. The throttle
control motor relay is controlled ON/OFF by the ECM. When the ignition switch is 
turned ON, the ECM
sends an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery  ...
   	</p>
    [881] => <p><a href="p2101_electric_throttle_control_function-881.html"><span>P2101 Electric throttle control function</span></a><br>
   	Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, 
throttle position sensor, etc.

The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the 
throttle valve.

The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle 
pos ...
   	</p>
    [882] => <p><a href="p2118_throttle_control_motor-882.html"><span>P2118 Throttle control motor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the 
throttle valve.

The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle 
position sensor. The throttle position
sensor it provides feedback to the ECM, when opens/closes the throttle ...
   	</p>
    [883] => <p><a href="p2119_electric_throttle_control_actuator-883.html"><span>P2119 Electric throttle control actuator</span></a><br>
   	Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, 
throttle position sensor, etc.

The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the 
throttle valve.

The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the 
openi ...
   	</p>
    [884] => <p><a href="p2122_p2123_app_sensor-884.html"><span>P2122, P2123 APP Sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator
position and sends a signal to the ECM.

Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometer which tran ...
   	</p>
    [885] => <p><a href="p2127_p2128_app_sensor-885.html"><span>P2127, P2128 APP Sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator
position and sends a signal to the ECM.

Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometer which tran ...
   	</p>
    [886] => <p><a href="p2135_tp_sensor-886.html"><span>P2135 TP sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.

The throttle position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a
kind of potentiometers which transform the  ...
   	</p>
    [887] => <p><a href="p2138_app_sensor-887.html"><span>P2138 APP sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator
position and sends a signal to the ECM.

Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometer which tran ...
   	</p>
    [888] => <p><a href="p2a00_p2a03_a_f_sensor_1-888.html"><span>P2A00, P2A03 A/F sensor 1</span></a><br>
   	Description
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar one-cell limit current sensor.

The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is composed an electrode
layer, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.

The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and r ...
   	</p>
    [889] => <p><a href="ascd_brake_switch-889.html"><span>ASCD Brake switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop 
lamp switch is turned ON.

ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by those two types of input (ON/OFF 
signal).

Refer to EC-1090, &quot;System Diagram&quot; for the ASCD function.
Component Function C ...
   	</p>
    [890] => <p><a href="ascd_indicator-890.html"><span>ASCD Indicator</span></a><br>
   	Description
The ASCD operation status is indicated by two indicators, (CRUISE and SET on 
the information display) on
the combination meter.

CRUISE indicator is displayed to indicate that ASCD system is ready for 
operation when MAIN switch on
ASCD steering switch is turned ON.

SET indica ...
   	</p>
    [891] => <p><a href="cooling_fan-891.html"><span>Cooling fan</span></a><br>
   	Description
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine 
coolant temperature, refrigerant
pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 4-step control 
[HIGH/MIDDLE/LOW/OFF].
COOLING FAN MOTOR
The cooling fan operates at each speed when the cur ...
   	</p>
    [892] => <p><a href="electrical_load_signal-892.html"><span>Electrical load signal</span></a><br>
   	Description
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, rear window defogger 
switch signal, etc.) is transferred via
the CAN communication.
Component Function Check
1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH FUNCTION
1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Connect CONSULT-III and select “DATA MO ...
   	</p>
    [893] => <p><a href="electronic_controlled_engine_mount-893.html"><span>Electronic controlled engine mount</span></a><br>
   	Description
The electronic controlled engine mount control solenoid valve controls the 
intake manifold vacuum signal for
electronic controlled engine mount. The electronic controlled engine mount 
control solenoid valve is moved by
ON/OFF signal from the ECM. When the solenoid is OFF, the vacu ...
   	</p>
    [894] => <p><a href="fuel_injector-894.html"><span>Fuel injector</span></a><br>
   	Description
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the fuel injector circuit, the coil in the fuel injector
is energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back and
allows fuel to flow via the fuel injector into the intake manifold. The
amo ...
   	</p>
    [895] => <p><a href="fuel_pump-895.html"><span>Fuel pump</span></a><br>
   	Description

*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and 
battery voltage.

The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is 
turned ON to improve engine
start ability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the camshaft ...
   	</p>
    [896] => <p><a href="ignition_signal-896.html"><span>Ignition signal</span></a><br>
   	Description
The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power 
transistor. The power transistor turns
ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the 
proper high voltage in the coil
secondary circuit.
Component Function Check
1.INSPECTION  ...
   	</p>
    [897] => <p><a href="malfunction_indicator_lamp-897.html"><span>Malfunction indicator lamp</span></a><br>
   	Description
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is located on the combination
meter.

The MIL will illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON without
the engine running. This is a bulb check.

When the engine is started, the MIL should turn off. If the MIL
remains illuminated, the on  ...
   	</p>
    [898] => <p><a href="on_board_refueling_vapor_recovery_orvr_-898.html"><span>On board refueling vapor recovery (ORVR)</span></a><br>
   	Description

From the beginning of refueling, the air and vapor inside the fuel tank go 
via the refueling EVAP vapor cut
valve and EVAP/ORVR line to the EVAP canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP 
canister and the air is
released to the atmosphere.

When the refueling has reached the  ...
   	</p>
    [899] => <p><a href="positive_crankcase_ventilation-899.html"><span>Positive crankcase ventilation</span></a><br>
   	Description

This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.

The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase 
blow-by gas to the intake
manifold.

During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the 
blow-by gas via the PCV ...
   	</p>
    [900] => <p><a href="refrigerant_pressure_sensor-900.html"><span>Refrigerant pressure sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the condenser of the air 
conditioner system. The sensor uses an
electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to 
voltage. The voltage signal is sent
to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.

Component ...
   	</p>
    [901] => <p><a href="variable_induction_air_system-901.html"><span>Variable induction air system</span></a><br>
   	Description
Power Valves 1 and 2
The power valves 1 and 2 are installed in intake manifold collector and used 
to control the suction passage of
the variable induction air control system. They are set in the fully closed or 
fully opened position by the power
valve actuators 1 and 2 operated b ...
   	</p>
    [902] => <p><a href="ecu_diagnosis-902.html"><span>ECU Diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	ECM
Reference Value
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL
Remarks:
&#9679; &nbsp;Specification data are reference 
values.

&#9679; &nbsp; Specification data are output/input 
values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.

* Specification data may not be directly related to the ...
   	</p>
    [904] => <p><a href="engine_control_system_symptoms-904.html"><span>Engine control system symptoms</span></a><br>
   	Symptom Table
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM


1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.

(continued on next page)
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL &amp; OTHER


1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. ...
   	</p>
    [905] => <p><a href="normal_operating_condition-905.html"><span>Normal operating condition</span></a><br>
   	Description
FUEL CUT CONTROL (AT NO LOAD AND HIGH ENGINE SPEED)
If the engine speed is above 1,400 rpm under no load (for example, the 
selector lever position is P or N and
engine speed is over 1,400 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact 
time when the fuel is cut off varies
ba ...
   	</p>
    [906] => <p><a href="precaution-906.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT 
PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [909] => <p><a href="fuel_pressure-909.html"><span>Fuel pressure</span></a><br>
   	Inspection
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.

3. Start engine.

4. After engine stalls, crank it 2 or 3 times to release all fuel pressure.

5. Turn ignition switch OFF.

1. Remove fuel ...
   	</p>
    [910] => <p><a href="evap_leak_check-910.html"><span>Evap leak check</span></a><br>
   	Inspection
CAUTION:
• Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.

• Never exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in EVAP system.

NOTE:
• Do not start engine.

• Improper installation of EVAP service port adapter (commercial service tool) 
to the EVAP service po ...
   	</p>
    [911] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_repair-911.html"><span>On-vehicle repair</span></a><br>
   	EVAP CANISTER
Exploded View

1. EVAP control system pressure sensor
2. EVAP canister
3. O-ring
4. EVAP canister vent control valve
5. O-ring
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Lift up the vehicle.

2. Remove EVAP canister fixing bolt.

3. Remove EVAP canister.

NOTE:
The EVAP canis ...
   	</p>
    [912] => <p><a href="service_data_and_specifications_sds_-912.html"><span>Service data and specifications (SDS)</span></a><br>
   	Idle Speed

*: Under the following conditions
• A/C switch: OFF
• Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan &amp; rear window defogger)
• Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position
Ignition Timing

*: Under the following conditions
• A/C switch: OFF
• Electric load: OFF (Lights ...
   	</p>
    [914] => <p><a href="precaution-914.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT 
PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [916] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_maintenance-916.html"><span>On-vehicle maintenance</span></a><br>
   	FUEL SYSTEM
Inspection 
Inspect fuel lines, fuel filler cap and fuel tank for improper attachment,
leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or deterioration.

If necessary, repair or replace damaged parts.

Quick Connector
CAUTION:
• After connecting fuel tube quick connectors, m ...
   	</p>
    [918] => <p><a href="fuel_level_sensor_unit_fuel_filter_and_fuel_pump_assembly-918.html"><span>Fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter
and fuel pump assembly</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 

1. Lock ring
2. Fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter and
fuel pump assembly
3. O-ring
4. Fuel Tank
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Read “General Precautions” before working on the fuel system.
Refer to GI-28, &quot;General Precautions&quot;.

1. Unscrew the  ...
   	</p>
    [919] => <p><a href="fuel_tank-919.html"><span>Fuel tank</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 

1. Lock ring
2. Fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel
pump assembly
3. Seal ring
4. Fuel tank mounting straps
5. Fuel tank protector
6. Fuel tank
7. Fuel filler hose
8. Fuel filler hose
9. Grommet
10. Fuel filler cap
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Read � ...
   	</p>
    [922] => <p><a href="precaution-922.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [925] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_repair-925.html"><span>On-vehicle repair</span></a><br>
   	EXHAUST SYSTEM (QR25DE) 
Exploded View 

1. RH rear muffler bracket
2. Gasket
3. Front exhaust tube
4. Ring gasket
5. Front exhaust tube hanger
6. Center exhaust tube
7. Mounting rubber
8. Center exhaust tube hanger
9. Gasket
10. Mounting rubber
11. Rear muffler
12. LH muffler tip
13. ...
   	</p>
    [927] => <p><a href="precaution-927.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [930] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_repair-930.html"><span>On-vehicle repair</span></a><br>
   	EXHAUST SYSTEM (VQ35DE)
Exploded View

1. RH rear muffler bracket
2. Gasket
3. Front exhaust tube
4. Ring gasket
5. Front exhaust tube hanger
6. Center exhaust tube
7. Mounting rubber
8. Center exhaust tube hanger
9. Gasket
10. Mounting rubber
11. Rear muffler
12. LH muffler tip
13. R ...
   	</p>
    [932] => <p><a href="basic_inspection-932.html"><span>Basic inspection</span></a><br>
   	DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Work Flow
OVERALL SEQUENCE

DETAILED FLOW
NOTE:
To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter motor and 
alternator test segments must be
done as a set from start to finish.
1.DIAGNOSIS WITH STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEM TESTER
Perform the start ...
   	</p>
    [935] => <p><a href="b_terminal_circuit-935.html"><span>B terminal circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description
The “B” terminal is constantly supplied with battery power.
Diagnosis Procedure
CAUTION:
Perform diagnosis under the condition that the engine cannot start by the 
following procedure.

1. Remove fuel pump fuse.

2. Crank or start the engine (where possible) until the fuel p ...
   	</p>
    [936] => <p><a href="s_connector_circuit-936.html"><span>S connector circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description
The starter motor magnetic switch is supplied with power when the ignition 
switch is turned to the START position
while the selector lever is in the P or N position (CVT models) or the clutch 
pedal is fully depressed (M/T
models).
Diagnosis Procedure
CAUTION:
Perform diagnosis  ...
   	</p>
    [937] => <p><a href="starting_system-937.html"><span>Starting system</span></a><br>
   	Wiring Diagram - Coupe 






Wiring Diagram - Sedan





 ...
   	</p>
    [939] => <p><a href="precaution-939.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [941] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_repair-941.html"><span>On-vehicle repair</span></a><br>
   	STARTER MOTOR
Removal and Installation
M/T MODELS
Removal
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal.

2. Disconnect the starter motor harness connectors.

3. Remove the two starter motor bolts, using power tools.

4. Remove the starter motor.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse ...
   	</p>
    [944] => <p><a href="basic_inspection-944.html"><span>Basic inspection</span></a><br>
   	DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Work Flow
OVERALL SEQUENCE

DETAILED FLOW
NOTE:
To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter motor and 
alternator test segments must be
done as a set from start to finish.
1.DIAGNOSIS WITH STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEM TESTER
Perform the start ...
   	</p>
    [947] => <p><a href="b_terminal_circuit-947.html"><span>B terminal circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description
The “B” terminal is constantly supplied with battery power.
Diagnosis Procedure
CAUTION:
Perform diagnosis under the condition that the engine cannot start by the 
following procedure.

1. Remove fuel pump fuse.

2. Crank or start the engine (where possible) until the fuel p ...
   	</p>
    [948] => <p><a href="s_connector_circuit-948.html"><span>S connector circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The starter motor magnetic switch is supplied with power when the ignition 
switch is turned to the START position
while the selector lever is in the P or N position (CVT models) or the clutch 
pedal is fully depressed (M/T
models).
Diagnosis Procedure
CAUTION:
Perform diagnosis ...
   	</p>
    [949] => <p><a href="starting_system-949.html"><span>Starting system</span></a><br>
   	Wiring Diagram - Coupe 






Wiring Diagram - Sedan





 ...
   	</p>
    [951] => <p><a href="precaution-951.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [953] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_repair-953.html"><span>On-vehicle repair</span></a><br>
   	STARTER MOTOR 
Removal and Installation 
M/T Models
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal.

2. Disconnect the starter motor harness connectors.

3. Remove the two starter motor bolts, using power tools.

4. Remove the starter motor.

INSTALLATION
1. Installation is in the  ...
   	</p>
    [956] => <p><a href="precaution-956.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [957] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_repair-957.html"><span>On-vehicle repair</span></a><br>
   	ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM 
Exploded View

1. Accelerator pedal and accelerator
position sensor assembly.
2. Locating pins

Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.

2. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector.

3. Remove the t ...
   	</p>
    [961] => <p><a href="precaution-961.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [964] => <p><a href="clutch_pedal-964.html"><span>Clutch pedal</span></a><br>
   	Inspection and Adjustment
1. Check to see if the master cylinder rod end moves freely. It
should not be bound by the clutch pedal.

• If the rod end does not move freely, remove the rod end and
check for deformation or damage on the rod end. Leave the
rod end removed for step 2.

2. Check  ...
   	</p>
    [965] => <p><a href="clutch_fluid-965.html"><span>Clutch fluid</span></a><br>
   	Air Bleeding Procedure
CAUTION:
Do not spill clutch fluid onto painted surfaces. If it spills, wipe up 
immediately and wash the affected
area with water.
NOTE:
• Do not use a vacuum assist or any other type of power bleeder on this system. 
Use of vacuum assist or
power bleeder will not p ...
   	</p>
    [967] => <p><a href="clutch_pedal-967.html"><span>Clutch pedal</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 

1. Clutch pedal assembly
2. Clutch interlock switch
3. ASCD clutch switch
4. Lock nut
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect master cylinder rod end from clutch pedal lever.

2. Disconnect the ASCD clutch switch and clutch interlock switch
harness connectors.

3. ...
   	</p>
    [968] => <p><a href="clutch_master_cylinder-968.html"><span>Clutch master cylinder</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner and air duct. Refer to EM-19, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot; for QR25DE and EM-
123, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot; for VQ35DE.

2. Use one of the following methods to remove hose from master cylinder.

• Drain clutch  ...
   	</p>
    [969] => <p><a href="clutch_piping-969.html"><span>Clutch piping</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 

1. Clutch tube
2. CSC connector
3. Lock pin
4. CSC
5. Air bleed connector valve
6. Clutch pedal
7. Clutch master cylinder
8. Clutch master cylinder connector
9. Branch connector
Removal and Installation
CAUTION:
Do not spill clutch fluid onto painted surfaces. If it spil ...
   	</p>
    [971] => <p><a href="csc_concentric_slave_cylinder_-971.html"><span>CSC (Concentric slave cylinder)</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 

1. Transaxle assembly
2. CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder)
Removal and Installation
CAUTION:
• If transaxle assembly is removed from the vehicle, always replace CSC. Return 
CSC insert to original
position to remove transaxle assembly. Dust on clutch disc sliding parts may 
 ...
   	</p>
    [972] => <p><a href="clutch_disc_and_clutch_cover-972.html"><span>Clutch disc and clutch cover</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 

1. Flywheel
2. Clutch disc
3. Clutch cover

1. Flywheel
2. Clutch disc *1, *2
3. Clutch cover
A. First step
B. Final Step
 Apply lithium-based grease 
including molybdenum disulphide
*1. Do not clean in solvent. *2. When installing, be careful that grease 
applied to in ...
   	</p>
    [975] => <p><a href="function_diagnosis-975.html"><span>Function diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	M/T SYSTEM
System Diagram
CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW

1. Transaxle case
2. 3rd input gear
3. 3rd-4th synchronizer hub
4. 3rd-4th coupling sleeve
5. 4th input gear
6. 5th input gear
7. 5th-6th synchronizer hub
8. 5th-6th coupling sleeve
9. 6th input gear
10. Input shaft rear bearing
11. Mains ...
   	</p>
    [977] => <p><a href="precaution-977.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [978] => <p><a href="preparation-978.html"><span>Preparation</span></a><br>
   	Special Service Tools
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special 
service tools illustrated here.



Commercial Service Tools

 ...
   	</p>
    [979] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_maintenance-979.html"><span>On-vehicle maintenance</span></a><br>
   	M/T OIL
Draining 
1. Start engine and let it run to warm up transaxle oil.

2. Stop engine and remove the drain plug to drain the oil.

3. Install the drain plug with a new gasket to the transaxle case. Tighten the 
drain plug to the specified
torque. Refer to TM-28, &quot;Exploded View&quot ...
   	</p>
    [981] => <p><a href="side_oil_seal-981.html"><span>Side oil seal</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the drive shaft. Refer to FAX-11, &quot;Removal and Installation (Left 
Side)&quot;, FAX-12, &quot;Removal and
Installation (Right Side)&quot;.

2. Remove oil seal using suitable tool.

CAUTION:
Do not damage the transaxle case surface when removin ...
   	</p>
    [984] => <p><a href="control_linkage-984.html"><span>Control linkage</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 

1. Control lever knob
2. Control lever
3. Control device assembly
4. Retainer grommet
5. Select cable
6. Shift cable
7. Lock plate
8. Cable bracket
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Shift control lever to the neutral position.

2. Remove the air filter assembly. Refer ...
   	</p>
    [985] => <p><a href="air_breather_hose-985.html"><span>Air breather hose</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View

1. Clip
2. Air cleaner case
3. Transaxle assembly
4. Clip
5. Air breather hose
A. Set paint mark and clip at front side


1. Air cleaner case
2. Transaxle assembly
3. Clip
4. Air breather hose
5. Clip
A. Set paint mark and clip at front side

Removal and Installation
 ...
   	</p>
    [986] => <p><a href="removal_and_installation-986.html"><span>Removal and installation</span></a><br>
   	TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
Exploded View

1. Transaxle assembly
2. LH engine mounting bracket
A. Refer to TM-26, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot;
Removal and Installation
CAUTON:
If transaxle assembly is removed from the vehicle, always replace CSC 
(Concentric Slave Cylinder).

Inserted CSC  ...
   	</p>
    [988] => <p><a href="transaxle_assembly-988.html"><span>Transaxle assembly</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View
CASE AND HOUSING

1. Differential side oil seal
2. Clutch housing
3. Input shaft oil seal
4. Oil channel
5. Oil gutter A
6. Back-up lamp switch
7. Plunger
8. Gasket
9. Plug
10. Bore plug
11. Striking rod oil seal
12. Transaxle case
13. Oil gutter B
14. Air breather tube ...
   	</p>
    [989] => <p><a href="input_shaft_and_gear-989.html"><span>Input shaft and gear</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 
Refer to TM-28, &quot;Exploded View&quot;.
Disassembly 
1. Before disassembling, measure end play for 3rd, 4th, 5th, and
6th input gears.
End play standard value : Refer to TM-83, &quot;End Play&quot;.
2. Remove oil channel.

3. Press out input shaft rear bearing using Tool an ...
   	</p>
    [990] => <p><a href="mainshaft_and_gear-990.html"><span>Mainshaft AND Gear</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 
Refer to TM-28, &quot;Exploded View&quot;.
Disassembly 
1. Before disassembling, measure the end play of 1st and 2nd
main gears.
End play standard value : Refer to TM-83, &quot;End Play&quot;.

2. Remove snap ring.

3. Remove C-ring holder and then remove mainshaft C-ring.

 ...
   	</p>
    [991] => <p><a href="reverse_idler_shaft_and_gear-991.html"><span>Reverse idler shaft and gear</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View
Refer to TM-28, &quot;Exploded View&quot;.
Disassembly 
1. Remove reverse idler gear (Rear), reverse coupling sleeve, and reverse 
insert spring simultaneously.

2. Remove reverse idler gear needle bearing.

3. Remove thrust needle bearing.

4. Remove reverse baulk ring.

5 ...
   	</p>
    [992] => <p><a href="final_drive-992.html"><span>Final drive</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 
Refer to TM-28, &quot;Exploded View&quot;.
Disassembly 
1. Remove final gear mounting bolts and then separate the final gear from 
differential case.

2. Remove differential side bearing (clutch housing side) using
Tool and pullers (B).
Tool number : ST33061000 (J-8107-2)

C ...
   	</p>
    [993] => <p><a href="shift_fork_and_fork_rod-993.html"><span>Shift fork and fork rod</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 
Refer to TM-28, &quot;Exploded View&quot;.
Disassembly 
1. Remove return spring to striking rod assembly.

Assembly 
1. Temporarily install return spring to striking rod assembly.

CAUTION:
Be careful with the orientation of return spring.

2. Attach one end of the return s ...
   	</p>
    [994] => <p><a href="service_data_and_specifications_sds_-994.html"><span>Service data and specifications
(SDS)</span></a><br>
   	General Specifications 
TRANSAXLE

FINAL GEAR

End Play 

Baulk Ring Clearance


Dimension 
Differential Side Bearing Preload 

Differential Side Gear Clearance
 ...
   	</p>
    [997] => <p><a href="diagnosis_and_repair_workflow-997.html"><span>Diagnosis and repair workflow</span></a><br>
   	Work Flow 
INTRODUCTION
The TCM receives a signal from the vehicle speed sensor, PNP switch and 
provides shift control or lock-up
control via CVT solenoid valves.

The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of a signal
sent from sensing elements used with the OBD-related parts of the
C ...
   	</p>
    [998] => <p><a href="inspection_and_adjustment-998.html"><span>Inspection and adjustment</span></a><br>
   	ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
CONTROL UNIT
Precaution for TCM and CVT
Assembly Replacement
CAUTION:
• Check if new data (Unit ID) are entered correctly after replacing CVT assembly 
and erasing data in
TCM. (Connect CONSULT-III, and then turn ignition switch OFF.)
• When replacing CV ...
   	</p>
    [1000] => <p><a href="cvt_system-1000.html"><span>CVT system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

Component Parts Location - Coupe

1. Control device assembly (Manual
mode select switch and manual
mode position select switch)
2. Accelerator pedal position (APP)
sensor
3. Secondary speed sensor
4. CVT unit harness connector
5. TCM
6. Battery
7. Shift position indicato ...
   	</p>
    [1001] => <p><a href="mechanical_system-1001.html"><span>Mechanical system</span></a><br>
   	Cross-Sectional View

1. Converter housing
2. Oil pump
3. Forward clutch
4. Reverse brake
5. Planetary carrier
6. Primary pulley
7. Steel belt
8. Sun gear
9. Side cover
10. Internal gear
11. Secondary pulley
12. Final gear
13. Differential case
14. Idler gear
15. Reduction gear
16.  ...
   	</p>
    [1002] => <p><a href="hydraulic_control_system-1002.html"><span>Hydraulic control system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description
The hydraulic control mechanism consists of the oil pump directly driven by 
the engine, the hydraulic control
valve that controls line pressure and transmission, and the input signal line.
LINE PRESSURE AND SECONDARY PRESSURE CONTROL
• When an input torq ...
   	</p>
    [1003] => <p><a href="control_system-1003.html"><span>Control system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description
The CVT senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors. It 
always controls the optimum shift
position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks.
CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE
The function of the TCM is to:
• Receive input signals sent from various s ...
   	</p>
    [1004] => <p><a href="lock_up_and_select_control_system-1004.html"><span>Lock-up and select control system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description
• The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is engaged to 
eliminate torque converter slip to
increase power transmission efficiency.

• The torque converter clutch control valve operation is controlled by the 
torque converter clutch s ...
   	</p>
    [1005] => <p><a href="shift_mechanism-1005.html"><span>Shift mechanism</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

NOTE:
The gear ratio is set for every position separately.
System Description
In order to select the gear ratio which can obtain the driving force in 
accordance with driver's intention and the
vehicle condition, TCM monitors the driving conditions, such as the vehicle 
spee ...
   	</p>
    [1006] => <p><a href="shift_lock_system-1006.html"><span>Shift lock system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description
The selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” position to any other position 
unless the ignition switch is in the
ON position and the brake pedal is depressed.
Component Parts Location

1. BCM (view with instrument panel removed
2. Steering column
3. ...
   	</p>
    [1007] => <p><a href="on_board_diagnostic_obd_system-1007.html"><span>On board diagnostic (OBD) system</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Description 
DESCRIPTION
The CVT system has two self-diagnostic systems.

The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD-II) performed 
by the TCM in combination
with the ECM. The malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator 
lamp) and is stored as a ...
   	</p>
    [1008] => <p><a href="diagnosis_system_tcm_-1008.html"><span>Diagnosis system (TCM)</span></a><br>
   	CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION) 
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes 
shown below.
FUNCTION

WORK SUPPORT MODE
Display Item List

Engine Brake Adjustment

CAUTION:
Mode of “+1”“0”“&#8722;1”“&#8722;2”“OFF” can be selected by  ...
   	</p>
    [1010] => <p><a href="u1000_can_comm_circuit-1010.html"><span>U1000 CAn comm circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time 
application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex
communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction 
detection ability.

Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and ...
   	</p>
    [1011] => <p><a href="p0615_start_signal-1011.html"><span>P0615 start signal</span></a><br>
   	Description 
• TCM controls starter relay in IPDM E/R.

• TCM switches starter relay ON at “P” or “N” position and allows to crank 
engine.

• Then it prohibits cranking other than at “P” or “N” position.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUT ...
   	</p>
    [1012] => <p><a href="p0703_stop_lamp_switch-1012.html"><span>P0703 stop lamp switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
BCM detects ON/OFF state of the stop lamp switch and transmits the data to 
the TCM via CAN communication
by converting the data to a signal.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION  ...
   	</p>
    [1013] => <p><a href="p0705_park_neutral_position_switch-1013.html"><span>P0705 park/neutral position switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
• The PNP switch is included in the control valve assembly.

• The PNP switch includes 4 transmission position switches.

• TCM judges the selector lever position by the PNP switch signal.

DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive ...
   	</p>
    [1014] => <p><a href="p0710_cvt_fluid_temperature_sensor-1014.html"><span>P0710 cvt fluid temperature sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The CVT fluid temperature sensor detects the CVT fluid temperature and sends 
a signal to the TCM.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, ...
   	</p>
    [1015] => <p><a href="p0715_input_speed_sensor_pri_speed_sensor_-1015.html"><span>P0715 input speed sensor (pri speed
sensor)</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The input speed sensor (primary speed sensor) detects the primary pulley 
revolution speed and sends a signal
to the TCM.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has be ...
   	</p>
    [1016] => <p><a href="p0720_vehicle_speed_sensor_cvt_secondary_speed_sensor_-1016.html"><span>P0720 vehicle speed sensor cvt (secondary
speed sensor)</span></a><br>
   	Description
The vehicle speed sensor CVT [output speed sensor (secondary speed sensor)] 
detects the revolution of the
CVT output shaft and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal is sent to the TCM, 
which converts it into vehicle
speed.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCE ...
   	</p>
    [1017] => <p><a href="p0725_engine_speed_signal-1017.html"><span>P0725 engine speed signal</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The engine speed signal is sent from the ECM to the TCM by CAN communication 
line.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn 
i ...
   	</p>
    [1018] => <p><a href="p0730_belt_damage-1018.html"><span>P0730 belt damage</span></a><br>
   	Description 
TCM selects the gear ratio using the engine load (throttle position), the 
primary pulley revolution speed, and
the secondary pulley revolution speed as input signal. Then it changes the 
operating pressure of the primary
pulley and the secondary pulley and changes the groove width ...
   	</p>
    [1019] => <p><a href="p0740_torque_converter_clutch_solenoid_valve-1019.html"><span>P0740 torque converter clutch solenoid
valve</span></a><br>
   	Description
• The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated by the TCM in 
response to signals sent from the vehicle
speed and accelerator pedal position sensors. Lock-up piston operation will then 
be controlled.

• Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when CVT fluid temper ...
   	</p>
    [1020] => <p><a href="p0744_a_t_tcc_s_v_function_lock_up_-1020.html"><span>P0744 a/t tcc s/v function (lock -up)</span></a><br>
   	Description 
This malfunction is detected when the torque converter clutch does not 
lock-up as instructed by the TCM. This
is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted), but 
also by mechanical malfunction such
as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operat ...
   	</p>
    [1021] => <p><a href="p0745_line_pressure_solenoid_valve-1021.html"><span>P0745 line pressure solenoid valve</span></a><br>
   	Description
The pressure control solenoid valve A (line pressure solenoid valve) 
regulates the oil pump discharge pressure
to suit the driving condition in response to a signal sent from the TCM.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCED ...
   	</p>
    [1022] => <p><a href="p0746_pressure_control_solenoid_a_performance_line_pressure_solenoid_valve_-1022.html"><span>P0746 pressure control solenoid A
performance (line pressure solenoid
valve)</span></a><br>
   	Description
The pressure control solenoid valve A (line pressure solenoid valve) 
regulates the oil pump discharge pressure
to suit the driving condition in response to a signal sent from the TCM.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a s ...
   	</p>
    [1023] => <p><a href="p0776_pressure_control_solenoid_b_performance_sec_pressure_solenoid_valve_-1023.html"><span>P0776 pressure control solenoid B
performance (sec pressure solenoid
valve)</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The pressure control solenoid valve B (secondary pressure solenoid valve) 
regulates the secondary pressure
to suit the driving condition in response to a signal sent from the TCM.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a saf ...
   	</p>
    [1024] => <p><a href="p0778_pressure_control_solenoid_b_electrical_sec_pressure_solenoid_valve_-1024.html"><span>P0778 pressure control solenoid B
electrical (sec pressure solenoid
valve)</span></a><br>
   	Description
The pressure control solenoid valve B (secondary pressure solenoid valve) 
regulates the oil pump discharge
pressure to suit the driving condition in response to a signal sent from the TCM.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle a ...
   	</p>
    [1025] => <p><a href="p0826_manual_mode_switch-1025.html"><span>P0826 manual mode switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
Manual mode switch is installed in CVT control device. The manual mode switch 
sends shift up and shift down
switch signals to TCM.

TCM sends the switch signals to combination meter via CAN communication line. 
Then manual mode switch
position is indicated on the CVT position ind ...
   	</p>
    [1026] => <p><a href="p0840_transmission_fluid_pressure_sensor_a_sec_pressure_sensor_-1026.html"><span>P0840 transmission fluid pressure
sensor A (sec pressure sensor)</span></a><br>
   	Description
The transmission fluid pressure sensor A (secondary pressure sensor) detects 
secondary pressure of CVT
and sends TCM the signal.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn 
igni ...
   	</p>
    [1027] => <p><a href="p0841_pressure_sensor_function-1027.html"><span>P0841 pressure sensor function</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Using the engine load (throttle position), the primary pulley revolution 
speed, and the secondary pulley revolution
speed as input signal, TCM changes the operating pressure of the primary pulley 
and the secondary pulley
and changes the groove width of the pulley to control the g ...
   	</p>
    [1028] => <p><a href="p0845_transmission_fluid_pressure_sensor_b_pri_pressure_sensor_-1028.html"><span>P0845 transmission fluid pressure
sensor B (pri pressure sensor)</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The transmission fluid pressure sensor B (primary pressure sensor) detects 
primary pressure of CVT and
sends TCM the signal.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn 
igniti ...
   	</p>
    [1029] => <p><a href="p0868_secondary_pressure_down-1029.html"><span>P0868 secondary pressure down</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The pressure control solenoid valve B (secondary pressure solenoid valve) 
regulates the secondary pressure
to suit the driving condition in response to a signal sent from the TCM.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe ...
   	</p>
    [1030] => <p><a href="p1701_transmission_control_module_power_supply_-1030.html"><span>P1701 transmission control module
(power supply)</span></a><br>
   	Description 
When the power supply to the TCM is cut OFF, for example because the battery 
is removed, and the self-diagnosis
memory function stops, malfunction is detected.

NOTE:
Since “P1701 TCM-POWER SUPPLY” will be indicated when replacing TCM, perform 
diagnosis after erasing
“SE ...
   	</p>
    [1031] => <p><a href="p1705_throttle_position_sensor-1031.html"><span>P1705 throttle position sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, 
accelerator pedal position sensor, throttle
position sensor etc. The actuator sends a signal to the ECM, and ECM sends the 
signal to TCM with CAN
communication.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMAT ...
   	</p>
    [1032] => <p><a href="p1722_estm_vehicle_speed_signal-1032.html"><span>P1722 Estm vehicle speed signal</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The vehicle speed signal is transmitted from ABS actuator and electric unit 
(control unit) to TCM by CAN communication
line.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has ...
   	</p>
    [1033] => <p><a href="p1723_cvt_speed_sensor_function-1033.html"><span>P1723 CVT speed sensor function</span></a><br>
   	Description
The vehicle speed sensor CVT [output speed sensor (secondary speed sensor)] 
detects the revolution of
parking gear and generates a pulse signal. The pulse signal is sent to the TCM, 
which converts it into vehicle
speed.

The input speed sensor (primary speed sensor) detects the  ...
   	</p>
    [1034] => <p><a href="p1726_electric_throttle_control_system-1034.html"><span>P1726 electric throttle control
system</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, 
accelerator pedal position sensor, throttle
position sensor etc. The actuator sends a signal to the ECM, and ECM sends the 
signal to TCM with CAN
communication.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMAT ...
   	</p>
    [1035] => <p><a href="p1740_lock_up_select_solenoid_valve-1035.html"><span>P1740 lock-up select solenoid
valve</span></a><br>
   	Description 
• Lock-up select solenoid valve controls lock-up clutch pressure or forward 
clutch pressure (reverse brake
pressure).

• When controlling lock-up clutch, the valve is turned OFF. When controlling 
forward clutch, it is turned ON.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIR ...
   	</p>
    [1036] => <p><a href="p1745_line_pressure_control-1036.html"><span>P1745 line pressure control</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The pressure control solenoid valve A (line pressure solenoid valve) 
regulates the oil pump discharge pressure
to suit the driving condition in response to a signal sent from the TCM.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCE ...
   	</p>
    [1037] => <p><a href="p1777_step_motor-1037.html"><span>P1777 step motor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The step motor changes the step with turning 4 coils ON/OFF according to the 
signal from TCM. As a result,
the flow of line pressure to primary pulley is changed and pulley ratio is 
controlled.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive  ...
   	</p>
    [1038] => <p><a href="p1778_step_motor_function-1038.html"><span>P1778 step motor - function</span></a><br>
   	Description
• The step motor's 4 aspects of ON/OFF change according to the signal from 
TCM. As a result, the flow of line
pressure to primary pulley is changed and pulley ratio is controlled.

• This diagnosis item is detected when electrical system is OK, but mechanical 
system is NG.

 ...
   	</p>
    [1039] => <p><a href="shift_lock_system-1039.html"><span>Shift lock system</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” position to any other position 
unless the ignition switch is in the
ON position and the brake pedal is depressed.
Wiring Diagram - CVT SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM -
Coupe



Wiring Diagram - CVT SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM -
Sedan



Diagnosi ...
   	</p>
    [1040] => <p><a href="ecu_diagnosis-1040.html"><span>Ecu diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	TCM
Reference Value 
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL



* Means CVT fluid temperature. Actual oil temperature °C (°F) cannot be 
checked unless a numeric value is converted. Refer to TM-237,
&quot;ATFTEMP COUNT Conversion Table&quot;.
TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES



*1: A circuit t ...
   	</p>
    [1041] => <p><a href="symptom_diagnosis-1041.html"><span>Symptom diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	SYSTEM SYMPTOM 
Symptom Table
The diagnostics item numbers show the sequence for inspection. Inspect in 
order from item 1.










 ...
   	</p>
    [1042] => <p><a href="precaution-1042.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [1045] => <p><a href="cvt_fluid-1045.html"><span>CVT Fluid</span></a><br>
   	Inspection
CHECKING CVT FLUID
Fluid level should be checked with the fluid warmed up to 50 to 80°C (122 to 
176°F). The fluid level check procedure
is as follows:
1. Check for fluid leakage.

2. With the engine warmed up, drive the vehicle in an urban area.

When ambient temperature is 20 ...
   	</p>
    [1046] => <p><a href="fluid_cooler_cleaning-1046.html"><span>Fluid cooler cleaning</span></a><br>
   	Cleaning 
Whenever an automatic transaxle is repaired, overhauled, or replaced, the CVT 
fluid cooler mounted in the
radiator must be inspected and cleaned.

Metal debris and friction material, if present, can be trapped or become deposit 
in the CVT fluid cooler. This
debris can contaminate  ...
   	</p>
    [1047] => <p><a href="stall_test-1047.html"><span>Stall test</span></a><br>
   	Inspection and Judgment
INSPECTION
1. Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary.

2. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the
CVT fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). Inspect the
amount of CVT fluid. Replenish if necessary.

3.  ...
   	</p>
    [1048] => <p><a href="line_pressure_test-1048.html"><span>Line pressure test</span></a><br>
   	Inspection and Judgment 
INSPECTION
Line Pressure Test Port

Line Pressure Test Procedure
1. Inspect the amount of engine oil and replenish if necessary.

2. Drive the car for about 10 minutes to warm it up so that the CVT fluid 
reaches in the range of 50 to 80°C
(122 to 176°F), then ins ...
   	</p>
    [1049] => <p><a href="road_test-1049.html"><span>Road test</span></a><br>
   	Description
DESCRIPTION
• The purpose of the test is to determine overall performance of CVT
and analyze causes of problems.

• The road test consists of the following three parts:
1. “Check Before Engine Is Started” TM-249.

2. “Check at Idle” TM-250.

3. “Cruise Test” TM- ...
   	</p>
    [1050] => <p><a href="cvt_position-1050.html"><span>CVT Position</span></a><br>
   	Inspection and Adjustment
INSPECTION
1. Place selector lever in “P” position, and turn ignition switch ON (engine 
stop).

2. Make sure that selector lever can be shifted to other than “P” position when 
brake pedal is depressed.

Also make sure that selector lever can be shifted fro ...
   	</p>
    [1051] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_repair-1051.html"><span>On-vehicle repair</span></a><br>
   	TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE 
Exploded View

1. TCM
2. Bracket
3. Battery

Removal and Installation 
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. Refer to PG-139, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;.

2. Remove the fresh air intake tube (upper) EM-25, &quot;Removal and Installat ...
   	</p>
    [1052] => <p><a href="control_device-1052.html"><span>Control device</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View

1. Control lever knob
2. Lock pin
3. Knob cover
4. Control device selector plate
5. Control device assembly
Removal and Installation 
REMOVAL
1. Remove the center console assembly. Refer to IP-18, &quot;Disassembly and 
Assembly&quot;.

2. Disconnect the control cable from ...
   	</p>
    [1053] => <p><a href="control_cable-1053.html"><span>Control cable</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 

1. Control lever
2. Control device assembly
3. Control cable socket
4. Retainer grommet
5. Control cable
6. Bracket
7. Lock plate
8. Manual lever
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Shift control lever to &quot;P&quot;.

2. Remove the air filter assembly. Refer to EM-25 ...
   	</p>
    [1054] => <p><a href="air_breather_hose-1054.html"><span>Air breather hose</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 

1. Air cleaner
2. Air breather hose
3. Transaxle assembly
4. Heater pipe
5. Clip
A. Paint mark

Removal and Installation
CAUTION:
• Install air breather hose with paint mark facing front.

• Insert air breather hose onto air breather tube until overlap area reaches t ...
   	</p>
    [1055] => <p><a href="differential_side_oil_seal-1055.html"><span>Differential side oil seal</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View

1. Transaxle assembly
2. Differential side oil seal

Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove drive shaft assembly. Refer to FAX-11, &quot;Removal and
Installation (Left Side)&quot; and FAX-12, &quot;Removal and Installation
(Right Side)&quot;.

2. Remove the differential ...
   	</p>
    [1056] => <p><a href="removal_and_installation-1056.html"><span>Removal and installation</span></a><br>
   	TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY 
Exploded View 

1. Rear gusset
2. Air breather hose
3. CVT fluid level gauge
4. CVT fluid charging pipe
5. O-ring
6. Copper washer
7. Fluid cooler tube
8. Transaxle assembly
A. Refer to TM-259, &quot;Removal and
Installation&quot;.
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
 ...
   	</p>
    [1057] => <p><a href="service_data_and_specifications_sds_-1057.html"><span>Service data and specifications
(SDS)</span></a><br>
   	General Specification 

CAUTION:
• Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2. Do not mix with other fluid.

• Using CVT fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will deteriorate in 
driveability and CVT durability, and may damage
the CVT, which is not covered by the warranty.
*1: Refe ...
   	</p>
    [1060] => <p><a href="diagnosis_and_repair_workflow-1060.html"><span>Diagnosis and repair workflow</span></a><br>
   	Work Flow 
INTRODUCTION
The TCM receives a signal from the vehicle speed sensor, PNP switch and 
provides shift control or lock-up
control via CVT solenoid valves.

The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of a signal
sent from sensing elements used with the OBD-related parts of the
C ...
   	</p>
    [1061] => <p><a href="inspection_and_adjustment-1061.html"><span>Inspection and adjustment</span></a><br>
   	ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
CONTROL UNIT
&nbsp;Service After Replacing TCM
and Transaxle Assembly
Perform the applicable service in the following sheet when replacing TCM 
or transaxle assembly.

CAUTION:
• Do not start the engine until the service is completed.

• “TCM-POWER S ...
   	</p>
    [1063] => <p><a href="cvt_system-1063.html"><span>CVT system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

Component Parts Location - Coupe

1. Control device assembly
2. Accelerator pedal position sensor
3. CVT unit harness connector
4. Primary speed sensor
5. Secondary speed sensor
6. PNP switch
7. TCM
8. Battery
9. Shift position indicator
Manual mode indicator
Component  ...
   	</p>
    [1064] => <p><a href="mechanical_system-1064.html"><span>Mechanical system</span></a><br>
   	Cross-Sectional View 

1. Converter housing
2. Driven sprocket
3. Chain
4. Reverse brake
5. Oil pump
6. Forward clutch
7. Planetary carrier
8. Primary pulley
9. Sun gear
10. Steel belt
11. Side cover
12. Internal gear
13. Parking gear
14. Secondary pulley
15. Final gear
16. Differen ...
   	</p>
    [1065] => <p><a href="hydraulic_control_system-1065.html"><span>Hydraulic control system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description 
The hydraulic control mechanism consists of the oil pump directly driven by 
the engine, the hydraulic control
valve that controls line pressure and transmission, and the input signal line.
LINE PRESSURE AND SECONDARY PRESSURE CONTROL
• When an input tor ...
   	</p>
    [1066] => <p><a href="control_system-1066.html"><span>Control system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description
The CVT senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors. It 
always controls the optimum shift
position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks.
TCM FUNCTION
The function of the TCM is to:
• Receive input signals sent from various switches an ...
   	</p>
    [1067] => <p><a href="lock_up_and_select_control_system-1067.html"><span>Lock-up and select control system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description 
• The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is engaged to 
eliminate torque converter slip to
increase power transmission efficiency.

• The torque converter clutch control valve operation is controlled by the 
torque converter clutch  ...
   	</p>
    [1068] => <p><a href="shift_mechanism-1068.html"><span>Shift mechanism</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

NOTE:
The gear ratio is set for every position separately.
System Description 
In order to select the gear ratio which can obtain the driving force in 
accordance with driver's intention and the
vehicle condition, TCM monitors the driving conditions, such as the vehicle 
spe ...
   	</p>
    [1069] => <p><a href="shift_lock_system-1069.html"><span>Shift lock system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description 
The selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” position to any other position 
unless the ignition switch is in the
ON position and the brake pedal is depressed.
Component Parts Location 

1. BCM (view with instrument panel removed
2. Steering column
 ...
   	</p>
    [1070] => <p><a href="on_board_diagnostic_obd_system-1070.html"><span>On board diagnostic (OBD) System</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Description 
DESCRIPTION
The CVT system has two self-diagnostic systems.

The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD-II) performed 
by the TCM in combination
with the ECM. The malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator 
lamp) and is stored as a ...
   	</p>
    [1071] => <p><a href="diagnosis_system_tcm_-1071.html"><span>Diagnosis system (TCM)</span></a><br>
   	CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION) 
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test 
modes shown below
FUNCTION

WORK SUPPORT MODE
Display Item List

Engine Brake Adjustment

CAUTION:
Mode of “+1”“0”“&#8722;1”“&#8722;2”“OFF” can be selected by p ...
   	</p>
    [1073] => <p><a href="u1000_can_comm_circuit-1073.html"><span>U1000 can comm circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time 
application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex
communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction 
detection ability.

Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, an ...
   	</p>
    [1074] => <p><a href="u1010_control_unit_can_-1074.html"><span>U1010 control unit (CAN)</span></a><br>
   	Description 
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time 
application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex
communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction 
detection ability.

Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, an ...
   	</p>
    [1075] => <p><a href="p0703_stop_lamp_switch-1075.html"><span>P0703 stop lamp switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
BCM detects ON/OFF state of the stop lamp switch and transmits the data to 
the TCM via CAN communication
by converting the data to a signal.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION P ...
   	</p>
    [1076] => <p><a href="p0705_park_neutral_position_switch-1076.html"><span>P0705 park/neutral position switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
• The PNP switch assembly includes a transaxle range switch.

• The transaxle range switch detects the selector lever position and sends a 
signal to the TCM.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

NOTE:
 ...
   	</p>
    [1077] => <p><a href="p0710_cvt_fluid_temperature_sensor-1077.html"><span>P0710 CVT fluid temperature sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The CVT fluid temperature sensor detects the CVT fluid temperature and sends 
a signal to the TCM.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed ...
   	</p>
    [1078] => <p><a href="p0715_input_speed_sensor_pri_speed_sensor_-1078.html"><span>P0715 input speed sensor (pri speed
sensor)</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The input speed sensor (primary speed sensor) detects the primary pulley 
revolution speed and sends a signal
to the TCM.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has be ...
   	</p>
    [1079] => <p><a href="p0720_vehicle_speed_sensor_cvt_secondary_speed_sensor_-1079.html"><span>P0720 vehicle speed sensor cvt (secondary
speed sensor)</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The vehicle speed sensor CVT [output speed sensor (secondary speed sensor)] 
detects the revolution of the
CVT output shaft and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal is transmitted to 
the TCM, which converts it into
vehicle speed.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMAT ...
   	</p>
    [1080] => <p><a href="p0725_engine_speed_signal-1080.html"><span>P0725 engine speed signal</span></a><br>
   	Description
The engine speed signal is transmitted from ECM to TCM by CAN communication 
line.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn 
ig ...
   	</p>
    [1081] => <p><a href="p0730_belt_damage-1081.html"><span>P0730 belt damage</span></a><br>
   	Description
TCM selects the gear ratio using the engine load (throttle position), the 
primary pulley revolution speed, and
the secondary pulley revolution speed as input signal. Then it changes the 
operating pressure of the primary
pulley and the secondary pulley and changes the groove width  ...
   	</p>
    [1082] => <p><a href="p0740_torque_converter_clutch_solenoid_valve-1082.html"><span>P0740 torque converter clutch solenoid
valve</span></a><br>
   	Description 
• The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated by the TCM in 
response to signals sent from the vehicle
speed and accelerator pedal position sensors. Lock-up piston operation will then 
be controlled.

• Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when CVT fluid tempe ...
   	</p>
    [1083] => <p><a href="p0744_a_t_tcc_s_v_function_lock_up_-1083.html"><span>P0744 A/T TCC S/V function (lock -up)</span></a><br>
   	Description 
This malfunction is detected when the torque converter clutch does not 
lock-up as instructed by the TCM. This
is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted), but 
also by mechanical malfunction such
as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operat ...
   	</p>
    [1084] => <p><a href="p0745_line_pressure_solenoid_valve-1084.html"><span>P0745 line pressure solenoid valve</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The pressure control solenoid valve A (line pressure solenoid valve) 
regulates the oil pump discharge pressure
to suit the driving condition in response to a signal sent from the TCM.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCE ...
   	</p>
    [1085] => <p><a href="p0746_pressure_control_solenoid_a_performance_line_pressure_solenoid_valve_-1085.html"><span>P0746 pressure control solenoid a
performance (line pressure solenoid
valve)</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The pressure control solenoid valve A (line pressure solenoid valve) 
regulates the oil pump discharge pressure
to suit the driving condition in response to a signal sent from the TCM.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a ...
   	</p>
    [1086] => <p><a href="p0776_pressure_control_solenoid_b_performance_sec_pressure_solenoid_valve_-1086.html"><span>P0776 pressure control solenoid B
performance (sec pressure solenoid
valve)</span></a><br>
   	Description
The pressure control solenoid valve B (secondary pressure solenoid valve) 
regulates the secondary pressure
to suit the driving condition in response to a signal sent from the TCM.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe  ...
   	</p>
    [1087] => <p><a href="p0778_pressure_control_solenoid_b_electrical_sec_pressure_solenoid_valve_-1087.html"><span>P0778 pressure control solenoid B electrical (sec pressure solenoid valve)</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The pressure control solenoid valve B (secondary pressure solenoid valve) 
regulates the oil pump discharge
pressure to suit the driving condition in response to a signal sent from the TCM.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle  ...
   	</p>
    [1088] => <p><a href="p0826_manual_mode_switch-1088.html"><span>P0826 manual mode switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Manual mode switch is installed in shift control device. The manual mode 
switch sends shift up and shift down
switch signals to TCM with CAN communication.

TCM sends the switch signals to combination meter via CAN communication line. 
Then manual mode switch
position is indicat ...
   	</p>
    [1089] => <p><a href="p0840_transmission_fluid_pressure_sensor_a_sec_pressure_sensor_-1089.html"><span>P0840 transmission fluid pressure sensor A (sec pressure sensor)</span></a><br>
   	Description
The transmission fluid pressure sensor A (secondary pressure sensor) detects 
secondary pressure of CVT
and sends TCM the signal.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn 
ign ...
   	</p>
    [1090] => <p><a href="p0841_pressure_sensor_function-1090.html"><span>P0841 pressure sensor function</span></a><br>
   	Description
Using the engine load (throttle position), the primary pulley revolution 
speed, and the secondary pulley revolution
speed as input signal, TCM changes the operating pressure of the primary pulley 
and the secondary pulley
and changes the groove width of the pulley to control the ge ...
   	</p>
    [1091] => <p><a href="p0868_secondary_pressure_down-1091.html"><span>P0868 secondary pressure down</span></a><br>
   	Description
The pressure control solenoid valve B (secondary pressure solenoid valve) 
regulates the secondary pressure
to suit the driving condition in response to a signal sent from the TCM.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe ...
   	</p>
    [1092] => <p><a href="p1701_transmission_control_module_power_supply_-1092.html"><span>P1701 transmission control module (power supply)</span></a><br>
   	Description 
When the power supply to the TCM is cut OFF, for example because the battery 
is removed, and the self-diagnosis
memory function stops, malfunction is detected.

NOTE:
Since “P1701 TCM-POWER SUPPLY” will be indicated when replacing TCM, perform 
diagnosis after erasing
“SE ...
   	</p>
    [1093] => <p><a href="p1705_throttle_position_sensor-1093.html"><span>P1705 throttle position sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, 
accelerator pedal position sensor, throttle
position sensor etc. The actuator sends a signal to the ECM, and ECM sends the 
signal to TCM with CAN
communication.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMA ...
   	</p>
    [1094] => <p><a href="p1722_estm_vehicle_speed_signal-1094.html"><span>P1722 estm vehicle speed signal</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The vehicle speed signal is transmitted from ABS actuator and electric unit 
(control unit) to TCM by CAN communication
line.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” ha ...
   	</p>
    [1095] => <p><a href="p1723_cvt_speed_sensor_function-1095.html"><span>P1723 cvt speed sensor function</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The vehicle speed sensor CVT [output speed sensor (secondary speed sensor)] 
detects the revolution of
parking gear and generates a pulse signal. The pulse signal is sent to the TCM, 
which converts it into vehicle
speed.

The input speed sensor (primary speed sensor) detects the ...
   	</p>
    [1096] => <p><a href="p1726_electric_throttle_control_system-1096.html"><span>P1726 electric throttle control system</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, 
accelerator pedal position sensor, throttle
position sensor etc. The actuator sends a signal to the ECM, and ECM sends the 
signal to TCM with CAN
communication.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMAT ...
   	</p>
    [1097] => <p><a href="p1740_lock_up_select_solenoid_valve-1097.html"><span>P1740 lock-up select solenoid valve</span></a><br>
   	Description 
• Lock-up select solenoid valve controls lock-up clutch pressure or forward 
clutch pressure (reverse brake
pressure).

• When controlling lock-up clutch, the valve is turned OFF. When controlling 
forward clutch, it is turned ON.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRM ...
   	</p>
    [1098] => <p><a href="p1745_line_pressure_control-1098.html"><span>P1745 line pressure control</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The pressure control solenoid valve A (line pressure solenoid valve) 
regulates the oil pump discharge pressure
to suit the driving condition in response to a signal sent from the TCM.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCED ...
   	</p>
    [1099] => <p><a href="p1777_step_motor-1099.html"><span>P1777 step motor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The step motor changes the step with turning 4 coils ON/OFF according to the 
signal from TCM. As a result,
the flow of line pressure to primary pulley is changed and pulley ratio is 
controlled
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive v ...
   	</p>
    [1100] => <p><a href="p1778_step_motor_function-1100.html"><span>P1778 step motor - function</span></a><br>
   	Description 
• The step motor's 4 aspects of ON/OFF change according to the signal from 
TCM. As a result, the flow of line
pressure to primary pulley is changed and pulley ratio is controlled.

• This diagnosis item is detected when electrical system is OK, but mechanical 
system is NG.
 ...
   	</p>
    [1101] => <p><a href="shift_position_indicator_circuit-1101.html"><span>Shift position indicator circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
• TCM sends position indicator signals to combination meter by CAN 
communication line.

• Manual mode switch position is indicated on shift position indicator.
Component Function Check
1.CHECK SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

1. Sta ...
   	</p>
    [1102] => <p><a href="shift_lock_system-1102.html"><span>Shift lock system</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” position to any other position 
unless the ignition switch is in the
ON position and the brake pedal is depressed.
Wiring Diagram - CVT SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM -
Coupe 



Wiring Diagram - CVT SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM -
Sedan 



Diagno ...
   	</p>
    [1103] => <p><a href="ecu_diagnosis-1103.html"><span>Ecu diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	TCM 
Reference Value 
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL


TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES



*1: This circuit is not used.

*2: A circuit tester cannot be used to test this item.
Wiring Diagram - CVT CONTROL SYSTEM -
Coupe 









Wiring Diagram - CVT CONTROL SYSTEM - Sedan

 ...
   	</p>
    [1104] => <p><a href="symptom_diagnosis-1104.html"><span>Symptom diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Symptom Table
The diagnostics item numbers show the sequence for inspection. Inspect in 
order from item 1.









 ...
   	</p>
    [1105] => <p><a href="precaution-1105.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [1108] => <p><a href="cvt_fluid-1108.html"><span>CVT fluid</span></a><br>
   	Inspection 
CHECKING CVT FLUID
Fluid level should be checked with the fluid warmed up to 50° to 80°C (122° 
to 176°F). The fluid level check
procedure is as follows:
1. Check for fluid leakage.

2. With the engine warmed up, drive the vehicle in an urban area.

When ambient temperature  ...
   	</p>
    [1109] => <p><a href="cvt_fluid_cooler_system-1109.html"><span>CVT fluid cooler system</span></a><br>
   	Cleaning
Whenever an automatic transaxle is repaired, overhauled, or replaced, the CVT 
fluid cooler mounted in the
radiator must be inspected and cleaned.

Metal debris and friction material, if present, can be trapped or become deposit 
in the CVT fluid cooler. This
debris can contaminate t ...
   	</p>
    [1110] => <p><a href="stall_test-1110.html"><span>Stall test</span></a><br>
   	Inspection and Judgment 
INSPECTION
1. Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary.

2. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the
CVT fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). Inspect the
amount of CVT fluid. Replenish if necessary.

3. ...
   	</p>
    [1111] => <p><a href="line_pressure_test-1111.html"><span>Line pressure test</span></a><br>
   	Inspection and Judgment
INSPECTION
Line Pressure Test Port (A)

Line Pressure Test Procedure
1. Inspect the amount of engine oil and replenish if necessary.

2. Drive the car for about 10 minutes to warm it up so that the CVT fluid 
reaches in the range of 50 to 80°C
(122 to 176°F), then  ...
   	</p>
    [1112] => <p><a href="road_test-1112.html"><span>Road test</span></a><br>
   	Description
DESCRIPTION
• The purpose of the test is to determine overall performance of CVT
and analyze causes of problems.

• The road test consists of the following three parts:
1. “Check Before Engine Is Started”TM-425.

2. “Check at Idle”TM-426.

3. “Cruise Test”TM-427 ...
   	</p>
    [1113] => <p><a href="cvt_position-1113.html"><span>CVT position</span></a><br>
   	Inspection and Adjustment
INSPECTION
1. Place selector lever in “P” position, and turn ignition switch ON (engine 
stop).

2. Make sure that selector lever can be shifted to other than “P” position when 
brake pedal is depressed.

Also make sure that selector lever can be shifted fro ...
   	</p>
    [1115] => <p><a href="transmission_control_module-1115.html"><span>Transmission control module</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View

1. TCM
2. Bracket
3. Battery

Removal and Installation 
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.

2. Remove the fresh air intake tube (upper).

3. Disconnect the TCM harness connector.

4. Remove the TCM (1) from the bracket (2).

• Battery (3)

INSTALL ...
   	</p>
    [1116] => <p><a href="control_device-1116.html"><span>Control device</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View

1. Control lever knob
2. Lock pin
3. Knob cover
4. Control device selector plate
5. Control device assembly
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the center console assembly. Refer to IP-12, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;.

2. Disconnect the control cable from  ...
   	</p>
    [1117] => <p><a href="control_cable-1117.html"><span>Control cable</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 

1. Control lever
2. Control device assembly
3. Control cable socket
4. Retainer grommet
5. Control cable
6. Bracket
7. Lock plate
8. Manual lever
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Shift control lever to &quot;P&quot;.

2. Remove the air filter assembly. Refer to EM-25 ...
   	</p>
    [1118] => <p><a href="differential_side_oil_seal-1118.html"><span>Differential side oil seal</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 

1. CVT assembly
2. Differential side oil seal

Removal and Installation 
REMOVAL
1. Remove drive shaft assembly. Refer to FAX-11, &quot;Removal and
Installation (Left Side)&quot; and FAX-12, &quot;Removal and Installation
(Right Side)&quot;.

2. Remove the differential sid ...
   	</p>
    [1119] => <p><a href="air_breather_hose-1119.html"><span>Air breather hose</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View

1. Air breather hose
2. Clip
3. Bracket
4. Air breather tube
5. CVT assembly
A. Paint mark

Removal and Installation 
Refer to the figure for removal and installation.
CAUTION:
• Install air breather hose with paint mark facing upward.

• Insert air breather hose a m ...
   	</p>
    [1120] => <p><a href="park_neutral_position_pnp_switch-1120.html"><span>Park/neutral position (PNP) switch</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 

1. Washer
2. Manual lever
3. PNP switch
4. CVT assembly
Removal and Installation 
Refer to the figure for removal and installation.

NOTE:
• Align PNP switch position when installing.

• After installation of PNP switch, check the continuity of PNP switch.

• Afte ...
   	</p>
    [1121] => <p><a href="primary_speed_sensor-1121.html"><span>Primary speed sensor</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View

1. CVT assembly
2. O-ring
3. Primary speed sensor

Removal and Installation
Refer to the figure for removal and installation.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-ring.

• Apply CVT fluid to O-ring.

• After installation is complete, check for CVT fluid leakage and CVT fluid 
 ...
   	</p>
    [1122] => <p><a href="secondary_speed_sensor-1122.html"><span>Secondary speed sensor</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View

1. CVT assembly
2. Shims
3. O-ring
4. Secondary Speed Sensor

Removal and Installation 
Refer to the figure for removal and installation.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-ring.

• Apply CVT fluid to O-ring.

• Insert the shims.

• After installation is complete, check ...
   	</p>
    [1123] => <p><a href="oil_pump_fitting_bolt-1123.html"><span>Oil pump fitting bolt</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 

1. Oil pump fitting bolt
2. O-ring
3. CVT assembly

Removal and Installation
Refer to the figure for removal and installation.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-ring.

• Apply CVT fluid to O-ring.

• After installation is complete, check for CVT fluid leakage and CVT fluid ...
   	</p>
    [1124] => <p><a href="control_valve-1124.html"><span>Control valve</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 
COMPONENT PARTS LOCATION

1. Transaxle assembly
2. Control valve
3. Bracket
4. O-ring
5. Oil strainer assembly
6. Magnet
7. Oil pan bolt
8. Oil pan
9. Oil pan gasket
10. Lock nut
11. Washer
12. Manual plate
13. Collar
14. Lip seal
15. Snap ring
A. CVT unit connector
 ...
   	</p>
    [1125] => <p><a href="removal_and_installation-1125.html"><span>Removal and installation</span></a><br>
   	TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY 
Exploded View

1. Air breather hose
2. CVT fluid level gauge
3. CVT fluid charging pipe
4. O-ring
5. Copper washer
6. Fluid cooler tube
7. Fluid cooler tube
8. CVT assembly
A. Refer to TM-447, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot;.
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. ...
   	</p>
    [1126] => <p><a href="disassembly_and_assembly-1126.html"><span>Disassembly and assembly</span></a><br>
   	TORQUE CONVERTER AND CONVERTER
HOUSING OIL SEAL 
Exploded View

1. CVT assembly
2. Converter housing oil seal
3. Torque converter
Apply CVT Fluid. Refer to MA-12, 
&quot;Fluids and Lubricants&quot;.
Disassembly
1. Remove torque converter.

2. Remove the converter housing oil seal using s ...
   	</p>
    [1127] => <p><a href="service_data_and_specifications_sds_-1127.html"><span>Service data and specifications
(SDS)</span></a><br>
   	General Specification

CAUTION:
• Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2. Do not mix with other fluid.

• Using CVT fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will deteriorate in 
driveability and CVT durability, and may damage
the CVT, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle l ...
   	</p>
    [1130] => <p><a href="precaution-1130.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [1132] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_maintenance-1132.html"><span>On-vehicle maintenance</span></a><br>
   	FRONT WHEEL HUB
Inspection
• Move wheel hub and bearing assembly in the axial direction by hand. Make 
sure there is no looseness of
wheel bearing.
Axial end play : 0.05 mm (0.002 in) or less
• Rotate wheel hub and make sure that is no unusual noise or other irregular 
conditions. If ther ...
   	</p>
    [1134] => <p><a href="front_wheel_hub_and_knuckle-1134.html"><span>Front wheel hub and knuckle</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Cotter pin
2. Disc rotor
3. Wheel hub and bearing assembly
4. Splash guard
5. Steering knuckle

REMOVAL
1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle. Refer to WT-66, &quot;Adjustment&quot;.

2. Remove brake caliper using power tool, leaving brake caliper hydraulic li ...
   	</p>
    [1135] => <p><a href="front_drive_shaft-1135.html"><span>Front drive shaft</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation (Left Side)

1. Drive shaft
2. Cotter pin
REMOVAL
1. Remove wheel and tire. Refer to WT-66, &quot;Adjustment&quot;.

2. Remove wheel sensor from steering knuckle. Refer to BRC-63, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot; (ABS), BRC-
134, &quot;Removal and Installation& ...
   	</p>
    [1136] => <p><a href="disassembly_and_assembly-1136.html"><span>Disassembly and assembly</span></a><br>
   	FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
Disassembly and Assembly (Left Side) 

1. Circlip
2. Dust shield
3. Slide joint housing
4. Snap ring
5. Spider assembly
6. Stopper ring
7. Boot band
8. Boot
9. Shaft
10. Damper band
11. Damper
12. Boot band
13. Boot
14. Ball cage / Steel ball / Inner race assembly
 ...
   	</p>
    [1140] => <p><a href="precaution-1140.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [1142] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_maintenance-1142.html"><span>On-vehicle maintenance</span></a><br>
   	WHEEL HUB 
On-vehicle Service
Check axle and suspension parts for excessive play, wear or damage.

• Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play.

Rear Wheel Bearing
• Check axial end play.
Axial end play : 0.1 mm (0.004 in) or less
• Check that wheel hub bearings operate smooth ...
   	</p>
    [1143] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_repair-1143.html"><span>On-vehicle repair</span></a><br>
   	WHEEL HUB
Removal and Installation

1. Knuckle
2. Baffle plate
3. Wheel hub assembly
4. Brake rotor
5. Wheel nut
6. Anchor block
7. ABS sensor
8. Parking brake cable
A. Refer to PB-6, &quot;PEDAL TYPE : Exploded View&quot; (Pedal type), PB-7, &quot;LEVER 
TYPE : Exploded View&quot; (Leve ...
   	</p>
    [1147] => <p><a href="precaution-1147.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [1149] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_maintenance-1149.html"><span>On-vehicle maintenance</span></a><br>
   	FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
Inspection and Adjustment
INSPECTION
Make sure the mounting conditions (looseness, back lash) of each component 
and component conditions
(wear, damage) are normal.
LOWER BALL JOINT END PLAY
1. Set front wheels in a straight-ahead position. Do not depress brake pedal ...
   	</p>
    [1151] => <p><a href="front_coil_spring_and_strut-1151.html"><span>Front coil spring and strut</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove wheel and tire. Refer to WT-66, &quot;Adjustment&quot;.

2. Remove brake caliper and reposition aside using wire. Refer to BR-30, &quot;BRAKE 
CALIPER ASSEMBLY :
Exploded View&quot;.

CAUTION:
Avoid depressing brake pedal with brake caliper removed ...
   	</p>
    [1152] => <p><a href="transverse_link-1152.html"><span>Transverse link</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove wheel and tire. Refer to WT-66, &quot;Adjustment&quot;.

2. Remove steering knuckle from transverse link. Refer to FSU-12, &quot;Exploded 
View&quot;.

3. Remove mounting nuts and washers on lower portion of stabilizer connecting 
rod.

4. Slightl ...
   	</p>
    [1153] => <p><a href="front_stabilizer-1153.html"><span>Front stabilizer</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove steering gear. Refer to ST-17, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot;.

2. Remove mounting nuts on upper portion of stabilizer connecting
rod.

3. Remove stabilizer clamp bolts.

4. Remove stabilizer from the vehicle.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check ...
   	</p>
    [1154] => <p><a href="removal_and_installation-1154.html"><span>Removal and installation</span></a><br>
   	FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY 
Exploded View 

1. Strut tower bar
2. Stabilizer bar
3. Stabilizer clamp
4. Stabilizer bushing
5. Connecting rod
6. VQ35DE front mount bracket
7. VQ35DE rear mount bracket
8. QR25DE mount bracket
9. Member pin stay
10. Transverse link
11. Steering stop plate
 ...
   	</p>
    [1155] => <p><a href="disassembly_and_assembly-1155.html"><span>Disassembly and assembly</span></a><br>
   	FRONT COIL SPRING AND STRUT
Disassembly and Assembly 
DISASSEMBLY
1. Install Tool to strut and secure it in a vise.

Tool number : ST35652000 ( — )
CAUTION:
When installing Tool, wrap a shop cloth around strut to protect
it from damage.
2. Slightly loosen piston rod lock nut.

WARNING:
 ...
   	</p>
    [1156] => <p><a href="service_data_and_specifications_sds_-1156.html"><span>Service data and specifications(SDS)</span></a><br>
   	Wheel Alignment (Unladen*)

Fuel, radiator coolant and engine 
oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.


 Fuel, 
radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in 
designated positions.
Ball Joint 

Wheelarch Height (Unladen*1) ...
   	</p>
    [1159] => <p><a href="precaution-1159.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [1161] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_maintenance-1161.html"><span>On-vehicle maintenance</span></a><br>
   	REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
On-vehicle Service
• Check the suspension parts for excessive play, cracks, wear or damage. 
Shake each rear wheel to check for
excessive play.

• Retighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque.

• Make sure that the cotter pin is installed.

• Check  ...
   	</p>
    [1162] => <p><a href="removal_and_installation-1162.html"><span>Removal and installation</span></a><br>
   	REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBL
Exploded View

1. Cap
2. Shock absorber insulator
3. Shock absorber seal
4. Bound bumper
5. Shock absorber
6. Suspension arm
7. Connecting rod mount bracket
8. Connecting rod
9. Upper rubber seat
10. Coil spring
11. Lower rubber seat
12. Knuckle
13. Knuckle bus ...
   	</p>
    [1164] => <p><a href="rear_lower_link_amp_coil_spring-1164.html"><span>Rear lower link &amp; coil spring</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
Removal
1. Loosen the rear lower link bolt and nut from the suspension member side.

2. Support the rear lower link by placing a suitable jack under the knuckle.

3. Remove the rear lower link adjusting bolt and nut from the suspension
member side using power tool.

 ...
   	</p>
    [1165] => <p><a href="front_lower_link-1165.html"><span>Front lower link</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
Removal
1. Remove the front lower link nut and bolt from the knuckle side
and the adjusting bolt and nut from the suspension member side
using power tools.

• Do not reuse the adjusting nut, use a new adjusting nut for
installation.

2. Remove the front lower link ...
   	</p>
    [1168] => <p><a href="suspension_arm-1168.html"><span>Suspension ARM</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
Removal
1. Remove the rear suspension assembly. Refer to RSU-12, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;.

2. Remove the connecting rod bracket from the suspension arm using power tools.

3. Remove the two suspension arm bolts and nuts from the suspension member side 
 ...
   	</p>
    [1169] => <p><a href="service_data_and_specifications_sds_-1169.html"><span>Service data and specifications
(SDS)</span></a><br>
   	General Specification (Rear) 

Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*) 

*: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools 
and mats in designated positions.

*: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and 
mats in designated positions.
Ball  ...
   	</p>
    [1172] => <p><a href="diagnosis_and_repair_workflow-1172.html"><span>Diagnosis and repair workflow</span></a><br>
   	Repair Work Flow
WORK FLOW

WT-5, &quot;Preliminary Check&quot;
WT-52, &quot;Self-Diagnosis (With CONSULT-III)&quot;
WT-53, &quot;Self-Diagnosis (Without CONSULT-III)&quot;
WT-55, &quot;Symptom Table&quot;
DETAILED FLOW
1.CUSTOMER INFORMATION
Interview the customer to obtain detailed inform ...
   	</p>
    [1173] => <p><a href="inspection_and_adjustment-1173.html"><span>Inspection and adjustment</span></a><br>
   	Preliminary Check
1.TIRE PRESSURE
Check all tire pressures. Refer to WT-70, &quot;Tire&quot;.

Do tire pressures match specification?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Adjust tire pressure to specified value.
2.LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
Check low tire pressure warning lamp activation.

 ...
   	</p>
    [1175] => <p><a href="tpms-1175.html"><span>TPMS</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description 
BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM)
The BCM is shown with the instrument panel LH removed. The BCM
reads the air pressure signal received by the tire pressure receiver,
and controls the low tire pressure warning lamp as shown below. It
also has a self-diagnosis funct ...
   	</p>
    [1176] => <p><a href="diagnosis_system_bcm_-1176.html"><span>Diagnosis system (BCM)</span></a><br>
   	CONSULT-III Function (BCM) 
CONSULT-III DIAGNOSTIC MODES
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test 
modes shown following.

DESCRIPTION
During driving, the tire pressure monitoring system receives the signal 
transmitted from the transmitter
installed in each whe ...
   	</p>
    [1178] => <p><a href="c1708_c1711_data_from_transmitter_not_being_received-1178.html"><span>C1708 - c1711 data from transmitter not being received</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Tire pressure data for one or more transmitters is not being received by the 
BCM.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.ID REGISTRATION AND VEHICLE DRIVING
1. Carry out ID registration of all transmitters.

2. Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more ...
   	</p>
    [1179] => <p><a href="c1712_c1715_c1720_c1723_c1724_c1727_transmitter_malfunction-1179.html"><span>C1712 - C1715, C1720 - C1723, C1724 -C1727 Transmitter malfunction</span></a><br>
   	Description 
One or more transmitters are malfunctioning internally.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.DRIVE VEHICLE
1. Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for 3 minutes, and then drive 
the vehicle at any speed for
10 minutes.

2. Check all tire pressu ...
   	</p>
    [1180] => <p><a href="c1716_c1719_transmitter_pressure_malfunction-1180.html"><span>C1716 - C1719 Transmitter pressure malfunction</span></a><br>
   	Description
Air pressure data from one or more transmitters is out of range.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.ID REGISTRATION AND VEHICLE DRIVING
1. Carry out ID registration of all transmitters.

2. Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for 3 minutes, and ...
   	</p>
    [1181] => <p><a href="c1729_vehicle_speed_signal-1181.html"><span>C1729 vehicle speed signal</span></a><br>
   	Description
The vehicle speed signal is not being detected by the BCM.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
1. On SELECT DIAG MODE, select the SELF-DIAG RESULT screen.

2. Check display contents on SELF DIAG RESULT screen.

Is the CAN C ...
   	</p>
    [1182] => <p><a href="c1734_control_unit-1182.html"><span>C1734 control unit</span></a><br>
   	Description
An internal malfunction has been detected in the TPMS function of the BCM.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
1. On SELECT DIAG MODE, select the SELF-DIAG RESULT screen.

2. Check display contents on SELF DIAG RESULT screen ...
   	</p>
    [1183] => <p><a href="ecu_diagnosis-1183.html"><span>ECU diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
Reference Value
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL




Terminal Layout 

Physical Values 


















1: Sedan only
2: With LH front window anti-pinch
3: With LH and RH front window anti-pinch
Wiring Diagram - TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM  ...
   	</p>
    [1186] => <p><a href="low_tire_pressure_warning_lamp_does_not_turn_on-1186.html"><span>Low tire pressure warning lamp
does not turn on</span></a><br>
   	Low Tire Pressure Warning Lamp Does Not Come
On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT CHECK
Using CONSULT-III, check display contents of BCM in SELF-DIAGNOSIS.

Is &quot;CAN COMM CIRCUIT&quot; displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES &gt;&gt ...
   	</p>
    [1187] => <p><a href="low_tire_pressure_warning_lamp_stays_on-1187.html"><span>Low tire pressure warning lamp
stays on</span></a><br>
   	Low Tire Pressure Warning Lamp Stays On When
Ignition Switch Is Turned On
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.CHECK BCM CONNECTORS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect BCM harness connectors.

3. Check terminals for damage or loose connections.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO  ...
   	</p>
    [1188] => <p><a href="low_tire_pressure_warning_lamp_blinks-1188.html"><span>Low tire pressure warning lamp
blinks</span></a><br>
   	Low Tire Pressure Warning Lamp Flashes When
Ignition Switch Is Turned On
NOTE:
If low tire pressure warning lamp flashes as shown, the system is normal.
Flash Mode A
• This mode shows transmitter status is OFF-mode.

Carry out transmitter wake up operation. Refer to WT-5, &quot;Transmitter
 ...
   	</p>
    [1192] => <p><a href="precaution-1192.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) AIR BA
G and SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
driver and front passenger for certain
 ...
   	</p>
    [1194] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_maintenance-1194.html"><span>On-vehicle maintenance</span></a><br>
   	ROAD WHEEL 
Inspection
ALUMINUM WHEEL
1. Check tires for wear and improper inflation.

2. Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If deformed, remove 
wheel and check wheel
runout.

a. Remove tire from aluminum wheel and mount on a tire balance machine.

b. Set dial indicat ...
   	</p>
    [1196] => <p><a href="tire_pressure_receiver-1196.html"><span>Tire pressure receiver</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove instrument lower cover (LH). Refer to IP-11, &quot;Exploded View&quot;.

2. Locate tire pressure receiver (1) to the right of the steering column
(2) and disconnect tire pressure receiver electrical connector.

3. Remove tire pressure receiver (1) fr ...
   	</p>
    [1197] => <p><a href="road_wheel_tire_assembly-1197.html"><span>Road wheel tire assembly</span></a><br>
   	Adjustment
WHEEL BALANCE
1. Remove inner and outer balance weights from the wheel.

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch the wheel during removal procedures.
2. Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the wheel.

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch the wheel durin ...
   	</p>
    [1198] => <p><a href="removal_and_installation-1198.html"><span>Removal and installation</span></a><br>
   	TRANSMITTER 
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool.

2. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall 
into tire.

3. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire.

Place wheel and tire assembly on tire  ...
   	</p>
    [1203] => <p><a href="parking_brake_system-1203.html"><span>Parking brake system</span></a><br>
   	PEDAL TYPE
Inspection 
• Check control device for wear or other damage. Replace if necessary.

• Check wires for wear or damage. Replace if necessary.

• Check warning lamp and switch. Replace if necessary.

• Check parts at each connecting position and if found deformed or damaged,  ...
   	</p>
    [1204] => <p><a href="parking_brake_shoe-1204.html"><span>Parking brake shoe</span></a><br>
   	Inspection
LINING THICKNESS INSPECTION
• Check thickness of lining.


DRUM INNER DIAMETER INSPECTION
• Check inner diameter of drum in rear disc rotor.


OTHER INSPECTIONS
• Check the following:
- Lining for excessive wear, damage, and peeling.

- Shoe sliding surface for excessiv ...
   	</p>
    [1206] => <p><a href="parking_brake_control-1206.html"><span>Parking brake control</span></a><br>
   	PEDAL TYPE 
Exploded View 

1. Control device assembly
2. Parking brake switch
3. Pedal pad
4. Adjusting nut
5. Lock plate
6. Front cable
7. Rear cable RH
8. Rear cable LH
9. Equalizer
10. Spring
11. Pin

&nbsp;Removal and Installation 
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear wheel and tires. Refer  ...
   	</p>
    [1207] => <p><a href="parking_brake_shoe-1207.html"><span>Parking brake shoe</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 

1. Return spring
2. Adjuster
3. Brake shoe
4. Anti-rattle pin
5. Retainer
6. Anti-rattle spring
7. Toggle lever
PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease 
or silicone-based grease
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
• Clean brakes with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the haza ...
   	</p>
    [1211] => <p><a href="precaution-1211.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot;
and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot; 
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
driver and front ...
   	</p>
    [1214] => <p><a href="power_steering_fluid-1214.html"><span>Power steering fluid</span></a><br>
   	Inspection
FLUID LEVEL
• Check fluid level with engine stopped.

• Make sure that fluid level is between MIN and MAX.

• Fluid levels at HOT (A) and COLD (B) are different. Do not confuse
them.


CAUTION:
• The fluid level should not exceed the MAX line. Excessive
fluid will caus ...
   	</p>
    [1215] => <p><a href="steering_wheel-1215.html"><span>Steering wheel</span></a><br>
   	Inspection
INSTALLATION CONDITION
• Check installation conditions of steering gear assembly, front suspension 
assembly, axle and steering column
assembly.

• Check if movement exists when steering wheel is moved up and down, to the left 
and right and to the axial
direction.
Steering w ...
   	</p>
    [1216] => <p><a href="power_steering_oil_pump-1216.html"><span>POWER STEERING OIL PUMP</span></a><br>
   	Inspection
RELIEF OIL PRESSURE
CAUTION:
Make sure that belt tension is normal before starting the following procedure.
1. Connect the Tool between oil pump discharge connector and
high-pressure hose. Bleed air from the hydraulic circuit while
opening valve fully. Refer to ST-8, &quot;Inspectio ...
   	</p>
    [1218] => <p><a href="steering_wheel-1218.html"><span>Steering wheel</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation 
REMOVAL
NOTE:
When reconnecting spiral cable, fix cable with a tape so that fixing case and 
rotating part keep aligned. This
will omit neutral position alignment procedure during spiral cable installation.

1. Set vehicle to the straight-ahead position.

2. Remove ...
   	</p>
    [1219] => <p><a href="steering_gear_and_linkage-1219.html"><span>Steering gear and linkage</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 

1. Cotter pin
2. Steering gear assembly

Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front tires.

2. Remove undercover using power tool.

3. Remove lower side bolt of lower joint.

4. Remove cotter pin (1), and then loosen the nut.

5. Remove steering outer socket  ...
   	</p>
    [1220] => <p><a href="power_steering_oil_pump-1220.html"><span>Power steering oil pump</span></a><br>
   	QR25DE : Exploded View

1. Rear bracket
2. Pump assembly
3. Front bracket
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Drain power steering fluid from reservoir tank.

2. Remove undercover using power tool.

3. Loosen drive belt. Refer to EM-16, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot;.

4. Remove d ...
   	</p>
    [1221] => <p><a href="hydraulic_line-1221.html"><span>Hydraulic line</span></a><br>
   	QR25DE : Exploded View
CAUTION:
Securely insert harness connector to pressure sensor.

1. Reservoir tank
2. Reservoir tank bracket
3. Suction hose
4. High-pressure hose
5. Oil pump assembly
6. Steering gear assembly
7. Low pressure piping
8. High pressure piping
9. O-ring
10. Eye-bolt
 ...
   	</p>
    [1224] => <p><a href="steering_gear_and_linkage-1224.html"><span>Steering gear and linkage</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View

1. Outer socket
2. Boot clamp
3. Boot
4. Inner socket
5. Boot clamp
6. SSPS valve (part of gear assembly)
7. Gear assembly


Disassembly
1. Remove outer socket locknut and outer socket
2. Remove boot clamps and boot.

3. Remove inner socket.
Inspection 
INSPECTION AFT ...
   	</p>
    [1225] => <p><a href="power_steering_oil_pump-1225.html"><span>Power steering oil pump</span></a><br>
   	QR25DE : Disassembly and Assembly
The power steering oil pump and pulley is not serviceable and should be 
replaced as an assembly. For front
and rear bracket removal, refer to ST-19, &quot;QR25DE : Removal and Installation&quot;.
VQ35DE : Disassembly and Assembly
The power steering oil pump an ...
   	</p>
    [1226] => <p><a href="service_data_and_specifications_sds_-1226.html"><span>Service data and specifications
(SDS)</span></a><br>
   	Steering Wheel 

Steering Angle

Steering Column
STEERING COLUMN LENGTH

TILT MECHANISM OPERATING RANGE

Steering Gear 
STEERING OUTER SOCKET AND INNER SOCKET

RACK STROKE

Oil Pump

Steering Fluid
 ...
   	</p>
    [1228] => <p><a href="basic_inspection-1228.html"><span>Basic inspection</span></a><br>
   	DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Work Flow
DETAILED FLOW
1.COLLECT THE INFORMATION FROM THE CUSTOMER
It is also important to clarify customer complaints before inspection. First 
of all, reproduce symptoms, and
understand them fully. Ask customer about his/her complaints carefully. In some 
case ...
   	</p>
    [1229] => <p><a href="function_diagnosis-1229.html"><span>Function diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	EPS SYSTEM
System Diagram
CONTROL DIAGRAM

System Description
• The EPS system controls the power steering solenoid valve through the power 
steering control unit.

• The valve driving voltage to control the power steering solenoid
valve varies according to the vehicle speed.

OPERATI ...
   	</p>
    [1231] => <p><a href="power_supply_and_ground_circuit-1231.html"><span>Power supply and ground circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
• EPS system functions by ignition power supply.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect power steering control unit harness connector.

3. Check voltage between power steering control unit harness connector
M59 terminal 3 and ...
   	</p>
    [1232] => <p><a href="power_steering_solenoid_valve-1232.html"><span>Power steering solenoid valve</span></a><br>
   	Description 
• Power steering solenoid valve controls the power steering oil pressure in 
the gear housing assembly.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK POWER STEERING SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL
1. Start engine.

2. Check voltage between power steering control unit harness connector
M59 terminal 1 and ...
   	</p>
    [1233] => <p><a href="engine_speed_signal_circuit-1233.html"><span>Engine speed signal circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description
• ECM sends engine speed signal to power steering control unit.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.PERFORM ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS

Perform ECM self-diagnosis.

Is any error system detected?
YES &gt;&gt; Check the error system.

NO &gt;&gt; GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND POWER STEE ...
   	</p>
    [1234] => <p><a href="vehicle_speed_signal_circuit-1234.html"><span>Vehicle speed signal circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
• Combination meter sends vehicle speed signal to power steering control 
unit.
Diagnosis Procedure
1.PERFORM COMBINATION METER SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform combination meter self-diagnosis.

Is any error system detected?
YES &gt;&gt; Check the error system.

NO &gt;&gt; GO TO 2.
 ...
   	</p>
    [1235] => <p><a href="ecu_diagnosis-1235.html"><span>ECU diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	POWER STEERING CONTROL UNIT
Reference Value
TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES


CAUTION:
When using circuit tester or oscilloscope to measure voltage for inspection, be 
sure not to extend forcibly any connector terminals.
Wiring Diagram — ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED
POWER STEERING SYSTEM  ...
   	</p>
    [1236] => <p><a href="symptom_diagnosis-1236.html"><span>Symptom diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	UNBALANCE STEERING WHEEL TURNING
FORCE (TORQUE VARIATION) 
Description 
• Hard steering when fully turning the steering wheel.

• Light steering when driving at a high speed.
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK SYSTEM FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND
Perform trouble diagnosis for power supply and gro ...
   	</p>
    [1237] => <p><a href="precaution-1237.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT 
PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
d ...
   	</p>
    [1240] => <p><a href="precaution-1240.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) &quot;AIR B
AG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot; 
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT 
PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
driver and fron ...
   	</p>
    [1241] => <p><a href="basic_inspection-1241.html"><span>Basic inspection</span></a><br>
   	COMPONENT INSPECTION
Inspection
AFTER A COLLISION
WARNING:
Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware 
after any collision.

NISSAN/INFINITI recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a 
collision be replaced
unless the collision was minor and t ...
   	</p>
    [1243] => <p><a href="front_seat_belt-1243.html"><span>Front seat belt</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View

1. D-ring anchor
2. Adjuster cover
3. Outer anchor bolt cover
4. Seat belt pre-tensioner connector
5. Seat belt retractor
6. Seat belt adjuster
A. D-ring anchor bolt
B. Outer anchor bolt
C. Retractor screw
D. Retractor anchor bolt
E. Bolt


1. Seat belt retractor
2. Se ...
   	</p>
    [1244] => <p><a href="rear_seat_belt-1244.html"><span>Rear seat belt</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View

1. Seat belt retractor RH
2. Seat belt buckle RH
3. Seat belt buckle center
4. Seat belt buckle LH
5. Seat belt retractor center
6. Seat belt retractor LH
A. Retractor anchor bolt
B. Outer anchor bolt
C. Buckle anchor bolt

1. Seat belt retractor outer RH
2. Seat belt buc ...
   	</p>
    [1248] => <p><a href="precaution-1248.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) &quot;AIR B
AG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT 
PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
driver and front ...
   	</p>
    [1251] => <p><a href="driver_air_bag_module-1251.html"><span>Driver air bag module</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View

1. Steering switch connector
2. Steering switch ground connector
3. Steering switches
4. Driver air bag module
5. Driver air bag module connectors
6. Side lid (RH/LH)
A. Steering switch screw
B. Driver air bag module bolt (RH/LH)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
 ...
   	</p>
    [1252] => <p><a href="spiral_cable-1252.html"><span>Spiral cable</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals 
and wait at least three
minutes.

• Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing.

• Do not disassemble the spiral cable.

• Do not allow oil, grease, ...
   	</p>
    [1253] => <p><a href="front_passenger_air_bag_module-1253.html"><span>Front passenger air bag module</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals 
and wait at
least three minutes.

• Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing.

• Always work from the side of air bag module. Do not work from the fro ...
   	</p>
    [1254] => <p><a href="side_curtain_air_bag_module-1254.html"><span>Side curtain air bag module</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 

1. Side curtain air bag module connector
2. Side curtain air bag module
A. Side curtain air bag module bolt


1. Side curtain air bag module
2. Side curtain air bag module
inflator
A. Side curtain air bag module bolt
Removal and Installation 
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Before ...
   	</p>
    [1255] => <p><a href="crash_zone_sensor-1255.html"><span>Crash zone sensor</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
REMOVAL

1. Crash zone sensor harness connector
2. Crash zone sensor
A. Crash zone sensor nuts

CAUTION:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals 
and wait at least three
minutes.

• Do not use air tools or electric tool ...
   	</p>
    [1256] => <p><a href="side_air_bag_satellite_sensor-1256.html"><span>Side air bag (satellite) sensor</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
REMOVAL

1. Side air bag (satellite) sensor harness
connector
2. Side air bag (satellite) sensor
A. Side air bag (satellite) sensor nuts


1. Side air bag (satellite) sensor harness
connector
2. Side air bag (satellite) sensor
A. Side air bag (satellite) sensor n ...
   	</p>
    [1257] => <p><a href="diagnosis_sensor_unit-1257.html"><span>Diagnosis sensor unit</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
REMOVAL

1. Diagnosis sensor unit harness connector
2. Diagnosis sensor unit shield
3. Diagnosis sensor unit
A. Diagnosis sensor unit bolts

CAUTION:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals 
and wait at least three
minutes ...
   	</p>
    [1259] => <p><a href="collision_diagnosis-1259.html"><span>Collision diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	For Frontal Collision 
Check the SRS components using the following table.

• After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no 
malfunction is detected. Refer to SRC-
12, &quot;SRS Operation Check&quot;.
SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION)


For Side and Rollover Co ...
   	</p>
    [1262] => <p><a href="diagnosis_and_repair_work_flow-1262.html"><span>Diagnosis and repair work flow</span></a><br>
   	Work Flow
OVERALL SEQUENCE

*1 SRC-12, &quot;Trouble Diagnosis Introduction&quot;
Introduction&quot;
*2 SRC-12, &quot;SRS Operation Check&quot;
*3 SRC-5, &quot;Trouble Diagnosis with
CONSULT-III&quot;
*4 SRC-14, &quot;Self-Diagnosis Function
(Without CONSULT-III)&quot;
DETAILED WORK FLOW
 ...
   	</p>
    [1263] => <p><a href="intermittents_incident-1263.html"><span>Intermittents incident</span></a><br>
   	Inspection Procedure
INTERMITTENT TROUBLE
An intermittent incident may have occured in the past but is not being 
detected currently. This DTC will not be
detected on SELF DIAG [CURRENT], but may be viewed on SELF DIAG [PAST] using 
CONSULT-III.
Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-III
DIAGNOSTIC P ...
   	</p>
    [1265] => <p><a href="srs_air_bag_system-1265.html"><span>SRS air bag system</span></a><br>
   	SRS Configuration 

The air bag deploys if the air bag diagnosis sensor unit is activated while 
the ignition switch is in the ON or
START position.

The collision modes for which supplemental restraint systems are activated are 
different among the SRS systems.

For example, the driver air ...
   	</p>
    [1266] => <p><a href="occupant_classification_system-1266.html"><span>Occupant classification system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

Occupant Classification System (OCS) 
The occupant classification system (OCS) identifies if a child or child seat 
is present in the front passenger
seat. The OCS receives inputs from the occupant classification sensor mat 
(located inside the passenger seat
cushion assembly ...
   	</p>
    [1267] => <p><a href="passenger_seat_belt_warning_system-1267.html"><span>Passenger seat belt warning system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description
The seat belt warning lamp (1) will remind the driver if the driver or
front passenger seat belt should be buckled. The system works in
conjunction with the occupant classification system. Refer to SRC-
10, &quot;Occupant Classification System (OCS)&quot;.
 ...
   	</p>
    [1268] => <p><a href="on_board_diagnostic_obd_system-1268.html"><span>On board diagnostic (OBD) system</span></a><br>
   	Trouble Diagnosis Introduction
CAUTION:
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless 
instructed to do so in
this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or 
orange harness connectors.

• Do not attempt to repair, splice or m ...
   	</p>
    [1270] => <p><a href="b1049_z_b1052_b1054_z_b1057_driver_airbag_module-1270.html"><span>B1049 – B1052, B1054 – B1057 driver airbag
module</span></a><br>
   	Description
DTC B1049 – B1052, B1054 – B1057 DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
The driver air bag module is dual stage and wired to the air bag diagnosis 
sensor unit through the spiral cable.

The air bag diagnosis sensor unit will monitor for opens and shorts in detected 
lines to the driver air bag  ...
   	</p>
    [1271] => <p><a href="b1065_z_b1068_b1070_z_b1073_passenger_airbag_module-1271.html"><span>B1065 – B1068, B1070 – B1073 passenger
airbag module</span></a><br>
   	Description
DTC B1065 – B1068, B1070 – B1073 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
The passenger air bag module is dual stage and wired to the air bag diagnosis 
sensor unit. The air bag diagnosis
sensor unit will monitor for opens and shorts in detected lines to the passenger 
air bag module.
PART LOC ...
   	</p>
    [1272] => <p><a href="b1134_z_b1137_side_airbag_module_lh-1272.html"><span>B1134 – B1137 side airbag module LH</span></a><br>
   	Description
DTC B1134 – B1137 FRONT LH SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
The front LH side air bag module is wired to the air bag diagnosis sensor 
unit. The air bag diagnosis sensor
unit will monitor for opens and shorts in detected lines to the front LH side 
air bag module.
PART LOCATION
Refer to SRC- ...
   	</p>
    [1273] => <p><a href="b1129_z_b1132_side_airbag_module_rh-1273.html"><span>B1129 – B1132 side airbag module RH</span></a><br>
   	Description
DTC B1129 – B1132 FRONT RH SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
The front RH side air bag module is wired to the air bag diagnosis sensor 
unit. The air bag diagnosis sensor
unit will monitor for opens and shorts in detected lines to the front RH side 
air bag module.
PART LOCATION
Refer to SRC- ...
   	</p>
    [1274] => <p><a href="b1150_z_b1153_side_curtain_air_bag_module_lh-1274.html"><span>B1150 – B1153 side curtain air bag
module LH</span></a><br>
   	Description
DTC B1150 – B1153 LH SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
The LH side curtain air bag module is wired to the air bag diagnosis sensor 
unit. The air bag diagnosis sensor
unit will monitor for opens and shorts in detected lines to the LH side curtain 
air bag module.
PART LOCATION
Refer t ...
   	</p>
    [1275] => <p><a href="b1145_z_b1148_side_curtain_air_bag_module_rh-1275.html"><span>B1145 – B1148 side curtain air bag
module RH</span></a><br>
   	Description 
DTC B1145 – B1148 RH SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
The RH side curtain air bag module is wired to the air bag diagnosis sensor 
unit. The air bag diagnosis sensor
unit will monitor for opens and shorts in detected lines to the RH side curtain 
air bag module.
PART LOCATION
Refer  ...
   	</p>
    [1276] => <p><a href="b1086_z_b1089_seat_belt_pre_tensioner_lh-1276.html"><span>B1086 – B1089 seat belt pre-tensioner
LH</span></a><br>
   	Description
DTC B1086 – B1089 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH
The seat belt pre-tensioner LH is wired to the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 
The air bag diagnosis sensor unit
will monitor for opens and shorts in detected lines to the seat belt pre-tensioner 
LH.
PART LOCATION
Refer to SRC-7, &qu ...
   	</p>
    [1277] => <p><a href="b1081_z_b1084_seat_belt_pre_tensioner_rh-1277.html"><span>B1081 – B1084 seat belt pre-tensioner
RH</span></a><br>
   	Description
DTC B1081 – B1084 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH
The seat belt pre-tensioner RH is wired to the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 
The air bag diagnosis sensor unit
will monitor for opens and shorts in detected lines to the seat belt pre-tensioner 
RH.
PART LOCATION
Refer to SRC-7, &qu ...
   	</p>
    [1278] => <p><a href="b1033_z_b1035_crash_zone_sensor-1278.html"><span>B1033 – B1035 crash zone sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
DTC B1033 – B1035 CRASH ZONE SENSOR
The crash zone sensor is wired to the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. The air 
bag diagnosis sensor unit will
monitor for opens and shorts in detected lines to the crash zone sensor.
PART LOCATION
Refer to SRC-7, &quot;SRS Component Parts Locat ...
   	</p>
    [1279] => <p><a href="b1118_z_b1120_satellite_sensor_lh-1279.html"><span>B1118 – B1120 satellite sensor LH</span></a><br>
   	Description 
DTC B1118 – B1120 SATELLITE SENSOR LH
The satellite sensor LH is wired to the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. The 
air bag diagnosis sensor unit will
monitor the satellite sensor LH for internal failures and it's circuits for 
communication errors.
PART LOCATION
Refer to SRC-7,  ...
   	</p>
    [1280] => <p><a href="b1113_z_b1115_satellite_sensor_rh-1280.html"><span>B1113 – B1115 satellite sensor RH</span></a><br>
   	Description
DTC B1113 – B1115 SATELLITE SENSOR RH
The satellite sensor RH is wired to the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. The 
air bag diagnosis sensor unit will
monitor the satellite sensor RH for internal failures and it's circuits for 
communication errors.
PART LOCATION
Refer to SRC-7, & ...
   	</p>
    [1281] => <p><a href="b1xxx_air_bag_diagnosis_sensor_unit-1281.html"><span>B1xxx air bag diagnosis sensor unit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
DTC B1XXX AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
The air bag diagnosis sensor unit will run self diagnostics when the ignition 
switch is turned ON. It has the
potential to set many diagnostic trouble codes which will conform to the B1XXX 
format, but will not match any
other SRS diagnosti ...
   	</p>
    [1282] => <p><a href="b1023_passenger_air_bag_off_indicator-1282.html"><span>B1023 passenger air bag off indicator</span></a><br>
   	Description
DTC B1023 FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF INDICATOR
The front passenger air bag off indicator is wired to the air bag diagnosis 
sensor unit. The air bag diagnosis
sensor unit monitors the front passenger air bag off indicator and circuit for 
failures.
PART LOCATION
Refer to SRC-7, & ...
   	</p>
    [1283] => <p><a href="b1017_z_b1022_occupant_classification_system-1283.html"><span>B1017 – b1022 occupant classification
system</span></a><br>
   	Description 
DTC B1017 – B1022 OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM (OCS)
The occupant classification system control unit is wired to the air bag 
diagnosis sensor unit. The air bag diagnosis
sensor unit will monitor the occupant classification system for control unit and 
sensor mat failures and
 ...
   	</p>
    [1284] => <p><a href="b1209_z_b1210_collision_detection-1284.html"><span>B1209 – b1210 collision detection</span></a><br>
   	Description
DTC B1209 - B1210 COLLISION DETECTION
The air bag diagnosis sensor unit will set this DTC if it has detected a 
collision which has resulted in a frontal
or side deployment of one or more air bags or pre-tensioners. If this DTC is 
detected after a SRS repair, the
air bag diagnosis ...
   	</p>
    [1285] => <p><a href="ecu_diagnosis-1285.html"><span>Ecu diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
Wiring Diagram 










Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-III 
DIAGNOSTIC CODE CHART
NOTE:
Follow the procedures in numerical order when repairing malfunctioning parts. 
Confirm whether malfunction is
eliminated using air bag warning lamp or CONSULT-III each tim ...
   	</p>
    [1286] => <p><a href="symptom_diagnosis-1286.html"><span>Symptom diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM 
&quot;AIR BAG&quot; Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off 
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7
1.CHECK CONDITION OF AIR BAG MODULE
Inspect for any deployed air bag modules or seat belt pre-tensioners.

Are any air bag modules or seat belt pre-tensioners deployed?
YES &gt;&gt; Refer to SR-20,  ...
   	</p>
    [1287] => <p><a href="precaution-1287.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [1289] => <p><a href="precaution-1289.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [1292] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_maintenance-1292.html"><span>On-vehicle maintenance</span></a><br>
   	IN-CABIN MICROFILTER 
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-12, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot;.

2. Disengage the filter cover tab (1) to remove the filter cover.

3. Remove the in-cabin microfilter from the blower unit by using the
pull tab on  ...
   	</p>
    [1295] => <p><a href="in_vehicle_sensor-1295.html"><span>In-vehicle sensor</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument lower cover LH. Refer to IP-12, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;.

2. Remove the in-vehicle sensor screw and remove the in-vehicle
sensor.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure that the  ...
   	</p>
    [1298] => <p><a href="heater_amp_cooling_unit_assembly-1298.html"><span>Heater &amp; cooling unit assembly</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation 
COMPONENTS

1. Steering member
2. Heater and cooling unit
3. Blower unit
REMOVAL
1. Discharge the refrigerant from the A/C system. Refer to HA-24, &quot;HFC-134a 
(R-134a) Service Procedure&quot;.

2. Drain the engine coolant from the cooling system. Refer to CO-1 ...
   	</p>
    [1299] => <p><a href="blower_unit-1299.html"><span>Blower unit</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation 
COMPONENTS

1. Heater and cooling unit
2. Blower unit
Front
REMOVAL
1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to VTL-12, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;.

2. Disconnect the blower motor connector.

3. Remove the screws from the blower unit, the ...
   	</p>
    [1303] => <p><a href="mode_door_motor-1303.html"><span>Mode door motor</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation 
REMOVAL
1. Remove the combination meter. Refer to MWI-176, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;.

2. Remove the BCM (2). Refer to BCS-96, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot;.

NOTE:
The illustration is shown with the heater and cooling unit assembly
out of the ve ...
   	</p>
    [1304] => <p><a href="air_mix_door_motor-1304.html"><span>Air mix door motor</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation 
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR - LH
Removal
1. Remove the instrument lower cover LH. Refer to IP-12, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;.

2. Remove the center console side finisher LH. Refer to IP-12, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;.

3. Remove the heater and cooling  ...
   	</p>
    [1305] => <p><a href="evaporator-1305.html"><span>Evaporator</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
COMPONENTS

1. Heater and cooling unit case
2. Evaporator
3. Intake sensor
4. In-cabin microfilter
5. Evaporator cover
6. Heater and cooling unit foot duct RH
7. Blower unit

REMOVAL
1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to HA-32, &quot;HFC-134a 
 ...
   	</p>
    [1306] => <p><a href="heater_core-1306.html"><span>Heater core</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
COMPONENTS

1. Heater grommet
2. Heater pipe support
3. Heater and cooling unit foot duct LH
4. Heater core
5. Heater and cooling unit case

REMOVAL
1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to VTL-12, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;.

2. Remov ...
   	</p>
    [1308] => <p><a href="ducts_nozzles_and_grilles-1308.html"><span>Ducts, nozzles and grilles</span></a><br>
   	Components

1. Upper ventilator duct
2. Heater and cooling unit assembly
3. Connector duct (LH
4. Floor ventilator duct (LH)
5. Connector duct (center)
6. Rear floor duct (LH)
7. Rear ventilator duct (center)
8. Rear floor duct (RH)
9. Floor ventilator duct (RH)
10. Connector duct (RH)
1 ...
   	</p>
    [1310] => <p><a href="side_ventilator_grilles-1310.html"><span>Side ventilator grilles</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
Release the tabs and then remove the side ventilator grilles using a suitable 
tool.

CAUTION:
Use a suitable tool to remove the grille to avoid damage to the instrument 
panel.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REMOVAL
1. ...
   	</p>
    [1315] => <p><a href="rear_ventilator_ducts-1315.html"><span>Rear ventilator ducts</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Removal and Installation
Removal
1. Remove the floor carpet. Refer to INT-19, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot;.

2. Remove the rear ventilator duct (center).
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FLOOR VENTILATOR DUCT (RH, LH)
Removal
1. Remove the floor ca ...
   	</p>
    [1319] => <p><a href="oil-1319.html"><span>Oil</span></a><br>
   	Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor
The oil in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. 
Add oil to compressor when
replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is 
important to maintain the specified
amount.

If oil quantity is ...
   	</p>
    [1320] => <p><a href="refrigeration_system-1320.html"><span>Refrigeration system</span></a><br>
   	HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure 
SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
WARNING:
Avoid breathing the A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate 
eyes, nose, and throat.

Remove the HFC-134a (R-134a) from the A/C system using certified service 
equipment meeting the
requ ...
   	</p>
    [1321] => <p><a href="fluorescent_leak_detector-1321.html"><span>Fluorescent leak detector</span></a><br>
   	Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent
Leak Detector 
1. Check A/C system for leaks using the UV lamp and safety goggles (J-42220) 
in a low sunlight area (area
without windows preferable). Illuminate all components, fittings and lines. The 
dye will appear as a bright
green/yellow ar ...
   	</p>
    [1322] => <p><a href="electrical_leak_detector-1322.html"><span>Electrical leak detector</span></a><br>
   	Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector
PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LEAK DETECTOR
When performing a refrigerant leak check, use a electronic refrigerant
leak detector (J-41995) or equivalent. Ensure that the instrument
is calibrated and set properly per the manufacturer's operating
instructions.
 ...
   	</p>
    [1324] => <p><a href="refrigeration_system-1324.html"><span>Refrigeration system</span></a><br>
   	Component 

1. Heater and cooling unit assembly
2. High-pressure pipe
3. High-pressure A/C service valve
4. Junction pipe
5. High-pressure flexible hose
6. Condenser and liquid tank
7. Air deflector RH (QR25DE shown,
VQ35DE similar)
8. Air deflector LH (QR25DE shown,
VQ35DE similar)
9. R ...
   	</p>
    [1325] => <p><a href="compressor-1325.html"><span>Compressor</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation for Compressor -
QR25DE Models

REMOVAL
1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to HA-24, &quot;HFC-134a (R-134a) Service 
Procedure&quot;.

2. Remove the drive belt. Refer to EM-16, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot;.

3. Remove the engine undercover.

4. Remove th ...
   	</p>
    [1326] => <p><a href="low_pressure_flexible_hose-1326.html"><span>Low-pressure flexible hose</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Flexible
Hose 
QR25DE
Removal
1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to HA-32, &quot;HFC-134a (R-134a) Service 
Procedure&quot;.

2. Remove the low-pressure flexible hose. Refer to HA-31, &quot;Component&quot;.

CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the h ...
   	</p>
    [1327] => <p><a href="low_pressure_pipe-1327.html"><span>Low-pressure pipe</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Pipe 
QR25DE
Removal
1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to HA-24, &quot;HFC-134a (R-134a) Service 
Procedure&quot;.

2. Remove the strut tower bar. Refer to FSU-12, &quot;Exploded View&quot;.

3. Remove the upper cowl. Refer to EXT-18, &quot;Removal ...
   	</p>
    [1328] => <p><a href="high_pressure_flexible_hose-1328.html"><span>High-pressure flexible hose</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation for High-Pressure Flexible
Hose 
QR25DE
Removal
1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to HA-32, &quot;HFC-134a (R-134a) Service 
Procedure&quot;.

2. Reposition the power steering reservoir out of the way without disconnecting 
the hose.

3. Reposition the engine coo ...
   	</p>
    [1329] => <p><a href="high_pressure_pipe-1329.html"><span>High-pressure pipe</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation for High-Pressure Pipe 
QR25DE
Removal
1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to HA-24, &quot;HFC-134a (R-134a) Service 
Procedure&quot;.

2. Remove the strut tower bar. Refer to FSU-12, &quot;Exploded View&quot;.

3. Remove the upper cowl. Refer to EXT-18, &quot;Remova ...
   	</p>
    [1330] => <p><a href="condenser-1330.html"><span>Condenser</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation for Condenser
REMOVAL
1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to HA-32, &quot;HFC-134a (R-134a) Service 
Procedure&quot;.

2. Remove the front fascia (coupe only). Refer to EXT-17, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;.

3. Remove the front grille (sedan only). Refer to  ...
   	</p>
    [1332] => <p><a href="refrigerant_pressure_sensor-1332.html"><span>Refrigerant pressure sensor</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure
Sensor 
REMOVAL
1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to HA-32, &quot;HFC-134a (R-134a) Service 
Procedure&quot;.

2. Remove the front grille. Refer to EXT-17, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot;.

3. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor ...
   	</p>
    [1333] => <p><a href="expansion_valve-1333.html"><span>Expansion valve</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation for Expansion Valve
REMOVAL
1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to HA-32, &quot;HFC-134a (R-134a) Service 
Procedure&quot;.

2. Remove the strut tower bar. Refer to FSU-12, &quot;Exploded View&quot;.

3. Remove the upper cowl. Refer to EXT-18, &quot;Removal and Instal ...
   	</p>
    [1337] => <p><a href="diagnosis_and_repair_workflow-1337.html"><span>Diagnosis and repair workflow</span></a><br>
   	Work Flow 
DETAILED FLOW
1.LISTEN TO CUSTOMER COMPLAINT
Listen to customer complaint. Get detailed information about the conditions 
and environment when the symptom
occurs.

&gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2.VERIFY THE SYMPTOM WITH OPERATIONAL CHECK
Verify the symptom with operational check. Refer to HAC ...
   	</p>
    [1338] => <p><a href="inspection_and_adjustment-1338.html"><span>Inspection and adjustment</span></a><br>
   	Description and Conditions
DESCRIPTION
The purpose of the operational check is to confirm that the system operates 
properly.
CONDITIONS:
• Engine running and at normal operation temperature.
Operational Check 
STEP 1: Check Blower
1. Turn blower control dial clockwise, blower should opera ...
   	</p>
    [1340] => <p><a href="function_information-1340.html"><span>Function information</span></a><br>
   	Component Part Location 
ENGINE COMPARTMENT

1. A/C compressor F3
2. Ambient sensor E211
3. Refrigerant pressure sensor E219
4. A/C relay (internal to IPDM E/R)

1. A/C compressor F3
2. Ambient sensor E211
3. Refrigerant pressure sensor E219
4. A/C relay (internal to IPDM E/R)
PASSENGER  ...
   	</p>
    [1341] => <p><a href="refrigeration_system-1341.html"><span>Refrigeration system</span></a><br>
   	Refrigerant Cycle 
Refrigerant flow
The refrigerant flows in the standard pattern, that is, through the 
compressor, the condenser with liquid tank,
through the evaporator, and back to the compressor. The refrigerant evaporation 
through the evaporator coil is
controlled by an externally equal ...
   	</p>
    [1342] => <p><a href="automatic_air_conditioner_system-1342.html"><span>Automatic air conditioner system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 
CONTROL SYSTEM
The control system consists of input sensors, switches, front air control and 
outputs. The relationship of these
components is shown in the figure below:

System Description 
CONTROL OPERATION
Display Screen
The operation status of the system is displayed on  ...
   	</p>
    [1344] => <p><a href="self_diagnosis_function-1344.html"><span>Self-diagnosis function</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Description 
SELF-DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
The self-diagnosis system is built into the front air control to quickly 
locate the cause of malfunctions.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
The self-diagnosis system diagnoses sensors, door motors, blower motor, etc. 
by system line. Refer to applicable
se ...
   	</p>
    [1346] => <p><a href="lan_system_circuit-1346.html"><span>Lan system circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description
SYMPTOM: Mode door motor, intake door motor and/or air mix door motor does 
not operate normally.

Diagnosis Procedure 
DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR LAN CIRCUIT
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR DOOR MOTORS
1. Press ignition switch ON.

2. Check voltage between front air control connector M37 ...
   	</p>
    [1347] => <p><a href="mode_door_motor-1347.html"><span>Mode door motor</span></a><br>
   	Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Mode door control system components are:
• Front air control
• Mode door motor (LCU)
• In-vehicle sensor
• Ambient sensor
• Sunload sensor
• Intake sensor
System Operation
The front air control receives data from each of the senso ...
   	</p>
    [1348] => <p><a href="air_mix_door_motor-1348.html"><span>Air mix door motor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Air mix door control system components are:
• Front air control
• Air mix door motors (LCU)
• In-vehicle sensor
• Ambient sensor
• Sunload sensor
• Intake sensor
System Operation
The front air control receives data from each of t ...
   	</p>
    [1349] => <p><a href="intake_door_motor-1349.html"><span>Intake door motor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Intake door control system components are:
• Front air control
• Intake door motor (LCU)
• In-vehicle sensor
• Ambient sensor
• Sunload sensor
• Intake sensor
System Operation
The intake door control determines intake door positi ...
   	</p>
    [1350] => <p><a href="blower_motor-1350.html"><span>Blower motor</span></a><br>
   	Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Fan speed control system components are:
• Front air control
• A/C LAN system (PBR built-in mode door motor, air mix door motors and 
intake door motor)
• In-vehicle sensor
• Ambient sensor
• Sunload sensor
• Intake sensor
• Fan ...
   	</p>
    [1351] => <p><a href="magnet_clutch-1351.html"><span>Magnet clutch</span></a><br>
   	Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Front air control controls A/C compressor operation by ambient temperature 
and signal from ECM.

Low Temperature Protection Control
Front air control will turn the A/C compressor ON or OFF as determined
by a signal detected by ambient sensor.

When ambient te ...
   	</p>
    [1352] => <p><a href="ambient_sensor-1352.html"><span>Ambient sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Ambient Sensor
The ambient sensor (1) is attached on the front bumper reinforcement.

It detects ambient temperature and converts it into a resistance
value which is then input into the front air control.

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INPUT PROCESS
The automatic am ...
   	</p>
    [1353] => <p><a href="in_vehicle_sensor-1353.html"><span>In-vehicle sensor</span></a><br>
   	Component Description 
In-vehicle sensor
The in-vehicle sensor (1) is located on instrument lower panel LH. It
converts variations in temperature of compartment air drawn from
the aspirator into a resistance value. It is then input into the front air
control.

Aspirator
The aspirator (1) is  ...
   	</p>
    [1354] => <p><a href="sunload_sensor-1354.html"><span>Sunload sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The sunload sensor (1) is located on the LH tweeter grille. It detects
sunload entering through windshield by means of a photo diode. The
sensor converts the sunload into a current value which is then input
into the front air control.

SUNLOAD INPUT PROCESS
 ...
   	</p>
    [1355] => <p><a href="intake_sensor-1355.html"><span>Intake sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor is located on the heater and cooling unit. It converts 
temperature of air after it passes
through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front 
air control.
Diagnosis Procedure 
SYMPTOM: Intake sensor circuit is open or  ...
   	</p>
    [1356] => <p><a href="power_supply_and_ground_circuit_for_front_air_control-1356.html"><span>Power supply and ground circuit for front air control</span></a><br>
   	Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
FRONT AIR CONTROL
The front air control has a built-in microcomputer which processes
information sent from various sensors needed for air conditioner
operation. The air mix door motors, mode door motor, intake door
motor, blower motor and compressor are then c ...
   	</p>
    [1357] => <p><a href="ecu_diagnosis-1357.html"><span>ECU diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
Reference Value 
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES


Wiring Diagram - Air Conditioner Control (Auto) -
Coupe 









Wiring Diagram - Air Conditioner Control (Auto) -
Sedan








 ...
   	</p>
    [1360] => <p><a href="insufficient_cooling-1360.html"><span>Insufficient cooling</span></a><br>
   	Component Function Check
SYMPTOM: Insufficient cooling
INSPECTION FLOW
1. CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATION CHECK - TEMPERATURE DECREASE
1. Press the AUTO switch.

2. Turn temperature control dial (LH) counterclockwise until 18°C (32°F) is 
displayed.

3. Check for cold air at disch ...
   	</p>
    [1361] => <p><a href="insufficient_heating-1361.html"><span>Insufficient heating</span></a><br>
   	Component Function Check
SYMPTOM: Insufficient heating
INSPECTION FLOW
SYMPTOM: Insufficient heating
1. CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATION CHECK - TEMPERATURE INCREASE
1. Press the AUTO switch.

2. Turn temperature control dial (LH) clockwise until 32°C (90°F) is displayed.

3. Check ...
   	</p>
    [1362] => <p><a href="noise-1362.html"><span>Noise</span></a><br>
   	Component Function Check 
SYMPTOM: Noise
INSPECTION FLOW

*1 HAC-5, &quot;Operational Check&quot;
*2 EM-16, &quot;Checking Drive Belts&quot;
(QR25DE) or EM-121, &quot;Checking
Drive Belts&quot; (VQ35DE)
*3 HAC-87, &quot;Performance Chart&quot;
*4 HA-45, &quot;Removal and Installation for
E ...
   	</p>
    [1363] => <p><a href="self_diagnosis_cannot_be_performed-1363.html"><span>Self-diagnosis cannot be performed</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
SYMPTOM: Self-diagnosis cannot be performed.
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
1. Press ignition switch ON.

2. Set in self-diagnosis mode as follows. Within 10 seconds after starting 
engine (ignition switch is Pressed
ON.), press OFF switch for at least 5 seconds.

NOTE ...
   	</p>
    [1364] => <p><a href="memory_function_does_not_operate-1364.html"><span>Memory function does not operate</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
SYMPTOM: Memory function does not operate. The setting is not maintained (it 
returns to the initial condition).

Inspection procedure
1.CHECK OPERATION
1. Set temperature control dial to 32°C (90°F).

2. Press OFF switch.

3. Press ignition switch OFF.

4. Press ig ...
   	</p>
    [1365] => <p><a href="precaution-1365.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot;
and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot; 
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
driver and front ...
   	</p>
    [1368] => <p><a href="diagnosis_and_repair_workflow-1368.html"><span>Diagnosis and repair workflow</span></a><br>
   	Work Flow
DETAILED FLOW
1.LISTEN TO CUSTOMER COMPLAINT
Listen to customer complaint. Get detailed information about the conditions 
and environment when the symptom
occurs.

&gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2.VERIFY THE SYMPTOM WITH OPERATIONAL CHECK
Verify the symptom with operational check. Refer to HAC- ...
   	</p>
    [1369] => <p><a href="inspection_and_adjustment-1369.html"><span>Inspection and adjustment</span></a><br>
   	Description &amp; Conditions
DESCRIPTION
The purpose of the operational check is to confirm that the system operates 
properly.
CONDITIONS:
• Engine running and at normal operation temperature.
Operational Check
STEP 1: Check Blower
1. Turn blower control dial clockwise, blower should oper ...
   	</p>
    [1371] => <p><a href="function_information-1371.html"><span>Function information</span></a><br>
   	Component Part Location 
ENGINE COMPARTMENT

1. A/C compressor F3
2. Refrigerant pressure sensor E219
3. A/C relay (internal to IPDM E/R)

1. A/C compressor F3
2. Refrigerant pressure sensor E219
3. A/C relay (internal to IPDM E/R)
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

1. Intake door motor M126
2. Fro ...
   	</p>
    [1372] => <p><a href="air_conditioner_control-1372.html"><span>Air conditioner control</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 
CONTROL SYSTEM
The control system consists of input sensors, switches, front air control and 
outputs. The relationship of these
components is shown in the figure below:

System Description
CONTROL OPERATION

1. Blower control dial
2: Air recirculation switch
3: Defroster  ...
   	</p>
    [1375] => <p><a href="lan_system_circuit-1375.html"><span>Lan system circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
SYMPTOM: Mode door motor, intake door motor and/or air mix door motor does 
not operate normally.

Diagnosis Procedure
DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR LAN CIRCUIT
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR DOOR MOTORS
1. Press ignition switch ON.

2. Check voltage between front air control connector M37 ...
   	</p>
    [1376] => <p><a href="mode_door_motor-1376.html"><span>Mode door motor</span></a><br>
   	Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Mode door control system components are:
• Front air control
• Mode door motor (LCU)
System Operation
The front air control receives user inputs through its various dials and 
switches. The front air control sends air
mix door, mode door an ...
   	</p>
    [1377] => <p><a href="air_mix_door_motor-1377.html"><span>Air mix door motor</span></a><br>
   	Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Air mix door control system components are:
• Front air control
• Air mix door motor (LCU)
System Operation
The front air control receives user inputs through its various dials and 
switches. The front air control sends air
mix door, mode d ...
   	</p>
    [1378] => <p><a href="intake_door_motor-1378.html"><span>Intake door motor</span></a><br>
   	Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Intake door control system components are:
• Front air control
• Intake door motor (LCU)
System Operation
The intake door control determines the intake door position based on the 
position of the recirculation switch.

When the recirculati ...
   	</p>
    [1379] => <p><a href="blower_motor-1379.html"><span>Blower motor</span></a><br>
   	Description 
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Fan speed control system components are:
• Front air control
• A/C LAN system (PBR built-in mode door motor, air mix door motor and intake 
door motor)
System Operation

Component Function Check
INSPECTION FLOW
1. CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERF ...
   	</p>
    [1380] => <p><a href="magnet_clutch-1380.html"><span>Magnet clutch</span></a><br>
   	Component Function Check 
INSPECTION FLOW
1. CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATION CHECK - MAGNET CLUTCH
1. Press ignition switch ON.

2. Press vent switch (  ).

3. Press A/C switch.

4. Confirm that the compressor clutch engages (sound or visual inspection). 
(Discharge air and blower
 ...
   	</p>
    [1381] => <p><a href="power_supply_and_ground_circuit_for_front_air_control-1381.html"><span>Power supply and ground circuit for front air control</span></a><br>
   	Description 
FRONT AIR CONTROL
The front air control has a built-in microcomputer which processes
information sent from temperature control dial and various switches
needed for air conditioner operation. The air mix door motor, mode
door motor, intake door motor, blower motor and compressor are ...
   	</p>
    [1382] => <p><a href="ecu_diagnosis-1382.html"><span>ECU diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
Reference Value 
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES


Wiring Diagram - Air Conditioner Control (Manual)
- Coupe 








Wiring Diagram - Air Conditioner Control (Manual)
- Sedan







 ...
   	</p>
    [1385] => <p><a href="insufficient_cooling-1385.html"><span>Insufficient cooling</span></a><br>
   	Component Function Check
SYMPTOM: Insufficient cooling
INSPECTION FLOW
1. CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATION CHECK - TEMPERATURE DECREASE
1. Press the A/C switch.

2. Turn temperature control dial counterclockwise to maximum cold.

3. Check for cold air at discharge air outlets.

Can  ...
   	</p>
    [1386] => <p><a href="insufficient_heating-1386.html"><span>Insufficient heating</span></a><br>
   	Component Function Check
SYMPTOM: Insufficient heating
INSPECTION FLOW
1. CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATION CHECK - TEMPERATURE INCREASE
1. Turn temperature control dial clockwise to maximum heat.

2. Check for hot air at discharge air outlets.

Can a symptom be duplicated?
YES &gt;&g ...
   	</p>
    [1387] => <p><a href="noise-1387.html"><span>Noise</span></a><br>
   	Component Function Check
SYMPTOM: Noise
INSPECTION FLOW

*1 HAC-102, &quot;Operational Check&quot;
*2 EM-16, &quot;Checking Drive Belts&quot;
(QR25DE) or EM-121, &quot;Checking
Drive Belts&quot; (VQ35DE)
*3 HAC-159, &quot;Performance Chart&quot;
*4 HA-45, &quot;Removal and Installation for
 ...
   	</p>
    [1388] => <p><a href="precaution-1388.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot;
and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
driver and front  ...
   	</p>
    [1390] => <p><a href="symptom_diagnosis-1390.html"><span>Symptom diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow

CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist 
when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic
Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the 
noise occurs and any
customer' ...
   	</p>
    [1391] => <p><a href="precaution-1391.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot;
and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
driver and front  ...
   	</p>
    [1394] => <p><a href="door_finisher-1394.html"><span>Door finisher</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View

1. Power window switch finisher
2. Front door finisher
3. Step lamp
4. Armrest finisher
5. Inside release handle escutcheon
6. Inside release handle

Removal and Installation 
Removal
1. Release the pawls at the rear edge and remove inside release handle 
escutcheon, then  ...
   	</p>
    [1395] => <p><a href="body_side_trim-1395.html"><span>Body side trim</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 

1. Front pillar finisher
2. Front body side welt
3. Front kicking plate
4. Front sill cover
5. Rear lower finisher
6. Upper pillar finisher
7. Rear pillar finisher


Removal and Installation 
CAUTION:
• Wrap the tip of flat-bladed screwdriver with a cloth when removing ...
   	</p>
    [1396] => <p><a href="rear_parcel_shelf_finisher-1396.html"><span>Rear parcel shelf finisher</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 

1. High mounted stop lamp
2. Rear parcel shelf finisher
3. Seatback release cover
4. Child anchor cover
5. Seatback latch cover


Removal and Installation 
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear seat cushion. Refer to SE-25, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot;
2. Remove rear lower finis ...
   	</p>
    [1397] => <p><a href="floor_trim-1397.html"><span>Floor trim</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View

1. Spacer (LH)
2. Floor carpet
3. Spacer (RH)
4. Floor mat hook

Removal and Installation 
REMOVAL
1. Remove the diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-17, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;.

2. Remove front seat (RH/LH) and rear seat cushion. Refer to SE-23, &quot;Removal ...
   	</p>
    [1398] => <p><a href="headlining-1398.html"><span>Headlining</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View

1. Headlining assembly (without
sunroof)
2. Assist grip
3. Headlining assembly (with sunroof)
4. Front room/Map lamp assembly
bracket
5. Front room/Map lamp assembly
6. Sunvisor
7. Sunvisor holder
8. Sunvisor cover

A. Clip C101
B. Dual lock fastener
Removal and Install ...
   	</p>
    [1399] => <p><a href="trunk_room_trim_amp_trunk_lid_finisher-1399.html"><span>Trunk room trim &amp; trunk lid finisher</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View
TRUNK ROOM TRIM

1. Upper trunk finisher
2. Trunk lid finisher
3. Trunk side finisher (RH)
4. Trunk floor carpet
5. Trunk side finisher (LH)
6. Trunk spacer (LH)
7. Spare tire cover
8. Trunk net rear
9. Trunk spacer (RH)
10. Trunk rear finisher
11. Trunk net side


Remo ...
   	</p>
    [1401] => <p><a href="symptom_diagnosis-1401.html"><span>Symptom diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow 

CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist 
when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic
Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the 
noise occurs and any
customer ...
   	</p>
    [1402] => <p><a href="precaution-1402.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot;
and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot; 
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
driver and front ...
   	</p>
    [1405] => <p><a href="door_finisher-1405.html"><span>Door finisher</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 

1. Mirror cover
2. Front door finisher
3. Step lamp lens
4. Rear door finisher
5. Step lamp/reflector lens (if equipped)
6. Arm rest finisher
7. Rear door power window switch finisher
8. Inside release handle
9. Inside release handle escutcheon
9. Inside release handle esc ...
   	</p>
    [1406] => <p><a href="body_side_trim-1406.html"><span>Body side trim</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View

1. Front pillar finisher
2. Dash side lower finisher
3. Front kicking plate
4. Front sill cover
5. Center pillar lower finisher
6. Rear sill cover
7. Rear kicking plate
8. Rear body side welt
9. Rear pillar finisher
10. Screw cover
11. Center pillar upper finisher
12. Fro ...
   	</p>
    [1407] => <p><a href="rear_parcel_shelf_finisher-1407.html"><span>Rear parcel shelf finisher</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 

1. Seatback release escutcheon
2. Seatback release cover
3. Child anchor cover
4. Seatback latch cover
5. Rear parcel shelf finisher
6. High mounted stop lamp (if equipped)
A. Clip C205


Removal and Installation 
REMOVAL
1. Release seatback latch RH/LH, then fold both r ...
   	</p>
    [1408] => <p><a href="floor_trim-1408.html"><span>Floor trim</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 

1. Spacer (RH)
2. Spacer (LH)
3. Floor mat hook
4. Floor carpet
5. Harness clamp

Removal and Installation 
REMOVAL
1. Remove front seat (RH/LH) and rear seat cushion. Refer to SE-51, &quot;Removal 
and Installation&quot; and SE-53,
&quot;Removal and Installation&quot;.
 ...
   	</p>
    [1409] => <p><a href="headlining-1409.html"><span>Headlining</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 

1. Room/Map lamp assembly
2. Mirror harness cover
3. Sunvisor holder
4. Sunvisor
5. Sunvisor cover
6. Headlining assembly (without sunroof)
7. Headlining assembly (with
sunroof)
8. Rear assist grip
9. Front assist grip
10. Sunroof clip
A. Metal clip
B. Dual lock fastene ...
   	</p>
    [1410] => <p><a href="trunk_room_trim_amp_trunk_lid_finisher-1410.html"><span>Trunk room trim &amp; trunk lid finisher</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View
TRUNK ROOM TRIM

1. Trunk lid finisher
2. Trunk lid rubber bumper
3. Trunk net rear
4. Trunk rear finisher
5. Trunk side finisher (RH)
6. Trunk floor carpet
7. Spare tire cover
8. Trunk floor board (LH)
9. Trunk side finisher (LH)
10. Trunk net side
A. Clip C205
B. Clip - ...
   	</p>
    [1412] => <p><a href="precaution-1412.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) &quot;AIR B
AG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot; 
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
driver and fron ...
   	</p>
    [1414] => <p><a href="symptom_diagnosis-1414.html"><span>Symptom diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow

CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist 
when the noise occurs.Use the Diagnostic
Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the 
noise occurs and any
customer's ...
   	</p>
    [1415] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_repair-1415.html"><span>On-vehicle repair</span></a><br>
   	INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
Exploded View 

1. Center speaker grille
2. Tweeter speaker grille (LH)
3. Instrument panel
4. Instrument side mask (LH)
5. Combination meter
6. Lower knee protector (LH)
7. Cluster lid A
8. Instrument lower cover (LH)
9. Fuse block cover
10. Steering column cov ...
   	</p>
    [1416] => <p><a href="disassembly_and_assembly-1416.html"><span>Disassembly and assembly</span></a><br>
   	CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY
Exploded View 

1. M/T finisher
2. CVT finisher
3. Storage bin (if equipped)
4. CD changer console bracket (if
equipped)
5. CD changer bracket LH (if
equipped)
6. CD changer bracket RH (if
equipped)
7. CD changer finisher (if equipped)
8. Console
9. Console scre ...
   	</p>
    [1421] => <p><a href="symptom_diagnosis-1421.html"><span>Symptom diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow

CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist 
when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic
Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the 
noise occurs and any
customer' ...
   	</p>
    [1422] => <p><a href="precaution-1422.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [1425] => <p><a href="front_seat-1425.html"><span>Front seat</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 
DRIVER'S SEAT

1. Headrest
2. Headrest holder (free)
3. Headrest holder (locked)
4. Seatback board
5. Seatback/frame assembly
6. Inner finisher
7. Seat belt buckle
8. Seat cushion trim
9. Seat harness
10. Seat cushion pad
11. Front leg covers
12. Lumbar lever
13. Power  ...
   	</p>
    [1426] => <p><a href="rear_seat-1426.html"><span>Rear seat</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 
SPLIT REAR SEAT

1. Release strap
2. Rear seat lock assembly
3. Rear striker assembly
4. Rear seatback reinforcement
5. LH seatback frame
6. RH seatback frame
7. RH seatback pad
8. LH seatback pad
9. RH seatback trim
10. LH seatback trim
11. RH seatback hinge assembly
12 ...
   	</p>
    [1427] => <p><a href="disassembly_and_assembly-1427.html"><span>Disassembly and assembly</span></a><br>
   	FRONT SEAT 
DRIVER SIDE
&nbsp;Exploded View

1. Headrest
2. Headrest holder (locked)
3. Headrest holder (free)
4. Seatback board
5. Seatback/frame assembly
6. Inner finisher
7. Seat belt buckle
8. Seat cushion trim
9. Seat harness
10. Seat cushion pad
11. Front leg covers
12. Lumbar l ...
   	</p>
    [1432] => <p><a href="symptom_diagnosis-1432.html"><span>Symptom diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow 

CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist 
when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic
Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the 
noise occurs and any
customer ...
   	</p>
    [1433] => <p><a href="precaution-1433.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [1436] => <p><a href="front_seat-1436.html"><span>Front seat</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 
DRIVER'S SEAT

1. Headrest
2. Headrest holder (locked)
3. Headrest holder (free)
4. Seatback board
5. Seatback assembly
6. Slide cover
7. Seat belt buckle
8. Seat harness
9. Seat cushion heater unit
10. Seat cushion
11. Seat trim
12. Front leg covers
13. Seat cushion fr ...
   	</p>
    [1437] => <p><a href="rear_seat-1437.html"><span>Rear seat</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 
BENCH SEAT

1. Rear seat side bolster assembly LH
2. Rear seatback latch mount
3. Rear seat side bolster assembly RH
4. Rear seatback latch
5. Rear seatback trim panel
6. Seat belt guide
7. Rear seatback pad RH
8. Rear seatback pad LH
9. Rear seatback pad trim RH
10. Rear  ...
   	</p>
    [1439] => <p><a href="front_seat-1439.html"><span>Front seat</span></a><br>
   	DRIVER SIDE
&nbsp;Exploded View 
DRIVER'S SEAT

1. Headrest
2. Headrest holder (locked)
3. Headrest holder (free)
4. Seatback board
5. Seatback assembly
6. Slide cover
7. Seat belt buckle
8. Seat harness
9. Seat cushion heater unit
10. Seat cushion
11. Seat trim
12. Front leg covers
 ...
   	</p>
    [1443] => <p><a href="diagnosis_and_repair_workflow-1443.html"><span>Diagnosis and repair workflow</span></a><br>
   	Work Flow 
OVERALL SEQUENCE

DETAILED FLOW
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the 
condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred).

&gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2.CHECK DTC WITH BCM AND IPDM E/R
1. Check “Self Diagn ...
   	</p>
    [1444] => <p><a href="pre_inspection_for_diagnostic-1444.html"><span>Pre-inspection for diagnostic</span></a><br>
   	Basic Inspection 
The engine start function, door lock function, power distribution system and 
NATS-IVIS/NMS in the Intelligent
Key system are closely related to each other regarding control. Narrow down the 
functional area in question
by performing basic inspection to identify which function ...
   	</p>
    [1445] => <p><a href="inspection_and_adjustment-1445.html"><span>Inspection and adjustment</span></a><br>
   	ECM RE-COMMUNICATING FUNCTION
Description
Performing following procedure can automatically perform re-communication of 
ECM and BCM, but only when
the ECM has been replaced with a new one (*1).

*1: New one means an ECM which has never been energized on-board.

(In this step, initialization  ...
   	</p>
    [1447] => <p><a href="intelligent_key_system_engine_start_function-1447.html"><span>Intelligent key system/engine
start function</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description 
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• The engine start function of Intelligent Key system is a system that makes 
it possible to start and stop the
engine without removing the key. It verifies the electronic ID using two-way 
communications w ...
   	</p>
    [1448] => <p><a href="nvis_nissan_vehicle_immobilizer_system_nats_-1448.html"><span>NVIS (Nissan vehicle immobilizer system-nats)</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description 
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• The NVIS (NATS) is an anti-theft system by registering an Intelligent Key 
ID in to the vehicle and prevents
the engine being started by an unregistered Intelligent Key. It has a higher 
protection agains ...
   	</p>
    [1449] => <p><a href="vehicle_security_system-1449.html"><span>Vehicle security system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

OPERATION FLOW

SETTING THE VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
Initial Condition
• Ignition switch is in OFF position.
Disarmed Phase
• When doors or trunk is open, the vehicle security system is set in the 
disarmed phase on the ass ...
   	</p>
    [1450] => <p><a href="diagnosis_system_bcm_-1450.html"><span>Diagnosis system (BCM)</span></a><br>
   	COMMON ITEM 
Diagnosis Description
BCM CONSULT-III FUNCTION
CONSULT-III performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.

SYSTEM APPLICATION
BCM can perform the following functions for each system.

NOTE:
It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub sy ...
   	</p>
    [1452] => <p><a href="u1000_can_comm_circuit-1452.html"><span>U1000 can comm circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time 
applications. It is an on-vehicle multiplex
communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error 
detection ability. Modern
vehicle is equipped with many electronic control unit, and ea ...
   	</p>
    [1454] => <p><a href="b2013_id_discord_immu_strg-1454.html"><span>B2013 ID discord, immu-strg</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM performs the ID verification with the steering lock unit and releases the 
steering lock if both BCM and
steering lock unit ID are same. BCM starts the communication with the steering 
lock unit when Intelligent Key
is carried into the passenger compartment and the push-button  ...
   	</p>
    [1455] => <p><a href="b2014_chain_of_strg_immu-1455.html"><span>B2014 chain of strg-immu</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM performs the ID verification with the steering lock unit to release the 
steering. BCM starts the communication
with the steering lock unit when Intelligent Key is carried into the passenger 
compartment and the pushbutton
ignition switch is pressed.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION L ...
   	</p>
    [1456] => <p><a href="b2108_steering_lock_relay-1456.html"><span>B2108 steering lock relay</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The steering lock relay ON signal is transmitted to IPDM E/R by BCM via CAN 
communication.

IPDM E/R turns the steering lock relay ON and transmits the release of the 
steering to BCM.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2108 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perf ...
   	</p>
    [1457] => <p><a href="b2109_steering_lock_relay-1457.html"><span>B2109 steering lock relay</span></a><br>
   	Description
The steering lock relay ON signal is transmitted to IPDM E/R by BCM via CAN 
communication.

IPDM E/R turns the steering lock relay ON and transmits the release of the 
steering to BCM.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2109 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perf ...
   	</p>
    [1458] => <p><a href="b210a_steering_lock_condition_switch-1458.html"><span>B210a steering lock condition switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
There are 2 switches in the steering unit. IPDM E/R compares those 2 switches 
conditions to judge the
present steering status and transmit the result to BCM via CAN communication.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B210A is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the  ...
   	</p>
    [1459] => <p><a href="b210b_starter_control_relay-1459.html"><span>B210b starter control relay</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Starter control relay, integrated in IPDM E/R, permits the starter relay 
operation when in N or P position and
the steering is locked or unlocked. It is installed in parallel with the starter 
relay.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B210B is displayed with DTC U10 ...
   	</p>
    [1460] => <p><a href="b210c_starter_control_relay-1460.html"><span>B210c starter control relay</span></a><br>
   	Description
Starter control relay, integrated in IPDM E/R, permits the starter relay 
operation when in N or P position and
the steering is locked or unlocked. It is installed in parallel with the starter 
relay.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B210C is displayed with DTC U100 ...
   	</p>
    [1461] => <p><a href="b210d_starter_relay-1461.html"><span>B210D starter relay</span></a><br>
   	Description
Located in IPDM E/R, it runs the starter motor. The starter relay is turned 
ON by the BCM when the ignition
switch is in START position. IPDM E/R transmits the starter relay ON signal to 
BCM via CAN communication.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B210D is displaye ...
   	</p>
    [1462] => <p><a href="b210e_starter_relay-1462.html"><span>B210E starter relay</span></a><br>
   	Description
Located in IPDM E/R, it runs the starter motor. The starter relay is turned 
ON by the BCM when the ignition
switch is in START position. IPDM E/R transmits the starter relay ON signal to 
BCM via CAN communication.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B210E is displaye ...
   	</p>
    [1463] => <p><a href="b210f_pnp_clutch_interlock_switch-1463.html"><span>B210F PNP/clutch interlock switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
IPDM E/R confirms the shift position with the following signals.

• Park/neutral position (PNP) switch (CVT models)
• Clutch interlock switch (M/T models)
• Shift position signal from BCM (CAN)
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B210F is displayed with DTC U100 ...
   	</p>
    [1464] => <p><a href="b2110_pnp_clutch_interlock_switch-1464.html"><span>B2110 PNP/clutch interlock switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
IPDM E/R confirms the shift position with the following signals.

• Park/neutral position (PNP) switch (CVT models)
• Clutch inter lock switch (M/T models)
• Shift position signal from BCM (CAN)
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2110 is displayed with DTC U10 ...
   	</p>
    [1465] => <p><a href="b2190_p1610_nats_antenna_amp-1465.html"><span>B2190, P1610 nats antenna AMP</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Performs ID verification through BCM and Intelligent Key when push-button 
ignition switch is pressed.

Prohibits the release of steering lock or start of engine when an unregistered 
ID of Intelligent Key is used.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PE ...
   	</p>
    [1466] => <p><a href="b2191_p1615_difference_of_key-1466.html"><span>B2191, P1615 difference of key</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Performs ID verification through BCM and Intelligent Key when push-button 
ignition switch is pressed.

Prohibits the release of steering lock or start of engine when an unregistered 
ID of Intelligent Key is used.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PE ...
   	</p>
    [1467] => <p><a href="b2192_p1611_id_discord_immu_ecm-1467.html"><span>B2192, P1611 ID discord, immu-ECM</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM performs the ID verification with ECM that allows the engine to start. 
Start the engine if the ID is OK.

ECM prevents the engine from starting if the ID is not registered. BCM starts 
the communication with ECM if
ignition switch is turned ON.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC ...
   	</p>
    [1468] => <p><a href="b2193_p1612_chain_of_ecm_immu-1468.html"><span>B2193, P1612 chain of ecm-immu</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM performs the ID verification with ECM that allows the engine to start. 
Start the engine if the ID is OK.

ECM prevents the engine from starting if the ID is not registered. BCM starts 
the communication with ECM if
ignition switch is turned ON.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGI ...
   	</p>
    [1469] => <p><a href="b2555_stop_lamp-1469.html"><span>B2555 stop lamp</span></a><br>
   	Description
BCM detects the stop lamp status and confirms the stop lamp switch ON/OFF 
status. BCM confirms the
engine start condition according to the stop lamp switch ON/OFF status.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Depress  ...
   	</p>
    [1470] => <p><a href="b2556_push_button_ignition_switch-1470.html"><span>B2556 push-button ignition switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
The switch that changes the power supply position. BCM maintains the power 
supply position status. BCM
changes the power supply position with the operation of the push-button ignition 
switch.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION ...
   	</p>
    [1471] => <p><a href="b2557_vehicle_speed-1471.html"><span>B2557 vehicle speed</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM receives the 2 vehicle speed signals via CAN communication. 1 signal is 
transmitted by the “unified
meter” Another signal is transmitted by “ABS actuator and electric unit (control 
unit)”. BCM compares both signals
to detect the vehicle speed.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTIO ...
   	</p>
    [1472] => <p><a href="b2560_starter_control_relay-1472.html"><span>B2560 starter control relay</span></a><br>
   	Description
Starter control relay, integrated in IPDM E/R, permits the starter relay 
operation when in N or P position and
the steering is locked or unlocked. It is installed in parallel with the starter 
relay.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2560 is displayed with DTC U10 ...
   	</p>
    [1473] => <p><a href="b2601_shift_position-1473.html"><span>B2601 shift position</span></a><br>
   	Description
BCM confirms the shift position with the following 2 signals.

• CVT selector lever
• P position signal from IPDM E/R (CAN)
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2601 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC U1000. Refer to
SEC-36 ...
   	</p>
    [1474] => <p><a href="b2602_shift_position-1474.html"><span>B2602 shift position</span></a><br>
   	Description
BCM confirms the shift position with the following 2 signals.

• CVT selector lever
• Speed signal from meter
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2602 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC U1000. Refer to
SEC-36, &quot;DTC Lo ...
   	</p>
    [1475] => <p><a href="b2603_shift_position_status-1475.html"><span>B2603 shift position status</span></a><br>
   	Description
BCM confirms the shift position with the following 2 signals.

• CVT selector lever
• P/N position switch
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2603 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC U1000. Refer to
SEC-36, &quot;DTC Logic& ...
   	</p>
    [1476] => <p><a href="b2604_pnp_switch-1476.html"><span>B2604 PNP switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM confirms the shift position with the following 4 signals.

• CVT selector lever
• P/N position switch
• P position signal from IPDM E/R (CAN)
• P position signal from TCM (CAN)
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2604 is displayed with DTC U1000, first ...
   	</p>
    [1477] => <p><a href="b2605_pnp_switch-1477.html"><span>B2605 PNP switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM confirms the shift position with the following 4 signals.

• AT selector lever
• P/N position switch
• P position signal from IPDM E/R (CAN)
• P position signal from TCM (CAN)
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2605 is displayed with DTC U1000, first  ...
   	</p>
    [1478] => <p><a href="b2606_steering_lock_relay-1478.html"><span>B2606 steering lock relay</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The steering lock relay ON signal is transmitted to IPDM E/R by BCM via CAN 
communication.

IPDM E/R turns the steering lock relay ON and transmits the release of the 
steering to BCM.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2606 is displayed with DTC U1000, first per ...
   	</p>
    [1479] => <p><a href="b2607_steering_lock_relay-1479.html"><span>B2607 steering lock relay</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM requests to IPDM E/R to supply power to electronic steering column lock. 
IPDM E/R sends status of
steering lock unit back to BCM.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2607 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC U1000. Refer to
 ...
   	</p>
    [1480] => <p><a href="b2608_starter_relay-1480.html"><span>B2608 starter relay</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Located in IPDM E/R, it runs the starter motor. The starter relay is turned 
ON by the BCM when the ignition
switch is in START position. IPDM E/R transmits the starter relay ON signal to 
BCM via CAN communication.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2608 is displa ...
   	</p>
    [1481] => <p><a href="b2609_steering_status-1481.html"><span>B2609 steering status</span></a><br>
   	Description 
There are 2 switches in the electronic steering column lock (steering 
lock/unlock switch 1 and 2). BCM compares
those two switches conditions to judge the present steering status.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2609 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the ...
   	</p>
    [1482] => <p><a href="b260b_steering_lock_unit-1482.html"><span>B260b steering lock unit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The steering lock unit performs the check by itself according to the steering 
status.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Press the push-button ignition switch, when steering is locked.

2. Check “Self diagnostic ...
   	</p>
    [1483] => <p><a href="b260c_steering_lock_unit-1483.html"><span>B260c steering lock unit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The electronic steering column lock performs the check by itself according to 
the steering status.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Turn ignition switch OFF.

3. Press door switch ...
   	</p>
    [1484] => <p><a href="b260d_steering_lock_unit-1484.html"><span>B260d steering lock unit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The electronic steering column lock performs the check by itself according to 
the steering lock status (before
lock, after lock and unlock).
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Turn i ...
   	</p>
    [1485] => <p><a href="b260f_engine_status-1485.html"><span>B260f engine status</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM receives the engine status signal from ECM via CAN communication.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B260F is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC U1000. Refer to
SEC-36, &quot;DTC Logic&quot;.

• If DTC B260F is displayed wi ...
   	</p>
    [1486] => <p><a href="b2612_steering_status-1486.html"><span>B2612 steering status</span></a><br>
   	Description 
There are 2 switches in the steering unit. IPDM E/R compares those 2 switches 
conditions to judge the
present steering status and transmit the result to BCM via CAN communication.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2612 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform th ...
   	</p>
    [1487] => <p><a href="b2617_starter_relay_circuit-1487.html"><span>B2617 starter relay circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Located in IPDM E/R, it runs the starter motor. The starter relay is turned 
ON by the BCM when the ignition
switch is in START position. IPDM E/R transmits the starter relay ON signal to 
BCM via CAN communication.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2617 is display ...
   	</p>
    [1488] => <p><a href="b2619_bcm-1488.html"><span>B2619 BCM</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM requests IPDM E/R to supply power to steering lock unit. After receiving 
the power, the steering lock unit
transmits an ON signal to BCM.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Press the push-button ignition switc ...
   	</p>
    [1489] => <p><a href="b261a_push_button_ignition_switch-1489.html"><span>B261a push-button ignition switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
IPDM E/R transmits the push-button ignition switch status via CAN 
communication to BCM. BCM receives
push-button ignition switch status by hardwire input. BCM compares the 2 signals 
for mismatch.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B261A is displayed with DTC U1000 ...
   	</p>
    [1490] => <p><a href="b26e1_no_reception_of_engine_status_signal-1490.html"><span>B26e1 no reception of engine status signal</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM receives the engine status signal from ECM via CAN communication.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B26E1 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC U1000. Refer to
SEC-36, &quot;DTC Logic&quot;.

• If DTC B26E1 is displayed wit ...
   	</p>
    [1492] => <p><a href="bcm-1492.html"><span>BCM</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
1. CHECK FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK
Check if the following BCM fuse or fusible link are blown.

Is the fuse or fusible link blown?
YES &gt;&gt; Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected 
circuit.

NO &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1 ...
   	</p>
    [1493] => <p><a href="ipdm_e_r_intelligent_power_distribution_module_engine_room_-1493.html"><span>IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution
module engine room)</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK
Check that the following IPDM E/R fuses or fusible link are not blown.

Is the fuse blown?
YES &gt;&gt; Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected 
circuit.

NO &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Tu ...
   	</p>
    [1494] => <p><a href="key_slot-1494.html"><span>Key slot</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK KEY SLOT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect key slot connector.

3. Check voltage between slot connector and ground.


Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair or replace key slot power supply circui ...
   	</p>
    [1495] => <p><a href="key_slot_illumination-1495.html"><span>Key slot illumination</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Blinks when Intelligent Key insertion is required.
Component Function Check 

Check key slot illumination (“KEY SLOT ILLUMI”) Active Test mode.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; Key slot function is OK.

NO &gt;&gt; Refer to SEC-114, &quot;Diagnosis Procedure&q ...
   	</p>
    [1496] => <p><a href="key_cylinder_switch-1496.html"><span>Key cylinder switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
For vehicles equipped with LH and RH anti-pinch system, the main power window 
and door lock/unlock switch
detects condition of the door key cylinder switch and transmits to BCM as the 
LOCK or UNLOCK signal.

For vehicles equipped with LH anti-pinch system only, the door lock ass ...
   	</p>
    [1497] => <p><a href="horn-1497.html"><span>Horn</span></a><br>
   	Description
Horn (high/low) is located inside of front bumper and operates when theft 
warning system is in alarm phase.
Component Function Check 
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select HORN in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.

2. Check the horn (high/low) operation.

Is the operation normal?
 ...
   	</p>
    [1498] => <p><a href="headlamp-1498.html"><span>Headlamp</span></a><br>
   	Description
Headlamp lighting when theft warning system is alarm phase.
Component Function Check 
1.CHECK HEADLAMP OPERATION
Check if headlamp operate by lighting switch.

Does headlamp come on when turning switch “ON”?
YES &gt;&gt; Headlamp circuit is OK.

NO &gt;&gt; Check headlamp sy ...
   	</p>
    [1499] => <p><a href="warning_lamp-1499.html"><span>Warning lamp</span></a><br>
   	Description 
• Warning lamp is built in combination meter.

• Intelligent Key system malfunction is reported to the driver by the warning 
lamp illumination.
Component Function Check
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Perform “INDICATOR” in the “Active Test” mode with CONSULT-III.

2. Check wa ...
   	</p>
    [1500] => <p><a href="vehicle_security_indicator-1500.html"><span>Vehicle security indicator</span></a><br>
   	Description
• Vehicle security indicator is built in combination meter.

• NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS) and vehicle security system 
conditions are indicated by
blink or illumination of vehicle security indicator.
Component Function Check 
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Perform “ ...
   	</p>
    [1502] => <p><a href="bcm_body_control_module_-1502.html"><span>BCM (Body control module)</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL





Terminal Layout 

Physical Values 


















1: Sedan only
2: With LH front window anti-pinch
3: With LH and RH front window anti-pinch
4: With Intelligent Key
5: Without Intelligent Key ...
   	</p>
    [1503] => <p><a href="wiring_diagram_intelligent_key_system_engine_start_function-1503.html"><span>Wiring Diagram - Intelligent key system/
engine start function</span></a><br>
   	












Wiring Diagram - VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM











Wiring Diagram - NVIS










Fail Safe 



DTC Inspection Priority Chart
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one 
based on the following priority
chart.
 ...
   	</p>
    [1504] => <p><a href="ipdm_e_r_intelligent_power_distribution_module_engine_room_-1504.html"><span>IPDM E/R (Intelligent power distribution
module engine room)</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value 
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL


TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES






Wiring Diagram — Coupe 






Fail Safe 
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL
When CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs 
fail-safe control. After CAN
communication rec ...
   	</p>
    [1506] => <p><a href="intelligent_key_system_engine_start_function_symptoms-1506.html"><span>Intelligent key system/engine start function symptoms</span></a><br>
   	Symptom Table
Engine cannot be started with all Intelligent Keys.
CAUTION:
• Follow Trouble Diagnosis Flowchart referring to “SEC-10, &quot;Work Flow&quot;”. 
Determine malfunctioning
condition before performing this diagnosis.

• Check that vehicle is under the condition shown in “ ...
   	</p>
    [1508] => <p><a href="nissan_vehicle_immobilizer_systemnats_symptoms-1508.html"><span>Nissan vehicle immobilizer systemnats symptoms</span></a><br>
   	Symptom Table
Security indicator does not turn ON or flash.
CAUTION:
• Follow Trouble Diagnosis Flowchart referring to “SEC-10, &quot;Work Flow&quot;”. 
Determine malfunctioning
condition before performing this diagnosis.

• Check that vehicle is under the condition shown in “Condit ...
   	</p>
    [1514] => <p><a href="diagnosis_and_repair_workflow-1514.html"><span>Diagnosis and repair workflow</span></a><br>
   	Work Flow
OVERALL SEQUENCE

DETAILED FLOW
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the 
condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred).

&gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2.CHECK DTC WITH BCM AND IPDM E/R
1. Check “Self Diagno ...
   	</p>
    [1515] => <p><a href="pre_inspection_for_diagnostic-1515.html"><span>Pre-inspection for diagnostic</span></a><br>
   	Basic Inspection 
The engine start function, door lock function, power distribution system and 
NATS-IVIS/NMS in the Intelligent
Key system are closely related to each other regarding control. Narrow down the 
functional area in question
by performing basic inspection to identify which function ...
   	</p>
    [1516] => <p><a href="inspection_and_adjustment-1516.html"><span>Inspection and adjustment</span></a><br>
   	ECM RE-COMMUNICATING FUNCTION
Description
Performing following procedure can automatically perform re-communication of 
ECM and BCM, but only when
the ECM has been replaced with a new one (*1).

*1: New one means an ECM which has never been energized on-board.

(In this step, initialization  ...
   	</p>
    [1518] => <p><a href="intelligent_key_system_engine_start_function-1518.html"><span>Intelligent key system/engine start function</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram  

System Description
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• The engine start function of Intelligent Key system is a system that makes 
it possible to start and stop the
engine without removing the key. It verifies the electronic ID using two-way 
communications w ...
   	</p>
    [1519] => <p><a href="nvis_nissan_vehicle_immobilizer_system_nats_-1519.html"><span>NVIS (Nissan vehicle immobilizer system-nats)</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram  

System Description
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• The NVIS (NATS) is an anti-theft system by registering an Intelligent Key 
ID in to the vehicle and prevents
the engine being started by an unregistered Intelligent Key. It has a higher 
protection agains ...
   	</p>
    [1520] => <p><a href="vehicle_security_system-1520.html"><span>Vehicle security system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

OPERATION FLOW

SETTING THE VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
Initial Condition
• Ignition switch is in OFF position.
Disarmed Phase
• When doors or trunk is open, the vehicle security system is set in the 
disarmed phase on the ass ...
   	</p>
    [1521] => <p><a href="diagnosis_system_bcm_-1521.html"><span>Diagnosis system (BCM)</span></a><br>
   	COMMON ITEM 
Diagnosis Description 
CONSULT-III performs the following functions via CAN communication with 
BCM.

SYSTEM APPLICATION
BCM can perform the following functions for each system.
NOTE:
It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system 
selection items.
 ...
   	</p>
    [1523] => <p><a href="u1000_can_comm_circuit-1523.html"><span>U1000 can comm circuit</span></a><br>
   	DescriptionCAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication 
line for real time applications. It is an on-vehicle multiplex
communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error 
detection ability. Modern
vehicle is equipped with many electronic control unit, and each  ...
   	</p>
    [1525] => <p><a href="b2013_id_discord_immu_strg-1525.html"><span>B2013 ID discord, immu-strg</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM performs the ID verification with the steering lock unit and releases the 
steering lock if both BCM and
steering lock unit ID are same. BCM starts the communication with the steering 
lock unit when Intelligent Key
is carried into the passenger compartment and the push-button  ...
   	</p>
    [1526] => <p><a href="b2014_chain_of_strg_immu-1526.html"><span>B2014 chain of strg-immu</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM performs the ID verification with the steering lock unit to release the 
steering. BCM starts the communication
with the steering lock unit when Intelligent Key is carried into the passenger 
compartment and the pushbutton
ignition switch is pressed.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION  ...
   	</p>
    [1527] => <p><a href="b2108_steering_lock_relay-1527.html"><span>B2108 steering lock relay</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The steering lock relay ON signal is transmitted to IPDM E/R by BCM via CAN 
communication.

IPDM E/R turns the steering lock relay ON and transmits the release of the 
steering to BCM.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2108 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perf ...
   	</p>
    [1528] => <p><a href="b2109_steering_lock_relay-1528.html"><span>B2109 steering lock relay</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The steering lock relay ON signal is transmitted to IPDM E/R by BCM via CAN 
communication.

IPDM E/R turns the steering lock relay ON and transmits the release of the 
steering to BCM.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2109 is displayed with DTC U1000, first per ...
   	</p>
    [1529] => <p><a href="b210a_steering_lock_condition_switch-1529.html"><span>B210a steering lock condition switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
There are 2 switches in the electronic steering column lock. IPDM E/R 
compares those 2 switches conditions
to judge the present steering status and transmit the result to BCM via CAN 
communication.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B210A is displayed with DTC U10 ...
   	</p>
    [1530] => <p><a href="b210b_starter_control_relay-1530.html"><span>B210b starter control relay</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Starter control relay, integrated in IPDM E/R, permits the starter relay 
operation when in N or P position and
the steering is locked or unlocked. It is installed in parallel with the starter 
relay.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B210B is displayed with DTC U1 ...
   	</p>
    [1531] => <p><a href="b210c_starter_control_relay-1531.html"><span>B210C starter control relay</span></a><br>
   	Description
Starter control relay, integrated in IPDM E/R, permits the starter relay 
operation when in N or P position and
the steering is locked or unlocked. It is installed in parallel with the starter 
relay.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B210C is displayed with DTC U10 ...
   	</p>
    [1532] => <p><a href="b210d_starter_relay-1532.html"><span>B210D starter relay</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Located in IPDM E/R, it runs the starter motor. The starter relay is turned 
ON by the BCM when the ignition
switch is in START position. IPDM E/R transmits the starter relay ON signal to 
BCM via CAN communication.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B210D is displa ...
   	</p>
    [1533] => <p><a href="b210e_starter_relay-1533.html"><span>B210E starter relay</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Located in IPDM E/R, it runs the starter motor. The starter relay is turned 
ON by the BCM when the ignition
switch is in START position. IPDM E/R transmits the starter relay ON signal to 
BCM via CAN communication.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B210E is displa ...
   	</p>
    [1534] => <p><a href="b210f_pnp_clutch_interlock_switch-1534.html"><span>B210F PNP/clutch interlock switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
IPDM E/R confirms the shift position with the following signals.

• Park/neutral position (PNP) switch (CVT models)
• Clutch interlock switch (M/T models)
• Shift position signal from BCM (CAN)
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B210F is displayed with DTC U1 ...
   	</p>
    [1535] => <p><a href="b2110_pnp_clutch_interlock_switch-1535.html"><span>B2110 PNP/clutch interlock switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
IPDM E/R confirms the shift position with the following signals.

• Park/neutral position (PNP) switch (CVT models)
• Clutch inter lock switch (M/T models)
• Shift position signal from BCM (CAN)
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2110 is displayed with DTC U1 ...
   	</p>
    [1536] => <p><a href="_nbsp_b2190_p1610_nats_antenna_amp-1536.html"><span>&nbsp;B2190, P1610 nats antenna AMP</span></a><br>
   	Description
Performs ID verification through BCM and Intelligent Key when push-button 
ignition switch is pressed.

Prohibits the release of steering lock or start of engine when an unregistered 
ID of Intelligent Key is used.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PE ...
   	</p>
    [1537] => <p><a href="b2191_p1615_difference_of_key-1537.html"><span>B2191, P1615 difference of key</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Performs ID verification through BCM and Intelligent Key when push-button 
ignition switch is pressed.

Prohibits the release of steering lock or start of engine when an unregistered 
ID of Intelligent Key is used.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.P ...
   	</p>
    [1538] => <p><a href="b2192_p1611_id_discord_immu_ecm-1538.html"><span>B2192, P1611 ID discord, IMMU-ECM</span></a><br>
   	Description
BCM performs the ID verification with ECM that allows the engine to start. 
Start the engine if the ID is OK.

ECM prevents the engine from starting if the ID is not registered. BCM starts 
the communication with ECM if
ignition switch is turned ON.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
 ...
   	</p>
    [1539] => <p><a href="b2193_p1612_chain_of_ecm_immu-1539.html"><span>B2193, P1612 chain of ECM-IMMU</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM performs the ID verification with ECM that allows the engine to start. 
Start the engine if the ID is OK.

ECM prevents the engine from starting if the ID is not registered. BCM starts 
the communication with ECM if
ignition switch is turned ON.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGI ...
   	</p>
    [1540] => <p><a href="b2555_stop_lamp-1540.html"><span>B2555 stop lamp</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM detects the stop lamp status and confirms the stop lamp switch ON/OFF 
status. BCM confirms the
engine start condition according to the stop lamp switch ON/OFF status.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Depress  ...
   	</p>
    [1541] => <p><a href="b2556_push_button_ignition_switch-1541.html"><span>B2556 push-button ignition switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The switch that changes the power supply position. BCM maintains the power 
supply position status. BCM
changes the power supply position with the operation of the push-button ignition 
switch.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATIO ...
   	</p>
    [1542] => <p><a href="b2557_vehicle_speed-1542.html"><span>B2557 vehicle speed</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM receives the 2 vehicle speed signals via CAN communication. One signal is 
transmitted by the “unified
meter”. Another signal is transmitted by “ABS actuator and electric unit 
(control unit)”. BCM compares both
signals to detect the vehicle speed.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETE ...
   	</p>
    [1543] => <p><a href="b2560_starter_control_relay-1543.html"><span>B2560 starter control relay</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Starter control relay, integrated in IPDM E/R, permits the starter relay 
operation when in N or P position and
the steering is locked or unlocked. It is installed in parallel with the starter 
relay.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2560 is displayed with DTC U1 ...
   	</p>
    [1544] => <p><a href="b2601_shift_position-1544.html"><span>B2601 shift position</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM confirms the shift position with the following 2 signals.

• CVT selector lever
• P position signal from IPDM E/R (CAN)
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2601 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC U1000. Refer to
SEC-23 ...
   	</p>
    [1545] => <p><a href="b2602_shift_position-1545.html"><span>B2602 shift position</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM confirms the shift position with the following 2 signals.

• CVT selector lever
• Speed signal from meter
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2602 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC U1000. Refer to
SEC-235, &quot;DTC L ...
   	</p>
    [1546] => <p><a href="b2603_shift_position_status-1546.html"><span>B2603 shift position status</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM confirms the shift position with the following 2 signals.

• CVT selector lever
• P/N position switch
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2603 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC U1000. Refer to
SEC-235, &quot;DTC Logic ...
   	</p>
    [1547] => <p><a href="b2604_pnp_switch-1547.html"><span>B2604 PNP switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM confirms the shift position with the following 4 signals.

• CVT selector lever
• P/N position switch
• P position signal from IPDM E/R (CAN)
• P position signal from TCM (CAN)
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2604 is displayed with DTC U1000, first  ...
   	</p>
    [1548] => <p><a href="b2605_pnp_switch-1548.html"><span>B2605 PNP switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM confirms the shift position with the following 4 signals.

• CVT selector lever
• P/N position switch
• P position signal from IPDM E/R (CAN)
• P position signal from TCM (CAN)
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2605 is displayed with DTC U1000, first  ...
   	</p>
    [1549] => <p><a href="b2606_steering_lock_relay-1549.html"><span>B2606 steering lock relay</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The steering lock relay ON signal is transmitted to IPDM E/R by BCM via CAN 
communication.

IPDM E/R turns the steering lock relay ON and transmits the release of the 
steering to BCM.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2606 is displayed with DTC U1000, first per ...
   	</p>
    [1550] => <p><a href="b2607_steering_lock_relay-1550.html"><span>B2607 steering lock relay</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM requests to IPDM E/R to supply power to electronic steering column lock. 
IPDM E/R sends status of
electronic steering column lock back to BCM.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2607 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC U100 ...
   	</p>
    [1551] => <p><a href="b2608_starter_relay-1551.html"><span>B2608 starter relay</span></a><br>
   	Description
Located in IPDM E/R, it runs the starter motor. The starter relay is turned 
ON by the BCM when the ignition
switch is in START position. IPDM E/R transmits the starter relay ON signal to 
BCM via CAN communication.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2608 is displaye ...
   	</p>
    [1552] => <p><a href="b2609_steering_status-1552.html"><span>B2609 steering status</span></a><br>
   	Description 
There are 2 switches in the electronic steering column lock (steering 
lock/unlock switch 1 and 2). BCM compares
those two switches conditions to judge the present steering status.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2609 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the ...
   	</p>
    [1553] => <p><a href="b260b_steering_lock_unit-1553.html"><span>B260B steering lock unit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The electronic steering column lock performs the check by itself according to 
the steering status.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Press the push-button ignition switch, when steering is locked.

2. Check “S ...
   	</p>
    [1554] => <p><a href="b260c_steering_lock_unit-1554.html"><span>B260C steering lock unit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The electronic steering column lock performs the check by itself according to 
the steering status.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Turn ignition switch OFF.

3. Press door switch. ...
   	</p>
    [1555] => <p><a href="b260d_steering_lock_unit-1555.html"><span>B260D steering lock unit</span></a><br>
   	Description
The electronic steering column lock performs the check by itself according to 
the steering lock status (before
lock, after lock and unlock).
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Turn ig ...
   	</p>
    [1556] => <p><a href="b260f_engine_status-1556.html"><span>B260F engine status</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM receives the engine status signal from ECM via CAN communication.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B260F is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC U1000. Refer to
SEC-235, &quot;DTC Logic&quot;.

• If DTC B260F is displayed w ...
   	</p>
    [1557] => <p><a href="b2612_steering_status-1557.html"><span>B2612 Steering status</span></a><br>
   	Description 
There are 2 switches in the electronic steering column lock. IPDM E/R 
compares those 2 switches conditions
to judge the present steering status and transmit the result to BCM via CAN 
communication.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2612 is displayed with DTC U10 ...
   	</p>
    [1558] => <p><a href="b2617_starter_relay_circuit-1558.html"><span>B2617 Starter relay circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description
Located in IPDM E/R, it runs the starter motor. The starter relay is turned 
ON by the BCM when the ignition
switch is in START position. IPDM E/R transmits the starter relay ON signal to 
BCM via CAN communication.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2617 is display ...
   	</p>
    [1559] => <p><a href="b2619_bcm-1559.html"><span>B2619 BCM</span></a><br>
   	Description
BCM requests IPDM E/R to supply power to steering lock unit. After receiving 
the power, the steering lock unit
transmits an ON signal to BCM.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Press the push-button ignition switch  ...
   	</p>
    [1560] => <p><a href="b261a_push_button_ignition_switch-1560.html"><span>B261A push-button ignition switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
IPDM E/R transmits the push-button ignition switch status via CAN 
communication to BCM. BCM receives
push-button ignition switch status by hardwire input. BCM compares the 2 signals 
for mismatch.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B261A is displayed with DTC U1000,  ...
   	</p>
    [1561] => <p><a href="b26e1_no_reception_of_engine_status_signal-1561.html"><span>B26E1 No reception of engine status
signal</span></a><br>
   	Description
BCM receives the engine status signal from ECM via CAN communication.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B26E1 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC U1000. Refer to
SEC-235, &quot;DTC Logic&quot;.

• If DTC B26E1 is displayed wi ...
   	</p>
    [1562] => <p><a href="power_supply_and_ground_circuit-1562.html"><span>POWER supply and ground circuit</span></a><br>
   	BCM 
Diagnosis Procedure 
1. CHECK FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK
Check if the following BCM fuse or fusible link are blown.

Is the fuse or fusible link blown?
YES &gt;&gt; Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected 
circuit.

NO &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRC ...
   	</p>
    [1563] => <p><a href="key_slot-1563.html"><span>Key slot</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK KEY SLOT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect key slot connector.

3. Check voltage between slot connector and ground.


Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair or replace key slot power supply circu ...
   	</p>
    [1564] => <p><a href="key_slot_illumination-1564.html"><span>Key slot illumination</span></a><br>
   	Description
Blinks when Intelligent Key insertion is required.
Component Function Check
1.CHECK FUNCTION

Check key slot illumination (“KEY SLOT ILLUMI”) Active Test mode.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; Key slot function is OK.

NO &gt;&gt; Refer to SEC-313, &quot;Diagn ...
   	</p>
    [1565] => <p><a href="key_cylinder_switch-1565.html"><span>Key cylinder switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
For vehicles equipped with LH and RH anti-pinch system, the main power window 
and door lock/unlock switch
detects condition of the door key cylinder switch and transmits to BCM as the 
LOCK or UNLOCK signal.

For vehicles equipped with LH anti-pinch system only, the front door loc ...
   	</p>
    [1566] => <p><a href="horn-1566.html"><span>Horn</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Horn (high/low) is located inside of front bumper and operates when theft 
warning system is in alarm phase.
Component Function Check
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select HORN in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.

2. Check the horn (high/low) operation.

Is the operation normal?
 ...
   	</p>
    [1567] => <p><a href="headlamp-1567.html"><span>Headlamp</span></a><br>
   	Description
Headlamp lighting when theft warning system is in alarm phase.
Component Function Check 
1.CHECK HEADLAMP OPERATION
Check if headlamps operate by lighting switch.

Does headlamp come on when turning switch “ON”?
YES &gt;&gt; Headlamp circuit is OK.

NO &gt;&gt; Check headlam ...
   	</p>
    [1568] => <p><a href="warning_lamp-1568.html"><span>Warning lamp</span></a><br>
   	Description
• Warning lamp is built in combination meter.

• Intelligent Key system malfunction is reported to the driver by the warning 
lamp illumination.
Component Function Check 
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Perform “INDICATOR” in the “Active Test” mode with CONSULT-III.

2. Check wa ...
   	</p>
    [1569] => <p><a href="vehicle_security_indicator-1569.html"><span>Vehicle security indicator</span></a><br>
   	Description 
• Vehicle security indicator is built in combination meter.

• NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS) and vehicle security system 
conditions are indicated by
blink or illumination of vehicle security indicator.
Component Function Check 
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Perform � ...
   	</p>
    [1571] => <p><a href="bcm_body_control_module_-1571.html"><span>BCM (Body control module)</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL





Terminal Layout 

Physical Values 


















1: Sedan only
2: With LH front window anti-pinch
3: With LH and RH front window anti-pinch
4: With Intelligent Key
5: Without Intelligent Key
Wiring Diagram - ENGIN ...
   	</p>
    [1572] => <p><a href="ipdm_e_r_intelligent_power_distribution_module_engine_room_-1572.html"><span>IPDM E/R (Intelligent power distribution
module engine room)</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL


TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES






Wiring Diagram — Sedan 






Fail Safe
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL
When CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs 
fail-safe control. After CAN
communication recov ...
   	</p>
    [1574] => <p><a href="intelligent_key_system_engine_start_function_symptoms-1574.html"><span>Intelligent key system/engine start function symptoms</span></a><br>
   	Symptom Table
Engine cannot be started with all Intelligent Keys.

CAUTION:
• Follow Trouble Diagnosis Flowchart referring to “SEC-209, &quot;Work Flow&quot;”. 
Determine malfunctioning
condition before performing this diagnosis.

• Check that vehicle is under the condition shown in  ...
   	</p>
    [1576] => <p><a href="nissan_vehicle_immobilizer_systemnats_symptoms-1576.html"><span>Nissan vehicle immobilizer systemnats symptoms</span></a><br>
   	Symptom Table
Security indicator does not turn ON or flash.

CAUTION:
• Follow Trouble Diagnosis Flowchart referring to “SEC-209, &quot;Work Flow&quot;”. 
Determine malfunctioning
condition before performing this diagnosis.

• Check that vehicle is under the condition shown in “Con ...
   	</p>
    [1582] => <p><a href="diagnosis_and_repair_workflow-1582.html"><span>Diagnosis and repair workflow</span></a><br>
   	Work Flow 
OVERALL SEQUENCE

DETAILED FLOW
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the 
condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred).

&gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2.CHECK DTC WITH BCM AND IPDM E/R
1. Check “Self Diagn ...
   	</p>
    [1583] => <p><a href="pre_inspection_for_diagnostic-1583.html"><span>Pre-inspection for diagnostic</span></a><br>
   	Basic Inspection
The engine start function, door lock function, power distribution system and 
NATS-IVIS/NMS in the Remote
Keyless Entry system are closely related to each other regarding control. Narrow 
down the functional area in
question by performing basic inspection to identify which func ...
   	</p>
    [1584] => <p><a href="inspection_and_adjustment-1584.html"><span>Inspection and adjustment</span></a><br>
   	ECM RE-COMMUNICATING FUNCTION 
&nbsp;Description
Performing following procedure can automatically perform re-communication of 
ECM and BCM, but only when
the ECM has been replaced with a new one (*1).

*1: New one means an ECM which has never been energized on-board.

(In this step, initiali ...
   	</p>
    [1586] => <p><a href="engine_start_function-1586.html"><span>Engine start function</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description 
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• The engine start function of remote keyless entry system is a system that 
makes it possible to start and stop
the engine without removing the key. It verifies the electronic ID using two-way 
communicati ...
   	</p>
    [1587] => <p><a href="nvis_nissan_vehicle_immobilizer_system_nats_-1587.html"><span>NVIS (Nissan vehicle immobilizer system- nats)</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description 
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• The NVIS (NATS) is an anti-theft system by registering a keyfob ID in to 
the vehicle and prevents the engine
being started by an unregistered keyfob. It has a higher protection against auto 
thefts that  ...
   	</p>
    [1588] => <p><a href="vehicle_security_system-1588.html"><span>Vehicle security system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description 
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

OPERATION FLOW

SETTING THE VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
Initial Condition
• Ignition switch is in OFF position.
Disarmed Phase
• When doors or trunk is open, the vehicle security system is set in the 
disarmed phase on the a ...
   	</p>
    [1589] => <p><a href="diagnosis_system_bcm_-1589.html"><span>Diagnosis system (BCM)</span></a><br>
   	COMMON ITEM 
Diagnosis Description 
BCM CONSULT-III FUNCTION
CONSULT-III performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.

SYSTEM APPLICATION
BCM can perform the following functions for each system.

NOTE:
It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub s ...
   	</p>
    [1591] => <p><a href="u1000_can_comm_circuit-1591.html"><span>U1000 can comm circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time 
applications. It is an on-vehicle multiplex
communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error 
detection ability. Modern
vehicle is equipped with many electronic control unit, and ea ...
   	</p>
    [1593] => <p><a href="b2013_id_discord_immu_strg-1593.html"><span>B2013 ID discord, immu-strg</span></a><br>
   	Description
BCM performs the ID verification with the steering lock unit and releases the 
steering lock if both BCM and
steering lock unit ID are same. BCM starts the communication with the steering 
lock unit when keyfob is carried
into the passenger compartment and the push-button ignition s ...
   	</p>
    [1594] => <p><a href="b2014_chain_of_strg_immu-1594.html"><span>B2014 chain of strg-immu</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM performs the ID verification with the steering lock unit to release the 
steering. BCM starts the communication
with the steering lock unit when keyfob is carried into the passenger 
compartment and the push-button
ignition switch is pressed.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

 ...
   	</p>
    [1595] => <p><a href="b2108_steering_lock_relay-1595.html"><span>B2108 steering lock relay</span></a><br>
   	Description
The steering lock relay ON signal is transmitted to IPDM E/R by BCM via CAN 
communication.

IPDM E/R turns the steering lock relay ON and transmits the release of the 
steering to BCM.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2108 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perf ...
   	</p>
    [1596] => <p><a href="b2109_steering_lock_relay-1596.html"><span>B2109 steering lock relay</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The steering lock relay ON signal is transmitted to IPDM E/R by BCM via CAN 
communication.

IPDM E/R turns the steering lock relay ON and transmits the release of the 
steering to BCM.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2109 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perf ...
   	</p>
    [1597] => <p><a href="b210a_steering_lock_condition_switch-1597.html"><span>B210A steering lock condition switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
There are 2 switches in the electronic steering column lock. IPDM E/R 
compares those 2 switches conditions
to judge the present steering status and transmit the result to BCM via CAN 
communication.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B210A is displayed with DTC U100 ...
   	</p>
    [1598] => <p><a href="b210b_starter_control_relay-1598.html"><span>B210B starter control relay</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Starter control relay, integrated in IPDM E/R, permits the starter relay 
operation when in N or P position and
the steering is locked or unlocked. It is installed in parallel with the starter 
relay.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B210B is displayed with DTC U10 ...
   	</p>
    [1599] => <p><a href="b210c_starter_control_relay-1599.html"><span>B210C starter control relay</span></a><br>
   	Description
Starter control relay, integrated in IPDM E/R, permits the starter relay 
operation when in N or P position and
the steering is locked or unlocked. It is installed in parallel with the starter 
relay.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B210C is displayed with DTC U10 ...
   	</p>
    [1600] => <p><a href="b210d_starter_relay-1600.html"><span>B210D starter relay</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Located in IPDM E/R, it runs the starter motor. The starter relay is turned 
ON by the BCM when the ignition
switch is in START position. IPDM E/R transmits the starter relay ON signal to 
BCM via CAN communication.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B210D is display ...
   	</p>
    [1601] => <p><a href="b210e_starter_relay-1601.html"><span>B210E starter relay</span></a><br>
   	Description
Located in IPDM E/R, it runs the starter motor. The starter relay is turned 
ON by the BCM when the ignition
switch is in START position. IPDM E/R transmits the starter relay ON signal to 
BCM via CAN communication.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B210E is display ...
   	</p>
    [1602] => <p><a href="b210f_pnp_clutch_interlock_switch-1602.html"><span>B210F PNP/Clutch interlock switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
IPDM E/R confirms the shift position with the following signals.

• Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
• Shift position signal from BCM (CAN)
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B210F is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC U1000 ...
   	</p>
    [1603] => <p><a href="b2110_pnp_clutch_interlock_switch-1603.html"><span>B2110 PNP/Clutch interlock switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
IPDM E/R confirms the shift position with the following signals.

• Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
• Shift position signal from BCM (CAN)
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2110 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC U1000 ...
   	</p>
    [1604] => <p><a href="b2190_p1610_nats_antenna_amp-1604.html"><span>B2190, P1610 nats antenna amp</span></a><br>
   	Description
Performs ID verification through BCM and keyfob when push-button ignition 
switch is pressed.

Prohibits the release of steering lock or start of engine when an unregistered 
ID of keyfob is used.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMA ...
   	</p>
    [1605] => <p><a href="b2191_p1615_difference_of_key-1605.html"><span>B2191, P1615 Difference of key</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Performs ID verification through BCM and keyfob when push-button ignition 
switch is pressed.

Prohibits the release of steering lock or start of engine when an unregistered 
ID of keyfob is used.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRM ...
   	</p>
    [1606] => <p><a href="b2192_p1611_id_discord_immu_ecm-1606.html"><span>B2192, P1611 ID discord, immu-ecm</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM performs the ID verification with ECM that allows the engine to start. 
Start the engine if the ID is OK.

ECM prevents the engine from starting if the ID is not registered. BCM starts 
the communication with ECM if
ignition switch is turned ON.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC ...
   	</p>
    [1607] => <p><a href="b2193_p1612_chain_of_ecm_immu-1607.html"><span>B2193, P1612 chain of ECM-IMMU</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM performs the ID verification with ECM that allows the engine to start. 
Start the engine if the ID is OK.

ECM prevents the engine from starting if the ID is not registered. BCM starts 
the communication with ECM if
ignition switch is turned ON.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGI ...
   	</p>
    [1608] => <p><a href="b2555_stop_lamp-1608.html"><span>B2555 stop lamp</span></a><br>
   	Description
BCM detects the stop lamp status and confirms the stop lamp switch ON/OFF 
status. BCM confirms the
engine start condition according to the stop lamp switch ON/OFF status.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Depress  ...
   	</p>
    [1609] => <p><a href="b2556_push_button_ignition_switch-1609.html"><span>B2556 push-button ignition switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The switch that changes the power supply position. BCM maintains the power 
supply position status. BCM
changes the power supply position with the operation of the push-button ignition 
switch.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION ...
   	</p>
    [1610] => <p><a href="b2557_vehicle_speed-1610.html"><span>B2557 vehicle speed</span></a><br>
   	Description
BCM receives the 2 vehicle speed signals via CAN communication. One signal is 
transmitted by the “unified
meter”. Another signal is transmitted by “ABS actuator and electric unit 
(control unit)”. BCM compares both
signals to detect the vehicle speed.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETEC ...
   	</p>
    [1611] => <p><a href="b2560_starter_control_relay-1611.html"><span>B2560 starter control relay</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Starter control relay, integrated in IPDM E/R, permits the starter relay 
operation when in N or P position and
the steering is locked or unlocked. It is installed in parallel with the starter 
relay.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2560 is displayed with DTC U1 ...
   	</p>
    [1612] => <p><a href="b2601_shift_position-1612.html"><span>B2601 shift position</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM confirms the shift position with the following 2 signals.

• CVT selector lever
• P position signal from IPDM E/R (CAN)
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2601 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC U1000. Refer to
SEC-4 ...
   	</p>
    [1613] => <p><a href="b2602_shift_position-1613.html"><span>B2602 shift position</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM confirms the shift position with the following 2 signals.

• CVT selector lever
• Speed signal from meter
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2602 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC U1000. Refer to
SEC-433, &quot;DTC  ...
   	</p>
    [1614] => <p><a href="b2603_shift_position_status-1614.html"><span>B2603 shift position status</span></a><br>
   	Description
BCM confirms the shift position with the following 2 signals.

• CVT selector lever
• P/N position switch
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2603 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC U1000. Refer to
SEC-433, &quot;DTC Logic& ...
   	</p>
    [1615] => <p><a href="b2604_pnp_switch-1615.html"><span>B2604 PNP switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
BCM confirms the shift position with the following 4 signals.

• CVT selector lever
• P/N position switch
• P position signal from IPDM E/R (CAN)
• P position signal from TCM (CAN)
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2604 is displayed with DTC U1000, first  ...
   	</p>
    [1616] => <p><a href="b2605_pnp_switch-1616.html"><span>B2605 PNP switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM confirms the shift position with the following 4 signals.

• CVT selector lever
• P/N position switch
• P position signal from IPDM E/R (CAN)
• P position signal from TCM (CAN)
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2605 is displayed with DTC U1000, first ...
   	</p>
    [1617] => <p><a href="b2606_steering_lock_relay-1617.html"><span>B2606 steering lock relay</span></a><br>
   	Description
The steering lock relay ON signal is transmitted to IPDM E/R by BCM via CAN 
communication.

IPDM E/R turns the steering lock relay ON and transmits the release of the 
steering to BCM.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2606 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perf ...
   	</p>
    [1618] => <p><a href="b2607_steering_lock_relay-1618.html"><span>B2607 steering lock relay</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM requests to IPDM E/R to supply power to electronic steering column lock. 
IPDM E/R sends status of
electronic steering column lock back to BCM.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2607 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC U100 ...
   	</p>
    [1619] => <p><a href="b2608_starter_relay-1619.html"><span>B2608 starter relay</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Located in IPDM E/R, it runs the starter motor. The starter relay is turned 
ON by the BCM when the ignition
switch is in START position. IPDM E/R transmits the starter relay ON signal to 
BCM via CAN communication.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2608 is display ...
   	</p>
    [1620] => <p><a href="b2609_steering_status-1620.html"><span>B2609 steering status</span></a><br>
   	Description 
There are 2 switches in the electronic steering column lock (steering 
lock/unlock switch 1 and 2). BCM compares
those two switches conditions to judge the present steering status.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2609 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform th ...
   	</p>
    [1621] => <p><a href="b260b_steering_lock_unit-1621.html"><span>B260B steering lock unit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The electronic steering column lock performs the check by itself according to 
the steering status.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Press the push-button ignition switch, when steering is locked.

2. Check “S ...
   	</p>
    [1622] => <p><a href="b260c_steering_lock_unit-1622.html"><span>B260C steering lock unit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The electronic steering column lock performs the check by itself according to 
the steering status.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Turn ignition switch OFF.

3. Press door switch ...
   	</p>
    [1623] => <p><a href="b260d_steering_lock_unit-1623.html"><span>B260D steering lock unit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The electronic steering column lock performs the check by itself according to 
the steering lock status (before
lock, after lock and unlock).
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Turn ig ...
   	</p>
    [1624] => <p><a href="b260f_engine_status-1624.html"><span>B260F engine status</span></a><br>
   	Description
BCM receives the engine status signal from ECM via CAN communication.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B260F is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC U1000. Refer to
SEC-433, &quot;DTC Logic&quot;.

• If DTC B260F is displayed wi ...
   	</p>
    [1625] => <p><a href="b2612_steering_status-1625.html"><span>B2612 steering status</span></a><br>
   	Description 
There are 2 switches in the electronic steering column lock. IPDM E/R 
compares those 2 switches conditions
to judge the present steering status and transmit the result to BCM via CAN 
communication.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2612 is displayed with DTC U10 ...
   	</p>
    [1626] => <p><a href="b2617_starter_relay_circuit-1626.html"><span>B2617 starter relay circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Located in IPDM E/R, it runs the starter motor. The starter relay is turned 
ON by the BCM when the ignition
switch is in START position. IPDM E/R transmits the starter relay ON signal to 
BCM via CAN communication.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2617 is displa ...
   	</p>
    [1627] => <p><a href="b2619_bcm-1627.html"><span>B2619 BCM</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM requests IPDM E/R to supply power to steering lock unit. After receiving 
the power, the steering lock unit
transmits an ON signal to BCM.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Press the push-button ignition switc ...
   	</p>
    [1628] => <p><a href="b261a_push_button_ignition_switch-1628.html"><span>B261A push-button ignition switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
IPDM E/R transmits the push-button ignition switch status via CAN 
communication to BCM. BCM receives
push-button ignition switch status by hardwire input. BCM compares the 2 signals 
for mismatch.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B261A is displayed with DTC U1000, ...
   	</p>
    [1629] => <p><a href="b26e1_no_reception_of_engine_status_signal-1629.html"><span>B26e1 no reception of engine status signal</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM receives the engine status signal from ECM via CAN communication.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B26E1 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis 
for DTC U1000. Refer to
SEC-433, &quot;DTC Logic&quot;.

• If DTC B26E1 is displayed w ...
   	</p>
    [1630] => <p><a href="power_supply_and_ground_circuit-1630.html"><span>Power supply and ground circuit</span></a><br>
   	BCM 
Diagnosis Procedure 
1. CHECK FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK
Check if the following BCM fuse or fusible link are blown.

Is the fuse or fusible link blown?
YES &gt;&gt; Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected 
circuit.

NO &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRC ...
   	</p>
    [1631] => <p><a href="ipdm_e_r_intelligent_power_distribution_module_engine_room_-1631.html"><span>IPDM E/R (Intelligent power distribution module engine room)</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK
Check that the following IPDM E/R fuses or fusible link are not blown.

Is the fuse blown?
YES &gt;&gt; Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected 
circuit.

NO &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
 ...
   	</p>
    [1632] => <p><a href="key_slot-1632.html"><span>Key slot</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK KEY SLOT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUI
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect key slot connector.

3. Check voltage between slot connector and ground.


Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair or replace key slot power supply circuit ...
   	</p>
    [1633] => <p><a href="key_slot_illumination-1633.html"><span>Key slot illumination</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Blinks when keyfob insertion is required.
Component Function Check 
1.CHECK FUNCTION

Check key slot illumination (“KEY SLOT ILLUMI”) Active Test mode.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; Key slot function is OK.

NO &gt;&gt; Refer to SEC-505, &quot;Diagnosis Pr ...
   	</p>
    [1634] => <p><a href="key_cylinder_switch-1634.html"><span>Key cylinder switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
For vehicles equipped with LH and RH anti-pinch system, the main power window 
and door lock/unlock switch
detects condition of the door key cylinder switch and transmits to BCM as the 
LOCK or UNLOCK signal.

For vehicles equipped with LH anti-pinch system only, the front door loc ...
   	</p>
    [1635] => <p><a href="horn-1635.html"><span>Horn</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Horn (high/low) is located inside of front bumper and operates when theft 
warning system is in alarm phase.
Component Function Check
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select HORN in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.

2. Check the horn (high/low) operation.

Is the operation normal?
 ...
   	</p>
    [1636] => <p><a href="headlamp-1636.html"><span>Headlamp</span></a><br>
   	Description
Headlamp lighting when theft warning system is in alarm phase.
Component Function Check
1.CHECK HEADLAMP OPERATION
Check if headlamps operate by lighting switch.

Does headlamp come on when turning switch “ON”?
YES &gt;&gt; Headlamp circuit is OK.

NO &gt;&gt; Check headlamp ...
   	</p>
    [1637] => <p><a href="warning_lamp-1637.html"><span>Warning lamp</span></a><br>
   	Description 
• Warning lamp is built in combination meter.

• Remote keyless entry system malfunction is reported to the driver by the 
warning lamp illumination.
Component Function Check
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Perform “INDICATOR” in the “Active Test” mode with CONSULT-III.

2. Che ...
   	</p>
    [1638] => <p><a href="vehicle_security_indicator-1638.html"><span>Vehicle security indicator</span></a><br>
   	Description
• Vehicle security indicator is built in combination meter.

• NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS) and vehicle security system 
conditions are indicated by
blink or illumination of vehicle security indicator.
Component Function Check 
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Perform “ ...
   	</p>
    [1640] => <p><a href="bcm_body_control_module_-1640.html"><span>BCM (Body control module)</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL





Terminal Layout 

Physical Values 


















1: Sedan only
2: With LH front window anti-pinch
3: With LH and RH front window anti-pinch
4: With Intelligent Key
5: Without Intelligent Key
Wiring Diagram - ENGIN ...
   	</p>
    [1641] => <p><a href="ipdm_e_r_intelligent_power_distribution_module_engine_room_-1641.html"><span>IPDM E/R (Intelligent power distribution
module engine room)</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value 
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL


TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES






Wiring Diagram — Sedan






Fail Safe
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL
When CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs 
fail-safe control. After CAN
communication recov ...
   	</p>
    [1643] => <p><a href="engine_start_function_symptoms-1643.html"><span>Engine start function symptoms</span></a><br>
   	Symptom Table
Engine cannot be started with all keyfobs.

CAUTION:
• Follow Trouble Diagnosis Flowchart referring to “SEC-411, &quot;Work Flow&quot;”. 
Determine malfunctioning
condition before performing this diagnosis.

• Check that vehicle is under the condition shown in “Condit ...
   	</p>
    [1645] => <p><a href="nissan_vehicle_immobilizer_systemnats_symptoms-1645.html"><span>Nissan vehicle immobilizer systemnats symptoms</span></a><br>
   	Symptom Table
Security indicator does not turn ON or flash.

CAUTION:
• Follow Trouble Diagnosis Flowchart referring to “SEC-411, &quot;Work Flow&quot;”. 
Determine malfunctioning
condition before performing this diagnosis.

• Check that vehicle is under the condition shown in “Con ...
   	</p>
    [1650] => <p><a href="symptom_diagnosis-1650.html"><span>Symptom diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow

CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist 
when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic
Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the 
noise occurs and any
customer' ...
   	</p>
    [1651] => <p><a href="precaution-1651.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) &quot;AIR B
AG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot; 
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
driver and fron ...
   	</p>
    [1654] => <p><a href="windshield_glass-1654.html"><span>Windshield glass</span></a><br>
   	Components 

1. Windshield glass
2. Spacer
3. Mirror base
4. Adhesive
5. Roof panel
6. Front pillar outer panel
7. Cowl top center
8. Primer
E. 7(0.28)
F. 12 (0.47)
G. 7.5 (0.30)
H. 16 (0.63)
I. 25 (0.98)
J. 12.5 (0.49)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Partially remove the headl ...
   	</p>
    [1655] => <p><a href="rear_window_glass-1655.html"><span>Rear window glass</span></a><br>
   	Components - Sedan 

1. Rear window glass
2. Spacer
3. Adhesive
4. Roof panel outer
5. Rear window molding
6. Body side outer
7. Parcel shelf
8. Primer
D. 7 (0.28)
E. 12 (0.47)
F. 12.5 (0.49)
G. 16 (0.63)
Components - Coupe

1. Rear window glass
2. Spacer
3. Adhesive
4. Roof panel ...
   	</p>
    [1656] => <p><a href="front_door_glass-1656.html"><span>Front door glass</span></a><br>
   	Components 

1. Door
2. Inside seal
3. Door glass
4. Regulator assembly
5. Door module assembly
6. Window motor
7. Cover
Removal and Installation 
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to INT-12, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;.

2. Remove the bolt hole covers.

3. R ...
   	</p>
    [1657] => <p><a href="front_regulator-1657.html"><span>Front regulator</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View

1. Door
2. Inside seal
3. Door glass
4. Regulator assembly
5. Door module assembly
6. Window motor
7. Cover
Removal and Installation 
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door finisher. For Sedan Refer to INT-34, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;. For Coupe Refer
to INT-12, &q ...
   	</p>
    [1658] => <p><a href="rear_door_glass-1658.html"><span>Rear door glass</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 

1. Rear door
2. Door glass run
3. Door glass
4. Inside seal
5. Partition sash
6. Rear window seal
7. Door rear, glass
8. Regulator assembly
9. Window motor
10. Water shield
Removal and Installation 
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to INT-34, &quot;Remova ...
   	</p>
    [1659] => <p><a href="rear_regulator-1659.html"><span>Rear regulator</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View

1. Rear door
2. Door glass run
3. Door glass
4. Inside seal
5. Partition sash
6. Rear window seal
7. Door rear, glass
8. Regulator assembly
9. Window motor
10. Water shield
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to INT-34, &quot;Removal  ...
   	</p>
    [1660] => <p><a href="side_window_glass-1660.html"><span>Side window glass</span></a><br>
   	Components

1. Windshield glass
2. Spacer
3. Seal
4. Body side outer
5. Primer
6. Adhesive
7. Encapsulation
E. 7(0.28)
F. 12 (0.47)
G. 15 (0.59)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Upper pillar finisher. Refer to INT-15, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;.

2. NOTE:
I ...
   	</p>
    [1662] => <p><a href="front_regulator-1662.html"><span>Front regulator</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View

1. Door
2. Inside seal
3. Door glass
4. Regulator assembly
5. Door module assembly
6. Window motor
Disassembly
Remove the window motor nuts (A) the four window regulator bolts
(B) and the window motor (1) from the door module assembly. On
the back side remove the window reg ...
   	</p>
    [1663] => <p><a href="rear_regulator-1663.html"><span>Rear regulator</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View

1. Rear door
2. Door glass run
3. Door glass
4. Inside seal
5. Partition sash
6. Door rear glass seal
7. Door rear glass
8. Regulator assembly
9. Window motor
10. Water shield
Disassembly
1. Remove the power window motor screws (A).

2. Remove power window motor from re ...
   	</p>
    [1666] => <p><a href="diagnosis_and_repair_workflow-1666.html"><span>Diagnosis and repair workflow</span></a><br>
   	Work Flow 
OVERALL SEQUENCE

DETAILED FLOW
1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the 
condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred).

&gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2. CHECK DTC
1. Check DTC.

2. Perform the following  ...
   	</p>
    [1668] => <p><a href="additional_service_when_removing_battery_negative_terminal-1668.html"><span>Additional service when removing battery
negative terminal</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Description
Initial setting is necessary when battery terminal is diconnected.
CAUTION:
The following specified operations are not performed under the non-initialized 
condition.

• Auto-up operation
• Anti-pinch function
• Retained power operation
&nbsp;Special Repair
Requirem ...
   	</p>
    [1669] => <p><a href="additional_service_when_replacing_control_unit-1669.html"><span>Additional service when replacing
control unit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Initial setting is necessary when replacing main power window and door 
lock/unlock switch.
CAUTION:
The following specified operations are not performed under the non-initialized 
condition.

• Auto-up operation
• Anti-pinch function
• Retained power operation
&nbsp;Spe ...
   	</p>
    [1671] => <p><a href="power_window_system-1671.html"><span>Power window system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram
POWER WINDOW LH ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM

System Description
MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

POWER WINDOW OPERATION
• Power window system is operable during the retained power operation timer 
after turning ignition switch ON
and OFF.

� ...
   	</p>
    [1673] => <p><a href="common_item-1673.html"><span>Common item</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Diagnosis Description 
BCM CONSULT-III FUNCTION
CONSULT-III performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.

SYSTEM APPLICATION
BCM can perform the following functions for each system.

NOTE:
It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system 
 ...
   	</p>
    [1677] => <p><a href="power_window_main_switch-1677.html"><span>Power window main switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
• BCM supplies power.

• It operates each power window motor via corresponding power window switch and 
makes window move up/
down when main power window and door lock/unlock switch is operated.
Component Function Check
Main Power Window And Door Lock/unlock Switch
1. CHECK M ...
   	</p>
    [1678] => <p><a href="passenger_side-1678.html"><span>Passenger side</span></a><br>
   	Description 
• BCM supplies power.

• Power window motor RH will be operated if power window and door lock/unlock 
switch RH is operated.
Component Function Check
Power Window And Door Lock/unlock Switch RH
1. CHECK POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH FUNCTION
Does power window motor RH operate with p ...
   	</p>
    [1680] => <p><a href="driver_side-1680.html"><span>Driver side</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Description
Door glass moves UP/DOWN by receiving the signal from main power window and 
door lock/unlock switch.
Component Function Check 
1. CHECK POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH CIRCUIT
Does power window motor LH operate with the main power window and door 
lock/unlock switch?
Is the inspectio ...
   	</p>
    [1681] => <p><a href="passenger_side-1681.html"><span>Passenger side</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Description 
Door glass moves UP/DOWN by receiving the signal from main power window and 
door lock/unlock switch or
power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.
Component Function Check
1. CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH CIRCIUT
Does power window motor RH operate with main power windo ...
   	</p>
    [1682] => <p><a href="encoder-1682.html"><span>Encoder</span></a><br>
   	DRIVER SIDE
Description 
Detects condition of the power window motor LH operation and transmits to 
main power window and door
lock/unlock switch as pulse signal.
Component Function Check 
1. CHECK ENCODER OPERATION
Does door glass LH perform AUTO open/close operation normally with main power ...
   	</p>
    [1683] => <p><a href="door_switch-1683.html"><span>Door switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
Detects door open/close condition and transmits the signal to BCM.
Component Function Check 
1. CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
Check (“DOOR SW-DR” and “DOOR SW-AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with 
CONSULT-III. Refer to BCS-
34, &quot;RETAINED PWR : CONSULT-III Function (BC ...
   	</p>
    [1684] => <p><a href="power_window_lock_switch-1684.html"><span>Power window lock switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Ground circuit of main power window and door lock/unlock switch shuts off if 
power window lock switch of
main power window and door lock/unlock switch is operated. This inhibits all 
operation, except for the main
switch.
Component Function Check
1. CHECK POWER WINDOW LOCK SIGNA ...
   	</p>
    [1686] => <p><a href="power_window_main_switch-1686.html"><span>Power window main switch</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value 
TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES
MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH


Wiring Diagram






Fail Safe
FAIL-SAFE CONTROL
Switches to fail-safe control when malfunction is detected in encoder signal 
that detects up/down speed and
direction of door glass. S ...
   	</p>
    [1687] => <p><a href="bcm_body_control_module_-1687.html"><span>BCM (Body control module)</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL





Terminal Layout

Physical Values 


















1: Sedan only
2: With LH front window anti-pinch
3: With LH and RH front window anti-pinch
4: With Intelligent Key
5: Without Intelligent Key
Wiring Diagram-Coupe

 ...
   	</p>
    [1688] => <p><a href="precaution-1688.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [1690] => <p><a href="none_of_the_power_windows_can_be_operated_using_any_switch-1690.html"><span>None of the power windows can be operated using any switch</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK BCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check BCM power supply and ground circuit.

Refer to BCS-42, &quot;Diagnosis Procedure&quot;.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2. CHECK MAIN POWER W ...
   	</p>
    [1692] => <p><a href="passenger_side_power_window_alone_does_not_operate-1692.html"><span>Passenger side power window
alone does not operate</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
1. CHECK POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH RH
Check power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.

Refer to PWC-22, &quot;PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check&quot;.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair or replace the malfu ...
   	</p>
    [1693] => <p><a href="anti_pinch_system_does_not_operate_normally_driver_side_-1693.html"><span>Anti-pinch system does not operate
normally (driver side)</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
1. PERFORM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
Perform initialization procedure.

Refer to PWC-21, &quot;POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Special Repair Requirement&quot;.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2. C ...
   	</p>
    [1694] => <p><a href="auto_operation_does_not_operate_but_manual_operates_normally_driver_side_-1694.html"><span>Auto operation does not operate
but manual operates normally
(driver side)</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1. PERFORM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
Perform initialization procedure.

Refer to PWC-21, &quot;POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Special Repair Requirement&quot;.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2. CH ...
   	</p>
    [1698] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_repair-1698.html"><span>On-vehicle repair</span></a><br>
   	POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the power window main switch finisher (2). Refer to
INT-12, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot;.


2. Power window main switch (1) is removed from power window
main switch finisher (2) using a suitable tool (A).

CAUTION: ...
   	</p>
    [1701] => <p><a href="diagnosis_and_repair_workflow-1701.html"><span>Diagnosis and repair workflow</span></a><br>
   	Work Flow
OVERALL SEQUENCE

DETAILED FLOW
1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the 
condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred).

&gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2. CHECK DTC
1. Check DTC.

2. Perform the following p ...
   	</p>
    [1703] => <p><a href="additional_service_when_removing_battery_negative_terminal-1703.html"><span>Additional service when removing battery
negative terminal</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Initial setting is necessary when battery terminal is removed.
CAUTION:
The following specified operations are not performed under the non-initialized 
condition.

• Auto-up operation
• Anti-pinch function
• Retained power operation
Special Repair
Requirement 
INITIALIZ ...
   	</p>
    [1704] => <p><a href="additional_service_when_replacing_control_unit-1704.html"><span>Additional service when replacing
control unit</span></a><br>
   	Description
Initial setting is necessary when replacing power window main switch.
CAUTION:
The following specified operations are not performed under the non-initialized 
condition.

• Auto-up operation
• Anti-pinch function
• Retained power operation
Special Repair Requirement
INITI ...
   	</p>
    [1706] => <p><a href="power_window_system-1706.html"><span>Power window system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 
FRONT POWER WINDOW LH ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM

System Description 
MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

POWER WINDOW OPERATION
• Power window system is operable during the retained power operation timer 
after turning ignition switch ON
and O ...
   	</p>
    [1708] => <p><a href="common_item-1708.html"><span>Common ITEM</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Diagnosis Description
BCM CONSULT-III FUNCTION
CONSULT-III performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.

SYSTEM APPLICATION
BCM can perform the following functions for each system.

NOTE:
It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system 
s ...
   	</p>
    [1712] => <p><a href="power_window_main_switch-1712.html"><span>Power window main switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
• BCM supplies power.

• It operates each power window motor via corresponding power window switch and 
makes window move up/
down when main power window and door lock/unlock switch is operated.
Component Function Check
Main Power Window And Door Lock/unlock Switch
1. CHECK  ...
   	</p>
    [1713] => <p><a href="front_power_window_switch-1713.html"><span>Front power window switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
• BCM supplies power.

• Front power window motor RH will be operated if power window and door 
lock/unlock switch RH is operated.
Component Function Check
Power Window And Door Lock/unlock Switch RH
1. CHECK POWER WINDOW MOTOR FUNCTION
Does front power window motor operate w ...
   	</p>
    [1714] => <p><a href="rear_power_window_switch-1714.html"><span>Rear power window switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
• BCM supplies power.

• Rear power window motor will be operated if rear power window switch is 
operated. Rear power window
switch.
&nbsp;Component Function Check 
Rear Power Window Switch
1. CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR FUNCTION
Does rear power window motor operate with  ...
   	</p>
    [1716] => <p><a href="driver_side-1716.html"><span>Driver side</span></a><br>
   	Description
Door glass moves UP/DOWN by receiving the signal from main power window and 
door lock/unlock switch.
Component Function Check 
1. CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH CIRCUIT
Does front power window motor LH operate with the main power window and door 
lock/unlock switch?
Is the ins ...
   	</p>
    [1717] => <p><a href="passenger_side-1717.html"><span>Passenger side</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Door glass moves UP/DOWN by receiving the signal from main power window and 
door lock/unlock switch or
power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.
Component Function Check
1. CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH CIRCIUT
Does front power window motor RH operate with main power windo ...
   	</p>
    [1718] => <p><a href="rear_lh-1718.html"><span>Rear LH</span></a><br>
   	Description
Door glass moves UP/DOWN by receiving the signal from main power window and 
door lock/unlock switch or
rear power window switch LH.
&nbsp;Component Function Check
1. CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH CIRCUIT
Does rear power window motor LH operate with main power window and door 
 ...
   	</p>
    [1719] => <p><a href="rear_rh-1719.html"><span>Rear RH</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Description
Door glass moves UP/DOWN by receiving the signal from main power window and 
door lock/unlock switch or
rear power window switch RH.
Component Function Check
1. CHECK POWER WINDOW MOTOR CIRCUIT
Does rear power window motor RH operate with operating power window main 
switch  ...
   	</p>
    [1720] => <p><a href="encoder-1720.html"><span>Encoder</span></a><br>
   	DRIVER SIDE 
&nbsp;Description 
Detects condition of the front power window motor LH operation and transmits 
to main power window and door
lock/unlock switch as pulse signal.
Component Function Check
1. CHECK ENCODER OPERATION
Does front door glass LH perform AUTO open/close operation normal ...
   	</p>
    [1721] => <p><a href="door_switch-1721.html"><span>Door switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Detects door open/close condition and transmits the signal to BCM.
Component Function Check
1. CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
Check (“DOOR SW-DR” and “DOOR SW-AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with 
CONSULT-III. Refer to BCS-
34, &quot;RETAINED PWR : CONSULT-III Functi ...
   	</p>
    [1722] => <p><a href="power_window_lock_switch-1722.html"><span>Power window lock switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Ground circuit of main power window and door lock/unlock switch shuts off if 
power window lock switch of
main power window and door lock/unlock switch is operated. This inhibits all 
operation, except for the main
switch.
Component Function Check 
1. CHECK POWER WINDOW LOCK SIGN ...
   	</p>
    [1724] => <p><a href="power_window_main_switch-1724.html"><span>Power window main switch</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value 
TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES
MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH


Wiring Diagram







Fail Safe 
FAIL-SAFE CONTROL
Switches to fail-safe control when malfunction is detected in encoder signal 
that detects up/down speed and
direction of door glass ...
   	</p>
    [1725] => <p><a href="bcm_body_control_module_-1725.html"><span>BCM (Body control module)</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value 
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL





Terminal Layout 

Physical Values


















1: Sedan only
2: With LH front window anti-pinch
3: With LH and RH front window anti-pinch
4: With Intelligent Key
5: Without Intelligent Key
Wiring Diagram-Sedan
 ...
   	</p>
    [1726] => <p><a href="precaution-1726.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [1728] => <p><a href="none_of_the_power_windows_can_be_operated_using_any_switch-1728.html"><span>None of the power windows can be
operated using any switch</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
1. CHECK BCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check BCM power supply and ground circuit.

Refer to BCS-42, &quot;Diagnosis Procedure&quot;.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2. CHECK MAIN POWER  ...
   	</p>
    [1730] => <p><a href="front_passenger_side_power_window_alone_does_not_operate-1730.html"><span>Front passenger side power window
alone does not operate</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
1. CHECK POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH RH
Check power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.

Refer to PWC-108, &quot;FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH : Component Function Check&quot;.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair or repla ...
   	</p>
    [1731] => <p><a href="rear_lh_side_power_window_alone_does_not_operate-1731.html"><span>Rear lh side power window alone
does not operate</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH
Check rear power window switch LH.

Refer to PWC-110, &quot;REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH : Component Function Check&quot;.

Is th e inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.  ...
   	</p>
    [1732] => <p><a href="rear_rh_side_power_window_alone_does_not_operate-1732.html"><span>Rear rh side power window alone
does not operate</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH
Check rear power winodw switch RH.

Refer to PWC-110, &quot;REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH : Component Function Check&quot;.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2. C ...
   	</p>
    [1733] => <p><a href="anti_pinch_system_does_not_operate_normally_driver_side_-1733.html"><span>Anti-pinch system does not operate
normally (driver side)</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1. PERFORM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
Perform initialization procedure.

Refer to PWC-108, &quot;POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Special Repair Requirement&quot;.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2. C ...
   	</p>
    [1734] => <p><a href="auto_operation_does_not_operate_but_manual_operates_normally_driver_side_-1734.html"><span>Auto operation does not operate
but manual operates normally
(driver side)</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
1. PERFORM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
Perform initialization procedure.

Refer to PWC-108, &quot;POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Special Repair Requirement&quot;.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.  ...
   	</p>
    [1738] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_repair-1738.html"><span>On-vehicle repair</span></a><br>
   	POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the power window main switch finisher (2). Refer to
INT-34, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot;.


2. Power window main switch (1) is removed from power window
main switch finisher (2) using a suitable tool (A).

CAUTION: ...
   	</p>
    [1741] => <p><a href="diagnosis_and_repair_workflow-1741.html"><span>Diagnosis and repair workflow</span></a><br>
   	Work Flow 
OVERALL SEQUENCE

DETAILED FLOW
1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the 
condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred).

&gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2. CHECK DTC
1. Check DTC.

2. Perform the following  ...
   	</p>
    [1743] => <p><a href="additional_service_when_removing_battery_negative_terminal-1743.html"><span>Additional service when removing battery
negative terminal</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Description 
Initial setting is necessary when battery terminal is diconnected.
CAUTION:
The following specified operations are not performed under the non-initialized 
condition.

• Auto-up operation
• Anti-pinch function
• Retained power operation
&nbsp;Special Repair Requirem ...
   	</p>
    [1744] => <p><a href="additional_service_when_replacing_control_unit-1744.html"><span>Additional service when replacing
control unit</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Description 
Initial setting is necessary when replacing main power window and door 
lock/unlock switch.

CAUTION:
The following specified operations are not performed under the non-initialized 
condition.

• Auto-up operation
• Anti-pinch function
• Retained power operation
S ...
   	</p>
    [1746] => <p><a href="power_window_system-1746.html"><span>Power window system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram
POWER WINDOW ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM

System Description
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

POWER WINDOW OPERATION
• Power window system is operable during the retained power operation timer 
 ...
   	</p>
    [1747] => <p><a href="diagnosis_system_bcm_-1747.html"><span>Diagnosis system (BCM)</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Description
BCM CONSULT-III FUNCTION
CONSULT-III performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.

SYSTEM APPLICATION
BCM can perform the following functions for each system.

NOTE:
It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system 
selecti ...
   	</p>
    [1750] => <p><a href="power_window_main_switch-1750.html"><span>Power window main switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
• BCM supplies power.

• It operates each power window motor via corresponding power window switch and 
makes window move up/
down when main power window and door lock/unlock switch is operated.
&nbsp;Component Function Check 
Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch
1. ...
   	</p>
    [1751] => <p><a href="passenger_side-1751.html"><span>Passenger side</span></a><br>
   	Description 
• BCM supplies power.

• Power window motor RH will be operated if power window and door lock/unlock 
switch RH is operated.
Component Function Check
Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH
1. CHECK POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH FUNCTION
Does power window motor RH operate with p ...
   	</p>
    [1753] => <p><a href="driver_side-1753.html"><span>Driver side</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Door glass moves UP/DOWN by receiving the signal from main power window and 
door lock/unlock switch.
Component Function Check 
1. CHECK POWER WINDOW MOTOR CIRCUIT
Does power window motor LH operate with operating main power window and door 
lock/unlock switch?
Is the inspection  ...
   	</p>
    [1754] => <p><a href="passenger_side-1754.html"><span>Passenger side</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Description 
Door glass moves UP/DOWN by receiving the signal from main power window and 
door lock/unlock switch or
power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.
Component Function Check
1. CHECK POWER WINDOW MOTOR CIRCIUT
Does power window motor operate with operating main power window  ...
   	</p>
    [1756] => <p><a href="driver_side-1756.html"><span>Driver side</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Description 
Detects condition of the power window motor LH operation and transmits to 
main power window and door
lock/unlock switch as pulse signal.
Component Function Check
1. CHECK ENCODER OPERATION
Does door glass LH perform AUTO open/close operation normally when operating 
main p ...
   	</p>
    [1757] => <p><a href="passenger_side-1757.html"><span>Passenger side</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Description 
Detects condition of the power window motor RH operation and transmits to 
power window and door lock/
unlock switch RH as pulse signal.
Component Function Check
1. CHECK ENCODER OPERATION
Does door glass RH perform AUTO open/close operation normally when operating 
power w ...
   	</p>
    [1758] => <p><a href="door_switch-1758.html"><span>Door switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Detects door open/close condition and transmits the signal to BCM.
Component Function Check
1. CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
Check (“DOOR SW-DR” and “DOOR SW-AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with 
CONSULT-III. Refer to BCS-
34, &quot;RETAINED PWR : CONSULT-III Function (BC ...
   	</p>
    [1759] => <p><a href="door_key_cylinder_switch-1759.html"><span>Door key cylinder switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Main power window and door lock/unlock switch detects condition of the door 
key cylinder and transmits to
BCM as the LOCK or UNLOCK signals.
Component Function Check
1. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
Check (“KEY CYL LK-SW”, “KEY CYL UN-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR ...
   	</p>
    [1761] => <p><a href="power_window_main_switch-1761.html"><span>Power window main switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
Main power window and door lock/unlock switch, power window and door 
lock/unlock switch RH and BCM
transmit and receive the signal by power window serial link.

The signal mentioned below is transmitted from BCM to main power window and door 
lock/unlock switch and
power window a ...
   	</p>
    [1762] => <p><a href="passenger_side-1762.html"><span>Passenger side</span></a><br>
   	Description
Main power window and door lock/unlock switch, power window and door 
lock/unlock switch RH and BCM
transmit and receive the signal by power window serial link.

The signal mentioned below is transmitted from BCM to main power window and door 
lock/unlock switch and
power window a ...
   	</p>
    [1763] => <p><a href="power_window_lock_switch-1763.html"><span>Power window lock switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
Ground circuit of main power window and door lock/unlock switch shuts off if 
power window lock switch of
main power window and door lock/unlock switch is operated. This inhibits all 
operation, except for the main
switch.
Component Function Check 
1. CHECK POWER WINDOW LOCK SIGNA ...
   	</p>
    [1765] => <p><a href="power_window_main_switch-1765.html"><span>Power window main switch</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value
TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES
MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH


Wiring Diagram 






Fail Safe 
FAIL-SAFE CONTROL
Switches to fail-safe control when malfunction is detected in encoder signal 
that detects up/down speed and
direction of door glass.  ...
   	</p>
    [1766] => <p><a href="front_power_window_switch-1766.html"><span>Front power window switch</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value
TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES
POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH RH


Wiring Diagram






Fail Safe 
FAIL-SAFE CONTROL
Switches to fail-safe control when malfunction is detected in encoder signal 
that detects up/down speed and
direction of door glass. Swi ...
   	</p>
    [1767] => <p><a href="bcm_body_control_module_-1767.html"><span>BCM (Body control module)</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL





Terminal Layout 

Physical Values 


















1: Sedan only
2: With LH front window anti-pinch
3: With LH and RH front window anti-pinch
4: With Intelligent Key
5: Without Intelligent Key
Wiring Diagram-Coupe
 ...
   	</p>
    [1768] => <p><a href="precaution-1768.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [1770] => <p><a href="none_of_the_power_windows_can_be_operated_using_any_switch-1770.html"><span>None of the power windows can be
operated using any switch</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK BCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check BCM power supply and ground circuit.

Refer to BCS-42, &quot;Diagnosis Procedure&quot;.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2. CHECK MAIN POWER W ...
   	</p>
    [1772] => <p><a href="passenger_side_power_window_alone_does_not_operate-1772.html"><span>Passenger side power window
alone does not operate</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH RH
Check power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.

Refer to PWC-200, &quot;PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check&quot;.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair or replace the malfu ...
   	</p>
    [1773] => <p><a href="anti_pinch_system_does_not_operate_normally_driver_side_-1773.html"><span>Anti-pinch system does not operate
normally (driver side)</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
1. PERFORM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
Perform initialization procedure.

Refer to PWC-190, &quot;ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special 
Repair Requirement&quot;.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair or replace the ma ...
   	</p>
    [1774] => <p><a href="anti_pinch_system_does_not_operate_normally_passenger_side_-1774.html"><span>Anti-pinch system does not operate
normally (passenger side)</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
1. PERFORM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
Perform initialization procedure.

Refer to PWC-190, &quot;ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special 
Repair Requirement&quot;.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair or replace the ma ...
   	</p>
    [1775] => <p><a href="auto_operation_does_not_operate_but_manual_operates_normally_driver_side_-1775.html"><span>Auto operation does not operate
but manual operates normally
(driver side)</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
1. PERFORM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
Perform initialization procedure.

Refer to PWC-190, &quot;ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special 
Repair Requirement&quot;.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair or replace the ma ...
   	</p>
    [1776] => <p><a href="auto_operation_does_not_operate_but_manual_operates_normally_passenger_side_-1776.html"><span>Auto operation does not operate
but manual operates normally
(passenger side)</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
1. PERFORM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
Perform initialization procedure.

Refer to PWC-190, &quot;ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special 
Repair Requirement&quot;.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair or replace the ma ...
   	</p>
    [1778] => <p><a href="does_not_operate_by_key_cylinder_switch-1778.html"><span>Does not operate by key cylinder
switch</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
1. PERFORM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
Perform initialization procedure.

Refer to PWC-190, &quot;ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special 
Repair Requirement&quot;.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair or replace the ma ...
   	</p>
    [1782] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_repair-1782.html"><span>On-vehicle repair</span></a><br>
   	POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH 
Removal and Installation 
REMOVAL
1. Remove the power window main switch finisher (2). Refer to
INT-12, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot;.


2. Power window main switch (1) is removed from power window
main switch finisher (2) using a suitable tool (A).
CAUTION: ...
   	</p>
    [1785] => <p><a href="diagnosis_and_repair_workflow-1785.html"><span>Diagnosis and repair workflow</span></a><br>
   	Work Flow 
OVERALL SEQUENCE

DETAILED FLOW
1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the 
condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred).

&gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2. CHECK DTC
1. Check DTC.

2. Perform the following  ...
   	</p>
    [1787] => <p><a href="additional_service_when_removing_battery_negative_terminal-1787.html"><span>Additional service when removing battery negative terminal</span></a><br>
   	Description
Initial setting is necessary when battery terminal is removed.
CAUTION:
The following specified operations are not performed under the non-initialized 
condition.

• Auto-up operation
• Anti-pinch function
• Retained power operation
Special Repair Requirement 
INITIALIZAT ...
   	</p>
    [1788] => <p><a href="additional_service_when_replacing_control_unit-1788.html"><span>Additional service when replacing control unit</span></a><br>
   	Description
Initial setting is necessary when replacing power window main switch.
CAUTION:
The following specified operations are not performed under the non-initialized 
condition.

• Auto-up operation
• Anti-pinch function
• Retained power operation
Special Repair Requirement
INITI ...
   	</p>
    [1790] => <p><a href="power_window_system-1790.html"><span>Power window system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 
FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM

System Description 
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

POWER WINDOW OPERATION
• Power window system is operable during the retained power operation timer  ...
   	</p>
    [1792] => <p><a href="common_item-1792.html"><span>Common ITEM</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Diagnosis Description
BCM CONSULT-III FUNCTION
CONSULT-III performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.

SYSTEM APPLICATION
BCM can perform the following functions for each system.

NOTE:
It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system 
s ...
   	</p>
    [1796] => <p><a href="power_window_main_switch-1796.html"><span>Power window main switch</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Description
• BCM supplies power.

• It operates each power window motor via corresponding power window switch and 
makes window move up/
down when main power window and door lock/unlock switch is operated.
Component Function Check 
Main Power Window And Door Lock/unlock Switch
1.  ...
   	</p>
    [1797] => <p><a href="front_power_window_switch-1797.html"><span>Front power window switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
• BCM supplies power.

• Front power window motor RH will be operated if power window and door 
lock/unlock switch RH is operated.
&nbsp;Component Function Check 
Power Window And Door Lock/unlock Switch RH
1. CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH FUNCTION
Does front power window ...
   	</p>
    [1798] => <p><a href="rear_power_window_switch-1798.html"><span>Rear power window switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
• BCM supplies power.

• Rear power window motor will be operated if rear power window switch is 
operated. Rear power window
switch.
&nbsp;Component Function Check 
Rear Power Window Switch
1. CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR FUNCTION
Does rear power window motor operate with  ...
   	</p>
    [1800] => <p><a href="driver_side-1800.html"><span>Driver side</span></a><br>
   	Description
Door glass moves UP/DOWN by receiving the signal from power window main 
switch.
Component Function Check
1. CHECK POWER WINDOW MOTOR CIRCUIT
Does front power window motor LH operate with operating main power window and 
door lock/unlock switch?
Is the inspection result normal?
Y ...
   	</p>
    [1801] => <p><a href="passenger_side-1801.html"><span>Passenger side</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Door glass moves UP/DOWN by receiving the signal from main power window and 
door lock/unlock switch or
power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.
Component Function Check
1. CHECK POWER WINDOW MOTOR CIRCIUT
Does power window motor operate with operating main power window and do ...
   	</p>
    [1802] => <p><a href="rear_lh-1802.html"><span>Rear LH</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Door glass moves UP/DOWN by receiving the signal from power window main 
switch or rear power window
switch LH.
Component Function Check 
1. CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH CIRCUIT
Does rear power window motor LH operate with main power window and door 
lock/unlock switch or rea ...
   	</p>
    [1803] => <p><a href="rear_rh-1803.html"><span>Rear RH</span></a><br>
   	Description
Door glass moves UP/DOWN by receiving the signal from main power window and 
door lock/unlock switch or
rear power window switch RH.
&nbsp;Component Function Check 
1. CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH CIRCUIT
Does rear power window motor RH operate with operating main power window  ...
   	</p>
    [1805] => <p><a href="driver_side-1805.html"><span>Driver side</span></a><br>
   	Description
Detects condition of the front power window motor LH operation and transmits 
to main power window and door
lock/unlock switch as pulse signal.
Component Function Check  
1. CHECK ENCODER OPERATION
Does front door glass LH perform AUTO open/close operation normally when 
operating ...
   	</p>
    [1806] => <p><a href="passenger_side-1806.html"><span>Passenger side</span></a><br>
   	Description
Detects condition of the front power window motor RH operation and transmits 
to power window and door
lock/unlock switch RH as pulse signal.
Component Function Check
1.CHECK ENCODER OPERATION
Does front door glass RH perform AUTO open/close operation normally when 
operating powe ...
   	</p>
    [1807] => <p><a href="door_switch-1807.html"><span>Door switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Detects door open/close condition and transmits the signal to BCM.
Component Function Check 
1. CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
Check (“DOOR SW-DR” and “DOOR SW-AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with 
CONSULT-III. Refer to BCS-
34, &quot;RETAINED PWR : CONSULT-III Funct ...
   	</p>
    [1808] => <p><a href="door_key_cylinder_switch-1808.html"><span>Door key cylinder switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Power window main switch detects condition of the door key cylinder and 
transmits to BCM as the LOCK or
UNLOCK signals.
Component Function Check
1. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
Check (“KEY CYL LK-SW”, “KEY CYL UN-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “POWER ...
   	</p>
    [1810] => <p><a href="power_window_main_switch-1810.html"><span>Power window main switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Main power window and door lock/unlock switch, power window and door 
lock/unlock switch RH and BCM
transmit and receive the signal by power window serial link.

The signal mentioned below is transmitted from BCM to main power window and door 
lock/unlock switch and
power window  ...
   	</p>
    [1811] => <p><a href="front_power_window_switch-1811.html"><span>Front power window switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
Main power window and door lock/unlock switch, power window and door 
lock/unlock switch RH and BCM
transmit and receive the signal by power window serial link.

The signal mentioned below is transmitted from BCM to main power window and door 
lock/unlock switch and
power window a ...
   	</p>
    [1812] => <p><a href="power_window_lock_switch-1812.html"><span>Power window lock switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
Ground circuit of main power window and door lock/unlock switch shuts off if 
power window lock switch of
main power window and door lock/unlock switch is operated. This inhibits all 
operation, except for the main
switch.
Component Function Check
1. CHECK POWER WINDOW LOCK SIGNAL ...
   	</p>
    [1814] => <p><a href="power_window_main_switch-1814.html"><span>Power window main switch</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value 
TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES
MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH


Wiring Diagram 








Fail Safe
FAIL-SAFE CONTROL
Switches to fail-safe control when malfunction is detected in encoder signal 
that detects up/down speed and
direction of door gla ...
   	</p>
    [1815] => <p><a href="front_power_window_switch-1815.html"><span>Front power window switch</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value 
TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES
POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH RH


Wiring Diagram








Fail Safe
FAIL-SAFE CONTROL
Switches to fail-safe control when malfunction is detected in encoder signal 
that detects up/down speed and
direction of door glass. ...
   	</p>
    [1816] => <p><a href="bcm_body_control_module_-1816.html"><span>BCM (Body control module)</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value 
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL





Terminal Layout

Physical Values


















1: Sedan only
2: With LH front window anti-pinch
3: With LH and RH front window anti-pinch
4: With Intelligent Key
5: Without Intelligent Key
Wiring Diagram-Sedan

 ...
   	</p>
    [1817] => <p><a href="precaution-1817.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [1819] => <p><a href="none_of_the_power_windows_can_be_operated_using_any_switch-1819.html"><span>None of the power windows can be
operated using any switch</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK BCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check BCM power supply and ground circuit.

Refer to BCS-42, &quot;Diagnosis Procedure&quot;.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2. CHECK MAIN POWER W ...
   	</p>
    [1821] => <p><a href="front_passenger_side_power_window_alone_does_not_operate-1821.html"><span>Front passenger side power window alone does not operate</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
1. CHECK POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH RH
Check power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.

Refer to PWC-308, &quot;FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH : Component Function Check&quot;.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair or repla ...
   	</p>
    [1822] => <p><a href="rear_lh_side_power_window_alone_does_not_operate-1822.html"><span>Rear lh side power window alone does not operate</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH
Check rear power window switch LH.

Refer to PWC-310, &quot;REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH : Component Function Check&quot;.

Is th e inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
Check rear power window switch LH.

Refer to PWC-310, &quo ...
   	</p>
    [1823] => <p><a href="rear_rh_side_power_window_alone_does_not_operate-1823.html"><span>Rear rh side power window alone does not operate</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
1. CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH
Check rear power winodw switch RH.

Refer to PWC-310, &quot;REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH : Component Function Check&quot;.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.  ...
   	</p>
    [1824] => <p><a href="anti_pinch_system_does_not_operate_normally_driver_side_-1824.html"><span>Anti-pinch system does not operate normally (driver side)</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1. PERFORM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
Perform initialization procedure.

Refer to PWC-295, &quot;ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special 
Repair Requirement&quot;.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair or replace the mal ...
   	</p>
    [1825] => <p><a href="anti_pinch_system_does_not_operate_normally_passenger_side_-1825.html"><span>Anti-pinch system does not operate normally (passenger side)</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
1. PERFORM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
Perform initialization procedure.

Refer to PWC-295, &quot;ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special 
Repair Requirement&quot;.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair or replace the ma ...
   	</p>
    [1826] => <p><a href="auto_operation_does_not_operate_but_manual_operates_normally_driver_side_-1826.html"><span>Auto operation does not operate but manual operates normally
(driver side)</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
1. PERFORM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
Perform initialization procedure.

Refer to PWC-295, &quot;ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special 
Repair Requirement&quot;.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair or replace the ma ...
   	</p>
    [1827] => <p><a href="auto_operation_does_not_operate_but_manual_operates_normally_passenger_side_-1827.html"><span>Auto operation does not operate but manual operates normally
(passenger side)</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1. PERFORM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
Perform initialization procedure.

Refer to PWC-295, &quot;ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special 
Repair Requirement&quot;.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair or replace the mal ...
   	</p>
    [1829] => <p><a href="does_not_operate_by_key_cylinder_switch-1829.html"><span>Does not operate by key cylinder
switch</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1. PERFORM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
Perform initialization procedure.

Refer to PWC-295, &quot;ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special 
Repair Requirement&quot;.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair or replace the mal ...
   	</p>
    [1833] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_repair-1833.html"><span>On-vehicle repair</span></a><br>
   	POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the power window main switch finisher (2). Refer to
INT-34, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot;.


2. Power window main switch (1) is removed from power window
main switch finisher (2) using a suitable tool (A).

CAUTION: ...
   	</p>
    [1836] => <p><a href="diagnosis_and_repair_workflow-1836.html"><span>Diagnosis and repair workflow</span></a><br>
   	Work Flow
OVERALL SEQUENCE

DETAILED FLOW
1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the 
condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred).

&gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2. CHECK DTC
1. Check DTC.

2. Perform the following p ...
   	</p>
    [1838] => <p><a href="additional_service_when_replacing_control_unit-1838.html"><span>Additional service when replacing
control unit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
MEMORY RESET PROCEDURE
1. Please observe the following instructions at confirming the sunroof 
operation.

NOTE:
Do not disconnect the electronic power while the sunroof is operating or within 
5 seconds after the sunroof
stops. (to wipe-out the memory of lid position and operat ...
   	</p>
    [1841] => <p><a href="sunroof_system-1841.html"><span>Sunroof system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram
SUNROOF

System Description 
SUNROOF SYSTEM
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

SUNROOF OPERATION
• Sunroof motor assembly operates with the power supply that is output from 
BCM while ignition switch is ON
or retained power is operating.

• Tilt up/ down &amp; slide open/ clos ...
   	</p>
    [1846] => <p><a href="power_supply_and_ground_circuit-1846.html"><span>Power supply and ground circuit</span></a><br>
   	SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY
&nbsp;Description 
• BCM supplies power.

• CPU is integrated in sunroof motor assembly.

• Tilts up/down &amp; slides open/close by sunroof switch operation.

• In order to close sunroof lid certainly with the signal from combination meter 
at the time of hig ...
   	</p>
    [1847] => <p><a href="door_switch-1847.html"><span>Door switch</span></a><br>
   	Description
Detects door open/close condition.
Component Function Check 
1.CHECK FUNCTION

Check door switches DOOR SW-DR, DOOR SW-AS in Data Monitor mode with 
CONSULT-III.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; Door switch is OK.

NO &gt;&gt; Refer to RF-17, &quot;Diagnosis Proc ...
   	</p>
    [1849] => <p><a href="bcm_body_control_module_-1849.html"><span>BCM (Body control module)</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL




Terminal Layout 

Physical Values 


















1: Sedan only
2: With LH front window anti-pinch
3: With LH and RH front window anti-pinch
Wiring Diagram-Coupe 









Wiring Diagram-Sedan 







 ...
   	</p>
    [1850] => <p><a href="sunroof_system-1850.html"><span>Sunroof system</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value 
TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES

Wiring Diagram — Coupe





Wiring Diagram — Sedan




 ...
   	</p>
    [1852] => <p><a href="sunroof_does_not_operate_properly-1852.html"><span>Sunroof does not operate properly</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
1. CHECK BCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check BCM power supply and ground circuit.

Refer to BCS-42, &quot;Diagnosis Procedure&quot;.

&gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2. CHECK SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check sunroof motor assembly power supply and grou ...
   	</p>
    [1857] => <p><a href="squeak_and_rattle_trouble_diagnoses-1857.html"><span>Squeak and rattle trouble diagnoses</span></a><br>
   	Work Flow

CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist 
when the noise occurs.Use the Diagnostic
Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the 
noise occurs and any
customer's comments; refer to RF-86, &quot;Diag ...
   	</p>
    [1858] => <p><a href="precaution-1858.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot;
and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
driver and front  ...
   	</p>
    [1860] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_repair-1860.html"><span>On-vehicle repair</span></a><br>
   	SUNROOF UNIT ASSEMBLY 
Inspection 
WIND DEFLECTOR
1. Open glass lid assembly fully.

2. Visually check for proper installation, damaged/deteriorated components, or 
foreign objects within mechanism.

Correct as required for smooth operation.

3. Check for grease at the wind deflector arm ( ...
   	</p>
    [1862] => <p><a href="precaution-1862.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [1864] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_maintenance-1864.html"><span>On-vehicle maintenance</span></a><br>
   	SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow 

CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer, if possible, to determine the conditions that exist 
when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic
Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the 
noise occurs and any
custome ...
   	</p>
    [1866] => <p><a href="front_bumper-1866.html"><span>Front bumper</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation 

1. Front bumper supports
2. Front bumper side bracket
3. Reinforcement bracket
4. Front bumper reinforcement
5. Front energy absorbing foam
6. Front bumper fascia
7. Tow hook cover
8. Front grille
9. License plate bracket
10. Fog lamp finisher (if equipped)
11. ...
   	</p>
    [1867] => <p><a href="rear_bumper-1867.html"><span>Rear bumper</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Rear bumper side brackets
2. Rear bumper supports
3. Rear bumper reinforcement
4. Rear energy absorbing foam
5. Rear bumper fascia
A. C205 push pin

REMOVAL
1. Remove the LH and RH rear combination lamps. Refer to EXL-260, &quot;Removal 
and Installation&quot; ...
   	</p>
    [1868] => <p><a href="front_grille-1868.html"><span>Front grille</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation 

1. Front bumper fascia
2. Front grille
3. License plate bracket
4. Fog lamp finisher (if equipped)
5. Fog lamp (if equipped)
A. Clip C101
Removal
1. Remove the front fender protectors RH and LH. Refer to EXT-19, &quot;Removal 
and Installation&quot;.

2. Remove ...
   	</p>
    [1869] => <p><a href="cowl_top-1869.html"><span>Cowl top</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Cowl top seal
2. Cowl top side trim covers
3. Cowl top foam blocks
4. Cowl top
A. Clips
REMOVAL
1. Remove both the RH and LH wiper arms. Refer to WW-116, &quot;FRONT WIPER ARMS : 
Removal and
Installation&quot;.

2. Remove the cowl top side trim covers.

3. ...
   	</p>
    [1870] => <p><a href="fender_protector-1870.html"><span>Fender protector</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Fender protector
2. Fender protector side cover
A. J-clips
B. Clips
C. Center mudguard screw

a. Sheet metal nut
REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine under cover. Refer to EXT-13, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;.

2. Remove the screw from center mudguard.

3 ...
   	</p>
    [1872] => <p><a href="door_outside_molding-1872.html"><span>Door outside molding</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Front door outside molding
2. Front door

Door Outside Molding
Removal
1. Open the front door window fully.

2. Remove the side view mirror. Refer to MIR-19, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot;.

3. Lift and twist front door molding from rear end, disconnect  ...
   	</p>
    [1873] => <p><a href="roof_side_molding-1873.html"><span>Roof side molding</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Body side outer panel
2. Windshield
3. Roof


REMOVAL
1. Lift and twist the roof side molding up from the rear edge.

2. Disconnect the roof side molding from the clips, and remove the roof side 
molding.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of  ...
   	</p>
    [1874] => <p><a href="license_lamp_finisher-1874.html"><span>License lamp finisher</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. License lamp finisher
REMOVAL
1. Remove the trunk lid finisher (if equipped). Refer to INT-23, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;.

2. Remove the license lamp finisher nuts.

3. Remove license lamp finisher by pulling toward the rear, then disconnect the 
tr ...
   	</p>
    [1876] => <p><a href="precaution-1876.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [1878] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_maintenance-1878.html"><span>On-vehicle maintenance</span></a><br>
   	SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow 

CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer, if possible, to determine the conditions that exist 
when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic
Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the 
noise occurs and any
custome ...
   	</p>
    [1880] => <p><a href="front_bumper-1880.html"><span>Front bumper</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Front bumper supports
2. Front bumper reinforcement
3. Energy absorbing foam
4. Tow cover
5. Front grille
6. Engine under cover
7. Fog lamp finisher (if equipped)
8. Fog lamp (if equipped)
9. Front bumper fascia


REMOVAL
1. Remove the front fender protecto ...
   	</p>
    [1881] => <p><a href="rear_bumper-1881.html"><span>Rear bumper</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Rear bumper supports
2. Rear bumper reinforcement
3. Energy absorbing foam
4. Splash shield LH
5. Rear bumper fascia
6. Splash shield RH

REMOVAL
1. Remove the LH and RH rear combination lamps. Refer to EXL-260, &quot;Removal 
and Installation&quot;.

2. Rem ...
   	</p>
    [1882] => <p><a href="front_grille-1882.html"><span>Front grille</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Front grille
2. Bumper fascia


FRONT GRILLE
Removal
1. Remove the front grille clips.

2. Release the grille tabs from the front bumper fascia, then remove the front 
grille.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ...
   	</p>
    [1883] => <p><a href="cowl_top-1883.html"><span>Cowl top</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Cowl top seal
2. Cowl top side trim covers
3. Cowl top foam blocks
4. Cowl top
A Clips
REMOVAL
1. Remove both the RH and LH wiper arms. Refer to WW-116, &quot;FRONT WIPER ARMS : 
Removal and
Installation&quot;.

2. Remove the cowl top side trim covers.

3.  ...
   	</p>
    [1884] => <p><a href="fender_protector-1884.html"><span>Fender protector</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Fender protector
2. Fender protector side cover
A. J-clips
B. Clips
C. Center mudguard screw

a. Sheet metal nut
REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine under cover. Refer to EXT-34, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;.

2. Remove the screw from center mudguard.

3 ...
   	</p>
    [1886] => <p><a href="side_guard_molding-1886.html"><span>Side guard molding</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Double-faced adhesive tape

Removal
CAUTION:
Never apply tack-paper adhesive remover to body panel surface finished with 
lacquer-based paints.
• Original side guard molding is affixed to body panel with double-faced 
adhesive tape.

1. Heat molding to betwe ...
   	</p>
    [1887] => <p><a href="door_outside_molding-1887.html"><span>Door outside molding</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation 

1. Front door outside molding
2. Rear door outside molding

Front Door Outside Molding
Removal
1. Open the front door window fully.

2. Remove the side view mirror. Refer to MIR-19, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot;.

3. Lift and twist from rear side, disconn ...
   	</p>
    [1888] => <p><a href="drip_molding-1888.html"><span>Drip molding</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation 


REMOVAL
1. Using a trim stick or equivalent, disconnect the drip mouldings starting 
at the front, working rearward.

2. Remove the drip moldings.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

• Insert drip moldings onto vehicle starting at t ...
   	</p>
    [1889] => <p><a href="roof_side_molding-1889.html"><span>Roof side molding</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation 

1. Body side outer panel
2. Windshield
2. Windshield


REMOVAL
1. Lift and twist the roof side molding up from the rear edge.

2. Disconnect the roof side molding from the clips, and remove the roof side 
molding.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse or ...
   	</p>
    [1890] => <p><a href="license_lamp_finisher-1890.html"><span>License lamp finisher</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. License lamp finisher
REMOVAL
1. Remove the trunk lid finisher (if equipped). Refer to INT-22, &quot;Exploded 
View&quot;.

2. Remove the license lamp finisher nuts.

3. Remove license lamp finisher by pulling toward the rear, then disconnect the 
trunk request ...
   	</p>
    [1891] => <p><a href="rear_spoiler-1891.html"><span>Rear spoiler</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Rear spoiler assembly
2. High mounted stop lamp harness
3. Gasket
A. Nuts

Removal
1. Remove trunk lid finisher (if equipped). Refer to INT-23, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;.

2. Disconnect high mounted stop lamp connector.

3. Using a trim stick, ca ...
   	</p>
    [1894] => <p><a href="precaution-1894.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR PLASTICS
Precautions For Plastics

1. When repairing and painting a portion of the body adjacent to plastic 
parts, consider their characteristics
(influence of heat and solvent) and remove them if necessary or take suitable 
measures to protect them.

2. Plastic par ...
   	</p>
    [1896] => <p><a href="body_component_parts-1896.html"><span>Body component parts</span></a><br>
   	Underbody Component Parts 


1. Upper dash assembly
2. Wiper bracket
3. Cowl top assembly
4. Lower dash assembly
5. Center floor assembly
6. Front floor assembly (RH,LH)
7. Rear crossmember (RH, LH)
8. Front crossmember (RH, LH)
9. Inner sill (RH, LH)
10. Front suspension member front nu ...
   	</p>
    [1897] => <p><a href="corrosion_protection-1897.html"><span>Corrosion protection</span></a><br>
   	Description
To provide improved corrosion prevention, the following anti-corrosive 
measures have been implemented in
NISSAN production plants. When repairing or replacing body panels, it is 
necessary to use the same anti-corrosive
measures.
Anti-Corrosive Precoated Steel (Galvannealed Steel) ...
   	</p>
    [1898] => <p><a href="body_sealing-1898.html"><span>Body sealing</span></a><br>
   	Description
The following figure shows the areas which are sealed at the factory. Sealant 
which has been applied to these
areas should be smooth and free from cuts or gaps. Care should be taken not to 
apply an excess amount of
sealant and not to allow other unaffected parts to come into conta ...
   	</p>
    [1900] => <p><a href="body_alignment-1900.html"><span>Body alignment</span></a><br>
   	Body Center Marks 
A mark has been placed on each part of the body to indicate the vehicle 
center. When repairing parts damaged
by an accident which might affect the vehicle frame (members, pillars, etc.), 
more accurate and effective
repair will be possible by using these marks together with  ...
   	</p>
    [1901] => <p><a href="precautions_in_repairing_high_strength_steel-1901.html"><span>Precautions in repairing high
strength steel</span></a><br>
   	High Strength Steel (HSS) 
High strength steel is used for body panels in order to reduce vehicle 
weight.

Accordingly, precautions in repairing automotive bodies made of high strength 
steel are described below:

SP130 is the most commonly used HSS.

Read the following precautions when re ...
   	</p>
    [1902] => <p><a href="replacement_operations-1902.html"><span>Replacement operations</span></a><br>
   	Description
This section is prepared for technicians who have attained a high level of 
skill and experience in repairing collision-
damaged vehicles and also use modern service tools and equipment. Persons 
unfamiliar with body
repair techniques should not attempt to repair collision-damaged v ...
   	</p>
    [1905] => <p><a href="precaution-1905.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR PLASTICS
Precautions For Plastics

1. When repairing and painting a portion of the body adjacent to plastic 
parts, consider their characteristics
(influence of heat and solvent) and remove them if necessary or take suitable 
measures to protect them.

2. Plastic par ...
   	</p>
    [1907] => <p><a href="body_component_parts-1907.html"><span>Body component parts</span></a><br>
   	Underbody Component Parts 

1. Upper dash assembly
2. Lower dash crossmember reinforcement
3. Rear crossmember (RH, LH)
4. Front crossmember (RHLH)
5. Front sidemember reinforcement upper (RHLH)
6. Front floor assembly (RHLH)
7. Front sidemember reinforcement lower
8. Front floor center
9. ...
   	</p>
    [1908] => <p><a href="corrosion_protection-1908.html"><span>Corrosion protection</span></a><br>
   	Description 
To provide improved corrosion prevention, the following anti-corrosive 
measures have been implemented in
NISSAN production plants. When repairing or replacing body panels, it is 
necessary to use the same anti-corrosive
measures.
Anti-Corrosive Precoated Steel (Galvannealed Steel ...
   	</p>
    [1909] => <p><a href="body_sealing-1909.html"><span>Body sealing</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The following figure shows the areas which are sealed at the factory. Sealant 
which has been applied to these
areas should be smooth and free from cuts or gaps. Care should be taken not to 
apply an excess amount of
sealant and not to allow other unaffected parts to come into cont ...
   	</p>
    [1911] => <p><a href="body_alignment-1911.html"><span>Body alignment</span></a><br>
   	Body Center Marks 
A mark has been placed on each part of the body to indicate the vehicle 
center. When repairing parts damaged
by an accident which might affect the vehicle frame (members, pillars, etc.), 
more accurate and effective
repair will be possible by using these marks together with  ...
   	</p>
    [1912] => <p><a href="precautions_in_repairing_high_strength_steel-1912.html"><span>Precautions in repairing high
strength steel</span></a><br>
   	High Strength Steel (HSS) 
High strength steel is used for body panels in order to reduce vehicle 
weight.

Accordingly, precautions in repairing automotive bodies made of high strength 
steel are described below:

SP130 is the most commonly used HSS.

Read the following precautions when re ...
   	</p>
    [1913] => <p><a href="replacement_operations-1913.html"><span>Replacement operations</span></a><br>
   	Description 
This section is prepared for technicians who have attained a high level of 
skill and experience in repairing collision-
damaged vehicles and also use modern service tools and equipment. Persons 
unfamiliar with body
repair techniques should not attempt to repair collision-damaged  ...
   	</p>
    [1918] => <p><a href="symptom_diagnosis-1918.html"><span>Symptom diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow 

CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions thatexist 
when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic
Worksheet during the interviewto document the facts and conditions when the 
noise occurs and any
customer's ...
   	</p>
    [1919] => <p><a href="precaution-1919.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) &quot;AIR B
AG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
driver and front ...
   	</p>
    [1922] => <p><a href="inside_mirror-1922.html"><span>Inside mirror</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View 

1. Inside mirror
2. Inside mirror finisher (if equipped)
3. Mirror base
Removal and Installation 
1. Remove inside mirror finisher (if equipped).

2. Remove screw of mirror base.

3. Slide the mirror upward to remove.

4. Disconnect the connector (if equipped).

INSTALL ...
   	</p>
    [1923] => <p><a href="door_mirror-1923.html"><span>Door mirror</span></a><br>
   	Exploded View

1. Nut
2. Mirror assembly
3. Door panel
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to INT-12, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;.

2. Disconnect the door mirror harness connector.

3. Remove the door mirror mounting nuts, and remove the do ...
   	</p>
    [1924] => <p><a href="disassembly_and_assembly-1924.html"><span>Disassembly and assembly</span></a><br>
   	DOOR MIRROR
Exploded View 

1. Door mirror cover
2. Mirror housing assembly
3. Mirror glass and holder
Disassembly 
1. Turn the mirror glass surface upward.

2. Apply a protective tape (A) to mirror housing. Insert a suitable
tool (B) into the concave gap between the mirror holder (1) and
 ...
   	</p>
    [1926] => <p><a href="basic_inspection-1926.html"><span>Basic inspection</span></a><br>
   	DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW 
Work Flow
OVERALL SEQUENCE

DETAILED FLOW
1.INTERVIEW FOR MALFUNCTION
Find out what the customer's concerns are.

&gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2.SYMPTOM CHECK
Verify the symptom from the customer's information.

&gt;&gt; GO TO 3
3.BASIC INSPECTION
Check the operation ...
   	</p>
    [1928] => <p><a href="headlamp_xenon_type_-1928.html"><span>Headlamp (xenon type)</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description 
Control of the headlamp system is dependent upon the position of the lighting 
switch (combination switch).

When the lighting switch is placed in the 2nd position, the BCM (body control 
module) receives input requesting
the headlamps and park lamps to il ...
   	</p>
    [1929] => <p><a href="headlamp_halogen_type_-1929.html"><span>Headlamp (halogen type)</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description
Control of the headlamp system operation is dependent upon the position of 
the lighting switch (combination
switch). When the lighting switch is placed in the 2nd position, the BCM (body 
control module) receives input
requesting the headlamps and park lam ...
   	</p>
    [1930] => <p><a href="daytime_running_light_system-1930.html"><span>Daytime running light system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description
The headlamp system for Canada vehicles is equipped with a daytime light 
control unit that activates the high
beam headlamps at approximately half illumination whenever the engine is 
running. If the parking brake is
applied before the engine is started the ...
   	</p>
    [1931] => <p><a href="auto_light_system-1931.html"><span>Auto light system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description 
• BCM (Body Control Module) controls auto light operation according to 
signals from optical sensor, lighting
switch and ignition switch.

• IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) operates parking, 
license plate, tail, front fog ...
   	</p>
    [1932] => <p><a href="front_fog_lamp-1932.html"><span>Front fog lamp</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description
• BCM (Body Control Module) controls front fog lamp operation.

• IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) operates front 
fog lamp according to CAN
communication signals from BCM.

• Combination meter operates front fog lamp indi ...
   	</p>
    [1933] => <p><a href="turn_signal_and_hazard_warning_lamps-1933.html"><span>Turn signal and hazard warning
lamps</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description 
• BCM (Body Control Module) controls turn signal lamp (RH and LH) and hazard 
warning lamp operation.

• Combination meter operates turn (RH and LH) indicator according to CAN 
communication signals from
BCM.
Component Parts Location 

1. BCM M16, M ...
   	</p>
    [1934] => <p><a href="parking_license_plate_and_tail_lamps-1934.html"><span>Parking, license plate and tail
lamps</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description 
• BCM (Body Control Module) controls parking, license plate and tail lamps 
operation.

• IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) operates parking, 
license plate and tail
lamps according to CAN communication signals from BCM.
Co ...
   	</p>
    [1935] => <p><a href="combination_switch_reading_system-1935.html"><span>Combination switch reading system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description 
OUTLINE
• BCM reads the status of the combination switch (light, turn signal, wiper 
and washer) and recognizes the
status of each switch.

• BCM is a combination of 5 output terminals (OUTPUT 1 - 5) and 5 input 
terminals (INPUT 1 - 5). It reads a
 ...
   	</p>
    [1937] => <p><a href="common_item-1937.html"><span>Common ITEM</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Description
BCM CONSULT-III FUNCTION
CONSULT-III performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.

SYSTEM APPLICATION
BCM can perform the following functions for each system.

NOTE:
It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system 
selecti ...
   	</p>
    [1938] => <p><a href="headlamp-1938.html"><span>Headlamp</span></a><br>
   	CONSULT-III Function 
WORK SUPPORT

1 : Initial setting
2: With auto light system
DATA MONITOR


1: With auto light system.

2: The item is indicated, not monitored.
ACTIVE TEST


 ...
   	</p>
    [1942] => <p><a href="diagnosis_system_ipdm_e_r_-1942.html"><span>Diagnosis system (IPDM E/R)</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Description
AUTO ACTIVE TEST
Description
In auto active test mode, the IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following 
systems to check their operation.

• Oil pressure warning lamp
• Front wiper (LO, HI)
• Parking lamps
• License plate lamps
• Tail lamps
• Front fog ...
   	</p>
    [1945] => <p><a href="bcm_body_control_module_-1945.html"><span>BCM (Body control module)</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK
Check if the following BCM fuse or fusible link are blown.

Is the fuse or fusible link blown?
YES &gt;&gt; Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected 
circuit.

NO &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. ...
   	</p>
    [1946] => <p><a href="ipdm_e_r_intelligent_power_distribution_module_engine_room_-1946.html"><span>IPDM E/R (Intelligent power distribution
module engine room)</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK

Is the fuse blown?
YES &gt;&gt; Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected 
circuit.

NO &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors.

3. Chec ...
   	</p>
    [1947] => <p><a href="headlamp_hi_circuit-1947.html"><span>Headlamp (HI) circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room) controls the 
headlamp high relay based on
inputs from the BCM over the CAN communication lines. When the headlamp high 
relay is energized, power
flows through fuses 48 and 49, located in the IPDM E/R. Power then flo ...
   	</p>
    [1949] => <p><a href="headlamp_halogen_-1949.html"><span>Headlamp (halogen)</span></a><br>
   	Description
The IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room) controls the 
headlamp low relay based on
inputs from the BCM over the CAN communication lines. When the headlamp low 
relay is energized, power
flows through fuses 51 and 52, located in the IPDM E/R. Power then flows  ...
   	</p>
    [1950] => <p><a href="headlamp_xenon_-1950.html"><span>Headlamp (xenon)</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Description 
The IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room) controls the 
headlamp low relay based on
inputs from the BCM over the CAN communication lines. When the headlamp low 
relay is energized, power
flows through fuses 51 and 52, located in the IPDM E/R. Power then ...
   	</p>
    [1951] => <p><a href="front_fog_lamp_circuit-1951.html"><span>Front fog lamp circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room) controls the 
front fog lamp relay based on
inputs from the BCM over the CAN communication lines. When the front fog lamp 
relay is energized, power
flows from the front fog lamp relay in the IPDM E/R to the front fog ...
   	</p>
    [1952] => <p><a href="parking_lamp_circuit-1952.html"><span>Parking lamp circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room) controls the 
tail lamp relay based on inputs
from the BCM over the CAN communication lines. When the tail lamp relay is 
energized, power flows through
fuses 46 and 47, located in the IPDM E/R. Power then flows to th ...
   	</p>
    [1953] => <p><a href="turn_signal_lamp_circuit-1953.html"><span>Turn signal lamp circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The BCM monitors inputs from the combination switch to determine when to 
activate the turn signals. The
BCM outputs voltage direction to the left and right turn signals during turn 
signal operation or both during hazard
warning operation. The BCM sends a turn signal indicator req ...
   	</p>
    [1954] => <p><a href="optical_sensor-1954.html"><span>Optical sensor</span></a><br>
   	Description
The optical sensor converts the outside brightness (lux) to voltage and 
transmits the optical sensor signal to
the BCM.
Component Function Check
1.CHECK OPTICAL SENSOR SIGNAL BY CONSULT-III

1. Turn the ignition switch ON.

2. Select &quot;OPTICAL SENSOR&quot; of BCM (HEAD LAMP ...
   	</p>
    [1955] => <p><a href="headlamp_halogen_-1955.html"><span>Headlamp (halogen)</span></a><br>
   	Wiring Diagram - Coupe 





Wiring Diagram - Sedan




 ...
   	</p>
    [1956] => <p><a href="headlamp_xenon_-1956.html"><span>Headlamp (xenon)</span></a><br>
   	Wiring Diagram - Coupe





Wiring Diagram - Sedan




 ...
   	</p>
    [1958] => <p><a href="headlamp_xenon_type_-1958.html"><span>Headlamp (xenon type)</span></a><br>
   	Wiring Diagram - Coupe 







Wiring Diagram - Sedan 






 ...
   	</p>
    [1959] => <p><a href="headlamp_halogen_-1959.html"><span>Headlamp (halogen)</span></a><br>
   	Wiring Diagram - Coupe 







Wiring Diagram - Sedan






 ...
   	</p>
    [1960] => <p><a href="auto_light_system-1960.html"><span>Auto light system</span></a><br>
   	Wiring Diagram - Coupe






Wiring Diagram - Sedan 





 ...
   	</p>
    [1961] => <p><a href="front_fog_lamp_system-1961.html"><span>Front fog lamp system</span></a><br>
   	Wiring Diagram - Coupe




Wiring Diagram - Sedan



 ...
   	</p>
    [1962] => <p><a href="turn_signal_and_hazard_warning_lamp_system-1962.html"><span>Turn signal and hazard warning
lamp system</span></a><br>
   	Wiring Diagram - Coupe 








Wiring Diagram - Sedan 







 ...
   	</p>
    [1963] => <p><a href="parking_license_plate_and_tail_lamps_system-1963.html"><span>Parking, license plate and tail lamps system</span></a><br>
   	Wiring Diagram - Coupe







Wiring Diagram - Sedan





 ...
   	</p>
    [1964] => <p><a href="stop_lamp-1964.html"><span>Stop lamp</span></a><br>
   	Wiring Diagram - Coupe




Wiring Diagram - Sedan



 ...
   	</p>
    [1965] => <p><a href="back_up_lamp-1965.html"><span>Back-up lamp</span></a><br>
   	Wiring Diagram - Coupe 





Wiring Diagram - Sedan




 ...
   	</p>
    [1967] => <p><a href="bcm_body_control_module_-1967.html"><span>BCM (Body control module)</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL





Terminal Layout

Physical Values


















1: Sedan only
2: With LH front window anti-pinch
3: With LH and RH front window anti-pinch
4: With Intelligent Key
5: Without Intelligent Key
Wiring Diagram-Coupe

 ...
   	</p>
    [1968] => <p><a href="ipdm_e_r_intelligent_power_distribution_module_engine_room_-1968.html"><span>IPDM E/R (Intelligent power distribution
module engine room)</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL


TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES






Wiring Diagram — Coupe






Wiring Diagram — Sedan 






Fail Safe
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL
When CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs 
fail-safe c ...
   	</p>
    [1971] => <p><a href="normal_operating_condition-1971.html"><span>Normal operating condition</span></a><br>
   	Description
XENON HEADLAMP
• The brightness and color of the light may vary slightly immediately after 
turning the headlamp ON. This condition
will remain until the xenon bulb becomes stable. This is normal.

• Illumination time lag may occur between right and left. This is normal.
AUTO  ...
   	</p>
    [1972] => <p><a href="both_side_headlamps_do_not_switch_to_high_beam-1972.html"><span>Both side headlamps do not switch
to high beam</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The headlamps (both sides) do not switch to high beam when the lighting 
switch is in the HI or PASS setting.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.COMBINATION SWITCH INSPECTION
Check the combination switch. Refer to BCS-10, &quot;System Description&quot;.

Is the combination switch normal?
YE ...
   	</p>
    [1973] => <p><a href="both_side_headlamps_lo_are_not_turned_on-1973.html"><span>Both side headlamps (LO) are not
turned on</span></a><br>
   	Description
The headlamps (both sides) do not turn ON in any lighting switch setting.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH
Check the combination switch. Refer to BCS-10, &quot;System Description&quot;.

Is the combination switch normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair or r ...
   	</p>
    [1974] => <p><a href="parking_license_plate_and_tail_lamps_are_not_turned_on-1974.html"><span>Parking, license plate and tail
lamps are not turned on</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The parking, license plate and tail lamps do not turn ON in with any lighting 
switch setting.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.COMBINATION SWITCH INSPECTION
Check the combination switch. Refer to BCS-10, &quot;System Description&quot;.

Is the combination switch normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO T ...
   	</p>
    [1975] => <p><a href="both_side_front_fog_lamps_are_not_turned_on-1975.html"><span>Both side front fog lamps are not
turned on</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The front fog lamps do not turn ON in any setting.
Diagnosis Procedure
1.COMBINATION SWITCH INSPECTION
Check the combination switch. Refer to BCS-10, &quot;System Description&quot;.

Is the combination switch normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair or replace the malfunc ...
   	</p>
    [1976] => <p><a href="precaution-1976.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [1978] => <p><a href="headlamp-1978.html"><span>Headlamp</span></a><br>
   	Aiming Adjustment 
PREPARATION BEFORE ADJUSTING
NOTE:
• For details, refer to the regulations in your area.

• Perform aiming adjustment if the vehicle front body has been repaired and/or 
the front combination lamp
assembly has been replaced.
Before performing aiming adjustment, check t ...
   	</p>
    [1979] => <p><a href="front_fog_lamp-1979.html"><span>Front fog lamp</span></a><br>
   	Aiming Adjustment
The fog lamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable halogen 
bulb. Before performing aiming
adjustment, make sure of the following.

• Keep all tires inflated to correct pressure.

• Place vehicle on level ground.

• See that vehicle is unloaded (except  ...
   	</p>
    [1981] => <p><a href="headlamp-1981.html"><span>Headlamp</span></a><br>
   	Bulb Replacement
HEADLAMP
CAUTION:
• Do not touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily 
substances away from
bulb. Do not touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off, 
burning may result.
Removal
1. Disconnect negative battery terminal.

2 ...
   	</p>
    [1982] => <p><a href="front_fog_lamp-1982.html"><span>Front fog lamp</span></a><br>
   	Bulb Replacement
REMOVAL
The fog lamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable halogen 
bulb.

CAUTION:
• Do not touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily 
substances away from it.

Do not touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned ...
   	</p>
    [1983] => <p><a href="stop_lamp-1983.html"><span>Stop lamp</span></a><br>
   	Bulb Replacement 
Removal
1. Remove rear combination lamp. Refer to EXL-257, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;.

2. Turn bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock and remove from combination lamp 
assembly.

3. Turn bulb counterclockwise to remove from bulb socket.
Installation
Installati ...
   	</p>
    [1985] => <p><a href="license_plate_lamp-1985.html"><span>License plate lamp</span></a><br>
   	Bulb Replacement 
REMOVAL
1. Position trunk lid finisher aside.

2. Turn license plate lamp bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock
and remove.

3. Pull license plate lamp bulb to remove from socket.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation 
 ...
   	</p>
    [1986] => <p><a href="rear_combination_lamp-1986.html"><span>Rear combination lamp</span></a><br>
   	Bulb Replacement 
Removal
1. Remove the rear combination lamp. Refer to EXL-260, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;.

2. Turn the rear turn signal lamp bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it.

3. Remove the rear turn signal lamp bulb.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order ...
   	</p>
    [1988] => <p><a href="hazard_switch-1988.html"><span>Hazard switch</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
Removal
1. Remove the cluster lid C. Refer to IP-12, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot;.

2. Remove CVT finisher or M/T finisher. Refer to TM-255, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot; or TM-21, &quot;Removal
and Installation&quot;.

3. Remove the hazard switch scr ...
   	</p>
    [1991] => <p><a href="basic_inspection-1991.html"><span>Basic inspection</span></a><br>
   	DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Work Flow
OVERALL SEQUENCE

DETAILED FLOW
1.INTERVIEW FOR MALFUNCTION
Find out what the customer's concerns are.

&gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2.SYMPTOM CHECK
Verify the symptom from the customer's information.

&gt;&gt; GO TO 3
3.BASIC INSPECTION
Check the operation  ...
   	</p>
    [1992] => <p><a href="function_diagnosis-1992.html"><span>Function diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM
System Diagram 

System Description 
OUTLINE
• Interior room lamps* are controlled by interior room lamp timer control 
function of BCM.

*:Front room/map lamps and personal lamps (when lamp switch is in DOOR 
position).

• Trunk room lamp is controll ...
   	</p>
    [1993] => <p><a href="ecu_diagnosis-1993.html"><span>ECU diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
Reference Value 
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL





Terminal Layout 

Physical Values 

















1: Sedan only
2: With LH front window anti-pinch
3: With LH and RH front window anti-pinch
4: With Intelligent Key
5: Without Intelligent K ...
   	</p>
    [1995] => <p><a href="precaution-1995.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot;
and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot; 
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT 
PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
driver and front ...
   	</p>
    [1997] => <p><a href="interior_room_lamp-1997.html"><span>Interior room lamp</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
FRONT ROOM/MAP LAMP
NOTE:
For non-sunroof equipped vehicles, the front room/map lamp assembly is an 
integral part of the headinlining
and repaired only as an assembly. Refer to INT-20, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot; 
for coupe models, and INT-42,
&quot;Removal  ...
   	</p>
    [1998] => <p><a href="illumination-1998.html"><span>Illumination</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
TRUNK ROOM LAMP
Removal
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal.

2. Release the tab (A), then swing open the lens.

3. Remove the bulb (3).

4. Release the tab (B), then pull trunk room lamp (2) away from
body opening.

5. Disconnect the connector (1) and re ...
   	</p>
    [2001] => <p><a href="basic_inspection-2001.html"><span>Basic inspection</span></a><br>
   	DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW 
Work Flow
OVERALL SEQUENCE

DETAILED FLOW
1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the 
condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred).

&gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2. CHECK DTC
1. Check DT ...
   	</p>
    [2003] => <p><a href="front_wiper_and_washer_system-2003.html"><span>Front wiper and washer system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description 
OUTLINE
The front wiper is controlled by each function of BCM and IPDM E/R.
Control by BCM
• Combination switch reading function
• Front wiper control function
Control by IPDM E/R
• Front wiper control function
• Relay control function
FRONT WIP ...
   	</p>
    [2005] => <p><a href="common_item-2005.html"><span>Common item</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Diagnosis Description 
BCM CONSULT-III FUNCTION
CONSULT-III performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.

SYSTEM APPLICATION
BCM can perform the following functions for each system.

NOTE:
It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system 
 ...
   	</p>
    [2007] => <p><a href="diagnosis_system_ipdm_e_r_-2007.html"><span>Diagnosis system (IPDM E/R)</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Description
AUTO ACTIVE TEST
Description
In auto active test mode, the IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following 
systems to check their operation.

• Oil pressure warning lamp
• Front wiper (LO, HI)
• Parking lamps
• License plate lamps
• Tail lamps
• Front fog ...
   	</p>
    [2010] => <p><a href="front_wiper_motor_lo_circuit-2010.html"><span>Front wiper motor lo circuit</span></a><br>
   	Component Function Check 
1. CHECK FRONT WIPER LO OPERATION

1. Start IPDM E/R auto active test. Refer to PCS-14, &quot;Diagnosis Description&quot;.

2. Check that the front wiper operates at the LO operation.

1. Select &quot;FRONT WIPER&quot; of IPDM E/R active test item.

2. While operat ...
   	</p>
    [2011] => <p><a href="front_wiper_motor_hi_circuit-2011.html"><span>Front wiper motor hi circuit</span></a><br>
   	Component Function Check 
1. CHECK FRONT WIPER HI OPERATION

1. Start IPDM E/R auto active test. Refer to PCS-14, &quot;Diagnosis Description&quot;.

2. Check that the front wiper operates at the HI operation.

1. Select &quot;FRONT WIPER&quot; of IPDM E/R active test item.

2. While operat ...
   	</p>
    [2012] => <p><a href="front_wiper_auto_stop_signal_circuit-2012.html"><span>Front wiper auto stop signal circuit</span></a><br>
   	Component Function Check
1. CHECK FRONT WIPER (AUTO STOP) OPERATION

1. Select &quot;FRONT WIPER STOP&quot; of IPDM E/R DATA MONITOR item.

2. Operate the front wiper.

3. With the front wiper operation, check the monitor status.

Is the status of item normal?
YES &gt;&gt; Auto stop signal ...
   	</p>
    [2013] => <p><a href="front_wiper_motor_ground_circuit-2013.html"><span>Front wiper motor ground circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR (GND) OPEN CIRCUIT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect front wiper motor.

3. Check continuity between front wiper motor harness connector
and ground.


Does continuity exist?
YES &gt;&gt; Front wiper motor ground circuit is norma ...
   	</p>
    [2014] => <p><a href="front_wiper_and_washer_system-2014.html"><span>Front wiper and washer system</span></a><br>
   	Wiring Diagram-Coupe 





Wiring Diagram-Sedan




 ...
   	</p>
    [2016] => <p><a href="bcm_body_control_module_-2016.html"><span>BCM (Body control module)</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value 
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL





Terminal Layout 

Physical Values 


















1: Sedan only
2: With LH front window anti-pinch
3: With LH and RH front window anti-pinch
4: With Intelligent Key
5: Without Intelligent Key
Wiring Diagram-Coupe  ...
   	</p>
    [2017] => <p><a href="ipdm_e_r_intelligent_power_distribution_module_engine_room_-2017.html"><span>IPDM E/R (Intelligent power distribution
module engine room)</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL


TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES






Wiring Diagram — Coupe






Wiring Diagram — Sedan 






Fail Safe 
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL
When CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs 
fail-safe  ...
   	</p>
    [2020] => <p><a href="front_wiper_does_not_operate-2020.html"><span>Front wiper does not operate</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The front wiper does not operate under any operation conditions
Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK WIPER RELAY OPERATION

1. Start IPDM E/R auto active test. Refer to PCS-14, &quot;Diagnosis Description&quot;.

2. Check that the front wiper operates at the LO/HI operation.

1. Select ...
   	</p>
    [2022] => <p><a href="precaution-2022.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) AIR BA
G and SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER 
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
driver and front passenger for certain
 ...
   	</p>
    [2025] => <p><a href="front_wiper_blade_refill-2025.html"><span>Front wiper blade refill</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Removal and Installation 
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front wiper blade. Refer to WW-115, &quot;FRONT WIPER BLADE : 
Removal and Installation&quot;.
2. Hold the wiper blade refill lip at the end (A) of the front wiper
blade (1) with a suitable tool (B) as shown, and pull it firmly in
the direc ...
   	</p>
    [2026] => <p><a href="front_wiper_blade-2026.html"><span>Front wiper blade</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Lift the front wiper arm and wiper blade assembly away from the 
windshield.

2. Rotate the front wiper blade assembly and push the release tab
(A), then move the front wiper blade assembly down (B) the
front wiper arm.

3. Remove the front wiper blade as ...
   	</p>
    [2027] => <p><a href="front_wiper_arms-2027.html"><span>Front wiper ARMS</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Turn wiper switch ON to operate wiper motor, and then turn wiper switch 
OFF (auto stop).

2. Open hood, remove arm caps, and remove wiper arm nuts.

3. Raise wiper arm, and remove wiper arm from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. Clean up the pivot area as sho ...
   	</p>
    [2028] => <p><a href="front_wiper_drive_assembly-2028.html"><span>Front wiper drive assembly</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Operate front wiper motor, and stop at the auto stop position.
2. Remove wiper arms. Refer to WW-116, &quot;FRONT WIPER ARMS : Removal and 
Installation&quot;.

3. Remove the cowl top cover. For Sedan Refer to EXT-39, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;.  ...
   	</p>
    [2031] => <p><a href="front_washer_nozzle-2031.html"><span>Front washer nozzle</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the cowl top cover For Sedan Refer to EXT-39, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;. For Coupe Refer to
EXT-18, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot;
2. Push washer nozzle tab (A), to release the washer nozzle (1)
from the cowl top cover, then di ...
   	</p>
    [2032] => <p><a href="washer_tank-2032.html"><span>Washer tank</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the washer tank filler tube (1).

2. Remove engine under cover.

3. Position the RH fender protector back. For Sedan Refer to EXT-40, &quot;Removal 
and Installation&quot;. For Coupe
Refer to EXT-19, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot; .
4. Discon ...
   	</p>
    [2036] => <p><a href="basic_inspection-2036.html"><span>Basic inspection</span></a><br>
   	DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW 
Work Flow
OVERALL SEQUENCE

DETAILED FLOW
1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the 
condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred).

&gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2. CHECK DTC
1. Check DT ...
   	</p>
    [2038] => <p><a href="rear_window_defogger_system-2038.html"><span>Rear window defogger system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description 
Operation Description
• Turn rear window defogger switch ON when the ignition switch is turned ON. 
Then front air control (rear window
defogger switch) transmits rear window defogger switch signal to BCM.

• BCM turns rear window defogger relay ON whe ...
   	</p>
    [2043] => <p><a href="rear_window_defogger_switch-2043.html"><span>Rear window defogger switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
• The rear window defogger is operated by turning the rear window defogger 
switch ON.

• Turns the indicator lamp in the rear window defogger switch ON when operating 
the rear window defogger.
Component Function Check 
1. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH FUNCTION
Check th ...
   	</p>
    [2044] => <p><a href="rear_window_defogger_relay-2044.html"><span>Rear window defogger relay</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Power is supplied to the rear window defogger with BCM control.
Component Function Check
1. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check that an operation noise of rear window defogger relay [located in fuse 
block (J/B)] can be heard when
turning the rear window de ...
   	</p>
    [2045] => <p><a href="rear_window_defogger_power_supply_and_ground_circuit-2045.html"><span>Rear window defogger power supply
and ground circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description
Heats the heating wire with the power supply from the rear window defogger 
relay to prevent the rear window
from fogging up.
Component Function Check 
1. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Check that the heating wire of rear window defogger is heated when turning 
the rear window defogge ...
   	</p>
    [2046] => <p><a href="driver_side_door_mirror_defogger-2046.html"><span>Driver side door mirror defogger</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Heats the heating wire with the power supply from the rear window defogger 
relay to prevent the door mirror
from fogging up.
Component Function Check 
1. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER LH
Check that heating wire of door mirror defogger LH is heated when turning the 
rear window defo ...
   	</p>
    [2047] => <p><a href="passenger_side_door_mirror_defogger-2047.html"><span>Passenger side door mirror defogger</span></a><br>
   	Description
Heats the heating wire with the power supply from the rear window defogger 
relay to prevent the door mirror
from fogging up.
Component Function Check
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER RH
Check that the heating wire of door mirror defogger RH is heated when turning 
the rear window def ...
   	</p>
    [2048] => <p><a href="ecu_diagnosis-2048.html"><span>ECU diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
Reference Value 
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL





Terminal Layout

Physical Values 


















1: Sedan only
2: With LH front window anti-pinch
3: With LH and RH front window anti-pinch
4: With Intelligent Key
5: Without Intelligent  ...
   	</p>
    [2050] => <p><a href="rear_window_defogger_and_door_mirror_defogger_do_not_operate-2050.html"><span>Rear window defogger and door
mirror defogger do not operate</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
1. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH
Check rear window defogger switch.

Refer to DEF-13, &quot;Component Function Check&quot;.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER R ...
   	</p>
    [2056] => <p><a href="precaution-2056.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot;
and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
driver and front  ...
   	</p>
    [2058] => <p><a href="filament-2058.html"><span>Filament</span></a><br>
   	Inspection and Repair
INSPECTION
1. When measuring voltage, wrap tin foil around the top of the negative
probe. Then press the foil against the wire with your finger.

2. Attach probe circuit tester (in Volt range) to middle portion of
each filament.

3. If a filament is burned out, circuit  ...
   	</p>
    [2059] => <p><a href="condenser-2059.html"><span>Condenser</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation - Coupe
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear seat cushion and the rear seatback.

Refer to SE-25, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot;.

2. Remove the rear kicking plate, rear wheel well garnish and the rear pillar 
finisher.

Refer to INT-19, &quot;Removal and Installation&q ...
   	</p>
    [2061] => <p><a href="precaution-2061.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) AIR BA
G and SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
driver and front passenger for certain
 ...
   	</p>
    [2062] => <p><a href="component_diagnosis-2062.html"><span>Component diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	Wiring Diagram - Coupe 




Wiring Diagram - Sedan



 ...
   	</p>
    [2065] => <p><a href="precaution-2065.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) AIR BA
G and SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
driver and front passenger for certain
 ...
   	</p>
    [2067] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_repair-2067.html"><span>On-vehicle repair</span></a><br>
   	POWER SOCKET
Removal and Installation
FRONT POWER SOCKET
Removal
1. Remove the instrument panel storage bin or CD changer finisher (if 
equipped). Refer to IP-17, &quot;Exploded
View&quot;.

2. Remove the inner socket (1) from the ring (2) while pressing the
hooks (B) on the ring (2) out fr ...
   	</p>
    [2069] => <p><a href="basic_inspection-2069.html"><span>Basic inspection</span></a><br>
   	DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW 
Work Flow
OVERALL SEQUENCE

DETAILED FLOW
1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the 
condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred).

&gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2. CHECK DTC
1. Check DT ...
   	</p>
    [2071] => <p><a href="body_control_system-2071.html"><span>Body control system</span></a><br>
   	System Description
OUTLINE
• BCM (body control module) controls the various electrical components. It 
inputs the information required to
the control from CAN communication and the signal received from each switch and 
sensor.

• BCM has combination switch reading function for reading the ...
   	</p>
    [2072] => <p><a href="combination_switch_reading_system-2072.html"><span>Combination switch reading system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description
OUTLINE
• BCM reads the status of the combination switch (light, turn signal, wiper 
and washer) and recognizes the
status of each switch.

• BCM is a combination of 5 output terminals (OUTPUT 1 - 5) and 5 input 
terminals (INPUT 1 - 5). It reads a
m ...
   	</p>
    [2074] => <p><a href="power_consumption_control_system-2074.html"><span>Power consumption control system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description
OUTLINE
• BCM incorporates a power saving control function that reduces the power 
consumption according to the
vehicle status.

• BCM switches the status (control mode) by itself with the power saving control 
function. It performs the sleep
request ...
   	</p>
    [2076] => <p><a href="common_item-2076.html"><span>Common item</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Diagnosis Description 
BCM CONSULT-III FUNCTION
CONSULT-III performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.

SYSTEM APPLICATION
BCM can perform the following functions for each system.

NOTE:
It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system 
 ...
   	</p>
    [2082] => <p><a href="headlamp-2082.html"><span>Headlamp</span></a><br>
   	CONSULT-III Function
WORK SUPPORT

1 : Initial setting
2: With auto light system
DATA MONITOR


1: With auto light system.
2: The item is indicated, not monitored.
ACTIVE TEST


*: The item is indicated, not monitored. ...
   	</p>
    [2085] => <p><a href="intelligent_key-2085.html"><span>Intelligent key</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;CONSULT-III Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)
WORK SUPPORT


SELF-DIAG RESULT
Refer to BCS-91, &quot;DTC Index&quot;.
DATA MONITOR


ACTIVE TEST

 ...
   	</p>
    [2094] => <p><a href="air_pressure_monitor-2094.html"><span>Air pressure monitor</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Description
DESCRIPTION
During driving, the TPMS receives the signal transmitted from the transmitter 
installed in each wheel, when
the tire pressure becomes low. The control unit (BCM) of this system has 
pressure judgment and trouble diagnosis
functions.

When the TPMS detects l ...
   	</p>
    [2096] => <p><a href="u1000_can_comm_circuit-2096.html"><span>U1000 can comm circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description
Refer to LAN-7, &quot;System Description&quot;.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Diagnosis Procedure 
1. PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 second or more.

2. Check “SELF- DIAG RESULTS”.

Is “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” displayed?
YES &gt;&gt; Ref ...
   	</p>
    [2098] => <p><a href="u0415_vehicle_speed_sig-2098.html"><span>U0415 vehicle speed sig</span></a><br>
   	Description 
U0415 is displayed if any unusual condition is present in the reception 
status of the vehicle speed signal from
the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. DTC CONFIRMATION
1. Erase the DTC.

2. Turn igniti ...
   	</p>
    [2099] => <p><a href="b2562_low_voltage-2099.html"><span>B2562 low voltage</span></a><br>
   	DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. DTC CONFIRMATION
1. Erase DTC.

2. Turn ignition switch OFF.

3. Perform the &quot;SELF-DIAG RESULTS&quot; of CONSULT-III, after the ignition switch has 
been turned ON for 1.5
seconds or more.

Is any DTC detected?
YES &gt;& ...
   	</p>
    [2100] => <p><a href="power_supply_and_ground_circuit-2100.html"><span>Power supply and ground circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK
Check if the following BCM fuse or fusible link are blown.

Is the fuse or fusible link blown?
YES &gt;&gt; Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected 
circuit.

NO &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. ...
   	</p>
    [2101] => <p><a href="combination_switch_input_circuit-2101.html"><span>Combination switch input circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
1. CHECK INPUT 1 - 5 SYSTEM CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the BCM and combination switch.

3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and combination
switch harness connector.


Does continuity exist?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO  ...
   	</p>
    [2102] => <p><a href="combination_switch_output_circuit-2102.html"><span>Combination switch output circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK OUTPUT 1 - 5 SYSTEM CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the BCM and combination switch.

3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and combination
switch harness connector.


Does continuity exist?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO  ...
   	</p>
    [2103] => <p><a href="ecu_diagnosis-2103.html"><span>ECU diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) 
Reference Value 
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL





Terminal Layout 

Physical Values 


















1: Sedan only
2: With LH front window anti-pinch
3: With LH and RH front window anti-pinch
4: With Intelligent Key
5: Without Intelligen ...
   	</p>
    [2105] => <p><a href="precaution-2105.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) &quot;AIR B
AG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot; 
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
driver and fron ...
   	</p>
    [2106] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_rep-2106.html"><span>On-vehicle rep</span></a><br>
   	BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Before replacing BCM, perform &quot;READ CONFIGURATION&quot; to save or print current 
vehicle specification.

Refer to BCS-5, &quot;ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Description&quot;.
1. Remove the combinati ...
   	</p>
    [2108] => <p><a href="precaution-2108.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precautions for Trouble Diagnosis
CAUTION:
• Never apply 7.0 V or more to the measurement terminal.

• Use a tester with open terminal voltage of 7.0 V or less.

• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the 
negative terminal when
checking the harness.
Prec ...
   	</p>
    [2110] => <p><a href="can_communication_system-2110.html"><span>Can communication system</span></a><br>
   	System Description 
• CAN communication is a multiplex communication system. This enables the 
system to transmit and receive
large quantities of data at high speed by connecting control units with two 
communication lines (CAN-H and
CAN-L).

• Control units on the CAN network transmit si ...
   	</p>
    [2112] => <p><a href="trouble_diagnosis-2112.html"><span>Trouble diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	Condition of Error Detection
“U1000” or “U1001” is indicated on SELF-DIAG RESULTS on CONSULT-III if CAN 
communication signal is
not transmitted or received between units for 2 seconds or more.

CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ERROR
• CAN communication line open (CAN-H, CAN-L, or both)
• ...
   	</p>
    [2113] => <p><a href="basic_inspection-2113.html"><span>Basic inspection</span></a><br>
   	DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart 

Trouble Diagnosis Procedure
INTERVIEW WITH CUSTOMER
Interview with the customer is important to detect the root cause of CAN 
communication system errors and to
understand vehicle condition and symptoms for proper trouble diagnosis. ...
   	</p>
    [2116] => <p><a href="precaution-2116.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [2118] => <p><a href="function_diagnosis-2118.html"><span>Function diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM 
CAN System Specification Chart 
Determine CAN system type from the following specification chart.

NOTE:
Refer to LAN-16, &quot;Trouble Diagnosis Procedure&quot; for how to use CAN system 
specification chart.

×: Applicable
VEHICLE EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION INFORM ...
   	</p>
    [2120] => <p><a href="can_communication_system-2120.html"><span>Can communication system</span></a><br>
   	Component Parts Location

1. ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) E26
2. AV control unit M46
3. TCM F16
4. ECM E10
5. IPDM E/R E17
6. BCM M19
7. Combination meter M24
8. Steering angle sensor M53
9. Air bag diagnosis sensor unit M35
10. Data link connector M22
Wiring Diagram -  ...
   	</p>
    [2122] => <p><a href="main_line_between_dlc_and_abs_circuit-2122.html"><span>Main line between dlc and abs circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (connector side
and harness side).

- Harness c ...
   	</p>
    [2123] => <p><a href="ecm_branch_line_circuit-2123.html"><span>ECM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and connector
side).

- ECM
- Harnes ...
   	</p>
    [2125] => <p><a href="av_branch_line_circuit-2125.html"><span>AV Branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the AV control unit for damage, bend 
and loose connection (unit
side and connector side).

I ...
   	</p>
    [2126] => <p><a href="bcm_branch_line_circuit-2126.html"><span>BCM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the BCM for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and
connector side).

Is the inspect ...
   	</p>
    [2127] => <p><a href="dlc_branch_line_circuit-2127.html"><span>DLC branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the data link connector for damage, 
bend and loose connection
(connector side and harness side ...
   	</p>
    [2128] => <p><a href="m_amp_a_branch_line_circuit-2128.html"><span>M&amp;A branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the combination meter for damage, bend 
and loose connection
(unit side and connector side).

 ...
   	</p>
    [2129] => <p><a href="strg_branch_line_circuit-2129.html"><span>STRG branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the steering angle sensor for damage, 
bend and loose connection
(unit side and connector side) ...
   	</p>
    [2130] => <p><a href="abs_branch_line_circuit-2130.html"><span>ABS branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the ABS actuator and electric unit 
(control unit) for damage, bend
and loose connection (unit  ...
   	</p>
    [2131] => <p><a href="tcm_branch_line_circuit-2131.html"><span>TCM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and connector
side).

- TCM
- Harne ...
   	</p>
    [2132] => <p><a href="ipdm_e_branch_line_circuit-2132.html"><span>IPDM-E branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side
and connector side).

Is the i ...
   	</p>
    [2133] => <p><a href="can_communication_circuit-2133.html"><span>Can communication circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Disconnect all the unit connectors on CAN communication system.

4. Check terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose con ...
   	</p>
    [2135] => <p><a href="main_line_between_dlc_and_abs_circuit-2135.html"><span>Main line between dlc and abs circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (connector side
and harness side).

- Harness co ...
   	</p>
    [2136] => <p><a href="ecm_branch_line_circuit-2136.html"><span>ECM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and connector
side).

- ECM
- Harne ...
   	</p>
    [2138] => <p><a href="bcm_branch_line_circuit-2138.html"><span>BCM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the BCM for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and
connector side).

Is the inspect ...
   	</p>
    [2139] => <p><a href="dlc_branch_line_circuit-2139.html"><span>DLC branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the data link connector for damage, 
bend and loose connection
(connector side and harness side ...
   	</p>
    [2140] => <p><a href="m_amp_a_branch_line_circuit-2140.html"><span>M&amp;A branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the combination meter for damage, bend 
and loose connection
(unit side and connector side).

 ...
   	</p>
    [2141] => <p><a href="abs_branch_line_circuit-2141.html"><span>ABS branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the ABS actuator and electric unit 
(control unit) for damage, bend
and loose connection (unit s ...
   	</p>
    [2142] => <p><a href="ipdm_e_branch_line_circuit-2142.html"><span>IPDM-E branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side
and connector side).

Is the i ...
   	</p>
    [2143] => <p><a href="can_communication_circuit-2143.html"><span>Can communication circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Disconnect all the unit connectors on CAN communication system.

4. Check terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose con ...
   	</p>
    [2145] => <p><a href="main_line_between_dlc_and_abs_circuit-2145.html"><span>Main line between DLC And ABS Circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (connector side
and harness side).

- Harness co ...
   	</p>
    [2146] => <p><a href="ecm_branch_line_circuit-2146.html"><span>ECM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and connector
side).

- ECM
- Harnes ...
   	</p>
    [2148] => <p><a href="av_branch_line_circuit-2148.html"><span>AV branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the AV control unit for damage, bend 
and loose connection (unit
side and connector side).

I ...
   	</p>
    [2149] => <p><a href="bcm_branch_line_circuit-2149.html"><span>BCM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the BCM for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and
connector side).

Is the inspec ...
   	</p>
    [2150] => <p><a href="dlc_branch_line_circuit-2150.html"><span>DLC Branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the data link connector for damage, 
bend and loose connection
(connector side and harness side) ...
   	</p>
    [2151] => <p><a href="m_amp_a_branch_line_circuit-2151.html"><span>M&amp;A branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the combination meter for damage, bend 
and loose connection
(unit side and connector side).

 ...
   	</p>
    [2152] => <p><a href="abs_branch_line_circuit-2152.html"><span>ABS branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the ABS actuator and electric unit 
(control unit) for damage, bend
and loose connection (unit  ...
   	</p>
    [2153] => <p><a href="ipdm_e_branch_line_circuit-2153.html"><span>IPDM-E branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side
and connector side).

Is the in ...
   	</p>
    [2154] => <p><a href="can_communication_circuit-2154.html"><span>Can communication circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Disconnect all the unit connectors on CAN communication system.

4. Check terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose con ...
   	</p>
    [2156] => <p><a href="main_line_between_dlc_and_abs_circuit-2156.html"><span>Main line between dlc and abs circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (connector side
and harness side).

- Harness co ...
   	</p>
    [2157] => <p><a href="ecm_branch_line_circuit-2157.html"><span>ECM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and connector
side).

- ECM
- Harnes ...
   	</p>
    [2159] => <p><a href="bcm_branch_line_circuit-2159.html"><span>BCM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the BCM for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and
connector side).

Is the inspec ...
   	</p>
    [2160] => <p><a href="dlc_branch_line_circuit-2160.html"><span>DLC branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the data link connector for damage, 
bend and loose connection
(connector side and harness side) ...
   	</p>
    [2161] => <p><a href="m_amp_a_branch_line_circuit-2161.html"><span>M&amp;A branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the combination meter for damage, bend 
and loose connection
(unit side and connector side).

 ...
   	</p>
    [2162] => <p><a href="abs_branch_line_circuit-2162.html"><span>ABS branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the ABS actuator and electric unit 
(control unit) for damage, bend
and loose connection (unit  ...
   	</p>
    [2163] => <p><a href="tcm_branch_line_circuit-2163.html"><span>TCM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and connector
side).

- TCM
- Harnes ...
   	</p>
    [2164] => <p><a href="ipdm_e_branch_line_circuit-2164.html"><span>IPDM-E branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side
and connector side).

Is the in ...
   	</p>
    [2165] => <p><a href="can_communication_circuit-2165.html"><span>Can communication circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Disconnect all the unit connectors on CAN communication system.

4. Check terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose con ...
   	</p>
    [2167] => <p><a href="main_line_between_dlc_and_abs_circuit-2167.html"><span>Main line between dlc and abs circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (connector side
and harness side).

- Harness co ...
   	</p>
    [2168] => <p><a href="ecm_branch_line_circuit-2168.html"><span>ECM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and connector
side).

- ECM
- Harnes ...
   	</p>
    [2170] => <p><a href="av_branch_line_circuit-2170.html"><span>AV branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the AV control unit for damage, bend 
and loose connection (unit
side and connector side).

I ...
   	</p>
    [2171] => <p><a href="bcm_branch_line_circuit-2171.html"><span>BCM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the BCM for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and
connector side).

Is the inspec ...
   	</p>
    [2172] => <p><a href="dlc_branch_line_circuit-2172.html"><span>DLC branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the data link connector for damage, 
bend and loose connection
(connector side and harness side) ...
   	</p>
    [2173] => <p><a href="m_amp_a_branch_line_circuit-2173.html"><span>M&amp;A branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the combination meter for damage, bend 
and loose connection
(unit side and connector side).

 ...
   	</p>
    [2174] => <p><a href="abs_branch_line_circuit-2174.html"><span>ABS branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the ABS actuator and electric unit 
(control unit) for damage, bend
and loose connection (unit  ...
   	</p>
    [2175] => <p><a href="ipdm_e_branch_line_circuit-2175.html"><span>IPDM-E branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and connector
side).

- TCM
- Harnes ...
   	</p>
    [2176] => <p><a href="can_communication_circuit-2176.html"><span>Can communication circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side
and connector side).

Is the in ...
   	</p>
    [2177] => <p><a href="can_communication_circuit-2177.html"><span>Can communication circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Disconnect all the unit connectors on CAN communication system.

4. Check terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose con ...
   	</p>
    [2179] => <p><a href="main_line_between_dlc_and_abs_circuit-2179.html"><span>Main line between dlc and abs circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (connector side
and harness side).

- Harness co ...
   	</p>
    [2180] => <p><a href="ecm_branch_line_circuit-2180.html"><span>ECM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and connector
side).

- ECM
- Harnes ...
   	</p>
    [2182] => <p><a href="bcm_branch_line_circuit-2182.html"><span>BCM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the BCM for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and
connector side).

Is the inspection result normal?
Y ...
   	</p>
    [2183] => <p><a href="dlc_branch_line_circuit-2183.html"><span>DLC branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the data link connector for damage, 
bend and loose connection
(connector side and harness side) ...
   	</p>
    [2184] => <p><a href="m_amp_a_branch_line_circuit-2184.html"><span>M&amp;A branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the combination meter for damage, bend 
and loose connection
(unit side and connector side).

 ...
   	</p>
    [2185] => <p><a href="abs_branch_line_circuit-2185.html"><span>ABS branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the ABS actuator and electric unit 
(control unit) for damage, bend
and loose connection (unit  ...
   	</p>
    [2186] => <p><a href="ipdm_e_branch_line_circuit-2186.html"><span>IPDM-E branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side
and connector side).

Is the in ...
   	</p>
    [2187] => <p><a href="can_communication_circuit-2187.html"><span>Can communication circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Disconnect all the unit connectors on CAN communication system.

4. Check terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose con ...
   	</p>
    [2189] => <p><a href="main_line_between_dlc_and_abs_circuit-2189.html"><span>Main line between dlc and abs circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (connector side
and harness side).

- Harness co ...
   	</p>
    [2190] => <p><a href="ecm_branch_line_circuit-2190.html"><span>ECM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and connector
side).

- ECM
- Harnes ...
   	</p>
    [2192] => <p><a href="av_branch_line_circuit-2192.html"><span>AV branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the AV control unit for damage, bend 
and loose connection (unit
side and connector side).

I ...
   	</p>
    [2193] => <p><a href="bcm_branch_line_circuit-2193.html"><span>BCM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the BCM for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and
connector side).

Is the inspec ...
   	</p>
    [2194] => <p><a href="dlc_branch_line_circuit-2194.html"><span>DLC branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the data link connector for damage, 
bend and loose connection
(connector side and harness side) ...
   	</p>
    [2195] => <p><a href="m_amp_a_branch_line_circuit-2195.html"><span>M&amp;A branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the combination meter for damage, bend 
and loose connection
(unit side and connector side).

 ...
   	</p>
    [2196] => <p><a href="abs_branch_line_circuit-2196.html"><span>ABS branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the ABS actuator and electric unit 
(control unit) for damage, bend
and loose connection (unit  ...
   	</p>
    [2197] => <p><a href="ipdm_e_branch_line_circuit-2197.html"><span>IPDM-E branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side
and connector side).

Is the in ...
   	</p>
    [2198] => <p><a href="can_communication_circuit-2198.html"><span>Can communication circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Disconnect all the unit connectors on CAN communication system.

4. Check terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose con ...
   	</p>
    [2200] => <p><a href="main_line_between_dlc_and_abs_circuit-2200.html"><span>Main line between dlc and abs circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (connector side
and harness side).

- Harness co ...
   	</p>
    [2201] => <p><a href="ecm_branch_line_circuit-2201.html"><span>ECM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and connector
side).

- ECM
- Harnes ...
   	</p>
    [2203] => <p><a href="bcm_branch_line_circuit-2203.html"><span>BCM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the BCM for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and
connector side).

Is the inspec ...
   	</p>
    [2204] => <p><a href="dlc_branch_line_circuit-2204.html"><span>DLC branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the data link connector for damage, 
bend and loose connection
(connector side and harness side) ...
   	</p>
    [2205] => <p><a href="m_amp_a_branch_line_circuit-2205.html"><span>M&amp;A branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the combination meter for damage, bend 
and loose connection
(unit side and connector side).

 ...
   	</p>
    [2206] => <p><a href="abs_branch_line_circuit-2206.html"><span>ABS branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the ABS actuator and electric unit 
(control unit) for damage, bend
and loose connection (unit  ...
   	</p>
    [2207] => <p><a href="tcm_branch_line_circuit-2207.html"><span>TCM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and connector
side).

- TCM
- Harnes ...
   	</p>
    [2208] => <p><a href="ipdm_e_branch_line_circuit-2208.html"><span>IPDM-E branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side
and connector side).

Is the in ...
   	</p>
    [2209] => <p><a href="can_communication_circuit-2209.html"><span>Can communication circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Disconnect all the unit connectors on CAN communication system.

4. Check terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose con ...
   	</p>
    [2211] => <p><a href="main_line_between_dlc_and_abs_circuit-2211.html"><span>Main line between dlc and abs circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (connector side
and harness side).

- Harness co ...
   	</p>
    [2212] => <p><a href="ecm_branch_line_circuit-2212.html"><span>ECM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and connector
side).

- ECM
- Harnes ...
   	</p>
    [2214] => <p><a href="av_branch_line_circuit-2214.html"><span>AV Branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the AV control unit for damage, bend 
and loose connection (unit
side and connector side).

I ...
   	</p>
    [2215] => <p><a href="bcm_branch_line_circuit-2215.html"><span>BCM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the BCM for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and
connector side).

Is the inspec ...
   	</p>
    [2216] => <p><a href="dlc_branch_line_circuit-2216.html"><span>DLC branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the data link connector for damage, 
bend and loose connection
(connector side and harness side) ...
   	</p>
    [2217] => <p><a href="m_amp_a_branch_line_circuit-2217.html"><span>M&amp;A branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the combination meter for damage, bend 
and loose connection
(unit side and connector side).

 ...
   	</p>
    [2218] => <p><a href="abs_branch_line_circuit-2218.html"><span>ABS branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the ABS actuator and electric unit 
(control unit) for damage, bend
and loose connection (unit  ...
   	</p>
    [2219] => <p><a href="tcm_branch_line_circuit-2219.html"><span>TCM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and connector
side).

- TCM
- Harnes ...
   	</p>
    [2220] => <p><a href="ipdm_e_branch_line_circuit-2220.html"><span>IPDM-E branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side
and connector side).

Is the in ...
   	</p>
    [2221] => <p><a href="can_communication_circuit-2221.html"><span>Can communication circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Disconnect all the unit connectors on CAN communication system.

4. Check terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose con ...
   	</p>
    [2223] => <p><a href="main_line_between_dlc_and_abs_circuit-2223.html"><span>Main line between dlc and abs circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (connector side
and harness side).

- Harness co ...
   	</p>
    [2224] => <p><a href="ecm_branch_line_circuit-2224.html"><span>ECM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and connector
side).

- ECM
- Harnes ...
   	</p>
    [2226] => <p><a href="bcm_branch_line_circuit-2226.html"><span>BCM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the BCM for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and
connector side).

Is the inspec ...
   	</p>
    [2227] => <p><a href="dlc_branch_line_circuit-2227.html"><span>DLC branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the data link connector for damage, 
bend and loose connection
(connector side and harness side) ...
   	</p>
    [2228] => <p><a href="m_amp_a_branch_line_circuit-2228.html"><span>M&amp;A branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the combination meter for damage, bend 
and loose connection
(unit side and connector side).

 ...
   	</p>
    [2229] => <p><a href="strg_branch_line_circuit-2229.html"><span>STRG branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the steering angle sensor for damage, 
bend and loose connection
(unit side and connector side). ...
   	</p>
    [2230] => <p><a href="abs_branch_line_circuit-2230.html"><span>ABS branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the ABS actuator and electric unit 
(control unit) for damage, bend
and loose connection (unit  ...
   	</p>
    [2231] => <p><a href="ipdm_e_branch_line_circuit-2231.html"><span>IPDM-E branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side
and connector side).

Is the in ...
   	</p>
    [2232] => <p><a href="can_communication_circuit-2232.html"><span>Can communication circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Disconnect all the unit connectors on CAN communication system.

4. Check terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose con ...
   	</p>
    [2234] => <p><a href="main_line_between_dlc_and_abs_circuit-2234.html"><span>Main line between DLC and ABS circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (connector side
and harness side).

- Harness co ...
   	</p>
    [2235] => <p><a href="ecm_branch_line_circuit-2235.html"><span>ECM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and connector
side).

- ECM
- Harnes ...
   	</p>
    [2237] => <p><a href="av_branch_line_circuit-2237.html"><span>AV branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the AV control unit for damage, bend 
and loose connection (unit
side and connector side).

I ...
   	</p>
    [2238] => <p><a href="bcm_branch_line_circuit-2238.html"><span>BCM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the BCM for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and
connector side).

Is the inspec ...
   	</p>
    [2239] => <p><a href="dlc_branch_line_circuit-2239.html"><span>DLC branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the data link connector for damage, 
bend and loose connection
(connector side and harness side) ...
   	</p>
    [2240] => <p><a href="m_amp_a_branch_line_circuit-2240.html"><span>M&amp;A branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the combination meter for damage, bend 
and loose connection
(unit side and connector side).

 ...
   	</p>
    [2241] => <p><a href="strg_branch_line_circuit-2241.html"><span>STRG branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the steering angle sensor for damage, 
bend and loose connection
(unit side and connector side). ...
   	</p>
    [2242] => <p><a href="abs_branch_line_circuit-2242.html"><span>ABS branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the ABS actuator and electric unit 
(control unit) for damage, bend
and loose connection (unit  ...
   	</p>
    [2243] => <p><a href="ipdm_e_branch_line_circuit-2243.html"><span>IPDM-E branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side
and connector side).

Is the in ...
   	</p>
    [2244] => <p><a href="can_communication_circuit-2244.html"><span>Can communication circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Disconnect all the unit connectors on CAN communication system.

4. Check terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose con ...
   	</p>
    [2246] => <p><a href="main_line_between_dlc_and_abs_circuit-2246.html"><span>Main line between DLC and ABS circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (connector side
and harness side).

- Harness co ...
   	</p>
    [2247] => <p><a href="ecm_branch_line_circuit-2247.html"><span>ECM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and connector
side).

- ECM
- Harnes ...
   	</p>
    [2249] => <p><a href="bcm_branch_line_circuit-2249.html"><span>BCM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the BCM for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and
connector side).

Is the inspec ...
   	</p>
    [2250] => <p><a href="dlc_branch_line_circuit-2250.html"><span>DLC branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the data link connector for damage, 
bend and loose connection
(connector side and harness side) ...
   	</p>
    [2251] => <p><a href="m_amp_a_branch_line_circuit-2251.html"><span>M&amp;A branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the combination meter for damage, bend 
and loose connection
(unit side and connector side).

 ...
   	</p>
    [2252] => <p><a href="strg_branch_line_circuit-2252.html"><span>STRG branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the steering angle sensor for damage, 
bend and loose connection
(unit side and connector side). ...
   	</p>
    [2253] => <p><a href="abs_branch_line_circuit-2253.html"><span>ABS branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the ABS actuator and electric unit 
(control unit) for damage, bend
and loose connection (unit  ...
   	</p>
    [2254] => <p><a href="tcm_branch_line_circuit-2254.html"><span>TCM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and connector
side).

- TCM
- Harnes ...
   	</p>
    [2255] => <p><a href="ipdm_e_branch_line_circuit-2255.html"><span>IPDM-E branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side
and connector side).

Is the in ...
   	</p>
    [2256] => <p><a href="can_communication_circuit-2256.html"><span>Can communication circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Disconnect all the unit connectors on CAN communication system.

4. Check terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose con ...
   	</p>
    [2258] => <p><a href="main_line_between_dlc_and_abs_circuit-2258.html"><span>Main line between DLC and ABS circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (connector side
and harness side).

- Harness co ...
   	</p>
    [2259] => <p><a href="ecm_branch_line_circuit-2259.html"><span>ECM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and connector
side).

- ECM
- Harnes ...
   	</p>
    [2261] => <p><a href="av_branch_line_circuit-2261.html"><span>AV Branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the AV control unit for damage, bend 
and loose connection (unit
side and connector side).

I ...
   	</p>
    [2262] => <p><a href="bcm_branch_line_circuit-2262.html"><span>BCM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the BCM for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and
connector side).

Is the inspec ...
   	</p>
    [2263] => <p><a href="dlc_branch_line_circuit-2263.html"><span>DLC branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the data link connector for damage, 
bend and loose connection
(connector side and harness side) ...
   	</p>
    [2264] => <p><a href="m_amp_a_branch_line_circuit-2264.html"><span>M&amp;A branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the combination meter for damage, bend 
and loose connection
(unit side and connector side).

 ...
   	</p>
    [2265] => <p><a href="strg_branch_line_circuit-2265.html"><span>STRG branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the steering angle sensor for damage, 
bend and loose connection
(unit side and connector side). ...
   	</p>
    [2266] => <p><a href="abs_branch_line_circuit-2266.html"><span>ABS branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the ABS actuator and electric unit 
(control unit) for damage, bend
and loose connection (unit  ...
   	</p>
    [2267] => <p><a href="tcm_branch_line_circuit-2267.html"><span>TCM branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side and connector
side).

- TCM
- Harnes ...
   	</p>
    [2268] => <p><a href="ipdm_e_branch_line_circuit-2268.html"><span>IPDM-E branch line circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Check the terminals and connectors of the IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose 
connection (unit side
and connector side).

Is the in ...
   	</p>
    [2269] => <p><a href="can_communication_circuit-2269.html"><span>Can communication circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

3. Disconnect all the unit connectors on CAN communication system.

4. Check terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose con ...
   	</p>
    [2271] => <p><a href="basic_inspection-2271.html"><span>Basic inspection</span></a><br>
   	DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW 
Work Flow
OVERALL SEQUENCE

DETAILED FLOW
1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the 
condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred).

&gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2. CHECK DTC
1. Check DT ...
   	</p>
    [2273] => <p><a href="relay_control_system-2273.html"><span>Relay control system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description
IPDM E/R activates the internal control circuit to perform the relay ON-OFF 
control according to the input signals
from various sensors and the request signals received from control units via CAN 
communication.
CAUTION:
IPDM E/R integrated relays cannot  ...
   	</p>
    [2274] => <p><a href="power_control_system-2274.html"><span>Power control system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description 
COOLING FAN CONTROL
IPDM E/R controls cooling fans according to the status of the cooling fan 
speed request signal received from
ECM via CAN communication. Refer to LAN-7, &quot;System Description&quot;.
GENERATOR CONTROL
IPDM E/R outputs power generation ...
   	</p>
    [2275] => <p><a href="signal_buffer_system-2275.html"><span>Signal buffer system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description
• IPDM E/R reads the status of the oil pressure switch and transmits the oil 
pressure switch signal to BCM via
CAN communication. Refer to PCS-11, &quot;System Description&quot;.

• IPDM E/R receives the rear window defogger status signal from BCM via C ...
   	</p>
    [2276] => <p><a href="power_consumption_control_system-2276.html"><span>Power consumption control system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description 
OUTLINE
• IPDM E/R incorporates a power consumption control function that reduces the 
power consumption according
to the vehicle status.

• IPDM E/R changes its status (control mode) with the sleep wake up signal 
received from BCM via CAN communicat ...
   	</p>
    [2277] => <p><a href="diagnosis_system_ipdm_e_r_-2277.html"><span>Diagnosis system (IPDM E/R)</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Description
AUTO ACTIVE TEST
Description
In auto active test mode, the IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following 
systems to check their operation.

• Oil pressure warning lamp
• Front wiper (LO, HI)
• Parking lamps
• License plate lamps
• Tail lamps
• Front fog ...
   	</p>
    [2279] => <p><a href="u1000_can_comm_circuit-2279.html"><span>U1000 can comm circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description
Refer to LAN-7, &quot;System Description&quot;.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
Diagnosis Procedure
1. PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 second or more.

2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of IPDM E/R.

Is “CAN C ...
   	</p>
    [2280] => <p><a href="b2098_ignition_relay_on_stuck-2280.html"><span>B2098 ignition relay on stuck</span></a><br>
   	Description 
• IPDM E/R operates the ignition relay when it receives an ignition switch ON 
signal from BCM via CAN communication.

• Turn the ignition relay OFF by pressing the push-button ignition switch once 
when the vehicle speed is 4 km/
h (2.5 MPH) or less.

• Turn the ignition  ...
   	</p>
    [2281] => <p><a href="b2099_ignition_relay_off_stuck-2281.html"><span>B2099 ignition relay off stuck</span></a><br>
   	Description 
• IPDM E/R operates the ignition relay when it receives an ignition switch ON 
signal from BCM via CAN communication.

• Turn the ignition relay OFF by pressing the push-button ignition switch once 
when the vehicle speed is 4 km/
h (2.5 MPH) or less.

• Turn the ignition  ...
   	</p>
    [2282] => <p><a href="power_supply_and_ground_circuit-2282.html"><span>Power supply and ground circuit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK
Check that the following IPDM E/R fuses or fusible link are not blown.

Is the fuse blown?
YES &gt;&gt; Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected 
circuit.

NO &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Tu ...
   	</p>
    [2283] => <p><a href="ecu_diagnosis-2283.html"><span>ECU diagnosis</span></a><br>
   	IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION
MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Reference Value 
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL


TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES






Wiring Diagram — Coupe






Wiring Diagram — Sedan






Fail Safe 
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL
When CAN communication ...
   	</p>
    [2284] => <p><a href="precaution-2284.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [2285] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_repair-2285.html"><span>On-vehicle repair</span></a><br>
   	IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION
MODULE ENGINE ROOM) 
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.

2. Remove the IPDM E/R cover (1) while pressing the pawl (A) at
the rear end of the IPDM E/R cover (1).

3. Disconnect the harness connectors from the ...
   	</p>
    [2287] => <p><a href="basic_inspection-2287.html"><span>Basic inspection</span></a><br>
   	DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Work Flow
OVERALL SEQUENCE

DETAILED FLOW
1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the 
condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred).

&gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2. CHECK DTC
1. Check DTC ...
   	</p>
    [2289] => <p><a href="power_distribution_system-2289.html"><span>Power distribution system</span></a><br>
   	System Description
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• PDS (POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM) is the system that BCM controls with the 
operation of the pushbutton
ignition switch and performs the power distribution to each power circuit. This 
system is used instead
of the mechanical ...
   	</p>
    [2291] => <p><a href="common_item-2291.html"><span>Common ITEM</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Diagnosis Description 
BCM CONSULT-III FUNCTION
CONSULT-III performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.

SYSTEM APPLICATION
BCM can perform the following functions for each system.

NOTE:
It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system 
 ...
   	</p>
    [2294] => <p><a href="u1000_can_comm_circuit-2294.html"><span>U1000 can comm circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description
Refer to LAN-7, &quot;System Description&quot;.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Diagnosis Procedure 
1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 second or more.

2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result”.

Is “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” displayed?
YES &gt;&gt;  ...
   	</p>
    [2296] => <p><a href="b2553_ignition_relay-2296.html"><span>B2553 ignition relay</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM turns ON the following relays to ignition power supply to each ECU when 
the ignition switch is turned
ON.

• Ignition relay-1 (inside IPDM E/R)
• Ignition relay-2 (inside fuse block)
• Blower fan motor relay
BCM checks any ignition relay ON request for consistency wit ...
   	</p>
    [2297] => <p><a href="b260a_ignition_relay-2297.html"><span>B260A ignition relay</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM turns ON the following relays to ignition power supply to each ECU when 
the ignition switch is turned
ON.

• Ignition relay-1 (inside IPDM E/R)
• Ignition relay-2 (inside fuse box)
• Blower fan motor relay
BCM checks any ignition relay ON request for consistency with  ...
   	</p>
    [2298] => <p><a href="b2611_acc_relay-2298.html"><span>B2611 ACC relay</span></a><br>
   	Description
BCM turns ON the ACC relay to supply ACC power to each ECU when the power 
supply position changes to
ACC.

BCM check ACC relay ON request for consistency with the actual ACC relay 
operation status.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2611 is displayed with DTC U1 ...
   	</p>
    [2299] => <p><a href="b2614_acc_relay_circuit-2299.html"><span>B2614 ACC relay circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description
BCM controls the various electrical components and simultaneously supplies 
power according to the power
supply position.

BCM checks the power supply position internally.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn  ...
   	</p>
    [2300] => <p><a href="b2615_blower_relay_circuit-2300.html"><span>B2615 blower relay circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM controls the various electrical components and simultaneously supplies 
power according to the power
supply position.

BCM checks the power supply position internally.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn  ...
   	</p>
    [2301] => <p><a href="b2616_ignition_relay_circuit-2301.html"><span>B2616 ignition relay circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description
BCM controls the various electrical components and simultaneously supplies 
power according to the power
supply position.

BCM checks the power supply position internally.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn i ...
   	</p>
    [2302] => <p><a href="b2618_bcm-2302.html"><span>B2618 BCM</span></a><br>
   	Description
BCM controls the various electrical components and simultaneously supplies 
power according to the power
supply position.

BCM checks the power supply position internally.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2618 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble ...
   	</p>
    [2303] => <p><a href="b261a_push_button_ignition_switch-2303.html"><span>B261A push-button ignition switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
BCM transmits the change in the power supply position with the push-button 
ignition switch to IPDM E/R via
the CAN communication line. IPDM E/R transmits the power supply position status 
via CAN communication
line to BCM.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCED ...
   	</p>
    [2305] => <p><a href="bcm-2305.html"><span>BCM</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK
Check if the following BCM fuse or fusible link are blown.

Is the fuse or fusible link blown?
YES &gt;&gt; Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected 
circuit.

NO &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. ...
   	</p>
    [2306] => <p><a href="ipdm_e_r_intelligent_power_distribution_module_engine_room_-2306.html"><span>IPDM E/R (Intelligent power distribution
module engine room)</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK
Check that the following IPDM E/R fuses or fusible link are not blown.

Is the fuse blown?
YES &gt;&gt; Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected 
circuit.

NO &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
 ...
   	</p>
    [2307] => <p><a href="push_button_ignition_switch_position_indicator-2307.html"><span>Push-button ignition switch position
indicator</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The switch that changes the power supply position.

BCM maintains the power supply position status.

BCM changes the power supply position with the operation of the push-button 
ignition switch.
Component Function Check 
1. CHECK FUNCTION

1. Check push-button ignition switch  ...
   	</p>
    [2309] => <p><a href="bcm_body_control_module_-2309.html"><span>BCM (Body control module)</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL





Terminal Layout 

Physical Values 


















1: Sedan only
2: With LH front window anti-pinch
3: With LH and RH front window anti-pinch
4: With Intelligent Key
5: Without Intelligent Key
Wiring Diagram-Coupe 
 ...
   	</p>
    [2310] => <p><a href="ipdm_e_r_intelligent_power_distribution_module_engine_room_-2310.html"><span>IPDM E/R (Intelligent power distribution
module engine room)</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL


TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES






Wiring Diagram — Coupe







Wiring Diagram — Sedan







Fail Safe 
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL
When CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs 
fail-sa ...
   	</p>
    [2312] => <p><a href="precaution-2312.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot; and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
dr ...
   	</p>
    [2317] => <p><a href="basic_inspection-2317.html"><span>Basic inspection</span></a><br>
   	DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW 
Work Flow
OVERALL SEQUENCE

DETAILED FLOW
NOTE:
To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter and generator 
test segments must be done
as a set from start to finish.
1.PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
Perform the preliminary inspection. Refer to CH ...
   	</p>
    [2320] => <p><a href="power_generation_voltage_variable_control_system-2320.html"><span>Power generation voltage variable
control system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description 
Power generation variable voltage control system has been adopted. By varying 
the voltage to the generator,
engine load due to power generation of the generator is reduced and fuel 
consumption is decreased.

NOTE:
When any malfunction is detected in th ...
   	</p>
    [2322] => <p><a href="charging_system_preliminary_inspection-2322.html"><span>Charging system preliminary inspection</span></a><br>
   	Inspection Procedure 
1.CHECK BATTERY TERMINALS CONNECTION
Check if battery terminals are clean and tight.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Repair battery terminals connection.
2.CHECK FUSE
Check for blown fuse and fusible link.

Is the inspection result n ...
   	</p>
    [2323] => <p><a href="power_generation_voltage_variable_control_system_operation_inspection-2323.html"><span>Power generation voltage variable
control system operation inspection</span></a><br>
   	Inspection Procedure
CAUTION:
When performing this inspection, always use a charged battery that has completed 
the battery inspection.

(When the charging rate of the battery is low, the response speed of the voltage 
change will
become slow. This can cause an incorrect inspection.)
1.CHECK ...
   	</p>
    [2324] => <p><a href="b_terminal_circuit-2324.html"><span>B Terminal circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description
The terminal “1” (B) circuit supplies power to charge the battery and operate 
the vehicles electrical system.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK TERMINAL “1” CONNECTION
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Check if terminal “1” is clean and tight.

Is the inspection result no ...
   	</p>
    [2325] => <p><a href="l_terminal_circuit-2325.html"><span>L Terminal circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description
The terminal “2” (L) circuit controls the charge warning lamp. The charge 
warning lamp illuminates when the
ignition switch is set to ON or START. When the generator is providing 
sufficient voltage with the engine running,
the charge warning lamp will go off. If the charge war ...
   	</p>
    [2326] => <p><a href="s_terminal_circuit-2326.html"><span>S Terminal circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description
The output voltage of the generator is controlled by the IC regulator at 
terminal “3” (S) detecting the input voltage.

Terminal “3” circuit detects the battery voltage to adjust the generator output 
voltage with the IC regulator.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK VOLTAGE REG ...
   	</p>
    [2327] => <p><a href="charging_system-2327.html"><span>Charging system</span></a><br>
   	Wiring Diagram - Coupe





Wiring Diagram - Sedan




 ...
   	</p>
    [2329] => <p><a href="precaution-2329.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot;
and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot; 
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
driver and front ...
   	</p>
    [2331] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_repair-2331.html"><span>On-vehicle repair</span></a><br>
   	GENERATOR
Removal and Installation
QR25DE

1.-2. Tightening order
3. Generator
4. B terminal nut
5. Generator bracket bolts
6. Generator bracket

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. Refer to PG-68, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot; (Coupe models) or
PG-139, &quot;Re ...
   	</p>
    [2335] => <p><a href="battery-2335.html"><span>Battery</span></a><br>
   	How to Handle Battery
CAUTION:
• If it becomes necessary to start the engine with a booster battery and jumper 
cables, use a 12-volt
booster battery.

• After connecting battery cables, ensure that they are tightly clamped to 
battery terminals for good
contact.

• Never add distill ...
   	</p>
    [2338] => <p><a href="power_supply_routing_circuit-2338.html"><span>Power supply routing circuit</span></a><br>
   	Wiring Diagram — Battery Power Supply — 







Wiring Diagram — Accessory Power Supply — 



Wiring Diagram — Ignition Power Supply —









Fuse 
• If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before
installing new fuse.

• Use fuse of spe ...
   	</p>
    [2339] => <p><a href="ground-2339.html"><span>Ground</span></a><br>
   	Ground Distribution 
MAIN HARNESS


ENGINE ROOM HARNESS


FRONT END MODULE HARNESS

ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS

BODY HARNESS

BODY NO. 2 HARNESS

HARNESS
Harness Layout 
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate
connectors on the draw ...
   	</p>
    [2341] => <p><a href="harness_connector-2341.html"><span>Harness connector</span></a><br>
   	Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
• The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or 
disconnection.

• The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the 
locking tab(s). Refer to the figure
below.

Refer to the next page for d ...
   	</p>
    [2346] => <p><a href="precaution-2346.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Supplemental Restraint System SRS &quot;AIR BAG&quot;
and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot; Service
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
driver and  ...
   	</p>
    [2348] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_repair-2348.html"><span>On-vehicle repair</span></a><br>
   	BATTERY
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove air duct (front). Refer to EM-25, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot; QR25DE 
models, EM-129, &quot;Removal
and Installation&quot; VQ35DE models.

2. Loosen battery terminal nuts, and disconnect both battery terminals.

CAUTION:
When disc ...
   	</p>
    [2352] => <p><a href="battery-2352.html"><span>Battery</span></a><br>
   	How to Handle Battery 
CAUTION:
• If it becomes necessary to start the engine with a booster battery and jumper 
cables, use a 12-volt
booster battery.

• After connecting battery cables, ensure that they are tightly clamped to 
battery terminals for good
contact.

• Never add distil ...
   	</p>
    [2355] => <p><a href="power_supply_routing_circuit-2355.html"><span>Power supply routing circuit</span></a><br>
   	Wiring Diagram — Battery Power Supply — 







Wiring Diagram — Accessory Power Supply — 




Wiring Diagram — Ignition Power Supply —









Fuse
• If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before
installing new fuse.

• Use fuse of sp ...
   	</p>
    [2356] => <p><a href="ground-2356.html"><span>Ground</span></a><br>
   	Ground Distribution 
MAIN HARNESS


ENGINE ROOM HARNESS


FRONT END MODULE HARNESS

ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS

BODY HARNESS

BODY NO. 2 HARNESS

HARNESS
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate
connectors on the drawi ...
   	</p>
    [2357] => <p><a href="electrical_units_location-2357.html"><span>Electrical units location</span></a><br>
   	Electrical Units Location
ENGINE COMPARTMENT

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT


LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT

HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description 
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
• The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or 
disconnection.

• The tab-locking type connectors a ...
   	</p>
    [2362] => <p><a href="precaution-2362.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Supplemental Restraint System SRS &quot;AIR BAG&quot;
and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot; Service 
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
driver and ...
   	</p>
    [2364] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_repair-2364.html"><span>On-vehicle repair</span></a><br>
   	BATTERY
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove air duct (front). Refer to EM-25, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot; QR25DE 
models, EM-129, &quot;Removal
and Installation&quot; VQ35DE models.

2. Loosen battery terminal nuts, and disconnect both battery terminals.

CAUTION:
When disc ...
   	</p>
    [2367] => <p><a href="basic_inspection-2367.html"><span>Basic inspection</span></a><br>
   	DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW 
Work Flow
DETAILED FLOW
1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM
Confirm symptom or customer complaint.

&gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS OPERATION OF COMBINATION METER
Perform self-diagnosis of combination meter. Refer to MWI-38, &quot;Diagnosis 
Description&quot;.

Does s ...
   	</p>
    [2369] => <p><a href="meter_system-2369.html"><span>Meter system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description
COMBINATION METER
• Speedometer, odo/trip meter, tachometer, fuel gauge, engine coolant 
temperature gauge and information
display are controlled by the unified meter control unit, which is built into 
the combination meter.

• Warning and indicator la ...
   	</p>
    [2370] => <p><a href="speedometer-2370.html"><span>Speedometer</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description
The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) provides a vehicle speed 
signal to the combination meter via
CAN communication lines.
Component Parts Location 


1. Combination meter M24
2. IPDM E/R E17, E18, E201, F10
3. ECM E10
4. TCM F16
5. BCM  ...
   	</p>
    [2371] => <p><a href="tachometer-2371.html"><span>Tachometer</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;System Diagram 

System Description 
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).

The ECM provides an engine speed signal to the combination meter via CAN 
communication lines.
Component Parts Location


1. Combination meter M24
2. IPDM E/R E17, E18, E201, ...
   	</p>
    [2372] => <p><a href="engine_coolant_temperature_gauge-2372.html"><span>Engine coolant temperature gauge</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description 
The engine coolant temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant 
temperature.

The ECM provides an engine coolant temperature signal to the combination meter 
via CAN communication
lines.
Component Parts Location 


1. Combination meter M24
2. IPDM  ...
   	</p>
    [2373] => <p><a href="fuel_gauge-2373.html"><span>Fuel gauge</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description
The fuel gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the fuel tank.

The fuel gauge is regulated by the unified meter control unit and a variable 
resistor signal supplied by the fuel
level sensor unit.
&nbsp;Component Parts Location 


1. Combination  ...
   	</p>
    [2374] => <p><a href="odo_trip_meter-2374.html"><span>ODO/TRIP meter</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description
The vehicle speed signal and the memory signals from the meter memory circuit 
are processed by the combination
meter and the mileage is displayed.
HOW TO CHANGE THE DISPLAY FOR ODO/TRIP METER
Refer to Owner's Manual for odo/trip meter operating instruction ...
   	</p>
    [2375] => <p><a href="shift_position_indicator-2375.html"><span>Shift position indicator</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description
The TCM receives CVT indicator signals from the park/neutral position (PNP) 
switch. The TCM then sends
CVT position indicator signals to the combination meter via CAN communication 
lines. The combination meter
indicates the received shift position.
Compon ...
   	</p>
    [2376] => <p><a href="warning_lamps_indicator_lamps-2376.html"><span>Warning lamps/indicator lamps</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description
OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
The oil pressure warning lamp is controlled by the IPDM E/R (intelligent 
power distribution module engine
room).

Low oil pressure causes the oil pressure switch to provide a ground signal to 
the IPDM E/R. The IPDM E/R
then sig ...
   	</p>
    [2377] => <p><a href="information_display-2377.html"><span>Information display</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description
FUNCTION
The information display can indicate the following items.

• Outside air temperature
• Trip/fuel consumption readings
• Intelligent Key operation information
• Maintenance information
• Warning/Indication messages (Door ajar, low fuel,  ...
   	</p>
    [2378] => <p><a href="compass-2378.html"><span>Compass</span></a><br>
   	Description
DESCRIPTION
With the ignition switch in the ON position, and the mode (N) switch
ON, the compass display will indicate the direction the vehicle is
heading.

Vehicle direction is displayed as follows:
• N: north
• E: east
• S: south
• W: west

ZONE VARIATION SETTING P ...
   	</p>
    [2379] => <p><a href="diagnosis_system_meter_-2379.html"><span>Diagnosis system (meter)</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Description
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
• Odo/trip meter and information display segment operation can be checked in 
self-diagnosis mode.

• Meters/gauges can be checked in self-diagnosis mode.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. While pushing the odo/trip meter  ...
   	</p>
    [2382] => <p><a href="dtc_b2205_vehicle_speed_circuit-2382.html"><span>DTC B2205 Vehicle speed circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description
The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) provides a vehicle speed 
signal to the combination meter via
CAN communication lines.
DTC Logic

Diagnosis Procedure
Symptom: Displays “VEHICLE SPEED CIRC [B2205]” as a self-diagnosis result of 
combination meter.
1.CHECK CO ...
   	</p>
    [2384] => <p><a href="combination_meter-2384.html"><span>Combination meter</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK FUSES
Check for blown combination meter fuses.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before 
installing new fuse.
2.POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK
1. Disconnect combinatio ...
   	</p>
    [2385] => <p><a href="bcm_body_control_module_-2385.html"><span>BCM (Body control module)</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
1. CHECK FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK
Check if the following BCM fuse or fusible link are blown.

Is the fuse or fusible link blown?
YES &gt;&gt; Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected 
circuit.

NO &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1 ...
   	</p>
    [2386] => <p><a href="ipdm_e_r_intelligent_power_distribution_module_engine_room_-2386.html"><span>IPDM E/R (Intelligent power distribution
module engine room)</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK
Check that the following IPDM E/R fuses or fusible link are not blown.

Is the fuse blown?
YES &gt;&gt; Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected 
circuit.

NO &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Tu ...
   	</p>
    [2387] => <p><a href="fuel_level_sensor_signal_circuit-2387.html"><span>Fuel level sensor signal circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump detects the approximate fuel level 
in the fuel tank and transmits the
fuel level signal to the combination meter.
Component Function Check
1.COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL
1. Select “METER/M&amp;A” on CONSULT-III.

2. Using “FUEL M ...
   	</p>
    [2388] => <p><a href="oil_pressure_switch_signal_circuit-2388.html"><span>Oil pressure switch signal circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Detects the engine oil pressure and transmits the oil pressure switch signal 
to the IPDM E/R.
Component Function Check 
1.COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL
1. Select “METER/M&amp;A” on CONSULT-III.

2. Monitor “OIL W/L” of “DATA MONITOR” while operating ignition switch. ...
   	</p>
    [2389] => <p><a href="parking_brake_switch_signal_circuit-2389.html"><span>Parking brake switch signal circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Transmits the parking brake switch signal to the combination meter.
Component Function Check 
1.COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL
1. Select “METER/M&amp;A” on CONSULT-III.

2. Monitor “PKB SW” of “DATA MONITOR” while applying and releasing the parking 
brake.

&gt;&gt; ...
   	</p>
    [2390] => <p><a href="washer_level_switch_signal_circuit-2390.html"><span>Washer level switch signal circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Transmits the washer level switch signal to the combination meter.
Component Function Check 
1.COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL
1. Select “METER/M&amp;A” on CONSULT-III.

2. Monitor “WASHER W/L” of “DATA MONITOR” under the following conditions.

&gt;&gt; Inspection End ...
   	</p>
    [2391] => <p><a href="ambient_sensor_signal_circuit-2391.html"><span>Ambient sensor signal circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Transmits the ambient sensor signal to the combination meter.
Component Function Check 
1.COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL
1. Select “METER/M&amp;A” on CONSULT-III.

2. Using “OUTSIDE TEMP” on “DATA MONITOR”, compare the value of DATA MONITOR 
with temperature
display  ...
   	</p>
    [2394] => <p><a href="combination_meter-2394.html"><span>Combination meter</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value 
TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES


Wiring Diagram - Coupe

















Wiring Diagram - Sedan

















Fail Safe
The combination meter performs a fail-safe operation for the functions listed 
below when communication is
lost.
 ...
   	</p>
    [2395] => <p><a href="bcm_body_control_module_-2395.html"><span>BCM (Body control module)</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value 
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL





Terminal Layout

Physical Values


















1: Sedan only
2: With LH front window anti-pinch
3: With LH and RH front window anti-pinch
4: With Intelligent Key
5: Without Intelligent Key
Wiring Diagram-Coupe

 ...
   	</p>
    [2396] => <p><a href="ipdm_e_r_intelligent_power_distribution_module_engine_room_-2396.html"><span>IPDM E/R (Intelligent power distribution
module engine room)</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL


TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES






Wiring Diagram — Coupe






Wiring Diagram — Sedan 






Fail Safe
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL
When CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs 
fail-safe c ...
   	</p>
    [2398] => <p><a href="the_fuel_gauge_pointer_does_not_move-2398.html"><span>The fuel gauge pointer does not move</span></a><br>
   	Description
Fuel gauge needle will not move from a certain position.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL
1. Select “METER/M&amp;A” on CONSULT-III.

2. Using “FUEL METER” of “DATA MONITOR”, compare the monitor value with the fuel 
gauge reading on
the combi ...
   	</p>
    [2399] => <p><a href="the_fuel_gauge_pointer_does_not_move_to_quot_f_quot_when_refueling-2399.html"><span>The fuel gauge pointer does not move to &quot;f&quot; when 
refueling</span></a><br>
   	Description
The fuel gauge needle will not move to “F” position when refueling.
Diagnosis Procedure
1.OBSERVE FUEL GAUGE
Does it take a long time for the pointer to move to FULL position?
YES or NO
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; GO TO 3
2.IDENTIFY FUELING CONDITION
Was the vehicle fue ...
   	</p>
    [2400] => <p><a href="the_oil_pressure_warning_lamp_does_not_turn_on-2400.html"><span>The oil pressure warning lamp does not turn on</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The oil pressure warning lamp stays off when the ignition switch is turned 
ON.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
Perform IPDM E/R auto active test. Refer to PCS-14, &quot;Diagnosis Description&quot;.

Is oil pressure warning lamp illuminated?
YES &gt;&gt; G ...
   	</p>
    [2401] => <p><a href="the_oil_pressure_warning_lamp_does_not_turn_off-2401.html"><span>The oil pressure warning lamp does not turn off</span></a><br>
   	Description
The oil pressure warning lamp remains illuminated while the engine is running 
(normal oil pressure).
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
Perform IPDM E/R auto active test. Refer to PCS-14, &quot;Diagnosis Description&quot;.

Is oil pressure warning lamp illumin ...
   	</p>
    [2402] => <p><a href="the_parking_brake_release_warning_continues_displaying_or_does_not_display-2402.html"><span>The parking brake release warning continues 
displaying, or does not
display</span></a><br>
   	Description 
• The parking brake warning is displayed while driving the vehicle even 
though the parking brake is released.

• The parking brake warning is not displayed even though driving the vehicle 
with the parking brake applied.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK PARKING BRAKE WARNING LAM ...
   	</p>
    [2403] => <p><a href="the_low_washer_fluid_warning_continues_displaying_or_does_not_display-2403.html"><span>The low washer fluid warning continues
displaying, or does not display</span></a><br>
   	Description 
• The warning is still displayed even after washer fluid is added.

• The warning is not displayed even though the washer tank is empty.
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK WASHER LEVEL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Check the washer level switch signal circuit. Refer to MWI-51, &quot;Diagnosi ...
   	</p>
    [2404] => <p><a href="the_door_open_warning_continues_displaying_or_does_not_display-2404.html"><span>The door open warning continues displaying, or does 
not display</span></a><br>
   	Description 
• The door ajar warning is displayed even though all of the doors and the 
trunk are closed.

• The door ajar warning is not displayed even though a door or the trunk is 
ajar.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL
Connect CONSULT-III and check the BCM input signals. ...
   	</p>
    [2405] => <p><a href="the_ambient_temperature_display_is_incorrect-2405.html"><span>The ambient temperature display is
incorrect</span></a><br>
   	Description
• The displayed ambient air temperature is higher than the actual 
temperature.

• The displayed ambient air temperature is lower than the actual temperature.
Diagnosis Procedure
NOTE:
Check that the symptom is not applicable to the normal operating condition 
before starting ...
   	</p>
    [2406] => <p><a href="normal_operating_condition-2406.html"><span>Normal operating condition</span></a><br>
   	COMPASS 
Description
• The electronic compass is highly protected from changes in most magnetic 
fields. However, some large
changes in magnetic fields can affect it. Some examples are (but not limited 
to): high tension power lines,
large steel buildings, subways, steel bridges, automatic c ...
   	</p>
    [2407] => <p><a href="precaution-2407.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot;
and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot; 
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT 
PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
driver and front ...
   	</p>
    [2408] => <p><a href="on_vehicle_repair-2408.html"><span>On-vehicle repair</span></a><br>
   	COMBINATION METER 
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Open the fuse block cover, remove the instrument lower cover
screw (A), then remove the instrument lower cover (1).

• Disconnect the harness connectors.

• Disconnect the aspirator tube.

2. Remove the steering column screws (A),  ...
   	</p>
    [2411] => <p><a href="basic_inspection-2411.html"><span>Basic inspection</span></a><br>
   	DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW 
Work Flow
DETAILED FLOW
1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM
Interview the customer to obtain as much information as possible about the 
conditions and environment under
which the malfunction occurred.

&gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2.CHECK SYMPTOM
• Check the symptom bas ...
   	</p>
    [2414] => <p><a href="warning_chime_system-2414.html"><span>Warning chime system</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description
COMBINATION METER
• The buzzer (1) for warning chime system is installed in the combination
meter.

• The buzzer sounds when the combination meter receives a buzzer
output signal from each unit.

BCM
BCM receives signals from various units and transm ...
   	</p>
    [2415] => <p><a href="light_reminder_warning_chime-2415.html"><span>Light reminder warning chime</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description 
DESCRIPTION
With ignition switch in OFF or ACC position, driver door open, and lighting 
switch in 1ST or 2ND position, the
light warning chime will sound.

• BCM detects ignition switch in OFF or ACC position, door switch LH ON, and 
lighting switch i ...
   	</p>
    [2416] => <p><a href="seat_belt_warning_chime-2416.html"><span>Seat belt warning chime</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description
DESCRIPTION
With ignition switch turned ON and driver seat belt unfastened, seat belt 
warning chime will sound for approximately
6 seconds.

• BCM receives seat belt buckle switch signal from combination meter with CAN 
communication line.

• BCM de ...
   	</p>
    [2417] => <p><a href="parking_brake_release_warning_chime-2417.html"><span>Parking brake release warning chime</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

&nbsp;System Description 
DESCRIPTION
• The combination meter receives the vehicle speed signal from the ABS 
actuator and electric unit (control
unit) via CAN communication line.

• The combination meter judges whether the parking brake is released using the 
parking b ...
   	</p>
    [2418] => <p><a href="diagnosis_system_meter_-2418.html"><span>Diagnosis system (meter)</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Description
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
• Odo/trip meter and information display segment operation can be checked in 
self-diagnosis mode.

• Meters/gauges can be checked in self-diagnosis mode.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. While pushing the odo/trip meter  ...
   	</p>
    [2422] => <p><a href="combination_meter-2422.html"><span>Combination meter</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK FUSES
Check for blown combination meter fuses.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before 
installing new fuse.
2.POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK
1. Disconnect combination meter ...
   	</p>
    [2423] => <p><a href="bcm_body_control_module_-2423.html"><span>BCM (Body control module)</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK
Check if the following BCM fuse or fusible link are blown.

Is the fuse or fusible link blown?
YES &gt;&gt; Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected 
circuit.

NO &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. ...
   	</p>
    [2424] => <p><a href="meter_buzzer_circuit-2424.html"><span>Meter buzzer circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description
• The buzzer for warning chime system is installed in the combination meter.

• The combination meter sounds the alarm buzzer based on the signals transmitted 
from various units.
Component Function Check
1. CHECK OPERATION OF METER BUZZER
1. Select “BUZZER” of “BCM” o ...
   	</p>
    [2425] => <p><a href="seat_belt_buckle_switch_signal_circuit-2425.html"><span>Seat belt buckle switch signal circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Transmits a seat belt buckle switch signal to the combination meter.
Component Function Check
1. CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL
Select “DATA MONITOR” for “METER/M&amp;A” and check the “BUCKLE SW” monitor 
value.

&gt;&gt; Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure
1. ...
   	</p>
    [2426] => <p><a href="warning_chime_system-2426.html"><span>Warning chime system</span></a><br>
   	Wiring Diagram-Coupe







Wiring Diagram-Sedan






 ...
   	</p>
    [2428] => <p><a href="combination_meter-2428.html"><span>Combination meter</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value 
TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES


Wiring Diagram - Coupe 

















Wiring Diagram - Sedan 

















Fail Safe
The combination meter performs a fail-safe operation for the functions listed 
below when communication is
lost ...
   	</p>
    [2429] => <p><a href="bcm_body_control_module_-2429.html"><span>BCM (Body control module)</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL





Terminal Layout 

Physical Values 


















1: Sedan only
2: With LH front window anti-pinch
3: With LH and RH front window anti-pinch
4: With Intelligent Key
5: Without Intelligent Key
Wiring Diagram-Coupe 
 ...
   	</p>
    [2431] => <p><a href="the_parking_brake_release_warning_continues_sounding_or_does_not_sound-2431.html"><span>The parking brake release warning continues sounding, 
or does not
sound</span></a><br>
   	Description
• The parking brake warning buzzer sounds continuously during vehicle travel 
though the parking brake is
released
• The parking brake warning buzzer does not sound at all even though driving 
the vehicle with the parking
brake applied.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1. CHECK PARKING B ...
   	</p>
    [2432] => <p><a href="the_light_reminder_warning_does_not_sound-2432.html"><span>The light reminder warning does not sound</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Light reminder warning does not sound even though headlamp is illuminated.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1. CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH (LIGHT SWITCH) OPERATION
Check that the headlamps operate normally by operating the combination switch 
(light switch).

Do they operate normally?
YES &gt; ...
   	</p>
    [2433] => <p><a href="the_seat_belt_warning_continues_sounding_or_does_not_sound-2433.html"><span>The seat belt warning continues sounding, or does not 
sound</span></a><br>
   	Description
• Seat belt warning does not sound even though driver seat belt is not 
fastened.

• Seat belt warning sounds even though driver seat belt is fastened.
Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK WARNING CHIME OPERATION
With the driver door open, turn lighting switch to 1st or 2nd position.
 ...
   	</p>
    [2434] => <p><a href="precaution-2434.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot;
and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
driver and front  ...
   	</p>
    [2436] => <p><a href="basic_inspection-2436.html"><span>Basic inspection</span></a><br>
   	DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Work Flow
OVERALL SEQUENCE

DETAILED FLOW
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition 
and the environment when the
incident/malfunction occurred).

&gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to c ...
   	</p>
    [2438] => <p><a href="audio_system_coupe_-2438.html"><span>Audio system (coupe)</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description 
AUDIO SYSTEM
The audio system consists of the following components
• Audio unit
• Window antenna
• Steering wheel audio control switches
• Door speakers
• Front tweeters
• Rear speakers
When the audio system is on, radio signals are receive ...
   	</p>
    [2439] => <p><a href="audio_system_sedan_-2439.html"><span>Audio system (sedan)</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description
AUDIO SYSTEM
The audio system consists of the following components
• Audio unit
• Window antenna
• Steering wheel audio control switches
• Front door speakers
• Tweeters
• Rear speakers
When the audio system is on, radio signals are received  ...
   	</p>
    [2440] => <p><a href="diagnosis_system_audio_unit_-2440.html"><span>Diagnosis system (audio unit)</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Description
Self-diagnosis mode can check the following items.

• Audio unit hardware/software versions
• Continuity of each speaker channel
• Continuity of each audio unit switch
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch to the ACC position.

2. Turn the audio unit off.
 ...
   	</p>
    [2443] => <p><a href="audio_unit-2443.html"><span>Audio unit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK FUSES
Check that the following fuses are not blown.

Are the fuses OK?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before 
installing new fuse.
2.POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK
1. Disconnect audio unit connector M43.
 ...
   	</p>
    [2444] => <p><a href="satellite_radio_tuner-2444.html"><span>Satellite radio tuner</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK FUSES
Check that the following fuses are not blown.

Are the fuses OK?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before 
installing new fuse.
2.POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2.  ...
   	</p>
    [2445] => <p><a href="power_supply_and_ground_circuit_sedan_-2445.html"><span>Power supply and ground circuit (sedan)</span></a><br>
   	AUDIO UNIT 
&nbsp;Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK FUSES
Check that the following fuses are not blown.

Are the fuses OK?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before 
installing new fuse.
2.POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK
1. Disconnect audio u ...
   	</p>
    [2446] => <p><a href="satellite_radio_tuner-2446.html"><span>Satellite radio tuner</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK FUSES
Check that the following fuses are not blown.

Are the fuses OK?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before 
installing new fuse.
2.POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Discon ...
   	</p>
    [2447] => <p><a href="door_speaker_coupe_-2447.html"><span>Door speaker (coupe)</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The audio unit sends audio signals to the door speakers using the door 
speaker circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure
1.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect audio unit connector M43 (A) and suspect speaker
connector (B).

2. Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M43 (A)
terminal ...
   	</p>
    [2448] => <p><a href="front_door_speaker_sedan_-2448.html"><span>Front door speaker (sedan)</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The audio unit sends audio signals to the front door speakers using the 
door speaker circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect audio unit connector M43 (A) and suspect speaker
connector (B).

2. Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M43 (A)
t ...
   	</p>
    [2449] => <p><a href="front_tweeter_coupe_-2449.html"><span>Front tweeter (coupe)</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The audio unit sends audio signals to the front tweeters using the door 
speaker circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect audio unit connector M43 (A) and suspect tweeter
connector (B).

2. Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M43 (A)
and su ...
   	</p>
    [2450] => <p><a href="tweeter_sedan_-2450.html"><span>Tweeter (sedan)</span></a><br>
   	Description
The audio unit sends audio signals to the tweeters using the door speaker 
circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect audio unit connector M43 (A) and suspect tweeter
connector (B).

2. Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M43 (A)
and suspect t ...
   	</p>
    [2451] => <p><a href="rear_speaker-2451.html"><span>Rear speaker</span></a><br>
   	Description
The audio unit sends audio signals to the rear speakers using the rear 
speaker circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect audio unit connector M43 (A) and suspect speaker
connector.

2. Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M43 (A)
and suspect  ...
   	</p>
    [2452] => <p><a href="steering_switch-2452.html"><span>Steering switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
When one of the steering wheel audio control switches is pushed, the 
resistance in steering switch circuit
changes depending on which button is pushed.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH RESISTANCE
1. Disconnect steering switch connector M88.

2. Check resistance betw ...
   	</p>
    [2453] => <p><a href="communication_signal_circuit_coupe_-2453.html"><span>Communication signal circuit
(coupe)</span></a><br>
   	SATELLITE RADIO TUNER 
&nbsp;Description 
Communication signals are exchanged between the audio unit and satellite 
radio tuner using the communication
circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK HARNESS - 1
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect satellite radio tuner (factory installed) con ...
   	</p>
    [2454] => <p><a href="communication_signal_circuit_sedan_-2454.html"><span>Communication signal circuit (sedan)</span></a><br>
   	SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
Description 
Communication signals are exchanged between the audio unit and satellite 
radio tuner using the communication
circuits.
&nbsp;Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK HARNESS - 1
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect satellite radio tuner (factory installed) conn ...
   	</p>
    [2455] => <p><a href="sound_signal_circuit_coupe_-2455.html"><span>Sound signal circuit (coupe)</span></a><br>
   	SATELLITE RADIO TUNER 
Description
Left and right channel audio signals are supplied from the satellite radio 
tuner to the audio unit through the
sound signal circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure
LEFT CHANNEL
1.CHECK HARNESS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect satellite radio tuner (fact ...
   	</p>
    [2456] => <p><a href="sound_signal_circuit_sedan_-2456.html"><span>Sound signal circuit (sedan)</span></a><br>
   	SATELLITE RADIO TUNER 
Description 
Left and right channel audio signals are supplied from the satellite radio 
tuner to the audio unit through the
sound signal circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure
LEFT CHANNEL
1.CHECK HARNESS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect satellite radio tuner (fac ...
   	</p>
    [2458] => <p><a href="audio_unit_coupe_-2458.html"><span>Audio unit (coupe)</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value
TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES



Wiring Diagram — Coupe






 ...
   	</p>
    [2459] => <p><a href="audio_unit_sedan_-2459.html"><span>Audio unit (sedan)</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value
TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES



Wiring Diagram — Sedan 







 ...
   	</p>
    [2466] => <p><a href="normal_operating_condition-2466.html"><span>Normal operating condition</span></a><br>
   	Description
The majority of the audio concerns are the result of outside causes (bad CD, 
electromagnetic interference,
etc.).
NOISE
The following noise results from variations in field strength, such as fading 
noise and multi-path noise, or
external noise from trains and other sources. It i ...
   	</p>
    [2467] => <p><a href="precaution-2467.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot;
and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
driver and front  ...
   	</p>
    [2471] => <p><a href="front_tweeter-2471.html"><span>Front tweeter</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front pillar finisher. Refer to INT-15, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot; (coupe) and INT-36, &quot;Removal
and Installation&quot; (sedan).

2. Remove tweeter speaker grille. Refer to IP-12, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot;.

3. Remove t ...
   	</p>
    [2472] => <p><a href="front_door_speaker-2472.html"><span>Front door speaker</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation 
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to INT-12, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot; (coupe) and INT-34, &quot;Removal
and Installation&quot; (sedan).

2. Remove the front door speaker screws (A), then disconnect the
front door speaker connector and remo ...
   	</p>
    [2473] => <p><a href="rear_speaker-2473.html"><span>Rear speaker</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation - Coupe 
REMOVAL
1. Remove the trunk front finisher. Refer to INT-23, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;.

2. Remove the rear speaker screws (A), then disconnect the rear
speaker connector (B) and remove the rear speaker (1).

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the  ...
   	</p>
    [2474] => <p><a href="satellite_radio_tuner-2474.html"><span>Satellite radio tuner</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation - Coupe
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.

2. Remove the trunk floor carpet and spare tire cover. Refer to INT-23, &quot;Removal 
and Installation&quot;.

3. Remove the LH trunk floor spacer.

4. Remove the satellite radio tuner assembly nuts (B), ...
   	</p>
    [2475] => <p><a href="satellite_radio_antenna-2475.html"><span>Satellite radio antenna</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Lower the headliner at the rear. Refer to INT-20, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot; (coupe) and INT-42,
&quot;Removal and Installation&quot; (sedan).

2. Remove the satellite radio antenna nut (A), then disconnect the
satellite radio antenna connector ( ...
   	</p>
    [2477] => <p><a href="antenna_amp-2477.html"><span>Antenna AMP</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation - Coupe 
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear pillar finisher RH. Refer to INT-15, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;.

2. Detach the antenna amp harness clip (B), disconnect the
antenna amp connectors (A), remove the antenna amp screw
(C) and remove the antenna amp (1).

 ...
   	</p>
    [2478] => <p><a href="audio_antenna_coupe_-2478.html"><span>Audio antenna (coupe)</span></a><br>
   	Location of Antenna

1. In-line connectors M87, M501
2. Audio unit harness
3. Audio unit
4. Satellite antenna
5. Audio antenna feeder
6. Satellite radio antenna feeder
7. Window Antenna
8. Antenna amp.
9. Satellite radio tuner
Window Antenna Repair 
ELEMENT CHECK
1. Attach probe circuit ...
   	</p>
    [2479] => <p><a href="audio_antenna_sedan_-2479.html"><span>Audio antenna (sedan)</span></a><br>
   	Location of Antenna 

1. In-line connectors M87, M501
2. Audio unit harness
3. Audio unit
4. Satellite antenna
5. Audio antenna feeder
6. Satellite radio antenna feeder
7. Window Antenna
8. Antenna amp.
9. Satellite radio tuner
Window Antenna Repair
ELEMENT CHECK
1. Attach probe circuit ...
   	</p>
    [2481] => <p><a href="basic_inspection-2481.html"><span>Basic inspection</span></a><br>
   	DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Work Flow
OVERALL SEQUENCE

DETAILED FLOW
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition 
and the environment when the
incident/malfunction occurred).

&gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to c ...
   	</p>
    [2483] => <p><a href="audio_system_coupe_-2483.html"><span>Audio system (coupe)</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description 
AUDIO SYSTEM
The audio system consists of the following components
• Audio unit
• BOSE speaker amp.
• Window antenna
• Steering wheel audio control switches
• Door speakers
• Front tweeters
• Center speaker
• Rear tweeters
• Rear sub ...
   	</p>
    [2484] => <p><a href="audio_system_sedan_-2484.html"><span>Audio system (sedan)</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description 
AUDIO SYSTEM
The audio system consists of the following components
• Audio unit
• Window antenna
• BOSE speaker amp.
• Steering wheel audio control switches
• Front door speakers
• Tweeters
• Center speaker
• Rear door speakers
• Re ...
   	</p>
    [2485] => <p><a href="hands_free_phone_system_coupe_-2485.html"><span>Hands free phone system (coupe)</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description
Refer to the owner's manual for Bluetooth telephone system operating 
instructions.

NOTE:
Cellular telephones must have their wireless connection set up (paired) before 
using the Bluetooth telephone
system.

Bluetooth telephone system allows users who ...
   	</p>
    [2486] => <p><a href="hands_free_phone_system_sedan_-2486.html"><span>Hands free phone system (sedan)</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description 
Refer to the owner's manual for Bluetooth telephone system operating 
instructions.

NOTE:
Cellular telephones must have their wireless connection set up (paired) before 
using the Bluetooth telephone
system.

Bluetooth telephone system allows users who ...
   	</p>
    [2487] => <p><a href="diagnosis_system_audio_unit_-2487.html"><span>Diagnosis system (audio unit)</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Description 
Self-diagnosis mode can check the following items.

• Audio unit hardware/software versions
• Continuity of each speaker channel
• Continuity of each audio unit switch
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch to the ACC position.

2. Turn the audio unit off.
 ...
   	</p>
    [2488] => <p><a href="diagnosis_system_bluetooth_control_unit_-2488.html"><span>Diagnosis system (bluetooth control
unit)</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Description
The Bluetooth control unit has two diagnostic checks. The first diagnostic 
check is performed automatically
every ignition cycle during control unit initialization. The second diagnostic 
check is performed by the technician
using the steering wheel audio control switches ...
   	</p>
    [2491] => <p><a href="audio_unit-2491.html"><span>Audio unit</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK FUSES
Check that the following fuses are not blown.

Are the fuses OK?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before 
installing new fuse.
2.POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK
1. Disconnect audio unit connector  ...
   	</p>
    [2492] => <p><a href="bose_speaker_amp-2492.html"><span>Bose speaker AMP</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK FUSE
Check for blown fuses.

Are the fuses OK?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp connector.

3. Chec ...
   	</p>
    [2493] => <p><a href="satellite_radio_tuner-2493.html"><span>Satellite radio tuner</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK FUSES
Check that the following fuses are not blown.

Are the fuses OK?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before 
installing new fuse.
2.POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Discon ...
   	</p>
    [2494] => <p><a href="bluetooth_control_unit-2494.html"><span>Bluetooth control unit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses of the Bluetooth control unit are not blown.

Are the fuses OK?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between Bluetooth  ...
   	</p>
    [2495] => <p><a href="microphone-2495.html"><span>Microphone</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (MICROPHONE SIDE)
Check voltage between microphone harness connector and ground.


Is proper voltage present?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 4
NO &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (CONTINUITY)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect Blu ...
   	</p>
    [2497] => <p><a href="audio_unit-2497.html"><span>Audio unit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK FUSES
Check that the following fuses are not blown.

Are the fuses OK?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before 
installing new fuse.
2.POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK
1. Disconnect audio unit connector M43.
 ...
   	</p>
    [2498] => <p><a href="bose_speaker_amp-2498.html"><span>Bose speaker AMP</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK FUSE
Check for blown fuses.

Are the fuses OK?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp connector.

3. Chec ...
   	</p>
    [2499] => <p><a href="satellite_radio_tuner-2499.html"><span>Satellite radio tuner</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK FUSES
Check that the following fuses are not blown.

Are the fuses OK?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before 
installing new fuse.
2.POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Discon ...
   	</p>
    [2500] => <p><a href="bluetooth_control_unit-2500.html"><span>Bluetooth control unit</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses of the Bluetooth control unit are not blown.

Are the fuses OK?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between Blue ...
   	</p>
    [2501] => <p><a href="microphone-2501.html"><span>Microphone</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (MICROPHONE SIDE)
Check voltage between microphone harness connector and ground.


Is proper voltage present?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 4
NO &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (CONTINUITY)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect Blu ...
   	</p>
    [2502] => <p><a href="door_speaker_coupe_-2502.html"><span>Door speaker (coupe)</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The audio unit sends audio signals to the BOSE speaker amp. The BOSE speaker 
amp. amplifies the audio
signals before sending them to the door speakers using the audio signal 
circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B121 and suspec ...
   	</p>
    [2503] => <p><a href="front_door_speaker_sedan_-2503.html"><span>Front door speaker (sedan)</span></a><br>
   	Description
The audio unit sends audio signals to the BOSE speaker amp. The BOSE speaker 
amp. amplifies the audio
signals before sending them to the front door speakers using the audio signal 
circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure
1.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B121 and su ...
   	</p>
    [2504] => <p><a href="front_tweeter_coupe_-2504.html"><span>Front tweeter (coupe)</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The audio unit sends audio signals to the BOSE speaker amp. The BOSE speaker 
amp. amplifies the audio
signals before sending them to the front tweeters using the audio signal 
circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B122 and suspe ...
   	</p>
    [2505] => <p><a href="tweeter_sedan_-2505.html"><span>Tweeter (sedan)</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The audio unit sends audio signals to the BOSE speaker amp. The BOSE speaker 
amp. amplifies the audio
signals before sending them to the front tweeters using the audio signal 
circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B122 and suspe ...
   	</p>
    [2506] => <p><a href="center_speaker-2506.html"><span>Center speaker</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The audio unit sends audio signals to the BOSE speaker amp. The BOSE speaker 
amp. amplifies the audio
signals before sending them to the center speaker using the audio signal 
circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B121 and cente ...
   	</p>
    [2507] => <p><a href="rear_tweeter_coupe_-2507.html"><span>Rear tweeter (coupe)</span></a><br>
   	Description
The audio unit sends audio signals to the BOSE speaker amp. The BOSE speaker 
amp. amplifies the audio
signals before sending them to the rear tweeters using the audio signal 
circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure
1.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connectors B121, B122 and
 ...
   	</p>
    [2508] => <p><a href="rear_door_speaker_sedan_-2508.html"><span>Rear door speaker (sedan)</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The audio unit sends audio signals to the BOSE speaker amp. The BOSE speaker 
amp. amplifies the audio
signals before sending them to the rear door speakers using the audio signal 
circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure
1.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connectors B121, B122 ...
   	</p>
    [2509] => <p><a href="subwoofer_coupe_-2509.html"><span>Subwoofer (coupe)</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The audio unit sends audio signals to the BOSE speaker amp. The BOSE speaker 
amp. amplifies the audio
signals before sending them to the subwoofers using the audio signal circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B122 and suspect
re ...
   	</p>
    [2510] => <p><a href="subwoofer_sedan_-2510.html"><span>Subwoofer (sedan)</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The audio unit sends audio signals to the BOSE speaker amp. The BOSE speaker 
amp. amplifies the audio
signals before sending them to the subwoofers using the audio signal circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure
1.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B122 and suspect
rea ...
   	</p>
    [2511] => <p><a href="amp_on_signal_circuit-2511.html"><span>AMP on signal circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description
When the audio system is turned on, a voltage signal is supplied from the 
audio unit to the BOSE speaker
amp. When this signal is received, the BOSE speaker amp. will turn on.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK AMP ON SIGNAL (BOSE SPEAKER AMP)
1. Turn audio system ON.

2. Check voltag ...
   	</p>
    [2512] => <p><a href="steering_switch_coupe_-2512.html"><span>Steering switch (coupe)</span></a><br>
   	Description
When one of the steering wheel audio control switches is pushed, the 
resistance in the steering switch circuit
changes depending on which button is pushed.
Diagnosis Procedure 
WITH BLUETOOTH
1.CHECK HARNESS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect Bluetooth control unit con ...
   	</p>
    [2513] => <p><a href="steering_switch_sedan_-2513.html"><span>Steering switch (sedan)</span></a><br>
   	Description
When one of the steering wheel audio control switches is pushed, the 
resistance in steering switch circuit
changes depending on which button is pushed.
Diagnosis Procedure 
WITH BLUETOOTH
1.CHECK HARNESS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect Bluetooth control unit connect ...
   	</p>
    [2515] => <p><a href="satellite_radio_tuner-2515.html"><span>Satellite radio tuner</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Communication signals are exchanged between the audio unit and satellite 
radio tuner using the communication
circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK HARNESS - 1
. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect satellite radio tuner (factory installed) connector B57
and audio unit conn ...
   	</p>
    [2516] => <p><a href="communication_signal_circuit_sedan_satellite_radio_tuner-2516.html"><span>Communication signal circuit (sedan) satellite radio tuner</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Description
Communication signals are exchanged between the audio unit and satellite 
radio tuner using the communication
circuits.
&nbsp;Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK HARNESS - 1
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect satellite radio tuner (factory installed) connector
B123 and au ...
   	</p>
    [2517] => <p><a href="sound_signal_circuit_coupe_-2517.html"><span>Sound signal circuit (coupe)</span></a><br>
   	SATELLITE RADIO TUNER 
Description 
Left and right channel audio signals are supplied from the satellite radio 
tuner to the audio unit through the
sound signal circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure
LEFT CHANNEL
1.CHECK HARNESS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect satellite radio tuner (fac ...
   	</p>
    [2518] => <p><a href="sound_signal_circuit_sedan_-2518.html"><span>Sound signal circuit (sedan)</span></a><br>
   	SATELLITE RADIO TUNER 
&nbsp;Description 
Left and right channel audio signals are supplied from the satellite radio 
tuner to the audio unit through the
sound signal circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure
LEFT CHANNEL
1.CHECK HARNESS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect satellite radio tune ...
   	</p>
    [2519] => <p><a href="microphone_signal_circuit_coupe_-2519.html"><span>Microphone signal circuit (coupe)</span></a><br>
   	Description
Voice signals are transmitted from the microphone to the Bluetooth control 
unit using the microphone signal
circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN BLUETOOTH CONTROL UNIT AND MICROPHONE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect Bluetooth control unit connector a ...
   	</p>
    [2520] => <p><a href="microphone_signal_circuit_sedan_-2520.html"><span>Microphone signal circuit (sedan)</span></a><br>
   	Description
Voice signals are transmitted from the microphone to the Bluetooth control 
unit using the microphone signal
circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN BLUETOOTH CONTROL UNIT AND MICROPHONE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect Bluetooth control unit connector an ...
   	</p>
    [2522] => <p><a href="audio_unit_coupe_-2522.html"><span>Audio unit (coupe)</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value 
TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES - WITH BLUETOOTH



PHYSICAL VALUES - WITHOUT BLUETOOTH


Wiring Diagram - Coupe 














 ...
   	</p>
    [2523] => <p><a href="audio_unit_sedan_-2523.html"><span>Audio unit (sedan)</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value
TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES - WITH BLUETOOTH



PHYSICAL VALUES - WITHOUT BLUETOOTH



Wiring Diagram - Sedan 













 ...
   	</p>
    [2531] => <p><a href="normal_operating_condition-2531.html"><span>Normal operating condition</span></a><br>
   	Description
The majority of the audio concerns are the result of outside causes (bad CD, 
electromagnetic interference,
etc.).
NOISE
The following noise results from variations in field strength, such as fading 
noise and multi-path noise, or
external noise from trains and other sources. It i ...
   	</p>
    [2532] => <p><a href="precaution-2532.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot;
and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot; 
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
driver and front ...
   	</p>
    [2536] => <p><a href="bose_speaker_amp-2536.html"><span>Bose speaker AMP</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation - Coupe 
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal.

2. Remove the trunk floor carpet and spare tire cover. Refer to INT-23, &quot;Removal 
and Installation&quot;.

3. Remove the RH trunk floor spacer.

4. Remove the Bose speaker amp. screws (A), then disc ...
   	</p>
    [2537] => <p><a href="front_tweeter-2537.html"><span>Front tweeter</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation 
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front pillar finisher. Refer to INT-20, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot; (coupe) and INT-42, &quot;Removal
and Installation&quot; (sedan).

2. Remove tweeter speaker grille. Refer to IP-12, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot;.

3. Remove  ...
   	</p>
    [2539] => <p><a href="front_door_speaker-2539.html"><span>Front door speaker</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to INT-12, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot; (coupe) and INT-34, &quot;Removal
and Installation&quot; (sedan).

2. Remove the front door speaker screws (A), then disconnect the
front door speaker connector and remov ...
   	</p>
    [2542] => <p><a href="subwoofer-2542.html"><span>Subwoofer</span></a><br>
   	Components 

1. Subwoofer speaker
2. Spacer
A. Screws
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to INT-17, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot; (coupe) and INT-38,
&quot;Removal and Installation&quot; (sedan).

2. Remove the trunk front finisher. Re ...
   	</p>
    [2543] => <p><a href="satellite_radio_tuner-2543.html"><span>Satellite radio tuner</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation - Coupe
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.

2. Remove the trunk floor carpet and spare tire cover. Refer to INT-23, &quot;Removal 
and Installation&quot;.

3. Remove the LH trunk floor spacer.

4. Remove the Bluetooth control unit screws (A), then  ...
   	</p>
    [2544] => <p><a href="satellite_radio_antenna-2544.html"><span>Satellite radio antenna</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation 
REMOVAL
1. Lower the headliner at the rear. Refer to INT-20, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot; (coupe) and INT-42,
&quot;Removal and Installation&quot; (sedan).

2. Remove the satellite radio antenna nut (A), then disconnect the
satellite radio antenna connector  ...
   	</p>
    [2546] => <p><a href="audio_antenna_coupe_-2546.html"><span>Audio antenna (coupe)</span></a><br>
   	Location of Antenna 

1. In-line connectors M87, M501
2. Audio unit harness
3. Audio unit
4. Satellite antenna
5. Audio antenna feeder
6. Satellite radio antenna feeder
7. Window Antenna
8. Antenna amp.
9. Satellite radio tuner
Window Antenna Repair
ELEMENT CHECK
1. Attach probe circuit ...
   	</p>
    [2547] => <p><a href="audio_antenna_sedan_-2547.html"><span>Audio antenna (sedan)</span></a><br>
   	Location of Antenna

1. In-line connectors M87, M501
2. Audio unit harness
3. Audio unit
4. Satellite antenna
5. Audio antenna feeder
6. Satellite radio antenna feeder
7. Window Antenna
8. Antenna amp.
9. Satellite radio tuner
Window Antenna Repair
ELEMENT CHECK
1. Attach probe circuit  ...
   	</p>
    [2548] => <p><a href="antenna_amp-2548.html"><span>Antenna AMP</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation - Coupe 
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear pillar finisher RH. Refer to INT-20, &quot;Exploded View&quot;.

2. Detach the antenna amp harness clip (B), disconnect the
antenna amp connectors (A), remove the antenna amp screw
(C) and remove the antenna amp (1).

NSTALLATION
 ...
   	</p>
    [2549] => <p><a href="microphone-2549.html"><span>Microphone</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation 
REMOVAL
1. Remove the room/map lamp assembly. Refer to INL-121, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;.

2. Detach the microphone connector (A).

3. Remove the map lamp covers (1), then remove the map lamp
assembly cover (2).

4. Release the microphone tabs (A), th ...
   	</p>
    [2550] => <p><a href="tel_antenna-2550.html"><span>TEL Antenna</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation - Coupe
REMOVAL
1. Remove the trunk front finisher, trunk floor carpet and spare tire cover. 
Refer to INT-22, &quot;Exploded View&quot;.

2. Remove the LH trunk floor spacer.

3. Remove the rear pillar LH. Refer to INT-20, &quot;Exploded View&quot;.

4. Remove the  ...
   	</p>
    [2551] => <p><a href="bluetooth_control_unit-2551.html"><span>Bluetooth control unit</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation - Coupe 
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.

2. Remove the trunk floor carpet and spare tire cover. Refer to INT-22, 
&quot;Exploded View&quot;.

3. Remove the LH trunk floor spacer.

4. Remove the Bluetooth control unit screws (A), disconnect the
 ...
   	</p>
    [2554] => <p><a href="diagnosis_and_repair_workflow-2554.html"><span>Diagnosis and repair workflow</span></a><br>
   	Work Flow
OVERALL SEQUENCE

• Reference 1··· Refer to AV-289, &quot;CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)&quot;.

• Reference 2··· Refer to AV-424, &quot;Symptom Table&quot;.
DETAILED FLOW
1.CHECK SYMPTOM
Check the malfunction symptoms by performing the following items.

• Intervie ...
   	</p>
    [2555] => <p><a href="inspection_and_adjustment-2555.html"><span>Inspection and adjustment</span></a><br>
   	REAR VIEW MONITOR GUIDING LINE ADJUSTMENT
&nbsp;Description 
This mode is used to modify the side distance guidelines if they are 
dislocated from the rear view monitor
image, because of variations of body/camera mounting conditions.
Special Repair Requirement
1. Create a correction line to mo ...
   	</p>
    [2557] => <p><a href="multi_av_system_coupe_-2557.html"><span>Multi AV system (coupe)</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description 
The multi AV system consists of the following systems.

• Navigation system
• Audio system
• Rear view monitor
• Hands-free phone system
Refer to the following table for multi AV system descriptions.

VOICE RECOGNITION
The multi AV system uses ...
   	</p>
    [2558] => <p><a href="multi_av_system_sedan_-2558.html"><span>Multi av system (sedan)</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description
The multi AV system consists of the following systems.

• Navigation system
• Audio system
• Rear view monitor
• Hands-free phone system
Refer to the following table for multi AV system descriptions.

VOICE RECOGNITION
The multi AV system uses v ...
   	</p>
    [2559] => <p><a href="navigation_system_coupe_-2559.html"><span>Navigation system (coupe)</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description 
NOTE:
Refer to NAVI System Owner's Manual for system operation.
The navigation system periodically calculates the vehicle's current
position according to the following three signals: Travel distance of
the vehicle as determined by the vehicle speed sensor, ...
   	</p>
    [2560] => <p><a href="navigation_system_sedan_-2560.html"><span>Navigation system (sedan)</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description
NOTE:
Refer to NAVI System Owner's Manual for system operation.
The navigation system periodically calculates the vehicle's current
position according to the following three signals: Travel distance of
the vehicle as determined by the vehicle speed sensor, t ...
   	</p>
    [2561] => <p><a href="rear_view_monitor_system_coupe_-2561.html"><span>Rear view monitor system (coupe)</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description
When the selector is in the R position, the display shows a view to the rear 
of the vehicle. Lines which indicate
the vehicle clearance and distances are also displayed.
AV COMMUNICATION LINE
The rear view camera control unit is connected to the AV control  ...
   	</p>
    [2562] => <p><a href="rear_view_monitor_system_sedan_-2562.html"><span>Rear view monitor system (sedan)</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description 
When the selector is in the R position, the display will show a view to the 
rear of the vehicle. Lines which indicate
the vehicle clearance and distances are also displayed.
AV COMMUNICATION LINE
The rear view camera control unit is connected to the AV co ...
   	</p>
    [2563] => <p><a href="audio_system_coupe_-2563.html"><span>Audio system (coupe)</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description 
AUDIO SYSTEM
The audio system consists of the following components
• AV control unit (audio unit)
• BOSE speaker amp.
• Window antenna
• Steering wheel audio control switches
• Door speakers
• Front tweeters
• Center speaker
• Rear twe ...
   	</p>
    [2564] => <p><a href="audio_system_sedan_-2564.html"><span>Audio system (sedan)</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description 
AUDIO SYSTEM
The audio system consists of the following components
• AV control unit (audio unit)
• BOSE speaker amp.
• Window antenna
• Antenna amp.
• Steering wheel audio control switches
• Front door speakers
• Tweeters
• Center spe ...
   	</p>
    [2565] => <p><a href="hands_free_phone_system_coupe_-2565.html"><span>Hands free phone system (coupe)</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description 
Refer to the owner's manual for Bluetooth telephone system operating 
instructions.

NOTE:
Cellular telephones must have their wireless connection set up (paired) before 
using the Bluetooth telephone
system.

Bluetooth telephone system allows users who ...
   	</p>
    [2566] => <p><a href="hands_free_phone_system_sedan_-2566.html"><span>Hands free phone system (sedan)</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram 

System Description 
Refer to the owner's manual for Bluetooth telephone system operating 
instructions.

NOTE:
Cellular telephones must have their wireless connection set up (paired) before 
using the Bluetooth telephone
system.

Bluetooth telephone system allows users wh ...
   	</p>
    [2567] => <p><a href="diagnosis_system_av_control_unit_-2567.html"><span>Diagnosis system (AV control unit)</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Description 
DESCRIPTION
• Diagnosis function consists of the self-diagnosis mode performed 
automatically and the CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT mode operated manually.

• Self-diagnosis mode checks for connections between the units constituting this 
system, analyzes each individual ...
   	</p>
    [2569] => <p><a href="u1000_can_comm_circuit-2569.html"><span>U1000 Can comm circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description
Refer to AV-240, &quot;System Description&quot;.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Diagnosis Procedure
Symptom: Displays “CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]” as a self-diagnosis result of AV 
control unit.
1.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION
Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “MULTI AV” w ...
   	</p>
    [2570] => <p><a href="u1010_control_unit_can_-2570.html"><span>U1010 control unit (CAN)</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Refer to LAN-9, &quot;Description&quot;.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Diagnosis Procedure 
Symptom: Displays “CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [U1010]” as a self-diagnosis result of 
AV control unit.
1.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION
Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “MULTI AV” with ...
   	</p>
    [2577] => <p><a href="u1208_dvd_rom_comm-2577.html"><span>U1208 DVD-ROM comm</span></a><br>
   	Description
Refer to AV-240, &quot;System Description&quot;.
DTC Logic 
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK DVD-ROM
Check DVD-ROM for dirt, scratches and warpage.

Is the DVD-ROM clean and undamaged?
OK &gt;&gt; Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-437, &quot;Removal and Insta ...
   	</p>
    [2578] => <p><a href="u1209_dvd_rom_read-2578.html"><span>U1209 DVD-ROM read</span></a><br>
   	Description
Refer to AV-240, &quot;System Description&quot;.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK DVD-ROM
Check DVD-ROM for dirt, scratches and warpage.

Is the DVD-ROM clean and undamaged?
YES &gt;&gt; Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-437, &quot;Removal and Insta ...
   	</p>
    [2579] => <p><a href="u120a_dvd_rom_disc-2579.html"><span>U120A DVD-ROM disc</span></a><br>
   	Description
Refer to AV-240, &quot;System Description&quot;.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK DVD-ROM
Check DVD-ROM for dirt, scratches and warpage.

Is the DVD-ROM clean and undamaged?
YES &gt;&gt; Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-437, &quot;Removal and Insta ...
   	</p>
    [2580] => <p><a href="u120c_dvd_rom_mecha_detect-2580.html"><span>U120C DVD-ROM mecha detect</span></a><br>
   	Description  
Refer to AV-240, &quot;System Description&quot;.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Diagnosis Procedure  
1.CHECK DVD-ROM
Check DVD-ROM for dirt, scratches and warpage.

Is the DVD-ROM clean and undamaged?
YES &gt;&gt; Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-437, &quot;Removal and I ...
   	</p>
    [2581] => <p><a href="u120d_dvd_rom_drive_mecha-2581.html"><span>U120D DVD-ROM drive mecha</span></a><br>
   	Description  
Refer to AV-240, &quot;System Description&quot;.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK DVD-ROM
Check DVD-ROM for dirt, scratches and warpage.

Is the DVD-ROM clean and undamaged?
YES &gt;&gt; Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-437, &quot;Removal and Ins ...
   	</p>
    [2582] => <p><a href="u1210_dvd_rom_seek-2582.html"><span>U1210 DVD-ROM seek</span></a><br>
   	Description  
Refer to AV-240, &quot;System Description&quot;.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Diagnosis Procedure  
1.CHECK DVD-ROM
Check DVD-ROM for dirt, scratches and warpage.

Is the DVD-ROM clean and undamaged?
YES &gt;&gt; Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-437, &quot;Removal and I ...
   	</p>
    [2583] => <p><a href="u1212_dvd_rom_data_forward-2583.html"><span>U1212 DVD-ROM data forward</span></a><br>
   	Description  
Refer to AV-240, &quot;System Description&quot;.
DTC Logic  
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Diagnosis Procedure  
1.CHECK DVD-ROM
Check DVD-ROM for dirt, scratches and warpage.

Is the DVD-ROM clean and undamaged?
YES &gt;&gt; Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-437, &quot;Removal and ...
   	</p>
    [2584] => <p><a href="u1213_dvd_rom_data-2584.html"><span>U1213 DVD-ROM data</span></a><br>
   	Description
Refer to AV-240, &quot;System Description&quot;.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Diagnosis Procedure  
1.CHECK DVD-ROM
Check DVD-ROM for dirt, scratches and warpage.

Is the DVD-ROM clean and undamaged?
YES &gt;&gt; Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-437, &quot;Removal and Ins ...
   	</p>
    [2585] => <p><a href="u1214_dvd_rom_timeout-2585.html"><span>U1214 DVD-ROM timeout</span></a><br>
   	Description  
Refer to AV-240, &quot;System Description&quot;.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK DVD-ROM
Check DVD-ROM for dirt, scratches and warpage.

Is the DVD-ROM clean and undamaged?
YES &gt;&gt; Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-437, &quot;Removal and Ins ...
   	</p>
    [2586] => <p><a href="u1215_dvd_rom_load-2586.html"><span>U1215 DVD-ROM load</span></a><br>
   	Description  
Refer to AV-240, &quot;System Description&quot;.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK DVD-ROM
Check DVD-ROM for dirt, scratches and warpage.

Is the DVD-ROM clean and undamaged?
YES &gt;&gt; Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-437, &quot;Removal and Ins ...
   	</p>
    [2590] => <p><a href="u1244_gps_antenna-2590.html"><span>U1244 GPS antenna</span></a><br>
   	Description  
Refer to AV-240, &quot;System Description&quot;.
DTC Logic  
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Diagnosis Procedure  
1.GPS ANTENNA CHECK
Inspect GPS antenna and antenna feeder for damage or poor connection.

Is the GPS antenna and feeder clean and undamaged?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;& ...
   	</p>
    [2591] => <p><a href="u124c_cd_changer-2591.html"><span>U124C CD changer</span></a><br>
   	Description  
Refer to AV-240, &quot;System Description&quot;.
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Diagnosis Procedure  
1.CHECK CD CHANGER POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check CD changer power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-318, &quot;CD 
CHANGER : Diagnosis Procedure&quot;.

Do power ...
   	</p>
    [2593] => <p><a href="av_control_unit-2593.html"><span>AV control unit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses of the AV control unit are not blown.

Are the fuses OK?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between AV control unit  ...
   	</p>
    [2594] => <p><a href="rear_view_camera_control_unit-2594.html"><span>Rear view camera control unit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses of the rear view camera control unit are not 
blown.

Are the fuses OK?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between r ...
   	</p>
    [2595] => <p><a href="rear_view_camera-2595.html"><span>Rear view camera</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (REAR VIEW CAMERA SIDE)
Check voltage between rear view camera harness connector and
ground.


Is voltage reading approximately 6 volts?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 4
NO &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (CONTINUITY)
1. Turn ignition swi ...
   	</p>
    [2596] => <p><a href="bose_speaker_amp-2596.html"><span>Bose speaker AMP</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses of the BOSE speaker amp. are not blown.

Are the fuses OK?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

 ...
   	</p>
    [2597] => <p><a href="cd_changer-2597.html"><span>CD changer</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses of the CD changer are not blown.

Are the fuses OK?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between CD changer harness con ...
   	</p>
    [2598] => <p><a href="microphone-2598.html"><span>Microphone</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (MICROPHONE SIDE)
Check voltage between microphone harness connector and ground.


Is proper voltage present?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 4
NO &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (CONTINUITY)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect mic ...
   	</p>
    [2600] => <p><a href="av_control_unit-2600.html"><span>AV control unit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses of the AV control unit are not blown.

Are the fuses OK?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between AV control unit h ...
   	</p>
    [2601] => <p><a href="rear_view_camera_control_unit-2601.html"><span>Rear view camera control unit</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses of the rear view camera control unit are not 
blown.

Are the fuses OK?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between  ...
   	</p>
    [2602] => <p><a href="rear_view_camera-2602.html"><span>Rear view camera</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (REAR VIEW CAMERA SIDE)
Check voltage between rear view camera harness connector and
ground.


Is inspection result normal?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 4
NO &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (CONTINUITY)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. ...
   	</p>
    [2603] => <p><a href="bose_speaker_amp-2603.html"><span>Bose speaker AMP</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses of the BOSE speaker amp. are not blown.

Are the fuses OK?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
 ...
   	</p>
    [2604] => <p><a href="cd_changer-2604.html"><span>CD changer</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses of the CD changer are not blown.

Are the fuses OK?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
NO &gt;&gt; Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between CD changer harness con ...
   	</p>
    [2605] => <p><a href="microphone-2605.html"><span>Microphone</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (MICROPHONE SIDE)
Check voltage between microphone harness connector and ground.


Is proper voltage present?
YES &gt;&gt; GO TO 4
NO &gt;&gt; GO TO 2
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (CONTINUITY)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect mic ...
   	</p>
    [2606] => <p><a href="door_speaker_coupe_-2606.html"><span>Door speaker (coupe)</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The audio unit sends audio signals to the BOSE speaker amp. The BOSE speaker 
amp. amplifies the audio
signals before sending them to the door speakers using the audio signal 
circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B121 and suspec ...
   	</p>
    [2607] => <p><a href="front_door_speaker_sedan_-2607.html"><span>Front door speaker (sedan)</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The audio unit sends audio signals to the BOSE speaker amp. The BOSE speaker 
amp. amplifies the audio
signals before sending them to the front door speakers using the audio signal 
circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B121 and  ...
   	</p>
    [2608] => <p><a href="front_tweeter_coupe_-2608.html"><span>Front tweeter (coupe)</span></a><br>
   	Description
The audio unit sends audio signals to the BOSE speaker amp. The BOSE speaker 
amp. amplifies the audio
signals before sending them to the front tweeters using the audio signal 
circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B122 and suspec ...
   	</p>
    [2609] => <p><a href="tweeter_sedan_-2609.html"><span>Tweeter (sedan)</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The audio unit sends audio signals to the BOSE speaker amp. The BOSE speaker 
amp. amplifies the audio
signals before sending them to the tweeters using the audio signal circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure
1.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B122 and suspect
tweet ...
   	</p>
    [2610] => <p><a href="center_speaker-2610.html"><span>Center speaker</span></a><br>
   	Description
The audio unit sends audio signals to the BOSE speaker amp. The BOSE speaker 
amp. amplifies the audio
signals before sending them to the center speaker using the audio signal 
circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B121 and center ...
   	</p>
    [2611] => <p><a href="rear_tweeter_coupe_-2611.html"><span>Rear tweeter (coupe)</span></a><br>
   	Description
The audio unit sends audio signals to the BOSE speaker amp. The BOSE speaker 
amp. amplifies the audio
signals before sending them to the rear tweeters using the audio signal 
circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure
1.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connectors B121, B122 and
 ...
   	</p>
    [2612] => <p><a href="rear_door_speaker_sedan_-2612.html"><span>Rear door speaker (sedan)</span></a><br>
   	Description
The audio unit sends audio signals to the BOSE speaker amp. The BOSE speaker 
amp. amplifies the audio
signals before sending them to the rear door speakers using the audio signal 
circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connectors B121, B122 ...
   	</p>
    [2613] => <p><a href="subwoofer_coupe_-2613.html"><span>Subwoofer (coupe)</span></a><br>
   	Description 
The audio unit sends audio signals to the BOSE speaker amp. The BOSE speaker 
amp. amplifies the audio
signals before sending them to the subwoofers using the audio signal circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B122 and suspect
re ...
   	</p>
    [2614] => <p><a href="subwoofer_sedan_-2614.html"><span>Subwoofer (sedan)</span></a><br>
   	Description
The audio unit sends audio signals to the BOSE speaker amp. The BOSE speaker 
amp. amplifies the audio
signals before sending them to the subwoofers using the audio signal circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure
1.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B122 and suspect
rear ...
   	</p>
    [2615] => <p><a href="amp_on_signal_circuit-2615.html"><span>AMP On signal circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description
When the audio system is turned on, a voltage signal is supplied from the AV 
control unit to the BOSE speaker
amp. When this signal is received, the BOSE speaker amp. will turn on.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK AMP ON SIGNAL (BOSE SPEAKER AMP)
1. Turn audio system ON.

2. Check v ...
   	</p>
    [2616] => <p><a href="steering_switch-2616.html"><span>Steering switch</span></a><br>
   	Description 
When one of the steering wheel audio control switches is pushed, the 
resistance in the steering switch circuit
changes depending on which button is pushed.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK HARNESS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M46 and spiral  ...
   	</p>
    [2617] => <p><a href="microphone_signal_circuit-2617.html"><span>Microphone signal circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description
Power is supplied to the microphone from the AV control unit. The microphone 
transmits voice signals to the
AV control unit.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN AV CONTROL UNIT AND MICROPHONE CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect AV control unit connect ...
   	</p>
    [2618] => <p><a href="camera_image_signal_circuit_rear_view_camera_to_camera_control_unit_coupe_-2618.html"><span>Camera image signal circuit (rear view camera to 
camera control
unit)(coupe)</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Rear view camera images are transmitted to the rear view camera control unit 
using the camera image signal
circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect rear view camera control unit connector and rear v ...
   	</p>
    [2619] => <p><a href="camera_image_signal_circuit_rear_view_camera_to_camera_control_unit_sedan_-2619.html"><span>Camera image signal circuit (rear view camera to 
camera control
unit)(sedan)</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Rear view camera images are transmitted to the rear view camera control unit 
using the camera image signal
circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect rear view camera control unit connector and rear  ...
   	</p>
    [2620] => <p><a href="camera_on_signal_circuit_coupe_-2620.html"><span>Camera on signal circuit (coupe)</span></a><br>
   	Description
When the selector lever is placed in the R position, the rear view camera 
control unit sends a camera ON signal
to the rear view camera.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK CAMERA ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect rear view camera control unit con ...
   	</p>
    [2621] => <p><a href="camera_on_signal_circuit_sedan_-2621.html"><span>Camera on signal circuit (sedan)</span></a><br>
   	Description
When the selector lever is placed in the R position, the rear view camera 
control unit sends a camera ON signal
to the rear view camera.
Diagnosis Procedure 
1.CHECK CAMERA ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect rear view camera control unit con ...
   	</p>
    [2622] => <p><a href="camera_image_signal_circuit_camera_control_unit_to_av_control_unit_-2622.html"><span>Camera image signal circuit (camera control unit to 
av control
unit)</span></a><br>
   	Description 
Rear view camera image signals are transmitted from the rear view camera 
control unit to the AV control unit
using the image signal circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect rear view camera control  ...
   	</p>
    [2623] => <p><a href="reverse_signal_circuit-2623.html"><span>Reverse signal circuit</span></a><br>
   	Description 
A reverse signal is supplied from the back-up lamp relay to the rear view 
camera control unit. When this signal
is received, the display shows a view to the rear of the vehicle.
Diagnosis Procedure
1.BACK-UP LAMP INSPECTION
1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Shift selector lever t ...
   	</p>
    [2625] => <p><a href="av_control_unit_coupe_-2625.html"><span>AV Control unit (coupe)</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value 
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL
CONSULT-III data monitor item

TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES





Wiring Diagram




















DTC Index 

 ...
   	</p>
    [2626] => <p><a href="av_control_unit_sedan_-2626.html"><span>AV control unit (sedan)</span></a><br>
   	Reference Value
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL
CONSULT-III data monitor item

TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES





Wiring Diagram 



















DTC Index

 ...
   	</p>
    [2633] => <p><a href="normal_operating_condition-2633.html"><span>Normal operating condition</span></a><br>
   	Description
AUDIO SYSTEM
The majority of the audio troubles are the result of outside causes (bad CD, 
electromagnetic interference,
etc.).

Noise
The following noise results from variations in field strength, such as fading 
noise and multi-path noise, or
external noise from trains and oth ...
   	</p>
    [2634] => <p><a href="precaution-2634.html"><span>Precaution</span></a><br>
   	Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) &quot;AIR BAG&quot;
and &quot;SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER&quot;
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, 
used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the 
driver and front  ...
   	</p>
    [2637] => <p><a href="audio_unit-2637.html"><span>Audio unit</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation 
REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-12, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot;.

2. Remove cluster lid D lower finisher. Refer to IP-12, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;.

3. Remove navigation audio unit upper and lower screws (A).

4. Remove the naviga ...
   	</p>
    [2638] => <p><a href="bose_speaker_amp-2638.html"><span>Bose speaker AMP</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation - Coupe 
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal.

2. Remove the trunk floor carpet and spare tire cover. Refer to INT-23, &quot;Removal 
and Installation&quot;.

3. Remove the RH trunk floor spacer.

4. Remove the Bose speaker amp. screws (A), then disc ...
   	</p>
    [2639] => <p><a href="cd_changer-2639.html"><span>CD Changer</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation 
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Cluster D lower finisher. Refer to IP-12, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;.

2. Put selector lever in the drive &quot;D&quot; position (CVT models only).

3. Put shift lever in neutral (M/T models only).

4. Using a suitable tool remove t ...
   	</p>
    [2640] => <p><a href="front_tweeter-2640.html"><span>Front tweeter</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front pillar finisher. Refer to INT-15, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot; (coupe) and INT-36, &quot;Removal
and Installation&quot; (sedan).

2. Remove tweeter speaker grille. Refer to IP-12, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot;.

3. Remove t ...
   	</p>
    [2642] => <p><a href="front_door_speaker-2642.html"><span>Front door speaker</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to INT-12, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot; (coupe) and INT-34, &quot;Removal
and Installation&quot; (sedan).

2. Remove the front door speaker screws (A), then disconnect the
front door speaker connector and remov ...
   	</p>
    [2645] => <p><a href="subwoofer-2645.html"><span>Subwoofer</span></a><br>
   	Components 

1. Subwoofer speaker
2. Spacer
A. Screws
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to INT-17, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot; (coupe) and INT-38,
&quot;Removal and Installation&quot; (sedan).

2. Remove the trunk front finisher. Re ...
   	</p>
    [2646] => <p><a href="satellite_radio_antenna-2646.html"><span>Satellite radio antenna</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Lower the headliner at the rear. Refer to INT-20, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot; (coupe) and INT-42,
&quot;Removal and Installation&quot; (sedan).

2. Remove the satellite radio antenna nut (A), then disconnect the
satellite radio antenna connector ( ...
   	</p>
    [2647] => <p><a href="gps_antenna-2647.html"><span>GPS antenna</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation 
REMOVAL
1. Remove the combination meter. Refer to MWI-176, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;.

2. Remove the navigation audio unit. Refer to AV-437, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;.

3. Remove the GPS navigation antenna screw (A), then fish the
GPS naviga ...
   	</p>
    [2649] => <p><a href="audio_antenna_coupe_-2649.html"><span>Audio antenna (coupe)</span></a><br>
   	Location of Antenna 

1. In-line connectors M87, M501
2. AV control unit harness
3. AV control unit
4. Satellite antenna
5. AV control unit antenna feeder
6. Satellite radio antenna feeder
7. Window Antenna
8. Antenna amp.
9. Satellite radio tuner
Window Antenna Repair 
ELEMENT CHECK
1. ...
   	</p>
    [2650] => <p><a href="audio_antenna_sedan_-2650.html"><span>Audio antenna (sedan)</span></a><br>
   	Location of Antenna 

1. In-line connectors M87, M501
2. AV control unit harness
3. AV control unit
4. Satellite antenna
5. AV control unit antenna feeder
6. Satellite radio antenna feeder
7. Window Antenna
8. Antenna amp.
9. Satellite radio tuner
Window Antenna Repair 
ELEMENT CHECK
1. ...
   	</p>
    [2651] => <p><a href="antenna_amp-2651.html"><span>Antenna AMP</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation - Coupe 
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear pillar finisher RH. Refer to INT-20, &quot;Exploded View&quot;.

2. Detach the antenna amp harness clip (B), disconnect the
antenna amp connectors (A), remove the antenna amp screw
(C) and remove the antenna amp (1).

INSTALLATION
 ...
   	</p>
    [2652] => <p><a href="microphone-2652.html"><span>Microphone</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation 
REMOVAL
1. Remove the room/map lamp assembly. Refer to INL-121, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot;.

2. Detach the microphone connector (A).

3. Remove the map lamp covers (1), then remove the map lamp
assembly cover (2).

4. Release the microphone tabs (A), th ...
   	</p>
    [2653] => <p><a href="rear_view_camera-2653.html"><span>Rear view camera</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation 
REMOVAL
1. Remove the license plate finisher. Refer to EXT-23, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot; (coupe) and EXT-46,
&quot;Removal and Installation&quot; (sedan).

2. Remove trunk lid finisher. Refer to INT-22, &quot;Exploded View&quot;.

3. Remove the rear view ...
   	</p>
    [2654] => <p><a href="camera_control_unit-2654.html"><span>Camera control unit</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation - Coupe 
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal.

2. Remove the trunk floor carpet and spare tire cover. Refer to INT-23, &quot;Removal 
and Installation&quot;.

3. Remove the LH trunk side finisher. Refer to INT-23, &quot;Removal and 
Installation&quot; ...
   	</p>
    [2661] => <p><a href="general_maintenance-2661.html"><span>General maintenance</span></a><br>
   	Explanation General Maintenance 
General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during the 
normal day-to-day operation
of the vehicle. They are essential if the vehicle is to continue operating 
properly. The owners can perform
checks and inspections themselves or have their  ...
   	</p>
    [2662] => <p><a href="periodic_maintenance-2662.html"><span>Periodic maintenance</span></a><br>
   	Introduction of Periodic Maintenance
Two different maintenance schedules are provided, and should be used, 
depending upon the conditions in
which the vehicle is mainly operated. After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 
months, continue the periodic
maintenance at the same mileage/time intervals.
 ...
   	</p>
    [2663] => <p><a href="recommended_fluids_and_lubricants-2663.html"><span>Recommended fluids and lubricants</span></a><br>
   	Fluids and Lubricants 

1: For further details, see “Engine Oil Recommendation”.

*2: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 
will damage the CVT, which is not covered
by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

*3: DEXRONTM VI type ATF or Canada NIS ...
   	</p>
    [2665] => <p><a href="drive_belts-2665.html"><span>Drive belts</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Checking Drive Belts 

WARNING:
Inspect the drive belt only when the engine is stopped.
NOTE:
On vehicles not equipped with A/C, there is an idler pulley in the position for 
the drive belt routing.

• Make sure that the stamp mark of drive belt auto-tensioner is within the 
usable  ...
   	</p>
    [2666] => <p><a href="engine_coolant-2666.html"><span>Engine coolant</span></a><br>
   	Changing Engine Coolant
WARNING:
• To avoid being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot.

• Wrap a thick cloth around cap and carefully remove the cap. First, turn the 
cap a quarter of a turn to
release built-up pressure. Then push down and turn the cap all the way to 
 ...
   	</p>
    [2668] => <p><a href="air_cleaner_filter-2668.html"><span>Air cleaner filter</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation

1. Air duct hose
2. Air cleaner filter
3. Air cleaner case (front)
4. Front air duct
5. Air cleaner mounting bracket
6. Air cleaner case (rear)
7. Mass air flow sensor
A. To electric throttle control actuator
B. Air cleaner case side clips
CHANGING THE AIR CLEANE ...
   	</p>
    [2669] => <p><a href="engine_oil-2669.html"><span>Engine oil</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Changing Engine Oil 
WARNING:
• Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil may be hot.

• Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer: try 
to avoid direct skin
contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or 
hand c ...
   	</p>
    [2670] => <p><a href="oil_filter-2670.html"><span>Oil filter</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the oil filter using Tool.


WARNING:
• Be careful not to get burned, the engine and engine oil
may be hot.

CAUTION:
• When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any oil
leakage or spillage.

• Do not allow engine oil to adhere to the ...
   	</p>
    [2671] => <p><a href="spark_plug-2671.html"><span>Spark plug</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation 

1. Ignition coil
2. Spark plug
3. Rocker cover
REMOVAL
1. Remove the ignition coil. Refer to EM-35, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot;.

2. Remove the spark plug with a suitable spark plug wrench.

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
• Do not use a wire brush for clean ...
   	</p>
    [2674] => <p><a href="drive_belts-2674.html"><span>Drive belts</span></a><br>
   	Checking Drive Belts 

1. Power steering pump
2. Drive belt auto-tensioner
3. Crankshaft
4. Idler pulley
5. A/C compressor pulley
6. Generator pulley
7. Idler pulley
8. Drive belt
A. Indicator
B. Possible use range (for new belt)
C. Belt replacement
WARNING:
Inspect and check the drive ...
   	</p>
    [2675] => <p><a href="engine_coolant-2675.html"><span>Engine coolant</span></a><br>
   	Changing Engine Coolant
WARNING:
• To avoid being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot.

• Wrap a thick cloth around cap and carefully remove the cap. First, turn the 
cap a quarter of a turn to
release built-up pressure. Then turn the cap all the way.
DRAINING ENGINE  ...
   	</p>
    [2677] => <p><a href="air_cleaner_filter-2677.html"><span>Air cleaner filter</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;Removal and Installation

1. Air duct hose
2. Duct sub-cover
3. Front air duct
4. Air cleaner case (lower)
5. Grommets
6. Air cleaner case mounting bracket
7. Bracket
8. Air cleaner filter
9. Air cleaner case (upper)
10. Mass air flow sensor
A. To electric throttle control actuator ...
   	</p>
    [2678] => <p><a href="engine_oil-2678.html"><span>Engine oil</span></a><br>
   	Changing Engine Oil 
WARNING:
• Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil may be hot.

• Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer; try 
to avoid direct skin
contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or 
hand cleaner ...
   	</p>
    [2679] => <p><a href="oil_filter-2679.html"><span>Oil filter</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation 
REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine undercover.

2. Remove the oil filter using Tool (A) as shown.


WARNING:
• Be careful not to get burned, the engine and engine oil
may be hot.

CAUTION:
• When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any oil
leakage or spillag ...
   	</p>
    [2680] => <p><a href="spark_plug-2680.html"><span>Spark plug</span></a><br>
   	Removal and Installation 

1. Ignition coil
2. Spark plug
3. Rocker cover RH
4. Rocker cover LH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the ignition coil. Refer to EM-145, &quot;Removal and Installation LH&quot; 
and EM-145, &quot;Removal and
Installation RH&quot;.

2. Remove the spark plug with a suitable spa ...
   	</p>
    [2685] => <p><a href="cvt_fluid-2685.html"><span>CVT fluid</span></a><br>
   	&nbsp;RE0F09B 
Inspection
CHECKING CVT FLUID
Fluid level should be checked with the fluid warmed up to 50 to 80°C (122 to 
176°F). The fluid level check procedure
is as follows:
1. Check for fluid leakage.

2. With the engine warmed up, drive the vehicle in an urban area.

When ambient t ...
   	</p>
    [2686] => <p><a href="m_t_oil-2686.html"><span>M/T Oil</span></a><br>
   	Draining
1. Start engine and let it run to warm up transaxle oil.

2. Stop engine and remove the drain plug to drain the oil.

3. Install the drain plug with a new gasket to the transaxle case. Tighten the 
drain plug to the specified
torque. Refer to TM-79, &quot;Exploded View&quot;.
CAUTIO ...
   	</p>
    [2687] => <p><a href="wheels-2687.html"><span>Wheels</span></a><br>
   	Inspection 
ALUMINUM WHEEL
1. Check tires for wear and improper inflation.

2. Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If deformed, remove 
wheel and check wheel
runout.

a. Remove tire from aluminum wheel and mount on a tire balance machine.

b. Set dial indicator as shown  ...
   	</p>
    [2690] => <p><a href="brake_fluid-2690.html"><span>Brake fluid</span></a><br>
   	Draining 
DRAINING
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause 
paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.

• Before working, disconnect connectors of ABS actuator and electric unit 
(control unit) or ...
   	</p>
    [2692] => <p><a href="_b_nbsp_front_brake_pad_b_-2692.html"><span><b>&nbsp;Front Brake Pad</b></span></a><br>
   	Inspection
PAD WEAR
Check pad thickness from an inspection hole on cylinder body.

Check using a scale if necessary.


Front Brake Rotor
Inspection 
VISUAL
Check surface of disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. 
Replace if necessary.
RUNOUT
1. Attach the disc rotor to  ...
   	</p>
    [2694] => <p><a href="power_steering_fluid_and_lines-2694.html"><span>Power steering fluid and lines</span></a><br>
   	Inspection
FLUID LEVEL
• Check fluid level with engine stopped.

• Make sure that fluid level is between MIN and MAX.

• Fluid levels at HOT (A) and COLD (B) are different. Do not confuse
them.


CAUTION:
• The fluid level should not exceed the MAX line. Excessive
fluid will caus ...
   	</p>
    [2695] => <p><a href="axle_and_suspension_parts-2695.html"><span>Axle and suspension parts</span></a><br>
   	Inspection 
Check front and rear axle and suspension parts for excessive play,
cracks, wear or other damage.

• Shake each wheel to check for excessive play.

• Check wheel bearings for smooth operation.

• Check axle and suspension nuts and bolts for looseness.

• Check strut (sho ...
   	</p>
    [2698] => <p><a href="seat_belt_buckles_retractors_anchors_and_adjusters-2698.html"><span>Seat belt, buckles, retractors, anchors
and adjusters</span></a><br>
   	Inspection
CAUTION:
• After any collision, inspect all seat belt assemblies, including retractors 
and other attached hardwares
(I.e. anchor bolt, guide rail set). Nissan recommends to replace all seat belt 
assemblies in use
during a collision, unless not damaged and properly operating afte ...
   	</p>
    [2701] => <p><a href="air_bags_seat_belts_and_child_restraints-2701.html"><span>Air bags, seat belts and child restraints</span></a><br>
   	

	Top tether strap anchor
	Rear seat belts with pretensioner(s) for
	outboard seating
	Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
	rollover supplemental air bag
	Front seat-mounted side-impact
	supplemental air bag
	Head restraints/headrests
	Front seat belt with pretensioner(s) and
	shoulder height adju ...
   	</p>
    [2702] => <p><a href="passenger_compartment-2702.html"><span>Passenger compartment</span></a><br>
   	

	Power moonroof (if so equipped)
	Sun visors 
	Interior lights
	HomeLink Universal Transceiver (if so
	equipped)
	Rearview mirror 
	Glove box
	Cup holders 
	Console box 
	Rear armrest
	Cup holders

Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
Instrument panel


	Vents
	 ...
   	</p>
    [2703] => <p><a href="engine_compartment_check_locations-2703.html"><span>Engine compartment check locations</span></a><br>
   	
2.0L 4 cylinder (KR20DDET engine model)

	Engine coolant reservoir 
	Drive belt location 
	Engine oil filler cap
	Brake fluid reservoir 
	Battery
	Fuse/Fusible link box
	Air cleaner
	Radiator cap 
	Engine oil dipstick
	Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

Refer to the page number indicated in
parenth ...
   	</p>
    [2704] => <p><a href="warning_indicator_lights-2704.html"><span>Warning/Indicator lights</span></a><br>
   	Warning/Indicator light (red)
Brake warning
light
Charge warning
light
Electronic parking
brake indicator
light (if so
equipped)
Engine oil pressure
warning light
Master warning
light
Seat belt warning
light and chime
Security indicator
light
Supplemental air
bag warning light
Warning/Indicator
ligh ...
   	</p>
    [2706] => <p><a href="seats-2706.html"><span>Seats</span></a><br>
   	
WARNING

	Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
	the seatback is reclined. This can be
	dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
	be against your body. In an accident,
	you could be thrown into it and receive
	neck or other serious injuries.
	You could also slide under the lap belt
	and receive serious ...
   	</p>
    [2707] => <p><a href="front_manual_seat_adjustment_if_so_equipped_-2707.html"><span>Front manual seat adjustment
(if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manually.

For additional information about adjusting
the seats, refer to the steps outlined
in this section.
WARNING
Before driving the vehicle, return the
seatback to an upright seating position
after manually releasing it. Also, make
sure the seat is locked in p ...
   	</p>
    [2708] => <p><a href="front_power_seat_adjustment_if_so_equipped_-2708.html"><span>Front power seat adjustment
(if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	Operating tips

	The power seat motor has an auto-reset
	overload protection circuit. If the motor
	stops during operation, wait 30 seconds
	then reactivate the switch.
	Do not operate the power seat switch for
	a long period of time when the engine is
	off. This will discharge the battery.

For add ...
   	</p>
    [2709] => <p><a href="folding_rear_seat-2709.html"><span>Folding rear seat</span></a><br>
   	

Interior trunk access
The trunk can be accessed from the driver
side and passenger side of the rear seat for
loading and unloading, as shown.
1. Move the front passenger seat to the
most forward position.
2. Open the access cover on the rear parcel
shelf.

3. Insert a key or another suitable tool
 ...
   	</p>
    [2710] => <p><a href="head_restraints_headrests-2710.html"><span>Head restraints/headrests</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
Head restraints/headrests supplement
the other vehicle safety systems. They
may provide additional protection
against injury in certain rear end collisions.

Adjustable head restraints/
headrests must be adjusted properly,
as specified in this section. Check the
adjustment after someone else ...
   	</p>
    [2712] => <p><a href="precautions_on_seat_belt_usage-2712.html"><span>Precautions on seat belt usage</span></a><br>
   	
If you are wearing your seat belt properly
adjusted and you are sitting upright and
well back in your seat with both feet on the
floor, your chances of being injured or killed
in a collision and/or the severity of injury
may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly
encourages you and all of your passeng ...
   	</p>
    [2713] => <p><a href="seat_belt_warning_light_and_chime-2713.html"><span>Seat belt warning light and chime</span></a><br>
   	
The driver and front passenger seat is
equipped with an enhanced seat belt reminder
function.

A visual and audible alert will operate at
speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h)
or more under the following conditions:

	If the driver seat belt is not fastened.
	The front passenger’s seat belt is  ...
   	</p>
    [2714] => <p><a href="three_point_type_seat_belt_with_retractor-2714.html"><span>Three-point type seat belt with
retractor</span></a><br>
   	WARNING

	Every person who drives or rides in
	this vehicle should use a seat belt at
	all times. Children should be in the
	rear seats and in an appropriate
	restraint.
	Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
	the seatback is reclined. This can be
	dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
	be against yo ...
   	</p>
    [2715] => <p><a href="seat_belt_extenders-2715.html"><span>Seat belt extenders</span></a><br>
   	If, because of body size or driving position, it
is not possible to properly fit the lap/
shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender
that is compatible with the installed seat
belts is available for purchase. The extender
adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)
of length and may be used for either the
driver ...
   	</p>
    [2716] => <p><a href="child_safety-2716.html"><span>Child safety</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat
belt becomes wrapped around a child’s
neck with the ALR mode activated, the
child can be seriously injured or killed if
the seat belt r ...
   	</p>
    [2718] => <p><a href="precautions_on_child_restraints-2718.html"><span>Precautions on child restraints</span></a><br>
   	
WARNING

	Failure to follow the warnings and instructions
	for proper use and installation
	of child restraints could result in serious
	injury or death of a child or other
	passengers in a sudden stop or collision:
		The child restraint must be used
		and installed properly. Always follow
		all of ...
   	</p>
    [2719] => <p><a href="latch_lower_anchors_and_tethers_for_children_system-2719.html"><span>LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system</span></a><br>
   	
LATCH system anchor locations
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor
points that are used with LATCH system
compatible child restraints. This system
may also be referred to as the ISOFIX
or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system,
you do not have to use a vehicle seat
belt to secure the ch ...
   	</p>
    [2720] => <p><a href="rear_facing_child_restraint_installation_using_latch-2720.html"><span>Rear-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH</span></a><br>
   	For additional information, see all Warnings
and Cautions in the "Child safety"
and "Child restraints" before installing
a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint
exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined
weight of the child and the ...
   	</p>
    [2721] => <p><a href="rear_facing_child_restraint_installation_using_the_seat_belts-2721.html"><span>Rear-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result
in the child restraint not being properly
secured. The restraint could tip over or
be loose and cause injury to a child in a
sudden stop o ...
   	</p>
    [2722] => <p><a href="forward_facing_child_restraint_installation_using_latch-2722.html"><span>Forward-facing child restraint
installation using LATCH</span></a><br>
   	For additional information, see all Warnings
and Cautions in "Child safety" and
"Child restraints" before installing a
child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint
exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined
weight of the child and the chi ...
   	</p>
    [2723] => <p><a href="forward_facing_child_restraint_installation_using_the_seat_belts-2723.html"><span>Forward-facing child restraint
installation using the seat belts</span></a><br>
   	WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result
in the child restraint not being properly
secured. The restraint could tip over or
be loose and cause injury to a child in a
sudden stop o ...
   	</p>
    [2724] => <p><a href="booster_seats-2724.html"><span>Booster seats</span></a><br>
   	For additional information on installing a
booster seat in your vehicle, follow the instructions
outlined in this section.
Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not
used properly, the risk of a child being
injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision
greatly inc ...
   	</p>
    [2726] => <p><a href="precautions_on_srs-2726.html"><span>Precautions on SRS</span></a><br>
   	This SRS section contains important information
concerning the following systems:

	Driver and front passenger supplemental
	front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced
	Air Bag System)
	Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental
	air bag
	Rear outboard seat-mounted side-impact
	supplemental air bag
	Roo ...
   	</p>
    [2727] => <p><a href="nissan_advanced_air_bag_system-2727.html"><span>NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System</span></a><br>
   	

	Top tether strap anchor
	Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
	rollover supplemental air bag inflators
	Rear seat belts
	Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
	rollover supplemental air bag
	Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental
	air bag
	Head restraints/headrests
	Front seat belts
	Side-imp ...
   	</p>
    [2728] => <p><a href="front_and_rear_outboard_seat_mounted_side_impact_supplemental_air_bag_and_roof_mounted_curtain_side_impact_and_rollover_supplemental_air_bag_systems-2728.html"><span>Front and rear outboard
seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag and
roof-mounted curtain
side-impact and rollover
supplemental air bag systems</span></a><br>
   	
The side air bags are located in the outside
of the seatback of the front and rear outboard
seats. The curtain air bags are located
in the side roof rails. All of the information,
cautions and warnings in this
manual must be followed. The side air
bags and curtain air bags are designed to
inflate i ...
   	</p>
    [2729] => <p><a href="supplemental_air_bag_warning_labels-2729.html"><span>Supplemental air bag warning labels</span></a><br>
   	Warning labels about the supplemental
front-impact air bag system are placed in
the vehicle as shown in the illustration.
WARNING
Do not use a rear-facing child restraint
on a seat protected by an air bag in
front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may
cause serious injury or death.
Supplemental air  ...
   	</p>
    [2731] => <p><a href="instrument_panel-2731.html"><span>Instrument panel</span></a><br>
   	

	Vents
	Steering wheel switches for audio control*
	Vehicle information display controls
	Headlight/turn signal switch 
	Paddle shifters (if so equipped)
	Driver supplemental air bag
	Horn 
	Meters and gauges
	Warning and indicator lights
	Vehicle information display
	Wiper and washer switch
	Heat ...
   	</p>
    [2733] => <p><a href="speedometer_and_odometer-2733.html"><span>Speedometer and odometer</span></a><br>
   	This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer
and odometer. The speedometer is
located on the right side of the meter
cluster. The odometer is located within the
vehicle information display.

5 inch (13 cm) Type A (if so equipped)
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

7 inch (18 cm) Ty ...
   	</p>
    [2734] => <p><a href="tachometer-2734.html"><span>Tachometer</span></a><br>
   	
5 inch (13 cm) Type A (if so equipped)
The tachometer indicates engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).

Do not rev the engine into the red zone 1.

7 inch (18 cm) Type B (if so equipped)
CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the
red zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce
engine speed. Operati ...
   	</p>
    [2735] => <p><a href="fuel_gauge-2735.html"><span>Fuel gauge</span></a><br>
   	
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel
level in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,
turning, acceleration, or going up or
down hills.

The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) after
the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.

The low fuel warning message shows in
the vehic ...
   	</p>
    [2736] => <p><a href="warning_lights_indicator_lights_and_audible_reminders-2736.html"><span>Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders</span></a><br>
   	Warning/Indicator light (red)
Brake warning light
Charge warning light
Electronic parking brake 
indicator
light (if so equipped)
 Engine oil pressure warning 
light
 Master warning light
 Seat belt warning light and 
chime
 Security indicator light
 Supplemental air bag warning 
light
Warning/Indic ...
   	</p>
    [2737] => <p><a href="warning_indicator_lights_red_-2737.html"><span>Warning/Indicator lights (red)</span></a><br>
   	For additional information on warnings
and indicators, see "Vehicle information
display - 5 inch (13 cm) Type A" or
"Vehicle information display - 7 inch (18cm)
Type B".
 or
 Brake warning
light
This light functions for both the parking
brake and the foot brake systems.
Parking brake indicator (if s ...
   	</p>
    [2738] => <p><a href="warning_indicator_lights_yellow_-2738.html"><span>Warning/Indicator lights (yellow)</span></a><br>
   	For additional information on warnings
and indicators, see "Vehicle information
display-5 inch (13 cm) Type A" or
"Vehicle information display-7 inch (18 cm)
Type B".
 or
 Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the ABS warning light illumi ...
   	</p>
    [2739] => <p><a href="warning_indicator_lights_other_-2739.html"><span>Warning/Indicator lights (other)</span></a><br>
   	For additional information on warnings
and indicators, see "Vehicle information
display-5 inch (13 cm) Type A" or
"Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm)
Type B".
 Automatic brake hold
indicator light (white/green)
(if so equipped)
The automatic brake hold indicator light
(white) illuminates whe ...
   	</p>
    [2740] => <p><a href="vehicle_information_display_5_inch_13_cm_type_a_if_so_equipped_-2740.html"><span>Vehicle information display - 5 inch (13 cm) Type A (if so equipped)</span></a><br>
   	
The vehicle information display is located
to the left of the speedometer. It displays
such items as:

	Vehicle settings
	Indicators and warnings
	Information/warning messages
	Tire pressure information
	Drive computer information
	Cruise control system information
	Driving Aids (if so equipped)
	N ...
   	</p>
)
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html lang="en-US">
<head profile="http://gmpg.org/xfn/11">
<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8">
<meta name="viewport" content="width=device-width, initial-scale=1.0">
<title>Nissan Altima (L32) 2007-2012 Service Manual: Spiral cable - On-vehicle repair - SRS Airbag</title>
<link rel="stylesheet" href="style1.css" type="text/css" media="screen, projection">
<link rel="shortcut icon" href="favicon.ico" type="image/x-icon">
</head>

<body>
<heading>
<div class="head">
<div class="head_content">
	<div class="brand">
	<a href="/" title="Nissan Altima manuals"><img src="images/logo.webp" alt="Nissan Altima manuals" title="Nissan Altima manuals" height="60"></a>
	</div>
	<nav>
      <div class="nav-mobile"><a id="nav-toggle" href="#!"><span></span></a></div>
      <ul class="nav-list">
<li><div class="mobilesearch">
<script async src="https://cse.google.com/cse.js?cx=partner-pub-4191894785090842:9162879404">
</script>
<div class="gcse-searchbox-only"></div></div>

</li>
        <li>
          <a href="/">Manuals</a>
        </li>
        <li>
          <a href="#">Owners</a>
          <ul class="nav-dropdown"><li>
              <a href="illustrated_table_of_contents-2700.html">Illustrated table of contents</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="safety_seats_seat_belts_and_supplemental_restraint_system-2705.html">Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="instruments_and_controls-2730.html">Instruments and controls</a>
            </li></ul>
        </li>
        <li>
          <a href="#!">Service</a>
			    <ul class="nav-dropdown"><li>
              <a href="general_information-397.html">General information</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="engine_mechanical-413.html">Engine mechanical</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="engine_lubrication_system_qr25de-466.html">Engine lubrication system QR25DE</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="engine_lubrication_system_vq35de-477.html">Engine lubrication system VQ35DE</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="engine_cooling_system_qr25de-488.html">Engine cooling system QR25DE</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="engine_cooling_system_vq35de-502.html">Engine cooling system VQ35DE</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="engine_control_system_qr25de_for_california-516.html">Engine control system QR25DE for california</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="engine_control_system_qr25de_except_for_california-652.html">Engine control system QR25DE except for california</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="engine_control_system_vq35de-778.html">Engine control system VQ35DE</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="fuel_system-913.html">Fuel system</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="exhaust_system_qr25de-921.html">Exhaust system QR25DE</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="exhaust_system_vq35de-926.html">Exhaust system VQ35DE</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="starting_system_qr25de-931.html">Starting system QR25DE</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="starting_system_vq35de-943.html">Starting system VQ35DE</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="accelerator_control_system-955.html">Accelerator control system</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="_nbsp_accelerator_control_system_clutch-959.html">&nbsp;Accelerator control system Clutch</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="transaxle_amp_transmission_6mt_rs6f52a-974.html">Transaxle &amp; transmission 6MT: RS6F52A</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="transaxle_amp_transmission_cvt_re0f09b-995.html">Transaxle &amp; transmission cvt: RE0F09B</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="transaxle_amp_transmission_cvt_re0f10a-1058.html">Transaxle &amp; transmission cvt: RE0F10A</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="front_axle-1128.html">Front Axle</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="rear_axle-1138.html">Rear axle</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="front_suspension-1145.html">Front suspension</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="rear_suspension-1157.html">Rear suspension</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="road_wheels_amp_tires-1170.html">Road wheels &amp; tires</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="parking_brake_system-1200.html">Parking brake system</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="steering_system-1209.html">Steering system</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="steering_control_system-1227.html">Steering control system</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="seat_belt_system-1239.html">Seat belt system</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="srs_airbag-1247.html">SRS Airbag</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="srs_airbag_control_system-1260.html">SRS Airbag control system</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="ventilation_system-1288.html">Ventilation system</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="heater_amp_air_conditioning_system-1317.html">Heater &amp; air conditioning system</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="heater_amp_air_conditioning_control_system_automatic_air_conditioner-1335.html">Heater &amp; air conditioning control system automatic air conditioner</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="heater_amp_air_conditioning_control_system_manual_air_conditioner-1366.html">Heater &amp; air conditioning control system manual air conditioner</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="interior_coupe-1389.html">Interior Coupe</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="interior_sedan-1400.html">Interior Sedan</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="instrument_panel-1411.html">Instrument panel</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="seat_coupe-1417.html">Seat Coupe</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="seat_sedan-1428.html">Seat Sedan</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="security_control_system_coupe-1441.html">Security control system coupe</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="security_control_system_sedan_with_intelligent_key-1512.html">Security control system sedan with intelligent key</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="security_control_system_sedan_without_intelligent_key-1580.html">Security control system sedan without intelligent key</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="glass_amp_window_system-1649.html">Glass &amp; window system</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="power_window_control_system_lh_only_anti_pinch_coupe-1664.html">Power window control system lh only anti-pinch-coupe</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="power_window_control_system_nbsp_lh_only_anti_pinch_sedan-1699.html">Power window control system&nbsp; LH only anti-pinch-sedan</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="power_window_control_system_lh_amp_rh_front_anti_pinch_coupe-1739.html">Power window control system lh&amp;rh front anti-pinch-coupe</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="power_window_control_system_lh_amp_rh_front_anti_pinch_sedan-1783.html">Power window control system lh&amp;rh front anti-pinch-sedan</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="roof-1834.html">Roof</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="exterior_coupe-1861.html">Exterior coupe</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="exterior_sedan-1875.html">Exterior sedan</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="body_repair_coupe-1892.html">Body repair coupe</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="body_repair_sedan-1903.html">Body repair sedan</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="mirrors-1914.html">Mirrors</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="exterior_lighting_system-1925.html">Exterior lighting system</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="interior_lighting_system-1990.html">Interior lighting system</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="wiper_amp_washer-2000.html">Wiper &amp; washer</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="defogger-2035.html">Defogger</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="horn-2060.html">Horn</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="power_outtlet-2064.html">Power Outtlet</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="body_control_system_bcm-2068.html">Body control system bcm</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="lan_system_can_fundamental-2107.html">Lan system can fundamental</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="lan_system_can-2114.html">Lan system can</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="lan_system_can_system_type_1_-2134.html">Lan system can system (type 1)</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="lan_system_can_system_type_2_-2144.html">Lan system can system (type 2)</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="lan_system_can_system_type_3_-2155.html">Lan system can system (type 3)</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="lan_system_can_system_type_4_-2166.html">Lan system can system (type 4)</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="lan_system_can_system_type_5_-2178.html">Lan system can system (type 5)</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="lan_system_can_system_type_6_-2188.html">Lan system can system (type 6)</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="lan_system_can_system_type_7_-2199.html">Lan system can system (type 7)</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="lan_system_can_system_type_8_-2210.html">Lan system can system (type 8)</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="lan_system_can_system_type_9_-2222.html">Lan system can system (type 9)</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="lan_system_can_system_type_10_-2233.html">Lan system can system (type 10)</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="lan_system_can_system_type_11_-2245.html">Lan system can system (type 11)</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="lan_system_can_system_type_12_-2257.html">Lan system can system (type 12)</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="power_control_system_ipdm_e_r-2270.html">Power control system IPDM E/R</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="power_distribution_system-2286.html">Power distribution system</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="charging_system-2316.html">Charging system</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="_nbsp_power_supply_ground_amp_circuit_elements_coupe-2333.html">&nbsp;Power supply, ground &amp; circuit elements coupe</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="power_supply_ground_amp_circuit_elements_sedan-2350.html">Power supply, ground &amp; circuit elements sedan</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="meter_warning_lamp_amp_indicator-2366.html">Meter, warning lamp &amp; indicator</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="warning_chime_system-2410.html">Warning chime system</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="audio_visual_amp_navigation_system_base_audio-2435.html">Audio, visual &amp; navigation system base audio</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="audio_visual_amp_navigation_system_bose_audio_without_navigation-2480.html">Audio, visual &amp; navigation system bose audio without navigation</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="audio_visual_amp_navigation_system_bose_audio_with_navigation-2552.html">Audio, visual &amp; navigation system bose audio with navigation</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="cruise_control_system_qr25de_for_california-2655.html">Cruise control system QR25DE for california</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="cruise_control_system_qr25de_except_for_california-2656.html">Cruise control system QR25DE Except for california</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="cruise_control_system_vq35de-2657.html">Cruise control system VQ35DE</a>
            </li><li>
              <a href="maintenance-2658.html">Maintenance</a>
            </li></ul>
        </li>
        <li><a href="/new.html">New</a></li>
		<li><a href="/top.html">Top</a></li>
		<li><a href="/sitemap.html">Sitemap</a></li>
      </ul>

    </nav>
</div>
</div>
</heading>

<main>
<article>

<div class="way"><a href="nissan_altima_l32_2007_2012_service_manual-396.html">Nissan Altima (L32) 2007-2012 Service Manual</a> &#8827 <a href="srs_airbag-1247.html">SRS Airbag</a> &#8827 <a href="on_vehicle_repair-1250.html">On-vehicle repair</a> &#8827  Spiral cable</div>

<h1>Nissan Altima (L32) 2007-2012 Service Manual: Spiral cable</h1>

<div style="margin:15px 0;"><script async src="https://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/js/adsbygoogle.js"></script>
<!-- nialtima.com top 120 adaptive -->
<ins class="adsbygoogle"
     style="display:block; height: 120px;"
     data-ad-client="ca-pub-8114057553037766"
     data-ad-slot="8983090490"></ins>
<script>
     (adsbygoogle = window.adsbygoogle || []).push({});
</script></div>
<p><p><b>Removal and Installation</b></p>
<p>REMOVAL</p>
<p><b>CAUTION:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals 
and wait at least three
minutes.</p>
<p>
• Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing.</p>
<p>
• Do not disassemble the spiral cable.</p>
<p>
• Do not allow oil, grease, detergent or water to come in contact with the 
spiral cable.</p>
<p>
• Do not cause impact to the spiral cable by dropping etc. Replace the spiral 
cable if it has been
dropped or sustained an impact.</p>
<p>
• With the steering linkage disconnected, the cable may snap by turning the 
steering wheel beyond
the limited number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned counterclockwise 
about 2.0 turns from
the neutral position.</b>
1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least 
three minutes.</p>
<p>
2. Remove the steering wheel. Refer to ST-13, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot;.</p>
<p>
3. Remove the column cover. Refer to IP-12, &quot;Removal and Installation&quot;.</p>
<p>
4. Disconnect the harness connectors (2) from spiral cable (1).</p>
<p><img border="0" src="images/books/396/42/4.htm60.gif"></p>
<p>5. Rotate the spiral cable slightly so the locating pin (2) is positioned
at the top.</p>
<p>
• Locating hole (1)
• Alignment arrows (B)
6. Remove the screws (A), then remove spiral cable from the
steering column.</p>
<p>
CAUTION:
Do not turn the spiral cable quickly or beyond the limit
number of turns (approximately 2.0 turns from the neutral
position), this may cause the cable to snap.</p>
<p>
7. Remove the steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-242,
&quot;Removal and Installation&quot;.</p>
<p><img border="0" src="images/books/396/42/4.htm61.gif"></p>
<p>INSTALLATION</p>
<p>1. Set the spiral cable neutral position.</p>
<p>
1. Slowly turn the spiral cable clockwise to the end position.</p>
<p>2. Next, turn it counterclockwise (about 2.0 turns) then stop turning at the 
point when the alignment
arrows (B) are directly across from each other.</p>
<p>
3. Rotate the spiral cable slightly so the locating pin (2) is positioned at the 
top.</p>
<p>
NOTE:
A service part is installed in the neutral position with a stopper clip in place 
and should not be adjusted
after the stopper clip is removed.</p>
<p>
2. Install the spiral cable in the reverse order of removal.</p>
<p>
3. Align the locating hole (1) at the top of the steering wheel with the 
locating pin of spiral cable during installation.</p>
<p>
<b>CAUTION:
• The spiral cable may snap by steering operation if the cable is installed in 
an improper position.</p>
<p>
• Do not turn the spiral cable quickly or beyond the limit number of turns. 
(This can cause the cable to
snap.)
• After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by 
air bag warning lamp.</p>
<p>
• In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset with the 
self-diagnosis function
and delete the memory with CONSULT&#8722;III.</p>
<p>
• If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform 
self-diagnosis to repair malfunctions.</p>
<p>
Refer to SRC-12, &quot;SRS Operation Check&quot;.</b></p><ul></ul></table></ul><div style="clear:both"></div><div align="center"><script async src="https://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/js/adsbygoogle.js"></script>
<!-- nialtima.com bot adaptive -->
<ins class="adsbygoogle"
     style="display:block"
     data-ad-client="ca-pub-8114057553037766"
     data-ad-slot="6064043935"
     data-ad-format="auto"
     data-full-width-responsive="true"></ins>
<script>
     (adsbygoogle = window.adsbygoogle || []).push({});
</script></div><section id="prevnext"><div class="clicknav">
<h2 style="margin:5px 0"><a href="driver_air_bag_module-1251.html" style="text-decoration:none"><img src="images/previus.webp" alt="" border="0" style="float:left; margin-right:3px;">Driver air bag module</a></h2>
   <span>Exploded View

1. Steering switch connector
2. Steering switch ground connector
3. Steering switches
4. Driver air bag module
5. Driver air bag module connectors
6. Side lid (RH/LH)
A. Steerin ...</span>
   </p></div>
<div class="clicknav right">
<h2 style="margin:5px 0"><a href="front_passenger_air_bag_module-1253.html" style="text-decoration:none"><img src="images/next.webp" alt="" border="0" style="float:right; margin-left:3px;">Front passenger air bag module</a></h2>
   <span>Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals 
and wait at
least three minutes.

• Do not use air tools or electr ...</span>
   </p></div>
</section>
<div style="clear:both"></div><aside>
<div style="margin-top:0px;">
   <h5 style="margin:5px 0">Other materials:</h5>2<br />3<br />4<br />5<br />7<br />8<br />10<br />11<br />12<br />15<br />16<br />17<br />18<br />19<br />20<br />22<br />25<br />26<br />27<br />28<br />30<br />31<br />33<br />34<br />35<br />36<br />37<br />38<br />39<br />40<br />42<br />43<br />44<br />46<br />48<br />50<br />52<br />53<br />54<br />56<br />57<br />58<br />59<br />60<br />61<br />62<br />63<br />64<br />66<br />67<br />68<br />69<br />71<br />72<br />73<br />76<br />78<br />79<br />80<br />81<br />82<br />86<br />87<br />89<br />91<br />92<br />93<br />97<br />98<br />99<br />101<br />102<br />103<br />104<br />107<br />108<br />109<br />110<br />112<br />113<br />114<br />115<br />116<br />117<br />118<br />119<br />120<br />122<br />124<br />125<br />127<br />129<br />130<br />132<br />133<br />135<br />136<br />139<br />142<br />143<br />146<br />147<br />148<br />149<br />150<br />152<br />153<br />154<br />155<br />156<br />157<br />158<br />159<br />160<br />161<br />163<br />164<br />165<br />166<br />167<br />168<br />169<br />170<br />171<br />172<br />173<br />174<br />175<br />177<br />178<br />179<br />180<br />181<br />182<br />183<br />184<br />185<br />186<br />187<br />188<br />189<br />190<br />191<br />192<br />193<br />194<br />195<br />201<br />202<br />203<br />204<br />205<br />206<br />207<br />208<br />209<br />211<br />212<br />213<br />214<br />215<br />216<br />217<br />219<br />221<br />222<br />223<br />224<br />225<br />226<br />227<br />228<br />229<br />230<br />233<br />235<br />236<br />237<br />238<br />239<br />241<br />247<br />248<br />249<br />250<br />251<br />252<br />253<br />254<br />255<br />256<br />257<br />259<br />260<br />261<br />262<br />263<br />264<br />265<br />266<br />267<br />268<br />270<br />271<br />273<br />274<br />275<br />276<br />277<br />278<br />279<br />281<br />282<br />283<br />289<br />291<br />292<br />295<br />297<br />298<br />299<br />301<br />302<br />303<br />304<br />306<br />307<br />308<br />311<br />312<br />314<br />315<br />316<br />317<br />318<br />321<br />322<br />324<br />325<br />326<br />327<br />328<br />329<br />330<br />332<br />333<br />334<br />336<br />337<br />338<br />339<br />340<br />341<br />342<br />343<br />345<br />346<br />349<br />350<br />351<br />352<br />353<br />355<br />358<br />360<br />361<br />362<br />363<br />364<br />366<br />367<br />368<br />369<br />374<br />385<br />386<br />387<br />388<br />389<br />390<br />391<br />392<br />393<br />394<br />395<br />398<br />399<br />400<br />404<br />405<br />407<br />408<br />409<br />411<br />412<br />414<br />415<br />416<br />418<br />419<br />420<br />421<br />422<br />424<br />425<br />426<br />427<br />429<br />430<br />431<br />432<br />433<br />434<br />436<br />437<br />438<br />439<br />441<br />443<br />444<br />445<br />446<br />447<br />449<br />450<br />451<br />452<br />453<br />454<br />455<br />456<br />457<br />458<br />459<br />460<br />461<br />462<br />463<br />464<br />465<br />467<br />469<br />471<br />472<br />474<br />475<br />478<br />482<br />483<br />485<br />486<br />489<br />492<br />494<br />496<br />497<br />498<br />499<br />500<br />503<br />508<br />510<br />511<br />512<br />513<br />514<br />518<br />519<br />520<br />522<br />523<br />524<br />525<br />526<br />527<br />529<br />530<br />531<br />532<br />533<br />534<br />535<br />536<br />537<br />538<br />539<br />541<br />542<br />543<br />544<br />545<br />546<br />547<br />548<br />549<br />550<br />551<br />552<br />553<br />554<br />555<br />556<br />557<br />558<br />559<br />560<br />561<br />562<br />563<br />564<br />565<br />566<br />567<br />568<br />569<br />570<br />571<br />572<br />573<br />574<br />575<br />576<br />577<br />578<br />579<br />580<br />581<br />582<br />583<br />584<br />585<br />586<br />587<br />588<br />589<br />590<br />591<br />592<br />593<br />594<br />595<br />596<br />597<br />598<br />599<br />600<br />601<br />602<br />603<br />605<br />606<br />607<br />608<br />609<br />610<br />611<br />612<br />613<br />614<br />615<br />616<br />617<br />618<br />619<br />620<br />621<br />622<br />623<br />624<br />625<br />626<br />627<br />628<br />629<br />630<br />631<br />632<br />633<br />634<br />635<br />636<br />637<br />638<br />639<br />640<br />641<br />643<br />644<br />645<br />648<br />649<br />650<br />651<br />652<br />654<br />655<br />656<br />657<br />658<br />659<br />660<br />661<br />662<br />664<br />665<br />666<br />667<br />668<br />669<br />670<br />671<br />672<br />673<br />675<br />676<br />677<br />678<br />679<br />680<br />681<br />682<br />683<br />684<br />685<br />686<br />687<br />688<br />689<br />690<br />691<br />692<br />693<br />694<br />695<br />696<br />697<br />698<br />699<br />700<br />701<br />702<br />703<br />704<br />705<br />706<br />707<br />708<br />709<br />710<br />711<br />712<br />713<br />714<br />715<br />716<br />717<br />718<br />719<br />720<br />721<br />722<br />723<br />724<br />725<br />726<br />727<br />728<br />729<br />730<br />731<br />732<br />734<br />735<br />736<br />737<br />738<br />739<br />740<br />741<br />742<br />743<br />744<br />745<br />746<br />747<br />748<br />749<br />750<br />751<br />752<br />753<br />754<br />755<br />756<br />757<br />758<br />759<br />760<br />761<br />762<br />763<br />764<br />765<br />766<br />767<br />769<br />770<br />771<br />774<br />775<br />776<br />777<br />779<br />781<br />782<br />783<br />784<br />785<br />786<br />787<br />788<br />789<br />791<br />792<br />793<br />794<br />795<br />796<br />797<br />798<br />799<br />800<br />801<br />802<br />804<br />805<br />806<br />807<br />808<br />809<br />810<br />811<br />812<br />813<br />814<br />815<br />816<br />817<br />818<br />819<br />820<br />821<br />822<br />823<br />824<br />825<br />826<br />827<br />828<br />829<br />830<br />831<br />832<br />833<br />834<br />835<br />836<br />837<br />838<br />839<br />840<br />841<br />842<br />843<br />844<br />845<br />846<br />847<br />848<br />849<br />850<br />851<br />852<br />853<br />854<br />855<br />856<br />857<br />858<br />859<br />860<br />862<br />863<br />864<br />865<br />866<br />867<br />868<br />869<br />870<br />871<br />872<br />873<br />875<br />876<br />877<br />878<br />879<br />880<br />881<br />882<br />883<br />884<br />885<br />886<br />887<br />888<br />889<br />890<br />891<br />892<br />893<br />894<br />895<br />896<br />897<br />898<br />899<br />900<br />901<br />902<br />904<br />905<br />906<br />909<br />910<br />911<br />912<br />914<br />916<br />918<br />919<br />922<br />925<br />927<br />930<br />932<br />935<br />936<br />937<br />939<br />941<br />944<br />947<br />948<br />949<br />951<br />953<br />956<br />957<br />961<br />964<br />965<br />967<br />968<br />969<br />971<br />972<br />975<br />977<br />978<br />979<br />981<br />984<br />985<br />986<br />988<br />989<br />990<br />991<br />992<br />993<br />994<br />997<br />998<br />1000<br />1001<br />1002<br />1003<br />1004<br />1005<br />1006<br />1007<br />1008<br />1010<br />1011<br />1012<br />1013<br />1014<br />1015<br />1016<br />1017<br />1018<br />1019<br />1020<br />1021<br />1022<br />1023<br />1024<br />1025<br />1026<br />1027<br />1028<br />1029<br />1030<br />1031<br />1032<br />1033<br />1034<br />1035<br />1036<br />1037<br />1038<br />1039<br />1040<br />1041<br />1042<br />1045<br />1046<br />1047<br />1048<br />1049<br />1050<br />1051<br />1052<br />1053<br />1054<br />1055<br />1056<br />1057<br />1060<br />1061<br />1063<br />1064<br />1065<br />1066<br />1067<br />1068<br />1069<br />1070<br />1071<br />1073<br />1074<br />1075<br />1076<br />1077<br />1078<br />1079<br />1080<br />1081<br />1082<br />1083<br />1084<br />1085<br />1086<br />1087<br />1088<br />1089<br />1090<br />1091<br />1092<br />1093<br />1094<br />1095<br />1096<br />1097<br />1098<br />1099<br />1100<br />1101<br />1102<br />1103<br />1104<br />1105<br />1108<br />1109<br />1110<br />1111<br />1112<br />1113<br />1115<br />1116<br />1117<br />1118<br />1119<br />1120<br />1121<br />1122<br />1123<br />1124<br />1125<br />1126<br />1127<br />1130<br />1132<br />1134<br />1135<br />1136<br />1140<br />1142<br />1143<br />1147<br />1149<br />1151<br />1152<br />1153<br />1154<br />1155<br />1156<br />1159<br />1161<br />1162<br />1164<br />1165<br />1168<br />1169<br />1172<br />1173<br />1175<br />1176<br />1178<br />1179<br />1180<br />1181<br />1182<br />1183<br />1186<br />1187<br />1188<br />1192<br />1194<br />1196<br />1197<br />1198<br />1203<br />1204<br />1206<br />1207<br />1211<br />1214<br />1215<br />1216<br />1218<br />1219<br />1220<br />1221<br />1224<br />1225<br />1226<br />1228<br />1229<br />1231<br />1232<br />1233<br />1234<br />1235<br />1236<br />1237<br />1240<br />1241<br />1243<br />1244<br />1248<br />1251<br />1252<br />1253<br />1254<br />1255<br />1256<br />1257<br />1259<br />1262<br />1263<br />1265<br />1266<br />1267<br />1268<br />1270<br />1271<br />1272<br />1273<br />1274<br />1275<br />1276<br />1277<br />1278<br />1279<br />1280<br />1281<br />1282<br />1283<br />1284<br />1285<br />1286<br />1287<br />1289<br />1292<br />1295<br />1298<br />1299<br />1303<br />1304<br />1305<br />1306<br />1308<br />1310<br />1315<br />1319<br />1320<br />1321<br />1322<br />1324<br />1325<br />1326<br />1327<br />1328<br />1329<br />1330<br />1332<br />1333<br />1337<br />1338<br />1340<br />1341<br />1342<br />1344<br />1346<br />1347<br />1348<br />1349<br />1350<br />1351<br />1352<br />1353<br />1354<br />1355<br />1356<br />1357<br />1360<br />1361<br />1362<br />1363<br />1364<br />1365<br />1368<br />1369<br />1371<br />1372<br />1375<br />1376<br />1377<br />1378<br />1379<br />1380<br />1381<br />1382<br />1385<br />1386<br />1387<br />1388<br />1390<br />1391<br />1394<br />1395<br />1396<br />1397<br />1398<br />1399<br />1401<br />1402<br />1405<br />1406<br />1407<br />1408<br />1409<br />1410<br />1412<br />1414<br />1415<br />1416<br />1421<br />1422<br />1425<br />1426<br />1427<br />1432<br />1433<br />1436<br />1437<br />1439<br />1443<br />1444<br />1445<br />1447<br />1448<br />1449<br />1450<br />1452<br />1454<br />1455<br />1456<br />1457<br />1458<br />1459<br />1460<br />1461<br />1462<br />1463<br />1464<br />1465<br />1466<br />1467<br />1468<br />1469<br />1470<br />1471<br />1472<br />1473<br />1474<br />1475<br />1476<br />1477<br />1478<br />1479<br />1480<br />1481<br />1482<br />1483<br />1484<br />1485<br />1486<br />1487<br />1488<br />1489<br />1490<br />1492<br />1493<br />1494<br />1495<br />1496<br />1497<br />1498<br />1499<br />1500<br />1502<br />1503<br />1504<br />1506<br />1508<br />1514<br />1515<br />1516<br />1518<br />1519<br />1520<br />1521<br />1523<br />1525<br />1526<br />1527<br />1528<br />1529<br />1530<br />1531<br />1532<br />1533<br />1534<br />1535<br />1536<br />1537<br />1538<br />1539<br />1540<br />1541<br />1542<br />1543<br />1544<br />1545<br />1546<br />1547<br />1548<br />1549<br />1550<br />1551<br />1552<br />1553<br />1554<br />1555<br />1556<br />1557<br />1558<br />1559<br />1560<br />1561<br />1562<br />1563<br />1564<br />1565<br />1566<br />1567<br />1568<br />1569<br />1571<br />1572<br />1574<br />1576<br />1582<br />1583<br />1584<br />1586<br />1587<br />1588<br />1589<br />1591<br />1593<br />1594<br />1595<br />1596<br />1597<br />1598<br />1599<br />1600<br />1601<br />1602<br />1603<br />1604<br />1605<br />1606<br />1607<br />1608<br />1609<br />1610<br />1611<br />1612<br />1613<br />1614<br />1615<br />1616<br />1617<br />1618<br />1619<br />1620<br />1621<br />1622<br />1623<br />1624<br />1625<br />1626<br />1627<br />1628<br />1629<br />1630<br />1631<br />1632<br />1633<br />1634<br />1635<br />1636<br />1637<br />1638<br />1640<br />1641<br />1643<br />1645<br />1650<br />1651<br />1654<br />1655<br />1656<br />1657<br />1658<br />1659<br />1660<br />1662<br />1663<br />1666<br />1668<br />1669<br />1671<br />1673<br />1677<br />1678<br />1680<br />1681<br />1682<br />1683<br />1684<br />1686<br />1687<br />1688<br />1690<br />1692<br />1693<br />1694<br />1698<br />1701<br />1703<br />1704<br />1706<br />1708<br />1712<br />1713<br />1714<br />1716<br />1717<br />1718<br />1719<br />1720<br />1721<br />1722<br />1724<br />1725<br />1726<br />1728<br />1730<br />1731<br />1732<br />1733<br />1734<br />1738<br />1741<br />1743<br />1744<br />1746<br />1747<br />1750<br />1751<br />1753<br />1754<br />1756<br />1757<br />1758<br />1759<br />1761<br />1762<br />1763<br />1765<br />1766<br />1767<br />1768<br />1770<br />1772<br />1773<br />1774<br />1775<br />1776<br />1778<br />1782<br />1785<br />1787<br />1788<br />1790<br />1792<br />1796<br />1797<br />1798<br />1800<br />1801<br />1802<br />1803<br />1805<br />1806<br />1807<br />1808<br />1810<br />1811<br />1812<br />1814<br />1815<br />1816<br />1817<br />1819<br />1821<br />1822<br />1823<br />1824<br />1825<br />1826<br />1827<br />1829<br />1833<br />1836<br />1838<br />1841<br />1846<br />1847<br />1849<br />1850<br />1852<br />1857<br />1858<br />1860<br />1862<br />1864<br />1866<br />1867<br />1868<br />1869<br />1870<br />1872<br />1873<br />1874<br />1876<br />1878<br />1880<br />1881<br />1882<br />1883<br />1884<br />1886<br />1887<br />1888<br />1889<br />1890<br />1891<br />1894<br />1896<br />1897<br />1898<br />1900<br />1901<br />1902<br />1905<br />1907<br />1908<br />1909<br />1911<br />1912<br />1913<br />1918<br />1919<br />1922<br />1923<br />1924<br />1926<br />1928<br />1929<br />1930<br />1931<br />1932<br />1933<br />1934<br />1935<br />1937<br />1938<br />1942<br />1945<br />1946<br />1947<br />1949<br />1950<br />1951<br />1952<br />1953<br />1954<br />1955<br />1956<br />1958<br />1959<br />1960<br />1961<br />1962<br />1963<br />1964<br />1965<br />1967<br />1968<br />1971<br />1972<br />1973<br />1974<br />1975<br />1976<br />1978<br />1979<br />1981<br />1982<br />1983<br />1985<br />1986<br />1988<br />1991<br />1992<br />1993<br />1995<br />1997<br />1998<br />2001<br />2003<br />2005<br />2007<br />2010<br />2011<br />2012<br />2013<br />2014<br />2016<br />2017<br />2020<br />2022<br />2025<br />2026<br />2027<br />2028<br />2031<br />2032<br />2036<br />2038<br />2043<br />2044<br />2045<br />2046<br />2047<br />2048<br />2050<br />2056<br />2058<br />2059<br />2061<br />2062<br />2065<br />2067<br />2069<br />2071<br />2072<br />2074<br />2076<br />2082<br />2085<br />2094<br />2096<br />2098<br />2099<br />2100<br />2101<br />2102<br />2103<br />2105<br />2106<br />2108<br />2110<br />2112<br />2113<br />2116<br />2118<br />2120<br />2122<br />2123<br />2125<br />2126<br />2127<br />2128<br />2129<br />2130<br />2131<br />2132<br />2133<br />2135<br />2136<br />2138<br />2139<br />2140<br />2141<br />2142<br />2143<br />2145<br />2146<br />2148<br />2149<br />2150<br />2151<br />2152<br />2153<br />2154<br />2156<br />2157<br />2159<br />2160<br />2161<br />2162<br />2163<br />2164<br />2165<br />2167<br />2168<br />2170<br />2171<br />2172<br />2173<br />2174<br />2175<br />2176<br />2177<br />2179<br />2180<br />2182<br />2183<br />2184<br />2185<br />2186<br />2187<br />2189<br />2190<br />2192<br />2193<br />2194<br />2195<br />2196<br />2197<br />2198<br />2200<br />2201<br />2203<br />2204<br />2205<br />2206<br />2207<br />2208<br />2209<br />2211<br />2212<br />2214<br />2215<br />2216<br />2217<br />2218<br />2219<br />2220<br />2221<br />2223<br />2224<br />2226<br />2227<br />2228<br />2229<br />2230<br />2231<br />2232<br />2234<br />2235<br />2237<br />2238<br />2239<br />2240<br />2241<br />2242<br />2243<br />2244<br />2246<br />2247<br />2249<br />2250<br />2251<br />2252<br />2253<br />2254<br />2255<br />2256<br />2258<br />2259<br />2261<br />2262<br />2263<br />2264<br />2265<br />2266<br />2267<br />2268<br />2269<br />2271<br />2273<br />2274<br />2275<br />2276<br />2277<br />2279<br />2280<br />2281<br />2282<br />2283<br />2284<br />2285<br />2287<br />2289<br />2291<br />2294<br />2296<br />2297<br />2298<br />2299<br />2300<br />2301<br />2302<br />2303<br />2305<br />2306<br />2307<br />2309<br />2310<br />2312<br />2317<br />2320<br />2322<br />2323<br />2324<br />2325<br />2326<br />2327<br />2329<br />2331<br />2335<br />2338<br />2339<br />2341<br />2346<br />2348<br />2352<br />2355<br />2356<br />2357<br />2362<br />2364<br />2367<br />2369<br />2370<br />2371<br />2372<br />2373<br />2374<br />2375<br />2376<br />2377<br />2378<br />2379<br />2382<br />2384<br />2385<br />2386<br />2387<br />2388<br />2389<br />2390<br />2391<br />2394<br />2395<br />2396<br />2398<br />2399<br />2400<br />2401<br />2402<br />2403<br />2404<br />2405<br />2406<br />2407<br />2408<br />2411<br />2414<br />2415<br />2416<br />2417<br />2418<br />2422<br />2423<br />2424<br />2425<br />2426<br />2428<br />2429<br />2431<br />2432<br />2433<br />2434<br />2436<br />2438<br />2439<br />2440<br />2443<br />2444<br />2445<br />2446<br />2447<br />2448<br />2449<br />2450<br />2451<br />2452<br />2453<br />2454<br />2455<br />2456<br />2458<br />2459<br />2466<br />2467<br />2471<br />2472<br />2473<br />2474<br />2475<br />2477<br />2478<br />2479<br />2481<br />2483<br />2484<br />2485<br />2486<br />2487<br />2488<br />2491<br />2492<br />2493<br />2494<br />2495<br />2497<br />2498<br />2499<br />2500<br />2501<br />2502<br />2503<br />2504<br />2505<br />2506<br />2507<br />2508<br />2509<br />2510<br />2511<br />2512<br />2513<br />2515<br />2516<br />2517<br />2518<br />2519<br />2520<br />2522<br />2523<br />2531<br />2532<br />2536<br />2537<br />2539<br />2542<br />2543<br />2544<br />2546<br />2547<br />2548<br />2549<br />2550<br />2551<br />2554<br />2555<br />2557<br />2558<br />2559<br />2560<br />2561<br />2562<br />2563<br />2564<br />2565<br />2566<br />2567<br />2569<br />2570<br />2577<br />2578<br />2579<br />2580<br />2581<br />2582<br />2583<br />2584<br />2585<br />2586<br />2590<br />2591<br />2593<br />2594<br />2595<br />2596<br />2597<br />2598<br />2600<br />2601<br />2602<br />2603<br />2604<br />2605<br />2606<br />2607<br />2608<br />2609<br />2610<br />2611<br />2612<br />2613<br />2614<br />2615<br />2616<br />2617<br />2618<br />2619<br />2620<br />2621<br />2622<br />2623<br />2625<br />2626<br />2633<br />2634<br />2637<br />2638<br />2639<br />2640<br />2642<br />2645<br />2646<br />2647<br />2649<br />2650<br />2651<br />2652<br />2653<br />2654<br />2661<br />2662<br />2663<br />2665<br />2666<br />2668<br />2669<br />2670<br />2671<br />2674<br />2675<br />2677<br />2678<br />2679<br />2680<br />2685<br />2686<br />2687<br />2690<br />2692<br />2694<br />2695<br />2698<br />2701<br />2702<br />2703<br />2704<br />2706<br />2707<br />2708<br />2709<br />2710<br />2712<br />2713<br />2714<br />2715<br />2716<br />2718<br />2719<br />2720<br />2721<br />2722<br />2723<br />2724<br />2726<br />2727<br />2728<br />2729<br />2731<br />2733<br />2734<br />2735<br />2736<br />2737<br />2738<br />2739<br />2740<br /><p><a href="vin_registration-523.html"><span>Vin registration</span></a><br>
   	Description 
VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be 
performed each time ECM is replaced.

NOTE:
Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection &amp; 
Maintenance (I/M)
VIN REGISTRATION : Special Repair Requirement
1.CHECK VIN
Check th ...
   	</p><p><a href="diagnosis_system_bluetooth_control_unit_-2488.html"><span>Diagnosis system (bluetooth control
unit)</span></a><br>
   	Diagnosis Description
The Bluetooth control unit has two diagnostic checks. The first diagnostic 
check is performed automatically
every ignition cycle during control unit initialization. The second diagnostic 
check is performed by the technician
using the steering wheel audio control switches ...
   	</p><p><a href="intake_valve_timing_control-537.html"><span>Intake valve timing control</span></a><br>
   	System Diagram

System Description
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed 
operating angle of the intake
valve.

The ECM receives signals su ...
   	</p></div></aside>
<script>
// <!--
document.write('<iframe src="counter.php?id=1252" width=0 height=0 marginwidth=0 marginheight=0 scrolling=no frameborder=0></iframe>');
// -->

</script>
</p>
</article>
</main>
<div class="footer">&copy; 2011-2024  Copyright www.nialtima.com
			<div style="float:right; text-align:right"><!--LiveInternet counter--><script type="text/javascript"><!--
document.write("<img src='//counter.yadro.ru/hit?t24.2;r"+
escape(document.referrer)+((typeof(screen)=="undefined")?"":
";s"+screen.width+"*"+screen.height+"*"+(screen.colorDepth?
screen.colorDepth:screen.pixelDepth))+";u"+escape(document.URL)+
";h"+escape(document.title.substring(0,80))+";"+Math.random()+
"' alt='' "+
"border='0' width='88' height='15'>")
//--></script><!--/LiveInternet-->
&nbsp;
<!--LiveInternet counter--><img id="licnt5525" width="0" height="0" style="border:0"
title=""
src="data:image/gif;base64,R0lGODlhAQABAIAAAAAAAP///yH5BAEAAAEALAAAAAABAAEAAAIBTAA7"
alt=""/><script>(function(d,s){d.getElementById("licnt5525").src=
"https://counter.yadro.ru/hit;encarall?t20.1;r"+escape(d.referrer)+
((typeof(s)=="undefined")?"":";s"+s.width+"*"+s.height+"*"+
(s.colorDepth?s.colorDepth:s.pixelDepth))+";u"+escape(d.URL)+
";h"+escape(d.title.substring(0,150))+";"+Math.random()})
(document,screen)</script><!--/LiveInternet--><br />0.009</div>
  <script src="/include/jquery.min.js"></script>

    <script type="text/javascript">

      /** code by webdevtrick ( https://webdevtrick.com ) **/
(function($) {
  $(function() {
    $('nav ul li a:not(:only-child)').click(function(e) {
      $(this).siblings('.nav-dropdown').toggle();
      $('.dropdown').not($(this).siblings()).hide();
      e.stopPropagation();
    });
    $('html').click(function() {
      $('.nav-dropdown').hide();
    });
    $('#nav-toggle').click(function() {
      $('nav ul').slideToggle();
    });
    $('#nav-toggle').on('click', function() {
      this.classList.toggle('active');
    });
  });
})(jQuery);
    </script>
</body>
</html>